HVAC Design Sourcebook PDF

www.EngineeringEBooksPdf.
com
HVAC Design
Sourcebook
www.EngineeringEBooksPdf.com
This page intentionally left blank
HVAC Design
Sourcebook
W. Larsen Angel, P.E., LEED AP
New York Chicago San Francisco

Lisbon London Madrid Mexico City
Milan New Delhi San Juan
Seoul Singapore Sydney Toronto
Copyright © 2012 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. Except as permitted under the United States
Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored
in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
ISBN: 978-0-07-175302-9
MHID: 0-07-175302-8
The material in this eBook also appears in the print version of this title: ISBN: 978-0-07-175303-6,
MHID: 0-07-175303-6.
All trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. Rather than put a trademark symbol after every occurrence of a
trademarked name, we use names in an editorial fashion only, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention
of infringement of the trademark. Where such designations appear in this book, they have been printed with initial caps.
McGraw-Hill eBooks are available at special quantity discounts to use as premiums and sales promotions, or for use in
corporate training programs. To contact a representative please e-mail us at bulksales@mcgraw-hill.com.
Information contained in this work has been obtained by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. (“McGraw-Hill”) from
sources believed to be reliable. However, neither McGraw-Hill nor its authors guarantee the accuracy or completeness of
any information published herein, and neither McGraw-Hill nor its authors shall be responsible for any errors, omissions,
or damages arising out of use of this information. This work is published with the understanding that McGraw-Hill and
its authors are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services. If such
services are required, the assistance of an appropriate professional should be sought.
TERMS OF USE
This is a copyrighted work and The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. (“McGrawHill”) and its licensors reserve all rights in
and to the work. Use of this work is subject to these terms. Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of 1976 and the
right to store and retrieve one copy of the work, you may not decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, reproduce, modify,
create derivative works based upon, transmit, distribute, disseminate, sell, publish or sublicense the work or any part of it
without McGraw-Hill’s prior consent. You may use the work for your own noncommercial and personal use; any other use
of the work is strictly prohibited. Your right to use the work may be terminated if you fail to comply with these terms.
THE WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” McGRAW-HILL AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO GUARANTEES OR
WARRANTIES AS TO THE ACCURACY, ADEQUACY OR COMPLETENESS OF OR RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED
FROM USING THE WORK, INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION THAT CAN BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE
WORK VIA HYPERLINK OR OTHERWISE, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. McGraw-Hill and its licensors do not warrant or guarantee that the functions contained
in the work will meet your requirements or that its operation will be uninterrupted or error free. Neither McGraw-Hill nor
its licensors shall be liable to you or anyone else for any inaccuracy, error or omission, regardless of cause, in the work
or for any damages resulting therefrom. McGraw-Hill has no responsibility for the content of any information accessed
through the work. Under no circumstances shall McGraw-Hill and/or its licensors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
special, punitive, consequential or similar damages that result from the use of or inability to use the work, even if any of
them has been advised of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall apply to any claim or cause
whatsoever whether such claim or cause arises in contract, tort or otherwise.
To Lisa, my dear wife whom I love, whose constant encouragement
and insight helped to make this book a reality.
“… with God all things are possible.”—Matthew 19:26
About the Author
W. Larsen Angel, P.E., LEED AP, is a principal in the
MEP consulting engineering firm Green Building
Energy Engineers. He has worked in the MEP consulting
engineering industry for more than 20 years. Mr. Angel
has contributed to the development of design standards
and continues to find new ways to streamline the
HVAC system design process. He is a Member of the
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) and is certified by
ASHRAE as a Commissioning Process Management
Professional (CPMP).
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
1 What Is HVAC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 The Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
HVAC Load Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Geographical Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Building Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Unconditioned Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Conditioned Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Codes and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Design Team Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Design Submissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Schematic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Design Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Construction Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3 Piping, Valves, and Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pipe, Fittings, and Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Steel Pipe Fittings and Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Specification for Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Copper Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Copper Fittings and Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Specification for Copper Tube, Fittings, and Joints . . . . . . . . . . 42
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ix
x Contents
Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Test Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Strainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Suction Diffusers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Flexible Pipe Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Air Vents and Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4 Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Heating Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Boilers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Heat Exchangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Cooling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Chillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Auxiliary Hydronic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Air Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Chemical Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Expansion Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Makeup Water Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4-Pipe and 2-Pipe Heating and Cooling Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Water-Source Heat Pump Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Equipment Room Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5 Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Air System Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
HVAC Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Ventilation Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Air Pressurization Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Air System Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6 Piping and Ductwork Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Equations and Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
General Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Hydronic System Design Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Low-Pressure Steam System Design Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . 210
Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Contents xi
Duct Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
General Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Air Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Coordination With Other Disciplines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
7 Terminal Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Heating-Only Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Finned-Tube Radiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Electric Radiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Duct Heating Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Unit Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Cabinet Unit Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Heating and Cooling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fan-Coil Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Ductless Split-System Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Variable Air Volume Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Similarities of Single-Duct and Fan-Powered VAV
Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Single-Duct VAV Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fan-Powered VAV Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Coordination With Other Disciplines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
8 Noise and V ibration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Sound Power and Sound Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Tonal Qualities of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Balanced and Unbalanced Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Outdoor Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Indoor Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Vibration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Equipment Hangers and Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
9 Automatic Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Hot Water Cabinet Unit Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Parallel Fan-Powered Variable Air Volume Terminal Unit . . . . 316
VAV Air Handling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
xii Contents
Building Automation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

BAS Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
10 Construction Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Legend and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Notes on Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Drawing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Key Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Computer-Aided Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
CAD Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Sheet Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Other Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Demolition Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
New Work Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Section Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Large-Scale Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Flow Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Riser Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
ATC Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Preface
A
re you searching for a practical handbook that will assist you in the process
of designing heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems for
commercial buildings? The HVAC Design Sourcebook is the tool you need to
quickly become a valuable member of your design team.
The typical approach to training junior employees in the process of designing HVAC
systems is to have them try to learn the skills they need to work as effective members of
a design team from the senior HVAC engineers they are working under. Unfortunately,
the knowledge the senior engineers are expected to impart has taken them years to
develop and, without a practical training resource, the process of teaching junior HVAC
system designers the essentials of HVAC system design becomes time-consuming,
ineffective, and costly.
The HVAC Design Sourcebook fills the void in the industry for a practical resource to
assist in the process of training junior HVAC system designers in the basics of HVAC
system design. Essential design concepts are clearly explained and illustrated with
photographs of actual HVAC systems installations and graphical conventions used in
the preparation of construction drawings. Codes and standards are referenced frequently
to emphasize the need for HVAC systems to be designed in accordance with the
requirements of the regulating authorities. Other topics such as the overall design
process, HVAC systems and equipment, piping and ductwork distribution systems,
noise and vibration control, and automatic temperature controls are presented in a
manner that can be understood and applied by the junior HVAC system designer. The
ultimate goal of preparing complete, well-coordinated HVAC system construction
drawings is consistently in view throughout the book.
The HVAC Design Sourcebook is the essential resource for individuals who are
considering or pursuing a career in the field of HVAC system design.
W. Larsen Angel, P.E., LEED AP
xiii
Acknowledgments
Special thanks to my two sons for their understanding during this busy time.
Thanks also to Joe Podson, Executive Director of B’nai B’rith Homecrest House
located in Silver Spring, Maryland, for allowing me to use photographs of the Homecrest
House facility in this book.
xv
HVAC Design
Sourcebook
Chapter 1
What Is HVAC?
T
he term HVAC stands for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning. It describes
the field that is concerned with heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning the
indoor environment in order to meet the comfort, health, and safety needs of
building occupants and the environmental needs of indoor equipment or processes.
Although HVAC systems are required for airplanes, ships, automobiles, and other spe-
cial applications, this book will focus on HVAC systems for commercial buildings.
Heating and ventilating systems for buildings have been in existence for centuries.
Fireplaces and windows, the earliest forms of indoor heating and ventilating, remained
the primary means of heating and ventilating buildings into the late nineteenth century.
It was in the nineteenth century that engineers began to use steam heating systems,
which consisted of coal-fired boilers, pipes, and radiators, to heat buildings. Steam
heating systems are still widely used today, although natural gas and fuel oil have
replaced coal as the primary fuel source.
In the Middle Ages, people made the connection between “bad air” in overcrowded
or smoky rooms and disease. In the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, scientists and
physicians began to study the sources of indoor air contaminants and the effects these
contaminants had on human health. As a result, in 1895 the American Society of Heat-
ing and Ventilating Engineers (ASHVE) adopted a minimum ventilation rate of 30 cubic
feet per minute (cfm) of outdoor air per occupant as a ventilation standard for public
buildings. It was understood at the time that this ventilation rate was sufficient to dilute
the indoor air contaminants to a level that was acceptable for human occupancy. Out-
door air ventilation rates that are required to produce acceptable indoor air quality for
various occupancies continue to be studied by the American Society of Heating, Refrig-
erating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), the successor of ASHVE. ANSI/
ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007—Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality is devoted to
the subject of indoor air quality. The guidelines of this standard have largely been incor-
porated into the various mechanical codes applied to building construction, such as
the International Mechanical Code (IMC), published by the International Code Council,
Inc. (ICC).
Mechanical cooling (air-conditioning) systems are a relatively recent development.
The first central building air-conditioning system, designed for the Missouri State
Building, was demonstrated to the public during the 1904 World’s Fair held in St. Louis.
Since that time, a great deal of research has been performed and a wide variety of air-
conditioning equipment has been developed to meet the diverse air-conditioning needs
of modern buildings.
In addition to heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning the indoor environment
to meet the comfort and health needs of the building occupants, modern HVAC systems
2 Chapter One
are frequently required to protect the safety of the occupants or, in industrial applica-
tions, to provide a clean environment for the processes performed within the building.
For example, smoke control systems may be required to minimize the spread of smoke
within a building during a fire. Also, the HVAC systems may be required to maintain
air pressure relationships between adjacent spaces where hazardous materials are han-
dled and to signal the building operator or activate emergency ventilation systems if
these pressure relationships are not maintained. HVAC systems may also be required to
provide a high level of air filtration in order to maintain a clean indoor environment for
such processes as semiconductor fabrication.
With the understanding of what HVAC systems are and what they are expected to
accomplish, it is the role of the HVAC system designer to design HVAC systems to meet
project needs. In order to do this, the HVAC system designer must first understand the
project requirements. The designer must then use this information, along with a knowl-
edge of the potential HVAC system options, to design the HVAC systems (in accor-
dance with the applicable codes) that are appropriate for the project. Factors governing
the HVAC system selection and the ultimate HVAC system design include:
• HVAC system types that are available to meet the project needs
• Building owner’s preferences or standards
• Building owner’s budget
• Installed cost, operating cost, and maintenance cost of the potential HVAC
system options
• Space limitations, both indoors and outdoors, and coordination with other
building elements such as the architectural, structural, and electrical systems
After all factors have been considered and the final HVAC system configuration
developed, the HVAC system designer must present the HVAC system design in a clear
and concise way through the use of construction documents. Construction documents
are the drawings and specifications for a project that are used by the installing contrac-
tor to construct the HVAC systems. The construction documents are also used by the
building maintenance personnel as a resource in the ongoing operation and mainte-
nance of the HVAC systems.
In this book, we will discuss the HVAC system design process from concept to com-
pletion of the construction documents (Chap. 2); piping, valves, and specialties, which
are an integral part of HVAC systems (Chap. 3); the central plant, which is where fuel
sources are converted to heating and cooling energy (Chap. 4); air systems, which circu-
late air within the building (Chap. 5); piping and ductwork distribution systems, which
are used to distribute the heating and cooling energy from the central plant to the air
systems and terminal equipment and eventually to the spaces within the building
(Chap. 6); terminal equipment, which is often used in the distribution of the heating
and cooling energy to the spaces within the building (Chap. 7); noise and vibration
control, which is a critical component of a successful HVAC system design (Chap. 8);
automatic temperature controls, without which HVAC systems cannot function prop-
erly (Chap. 9); and finally the preparation of construction drawings, including some
important drafting and computer-aided design concepts (Chap. 10).
Chapter 2
The Design Process
HVAC Load Calculations
HVAC load calculations are the foundation upon which the HVAC system design is
built. Therefore, it is imperative that the HVAC system designer accurately calculate the
peak heating and cooling loads for the project in order to properly design the HVAC
systems. The most accurate method for calculating the HVAC loads of a commercial
building is the heat balance method. This method is described in detail in Chap. 18 of
the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals. The HVAC system designer must have a
good understanding of this method in order to understand how a building’s geometry,
orientation, and internal functions affect the HVAC loads within the different areas of
the building.
Because the process of calculating HVAC loads is quite involved, commercially
available HVAC load calculation software is used almost exclusively for commercial
projects. This section provides an overview of the major considerations associated with
HVAC load calculations for commercial buildings. The details of how building infor-
mation is entered into the HVAC load calculation program will vary from one program
to another. The HVAC system designer should consult the software user’s manual for
detailed instructions on how to set up the load calculations.
Buildings are affected by heating and cooling loads both external to and internal to
the building. External loads include heat gains or losses from exterior walls (above or
below grade), windows, roofs, skylights, doors, floors, partitions (walls, floors, or ceil-
ings internal to a building that separate conditioned spaces from unconditioned spaces),
and outdoor air leakage (referred to as infiltration). External loads vary with outdoor air
temperature and relative humidity, the intensity and position of the sun, wind speed,
and the temperature of the ground. External loads are also dependent upon the geo-
graphical location of the project. Internal loads include heat gains from people, lighting,
and equipment. These loads also vary and depend upon the occupancy of the various
spaces within the building and equipment usage.
In most situations, the goal of proper HVAC system design is to maintain a constant
indoor air temperature year-round, regardless of the outdoor conditions or internal
functions. In some cases, it is desirable to maintain a constant indoor air relative humidity.
However, for the sake of simplicity, we will assume that only indoor air temperature is
being controlled.
In order to maintain a constant indoor air temperature, the HVAC systems serving
a building must be sized to offset the heat that is lost from the various spaces within the
building (when the heat losses exceed the heat gains) and offset the heat that is added
to the various spaces within the building (when the heat gains exceed the heat losses).
4 Chapter Two T
Terms
Before we continue with the discussion of HVAC load calculations for commercial
buildings, it is necessary to define some terms:
• Space: The smallest area defined in the HVAC load calculation, usually consists
of a single room.
• Zone: Typically a collection of spaces, all of which have similar HVAC loading
characteristics. HVAC loading characteristics are defined as the manner in
which the HVAC loads vary within a space. For example, three offices located
on the south side of a building would normally have similar HVAC loading
characteristics because the heat gains and losses through the exterior building
components would vary similarly for all of the spaces. Therefore, these spaces
would commonly be grouped into one HVAC zone. The space temperature of
these three offices would be controlled by a single thermostat1 located in one of
the offices. However, single-space zones in a building are common where
temperature control of that one space is critical. An example would be a
conference room. It would not be desirable for the space temperature in a
conference room to be controlled by a thermostat located in a nearby office. If
that office was unoccupied, the thermostat would call for minimum cooling.
However, if the conference room was fully occupied at the same time, it would
require maximum cooling. In this case, the thermostat would not adequately
satisfy the cooling requirement of the conference room because the conference
room has different HVAC loading characteristics than the office. Another
example of a single-space zone would be an office located in the corner of a
building. Because this office would have two exterior walls with exposures that
are at right angles to each other, its HVAC loading characteristics would be
different from any other space on that floor.
• Terminal Equipment: The equipment that delivers the heating or cooling energy
to the HVAC zones in response to the zone thermostats. An example of terminal
equipment for a commercial building is a variable air volume (VAV) terminal
unit. Multiple VAV terminal units are normally served by a single VAV air
system (see air system description below). Each VAV terminal unit receives
conditioned supply air from the air system, modulates the supply airflow, and
may add heat to the supply airflow in response to the zone thermostat controlling
the VAV terminal unit. Another example of terminal equipment for a commercial
building is a finned-tube radiator that is sometimes used to provide radiant
heat for zones having external loads.
• Air System: The HVAC equipment that conditions the air supplied to the HVAC
zones. An air system also returns air from the HVAC zones and provides
outdoor air ventilation when required. An air system may serve multiple zones
(as in the case of the VAV terminal units described above) or it may serve only
one zone. In the case of the single-zone air system, the zone thermostat controls
the heating and cooling capacity of the air system, and there is no terminal
equipment. An example of a single-zone air system that most people are familiar
with is the fan-coil unit that provides heating and cooling for a home in response
to the zone thermostat.
Air can be conditioned in an air system by heating, cooling, humidifying
(adding moisture), or dehumidifying (removing moisture). The components of
T h e D e s i g n P r o c e s s 5
an air system that are relevant to HVAC load calculations are the supply fan
and return fan (if applicable), which circulate the air through the heating and/or
cooling coils in the unit; the heating and/or cooling coils, which transfer the
necessary heating and/or cooling energy that is required by the zones to the
airstream; and the outdoor air ventilation, which is usually introduced at a
mixing point upstream of the heating and cooling coils. The combination of
return air and outdoor air is called mixed air.
Other components of an air system that are relevant to HVAC load
calculations but are not as widely used include a humidifier, which is used to
add moisture to the supply air; a reheat coil, which is used to reheat the supply
air after it has been cooled (often used as a means to maintain the relative
humidity of the zones at a maximum level); and an energy recovery coil, which
is used to exchange energy from an exhaust airstream to the outdoor air
ventilation airstream.
• Central Plant: Buildings require heating and cooling energy to offset the heat
gains and heat losses and to condition the outdoor air ventilation for the
building. The central plant refers to the equipment that generates the heating
and cooling energy utilized by the building. This equipment can be either
centralized or decentralized. In a centralized system the central plant equipment
is remote from the air systems and terminal equipment. An example of a
centralized system would be a central heating and cooling plant for a building
where the plant is remote from the air systems and contains boilers that provide
heating water or steam to the air system heating coils and chillers that provide
chilled water to the air system cooling coils. Heating and cooling energy may
also be supplied by the central plant to various types of heating and/or cooling
terminal equipment in the building.
In a decentralized system, the central plant equipment is an integral part of
each air system. An example of a decentralized system would be multiple
rooftop units serving a building where each rooftop unit contains a gas-fired
furnace that provides heating energy to the airstream through a heat exchanger
and a complete refrigeration system that provides cooling energy to the
airstream through a cooling coil. This type of unit is referred to as a packaged,
or self-contained, unit because all of the necessary heating and cooling
equipment is contained within one complete package. In this example of a
decentralized system, each air system (rooftop unit) contains the central heating
and cooling plant equipment.
Geographical Location
Now that the terms for calculating HVAC loads have been defined, we will discuss the
process of setting up the HVAC load calculations, assuming the calculation will be per-
formed with commercially available HVAC load calculation software. The first step in
the process is to define the inputs to the program, starting with the building’s geo-
graphical location. Once the location has been selected, the program will utilize that
area’s database of annual weather data (contained within the program) to simulate the
outdoor conditions, which include air temperature and relative humidity, wind speed
and direction, intensity and position of the sun, and ground temperature. The database
contains weather data for 365 typical (not actual) 24-hour days, totaling 8,760 hours of
weather data for that location.
6 Chapter Two T
Building Materials
Opaque Materials
All materials conduct heat to some degree. The conductance, or U-Value, of a material,
expressed in terms of British thermal units per hour per square foot per Fahrenheit
degree (Btu/h·ft2·°F), is a measure of how well the material conducts heat. The higher
the U-Value, the better the material conducts heat and vice versa. For HVAC load cal-
culations, the U-Value for each type of wall, roof, and partition needs to be calculated.
This is done by examining the wall, roof, and partition sections in the architectural
drawings for the building. The properties of common construction materials are listed
in Chap. 26 of the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals and are also included in the
building materials database of some HVAC load calculation programs.
In order to calculate the U-Value for a wall, roof, or partition type, it is necessary to
first sum the resistances of all of the components for each wall, roof, or partition that are
shown on the architectural drawings. The resistance of a material is the inverse of the
U-Value and is given in terms of hour square foot Fahrenheit degree per British thermal
unit (h·ft2·°F/Btu). Most people are familiar with this term because it is used to describe
the insulating value of fiberglass batt insulation (e.g., 3½ in. of batt fiberglass insulation
has an R-Value of 11, which is typically denoted as R-11). Once the total R-Value of the
wall, roof, or partition has been determined, the reciprocal of this total R-Value will be
the U-Value.
Figure 2-1 provides an example of how the U-Value is determined for a typical wall
that consists of the following components (from inside to outside): gypsum wall board,
batt insulation, vegetable board sheathing, air space, and face brick. The U-Value for
this wall section is the reciprocal of the R-Value, or 0.066 Btu/h·ft2·°F.
Component R-Value
1. Inside surface 0.69
resistance
2. ½-in. gypsum board 0.45
3. 3½-in. fiberglass 11.00
batt insulation
4. ½-in. vegetable 1.30
board sheathing
5. 1-in. air space 0.91
6. 4-in. face brick 0.43
7. Outside surface 0.33
resistance
Total R-Value 15.11 h·ft2·°F/Btu
Figure 2-1 Typical architectural wall section.
In addition to the U-Value of the building envelope2 materials, the color (light,
medium, dark) and the weight (light, medium, heavy) of these materials have to be
entered into the HVAC load calculation program because these factors affect the heat
absorption and transmittance of these materials. For example, lighter-colored building
materials exposed to the sun reflect more of the sun’s radiant energy than darker-colored
building materials do and, therefore, do not absorb as much of the sun’s radiant energy.
Second, lighter-weight building materials transmit the energy that they absorb from the
sun to the interior of the building more quickly than heavier-weight building materials
do. As a result, the peak cooling load of a lightweight building occurs shortly after the
outdoor air temperature and intensity of the sun reach their peak; the peak cooling load
of a heavyweight building will occur at a longer time interval after the outdoor condi-
tions peak. Lightweight buildings will also cool off more quickly at night in the summer
than heavyweight buildings will. In short, heavyweight buildings have more thermal
mass than lightweight buildings and, as a result, transmit changes in the outdoor condi-
tions more slowly to the indoor environment.
Fenestration
Fenestrations (windows, skylights, and doors) in a building also have a U-Value associ-
ated with them. However, in addition to defining the U-Value for the glazing (glass
component only—no frame) contained within the windows, skylights, and doors, the
solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) needs to be determined as well. The SHGC is dimen-
sionless and represents the percentage of the sun’s radiant energy that is transferred
through the glazing to the space. The SHGC coefficient decreases with added panes of
glazing, tinting, or low-e (low-emittance) coatings. For example, SHGCs for various
types of glazing are as follows:
Glazing SHGC
1/8-in. clear, uncoated, single-pane 0.86
1/8-in. clear, uncoated, double-pane 0.76
1/8-in. gray, uncoated, double-pane 0.60
1/8-in. gray, low-e, double-pane 0.54
It is best to obtain the U-Value and SHGC for the various types of fenestration pro-
posed for a project from the fenestration manufacturers’ product data because these
values vary considerably from one product to another and from one manufacturer to
another. It is also necessary to determine if the window frames are thermally broken
from the walls in which they installed, that is, if the frame is insulated from the wall.
This can be determined by reviewing the details of the various window types in the
architectural drawings for the building.
Buildings will sometimes incorporate elements that provide an external shading of
the fenestration components, such as a roof overhang or shading above the top or along
the sides of windows. The dimensions and positions relative to the fenestration compo-
nents of all external shades must be entered into the description of each type of fenes-
tration because they will have a significant impact on the percentage of the sun’s radiant
energy that is transmitted through the fenestration to the building’s spaces. Internal
shades such as drapes or venetian blinds may also be used, although it is recommended
that they be omitted from the description of the fenestration types because their use will
8 Chapter Two T
vary from one space to another. Omitting internal shades from the description of the
fenestration types will result in a more conservative calculation of the cooling load for
the affected spaces and will provide a bit of a safety factor for the cooling airflow calcu-
lation if the internal shades are actually used within a particular space.
Unconditioned Spaces
Once the components of the building envelope have been defined, the unconditioned
spaces within the building should be determined so that the partitions (walls, floors, or
ceilings) separating the conditioned spaces from the unconditioned spaces can be iden-
tified, their U-Values calculated, and the partition areas (square feet) entered into the
HVAC load calculation. Although an unconditioned space is referred to as uncondi-
tioned, it can also mean that the space is partially conditioned to a certain degree. For
example, equipment rooms in buildings are usually heated to at least 60°F in the winter
and are ventilated during the summer with outdoor air. Therefore, the minimum space
temperature of equipment rooms will typically be 60°F in the winter and the maximum
space temperature will be 100 to 105°F in the summer. The variable temperature in the
unconditioned space will need to be entered into the HVAC load calculation program
so that the heat losses (in the winter) and heat gains (in the summer) through the parti-
tion wall are accounted for in the calculation of peak heating and cooling loads for the
conditioned spaces adjacent to the unconditioned spaces.
Conditioned Spaces
Once the unconditioned spaces within the building have been determined, the remain-
ing spaces in the building will be heated during the winter and cooled during the sum-
mer by the HVAC systems and their external and internal loads must be accounted for.
Spaces having at least one component that separates the space from the outdoors are
referred to as perimeter spaces. Perimeter spaces for open office areas can also be
defined as the first 15 ft of space from the exterior walls. Spaces having no components
that separate them from the outdoors are referred to as interior spaces. For perimeter
spaces, the area and orientation (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW) of all the exterior walls,
windows, and doors will be entered into the space input menu of the HVAC load calcu-
lation program. The areas and slopes of the roofs and skylights also need to be entered
into the space input menu.
Spaces with Floors at or Below Grade

If the floor elevation of the space is at or below grade, the exterior perimeter of the floor
as well as the depth of the floor below grade must be entered into the space input menu.
This will enable the HVAC load calculation program to account for the heat losses
through the edges of the floor slab and walls below grade during the winter. It is com-
mon for floor slabs on grade to be insulated around the perimeter in order to provide a
thermal break between the floor slab and the ground outdoors. The thickness and
R-Value per inch of insulation of the floor slab perimeter insulation will need to be
entered into the space input menu. Also, for floors below grade, it is common for the
exterior wall to be insulated underground from the grade elevation to several feet below
grade. Once again, the thickness, R-Value per inch, and depth of this insulation below
grade will have to be entered into the space input menu. Perimeter floor slab insulation
and insulation of walls below grade will be shown in the wall sections on the architec-
tural drawings for the building.
Infiltration
An estimate of infiltration (air leakage through cracks in the building envelope) may
be considered for perimeter spaces above grade. However, this is not necessary if the
building will be sufficiently pressurized with outdoor air during occupied periods.
Positive building pressurization results when the outdoor air introduced to the build-
ing through the air systems to provide ventilation exceeds the air that is mechanically
exhausted from the building. This is the case for most buildings because it is undesir-
able for a building to be under negative pressurization. Negative pressurization can
cause unfiltered, unconditioned outdoor air to be introduced directly to the spaces
within the building, resulting in drafts and other undesirable conditions. However, it
is recommended that infiltration be accounted for in spaces having exterior doors that
will be opened frequently, such as vestibules. Outdoor air infiltration through exterior
doors should be estimated according to the procedure described in Chap. 16 of the
2009 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals. For an exterior door that serves approxi-
mately 75 people per hour, the outdoor air infiltration can be estimated at about 50 cfm
per 3-ft × 7-ft door, based on a 0.10-in. water column (w.c.) pressure difference across
the door.
Internal Loads
For all spaces (perimeter and interior) within the building, it is necessary to account for
all the internal loads, including heat gains from people, lighting, and equipment. The
number of people who will occupy a space can generally be obtained from the furniture
plan that is part of the architectural drawings for the project. If this information is not
available, each space will have to be categorized as to its use (i.e., office, conference
room, auditorium, etc.) and the minimum number of people assigned to each space in
accordance with the applicable mechanical code. Table 6-1 in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
62.1-2007—Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, which also lists the default occu-
pant density (number of people per 1,000 ft2) for various occupancy categories, can be
referred to if the actual occupant density is unknown. Next, the rate of heat gain per
person (both sensible and latent heat gains) needs to be assigned for each space. The
rate of heat gain per person for various degrees of activity is given in Chap. 18, Table 1,
of the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals.
Lighting power densities (Chap. 18, Table 2, 2009 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals)
for various space types can be used for preliminary HVAC load calculations. How-
ever, it is recommended that the actual lighting power for each space be obtained
from the lighting plan that is part of the electrical drawings for the project. The quan-
tity of lighting fixtures and power (watts) per fixture should be tabulated for each
space and this information entered into the space input menu for the final HVAC
load calculations.
Finally, heat gains from equipment used in each space need to be accounted for. It
is best to request a list of equipment that will be used in each space from the building
owner and coordinate this information with the architect. Some commonsense esti-
mates can be made for typical spaces, such as offices, where the HVAC system designer
would estimate that there will be one computer per occupant. Heat gains from com-
mon equipment and appliances are listed in various tables in Chap. 18 of the 2009
ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals. However, it is best to obtain the manufacturer’s
product data for large pieces of equipment in order to accurately estimate the heat gain
from this equipment. Also, a diversity factor, which represents the percentage of time
10 Chapter Two T
the equipment is actually operating, should be applied to equipment that does not
run continuously, like copiers or printers. The tables in the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook—
Fundamentals list the average power use in watts for common equipment and appli-
ances. However, the HVAC system designer will have to determine a diversity factor
for equipment and appliances that do not fall into the listed categories. The best way to
do this is through a discussion with the building owner and architect.
Schedules
Schedules are used in HVAC load calculation programs to vary the percentage (on an
hourly basis) of an internal load’s heat gain to the space. For example, a schedule that
has 100% values for the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. and 0% values for the hours of
6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. may be used to vary the lighting heat gain for an office space.
Schedules are also used to identify periods of the day when the space temperature will
be maintained at the occupied setpoint or the unoccupied setpoint.
Zones
If an air system will serve multiple zones, as in the case of a VAV air handling unit that
serves multiple VAV terminal units, each zone will need to be defined in the HVAC load
program in terms of the spaces that it serves, occupied and unoccupied space tempera-
ture setpoints, and the type of terminal equipment that will be used.
Typical occupied space setpoints are 75°F for cooling and 70°F for heating. A typical
unoccupied space setpoint for heating is 60°F. It is common for cooling not to be pro-
vided for commercial buildings during unoccupied periods. In this case, the tempera-
ture within the building will rise in proportion to the thermal energy stored within the
building over the course of the day and the nighttime outdoor air temperature.
Baseboard radiators and VAV terminal units (with or without fans or heating coils)
are examples of terminal equipment that may be used. Other information describing
the terminal equipment will also need to be entered in the zone input menu as required
by the HVAC load calculation software. The user’s manual for the software should be
consulted for detailed instructions.
Air Systems
Air systems in HVAC load calculations represent those systems that provide the nec-
essary heating, cooling, and outdoor air ventilation required by the various zones and
spaces that they serve. For each air system, it will be necessary to determine the air
system type (i.e., constant air volume, VAV, etc.) and the various components of the
air system that are relevant to the HVAC load calculations, such as the amount of out-
door air ventilation required, as well as specific information on the heating coils, cool-
ing coils, supply fan, and other components.3 The air system definition will also include
the relevant information for the terminal equipment, such as finned-tube radiators and
the VAV terminal units for VAV air systems. The heating and cooling supply air tem-
peratures must also be determined so that the heating and cooling airflows can be cal-
culated based on the heating and cooling loads of the areas served by each air system.
A common heating supply air temperature for most occupancies is 85°F, which is 15°F
above a normal space heating setpoint of 70°F. If the supply air used for heating is
cooler than 85°F, the spaces will feel drafty. If the supply air used for heating is warmer
than 85°F, the heating air supplied to the spaces will stratify, meaning that it will stay
near the ceiling and not reach the occupied zone, which is from 0 to 6 ft above the floor.
A common cooling supply air temperature for most occupancies is 55 to 58°F. Cooling
air in this temperature range has a low enough dew point4 to achieve a space-relative
humidity for most occupancies that is between 40 and 60% at a normal space cooling
setpoint of 75°F.
Central Plant
Finally, it will be necessary to define the central plant equipment for each building. This
is the equipment that provides the necessary heating and cooling energy required by all
of the air systems and terminal equipment. For the purposes of determining the peak
heating and cooling load of the building, it is not necessary to describe the central plant
equipment in detail. Rather, the generic heating and cooling plants that are available
within the HVAC load calculation program should be used instead. The HVAC load
calculation program will sum the heating and cooling loads for each air system and
piece of terminal equipment every hour of the year and will identify the peak heating
and cooling loads and the month and hour that these peak loads occur. These peak
heating and cooling loads, plus any additional capacity for future expansion, will be
used to size the central plant heating and cooling equipment.
Codes and Standards

Codes
Many counties, cities, and towns have building codes that govern the construction of
buildings within their jurisdictions. For smaller cities, towns, and counties that do not
have building codes, the state’s building codes apply to construction within these areas.
The codes that are in effect are enforced by the local and state code officials who are
frequently referred to as the authorities having jurisdiction (AHJs). The AHJs enforce
the codes that are in effect for their jurisdictions through the permitting process.
The permitting process starts when the contractor, building owner, or member of
the design team completes an application for a building permit and submits the appli-
cation along with a fee and the required number of complete sets of drawings to the
permitting department of the local or state jurisdiction where the project is located.
These plans have to be stamped and signed by the architect and professional engineers
on the design team who are registered in the state in which the project is located. The
plans are reviewed by plan reviewers for each discipline; reviewers frequently issue a
list of comments to the design team for their responses. Sometimes the building permit
is granted pending the satisfactory responses of the design team; sometimes the permit
is withheld until the responses are incorporated into revised plans, which are resubmit-
ted to the permitting department.
Once the building permit has been issued, the trade permits can be applied for by
the project mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical contractors. During
construction, the inspectors for the local or state jurisdiction will perform rough-in and
final inspections for the work of the various trades, citing concerns that need to be
resolved. Upon resolution of the concerns, the inspectors will issue their approvals for
the various trades at these project milestones. Once all final inspections are complete
and the project has been approved by the state and local code officials, a use and occu-
pancy permit is granted for the project and the owner is permitted to use and occupy
the premises.
12 Chapter Two T
Since a project must be designed in accordance with the applicable codes, each
member of the design team must know what codes apply for each project. The codes
that apply to building construction within a local or state jurisdiction can be obtained
by contacting the permit department of the appropriate jurisdiction.
In most cases, the local or state jurisdictions will adopt a published building code,
mechanical code, plumbing code, fire prevention code, electric code, and other codes by
reference and will write amendments to each code, the sum of which represents the
codes for the local or state jurisdiction. Examples of published codes are the Interna-
tional Mechanical Code (IMC) published by the International Code Council, Inc. (ICC),
which would apply to the HVAC systems, and the National Electric Code (NEC), pub-
lished by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), which would apply to the
electrical systems. Codes are normally updated every 3 years.
Standards
Standards are published by professional societies and associations as guidelines for the
design of various building systems, with the goal of protecting the safety and health of
building occupants. Standards are not codes and are therefore not enforced by the
AHJs. However, the recommendations of standards are frequently incorporated into
published codes and are thereby indirectly enforced by the AHJs as code requirements.
An example is ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007—Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
The recommendations of this standard have largely been incorporated into the 2009
version of the IMC. In other words, standards usually take the lead on issues related to
safety and health and are later incorporated into the applicable codes. It is prudent for
the HVAC system designer to not only be familiar with the applicable codes but also
with the latest standards.
System Selection
The types of HVAC systems that will be utilized for projects will normally be determined
by the senior HVAC engineer. However, it is helpful for the junior HVAC system designer
to be familiar with some of the factors that govern proper HVAC system selection.
A leading factor in determining the HVAC systems for a project is whether the proj-
ect is a renovation within an existing building where some of the existing HVAC systems
will be retained or a new project where the HVAC systems will be designed from scratch.
For a renovation project, the HVAC system options are usually limited because the new
portions of the HVAC systems will often have to coordinate with the existing HVAC
system components that will remain. For example, if the project consists of the renova-
tion of a single floor within a 20-year-old, three-story office building where each floor is
conditioned with a VAV air handling unit serving fan-powered VAV terminal units with
hot water heating coils, most likely the air handling unit and all associated ductwork,
piping, and VAV terminal units on that floor will be replaced. Furthermore, if the scope
of the project is limited to that one floor, the existing heating and cooling plant, which (in
this example) consists of hot water boilers, chillers, and pumping systems, would remain.
Therefore, the HVAC system selection for this project would consist of a replacement of
the HVAC systems serving that floor with similar systems. The selection of the heating
and cooling coils within the VAV air handling unit serving the floor would have to coor-
dinate with the operating parameters of the existing central heating and cooling plant
that is to remain. If the central heating and cooling plant is designed to deliver 180°F
heating water with a 20°F delta T (difference between the heating water supply tempera-
ture from the heating plant and the heating water return temperature to the heating
plant) and deliver 45°F chilled water with a 10°F delta T (difference between the chilled
water supply temperature from the cooling plant and the chilled water return tempera-
ture to the cooling plant), the hot water heating and chilled water cooling coils within the
replacement air handling unit would have to be selected based on these criteria.
Although it is typical for the HVAC systems serving renovated areas of a building
to be similar to the existing HVAC systems, there will be times when it is desirable to
change the HVAC systems, especially when the usage of the project area has changed
from its original use or if the existing HVAC system is obsolete or inefficient.
For new projects, the HVAC system options are more numerous than they are for
renovation projects. The final HVAC system selection will depend upon a number of
factors that should be discussed with the building owner and architect. The pros and
cons of each option should be explored before finalizing the HVAC system selection.
Some of the factors that affect the HVAC system selection include:
• The use and occupancy schedule of the various spaces within the building
• The building owner’s preferences or standards
• The building owner’s budget
• The presence or absence of a central heating and cooling plant to serve the
HVAC systems
• Installed costs of the HVAC system options
• Energy efficiencies of the HVAC system options
• Maintenance costs of the HVAC system options
• Type of building construction
• Available interstitial space above ceilings
• Flexibility of the HVAC system options for future expansion
• Other project-specific requirements
Design Team Members

Before we begin a discussion of the design submissions, it is necessary to describe the
various disciplines that are involved in the building design.
First, the architect for the project is usually the design team leader. In addition to
designing the building envelope and core interior components that are essential to the
building, the architect is responsible for coordinating all of the design disciplines, as
well as being the main design team contact with the building owner. Starting from the
outside and working to the interior of the building, the other disciplines that are com-
monly involved in a building design are:
• Civil Engineer: Responsible for the design of the site on which the building will
be located, which includes the design of the grading, paving, and utilities.
• Environmental Engineer: May be required if there are hazardous materials
located on the site or if it is necessary to remediate wetlands or deal with other
environmentally sensitive issues on the project site.
14 Chapter Two T
• Landscape Architect: Responsible for designing the plantings, walkways,

irrigation, and water features on the project site.
• Architect: Responsible for designing the building envelope and core interior
components.
• Structural Engineer: Responsible for designing the foundations and major
structural elements of the building, including floor slabs, roofs, columns
(vertical members), and beams or joists (horizontal or angled members).
• Interior Designer: Responsible for designing the interior partitions (nonload-
bearing walls), doors, and ceilings in the noncore areas and for specifying
the finishes for the interior components of the building such as the walls,
ceilings, floors, and doors. The interior designer is also responsible for
designing the furniture, fixtures, and major equipment that will be utilized
within the building.
• Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing (MEP) Engineer: Responsible for design
ing the HVAC, electrical power and lighting, and plumbing systems within the
building.
• Fire Protection (FP) Engineer: May be involved in the design of the sprinkler
and fire alarm systems within the building. Other times, the MEP engineer will
design the major components of the sprinkler system and provide a specification
for the sprinkler system, which will be designed and built by the sprinkler
contractor. It is also common for the MEP engineer to design the fire alarm
system for the building.
• Conveying Systems Engineer: Responsible for designing the conveying systems
(elevators, dumb waiters, and escalators) in the building.
• Other Consultants: May be part of the design team for certain building projects
and will design specialized systems such as audiovisual (AV), security, telephone,
and data systems.
Design Submissions
Schematic Design
The schematic design (SD) is normally the first design submission for medium- and
large-sized projects (projects larger than 10,000 ft2) where the design team will issue
preliminary design submissions prior to the final design submission. The SD submission
represents an approximately 15 to 25% level of completion for the project. The purpose
of the SD submission is to present the preliminary architectural and engineering design
concepts for the building to the building owner. The SD submission will normally
include preliminary architectural floor plans5 and narrative descriptions of the pro-
posed building systems and site improvements. It is customary for the SD submission
to be followed by a design meeting where the design team discusses the major elements
of the building design with the building owner to refine the design concepts and meet
the owner’s needs.
For the HVAC system design, the elements described in the following paragraphs
should be included in the SD submission.
Block HVAC Load Calculations

Block HVAC load calculations are those in which the building is subdivided into areas
that will be served by individual air systems. For each air system, the areas served will
be considered as one large space, even though these areas will be further subdivided
into more spaces and zones later in the development of the design. The heating, cool-
ing, and outdoor air ventilation requirements for each air system are determined from
the block load calculations. If the air systems will be served by a central heating and
cooling plant, the heating and cooling capacity of the central plant equipment can also
be determined by the HVAC load calculation software from the block HVAC load
calculations.
HVAC System Options

In the SD submission, several HVAC system options should be presented based on the
block HVAC load calculations and the other requirements of the project. A brief descrip-
tion of each system’s advantages and disadvantages should also be presented in order
to provide the building owner with sufficient information to make an informed deci-
sion on the HVAC system approach for the project. The HVAC system designer should
keep in mind that all but one of the HVAC system options will be discarded, so a mini-
mal amount of effort should be expended explaining each option. The chosen HVAC
system option will be further developed in the subsequent design submissions.
Single-Line Layout of the Recommended HVAC System

Sometimes a single-line layout of the recommended HVAC system option is helpful to
illustrate the HVAC system components for the owner and architect, enabling them to
begin to conceptualize the major components of the likely HVAC system configuration.
With a single-line HVAC layout, the central HVAC equipment is shown on the architec-
tural floor plans as rectangular blocks having the approximate dimensions of the actual
equipment. The equipment maintenance clearances and space required for ductwork
and piping connections are also allowed for in the layout in order to give the architect
a rough approximation of the size of the equipment rooms that may be required to
house the indoor HVAC equipment. Approximate locations and sizes of the ductwork
and piping mains should be shown on the architectural floor plans to illustrate the
coordination that will be required between the HVAC systems and the other compo-
nents of the building design. Outdoor HVAC equipment, located either on the building
roof or on grade, should also be shown on the single-line HVAC drawings.
Design Development
Once the HVAC system configuration has been selected based on the various options
presented in the SD submission, the project will move into the design development
(DD) phase where the HVAC system design will be further developed. The DD submis-
sion represents an approximately 35 to 50% level of completion for the project. The
purpose of the DD submission is to present a well-developed and coordinated design
concept for the building to the building owner.
Zone-by-Zone HVAC Load Calculations

During the DD phase, the block HVAC calculations begun during the SD phase are
further developed by subdividing the areas served by each air system into (single-
space) zones even though these zones will be further subdivided into more spaces and
16 Chapter Two T
possibly more zones later in the final phase of the design. Space-by-space HVAC load
calculations are not appropriate at this phase of the design because it is likely that the
architectural design will change. Also, the level of accuracy that is achieved through
space-by-space HVAC calculations is not required at the DD phase.
Preliminary Equipment Selections

Preliminary selections of major equipment should be made for the selected HVAC sys-
tems based on the zone-by-zone HVAC load calculations. These equipment selections
are used to provide preliminary information to the architect for space requirements,
electrical engineer for the electrical loads, and structural engineer for the loading on the
building structural elements.
Preliminary Sizing of Equipment Rooms

Once the major HVAC equipment has been selected, this information is used to prepare
preliminary floor plans of the equipment rooms. The purpose of the preliminary equip-
ment room floor plans is to provide the architect with an estimate of the floor space
required for the equipment rooms within the building. Preferred areas within the build-
ing for the equipment rooms should also be communicated to the architect so that these
areas can be worked into the architect’s overall building design.
At this stage in design development, the HVAC equipment should still be repre-
sented by rectangular blocks of the approximate size of the equipment. The areas
surrounding the HVAC equipment required for proper maintenance, ductwork and
piping connections, and equipment replacement should be identified as well. Other
equipment within the equipment rooms, such as electrical panelboards, should be
identified so that adequate space is allowed for all equipment within the equipment
rooms. Major building structural components, such as building columns, and vertical
shafts, should be identified, and the major pieces of HVAC equipment should be
coordinated with these elements. Finally, the locations and sizes of the doors for the
equipment rooms should be shown so that the architect can coordinate the layout of
the spaces surrounding the equipment rooms. The architect will determine the
direction that the doors must swing based on the requirements of the building code.
If they must swing into the equipment room, sufficient floor space must be allowed
within the room for the door swings. Figure 2-2 shows a sample DD-level equipment
room layout.
Obviously, at this stage in the design, some compromise is required between the
architect and the HVAC system designer. The HVAC system designer should always
keep in mind that the HVAC systems for a building, though essential, are supplemental
to the building’s main function. From the perspective of the building owner and archi-
tect, maximizing the useable space within a building and incorporating the desired
architectural features are the most important issues. However, these goals should not
be achieved by designing poorly functioning HVAC systems that are not allowed suffi-
cient space for maintenance and equipment replacement.
At the DD level of the HVAC system design, the HVAC system designer should
be somewhat conservative in estimating the space requirements for the equipment
rooms. It is much easier to give space back to the architect than it is to gain more
mechanical equipment space after the architect has laid out the areas surrounding the
equipment rooms and the owner has agreed to the amount of mechanical space that
will be allotted.
Figure 2-2 DD-level equipment room layout.
Preliminary Sizing of Vertical Shafts

In addition to the floor space required for equipment rooms, the architect and structural
engineer will also need to know the sizes and locations of vertical shafts that will be
required within the building. Vertical shafts are designed within buildings to allow the
vertical ductwork and piping elements (referred to as risers) to be routed from one floor
18 Chapter Two T
to the next. Vertical shafts are also required for the plumbing and electrical system
risers. Plumbing system risers include sanitary, vent, storm water, and domestic cold
and hot water piping. Electrical system risers include conduits that enclose the electri-
cal power and telephone/data systems that are required to be routed between floors.
Sometimes the plumbing and electrical system risers will be routed within the mechan-
ical shafts that enclose the ductwork and piping systems. However, it is common for the
plumbing and electrical system risers to be routed within dedicated shafts near the
toilet rooms, electrical closets, and telephone/data closets on each floor.
Mechanical shafts are commonly located near the equipment rooms because the
ductwork and piping within these shafts often have their source within the equipment
rooms. Therefore, the sizes and locations of mechanical shafts need to be developed
concurrent with the layout and sizing of the equipment rooms. The geometry of the
vertical shafts will be affected by the architectural floor plan and building structural
elements.
In the same way that floor space for equipment rooms is reluctantly yielded by the
architect, so is the floor space that is required for the mechanical shafts. For this reason,
it is incumbent upon the HVAC system designer to provide a layout of the ductwork
and piping that will be located within the shafts in order to justify the need for the shaft
space. This ductwork and piping needs to be configured within the shafts in a way that
enables the ductwork and piping to enter the shaft from the equipment room (or other
source) and also enables the branch ductwork and piping on each floor to be connected
to the risers without conflict.
The HVAC system designer must realize that the vertical structural members
(columns) of a building are laid out on a grid that coordinates with the needs of the
architectural floor plan. Also, it is difficult and costly to modify the basic structural
column grid to accommodate the needs of the HVAC or other building systems. It is
much more reasonable for the building HVAC systems to coordinate with the structural
columns designed by the structural engineer. However, the architect normally has the
ability to reconfigure various rooms within the building core to provide floor space for
shafts if this need is clearly communicated by the HVAC system designer early in the
design process.
Figure 2-3 shows a sample shaft layout that would be provided to the architect and
structural engineer for coordination. The floor plan layout shows the 24 × 10 exhaust air
duct, 24 × 32 return air duct, 14 × 30 supply air duct, 4-in. chilled water supply and
return, and 3-in. heating water supply and return risers that must be located in the
shaft. This layout also incorporates the clearances between the various risers and the
shaft walls in order to arrive at the minimum inside clear dimensions of the shaft and
its associated floor opening. The inside face of the shaft wall will coincide with the floor
opening. A minimum of 6 in. of clearance should be allowed between piping and duct-
work risers to accommodate ductwork flanges (if required) and insulation on the duct-
work and piping. A minimum clearance of 3 in. should be allowed between the piping
and ductwork risers and the inside face of the shaft wall to accommodate the ductwork
flanges and insulation. It may also be desirable to allow some additional space within
the shaft for future services. The amount of space allowed for future services will
depend upon the current and future finish-out plans for the building and should be
discussed with the building owner and architect. The architect and structural engineer
need to know the dimensions of the floor slab openings on each floor in order to accom-
modate the required mechanical shafts into the architectural and structural drawings.
Figure 2-3 DD-level plan of vertical shaft.
Preliminary Space Required Above Ceilings

Equally as important as communicating the floor space requirements for equipment
rooms and shafts to the architect and structural engineer is communicating the vertical
clear space required above the ceilings (and below the horizontal structural members) to
conceal the HVAC ductwork, piping, and equipment that will be located above the
ceilings. The best way to communicate this need is to prepare partial floor plans and
sections6 in various locations of the building that show the preliminary dimensions and
layout of the HVAC systems at each location. In addition to showing the HVAC systems
on the sections, allowances should be shown for other building systems, such as con-
duits, sprinkler piping, and plumbing piping, in order to give the architect and structural
engineer a reasonable understanding of systems that need to be concealed above the ceil-
ings. The clear space requirements above ceilings are typically the greatest near the inte-
rior core area of each floor where the ductwork, piping, and electrical distribution
systems are the largest. Because the need for clear space above the ceilings differs based
upon the location on the floors, the HVAC system designer should select representative
areas near the building core and building perimeter that will require the greatest clear
space and closest coordination between disciplines when developing the sections.
When preparing the section drawings, it is easiest to think of the vertical space
above the ceiling in terms of planes. For example, the first 6 to 8 in. above the finished
ceiling7 should be considered as the lighting plane if recessed lighting fixtures are used.
Above the lighting plane will be the sprinkler piping plane, which requires between 2
and 4 in. of vertical space. Above the lighting and sprinkler planes will be the HVAC
and plumbing systems plane. Most HVAC systems that are concealed above ceilings
can fit within 12 to 18 in. of vertical space above the lighting and sprinkler planes. The
plumbing systems can usually be coordinated within the HVAC systems plane as well,
but it is necessary to coordinate the pitched horizontal components of the sanitary pip-
ing systems with the HVAC systems. Steam, steam condensate, and air-conditioning
condensate drainage systems also have pitched piping, which requires additional coor-
dination because the elevation of this piping changes along the piping run. Therefore,
the vertical clear space from the finished ceiling to the underside of the building struc-
ture required to accommodate the HVAC, plumbing, sprinkler, and electrical systems
20 Chapter Two T
Figure 2-4 Coordination of the space above ceilings.
will normally be between 20 and 30 in. Figure 2-4 illustrates the coordination of the
space above ceilings.
In general, all work above the ceilings must fit between the ceiling and the under-
side of the building structure. The building structure can be constructed of steel or
concrete. In either case, the structural engineer may, on rare occasions, design holes
within the webs of wide flange steel beams8 or design framed openings in concrete
beams to allow ductwork, piping, or other services to pass through the beams. How-
ever, if given notice early in the design process, the structural engineer can usually
design some beams to have a lower height, which will allow more clear space below
these beams for the building systems that will be concealed above the ceilings. Or,
the structural engineer may choose to use bar joists9 in lieu of beams in certain areas
to make it possible for small pipes and ducts to be routed through the web of the bar
joists if necessary. Clear communication early in the design process is key to obtain-
ing the necessary clear space above the ceilings for the HVAC and other building
systems.
Single-Line Layout of HVAC Systems

Once the equipment rooms have been laid out, the vertical shafts have been located,
and HVAC plans and sections of various areas of the floors have been developed, a
single-line layout of the HVAC systems serving the occupied spaces should be devel-
oped for the DD submission. Sizes of the main ducts and the locations of the terminal
HVAC equipment should be shown on the single-line HVAC layout, as well as the loca-
tions of the supply, return, and exhaust air devices (air inlets and outlets) in the ceil-
ings. All of this information is helpful not only to the architect, structural engineer, and
electrical engineer who must coordinate the design of the ceilings, structure, and lighting
systems with the HVAC systems, but also for the HVAC system designer. Developing a
Figure 2-5 DD-level single-line HVAC layout.
single-line HVAC layout will help the HVAC system designer identify the logical routes
for the main ducts and HVAC piping systems, identify areas where ducts and pipes
need to cross over one another, and identify locations where close coordination with
the architectural and structural components will be required. Figures 2-5 and 2-6 illus-
trate a DD-level single-line HVAC layout and a DD-level section, respectively. The
section shows the combination fire/smoke damper that is required in the shaft wall
and the associated access door, the 42 × 10 supply air duct, the 8 × 10 supply air duct,
as well as the lighting, sprinkler, finished ceiling, structure, elevation above the fin-
ished floor to the finished ceiling, and the clear space required between the finished
ceiling and the underside of the structure.
Preliminary Electrical Loads

At the DD level of the HVAC system design, it is necessary to give the electrical engi-
neer an estimate of the electrical loads for the major pieces of HVAC equipment. The
electrical load of HVAC equipment is measured in terms of power, which has units of
22 Chapter Two T
Figure 2-6 DD-level section.
watts (W) or horsepower (hp). The voltage that the HVAC equipment will utilize is
very important to the electrical engineer and should be determined by the electrical
engineer based on the design of the electrical power distribution system in the building
and the available voltages that the HVAC equipment can utilize. The available voltages
that the HVAC equipment can utilize can be obtained from the HVAC equipment
manufacturer’s product data.
For commercial buildings, the local electrical utility will normally provide a three-
phase electrical service. From this three-phase service, single-phase power is derived
within the building, and both three-phase and single-phase power is distributed
throughout the building for use by the HVAC equipment, lighting, receptacles, and
other equipment. Generally, three-phase power is used by large equipment and motors
that are ½ hp and larger. Single-phase power is used for receptacles, lighting, small
equipment, and motors that are smaller than ½ hp.
A list of the electrical loads for the major pieces of HVAC equipment can be used by
the electrical engineer to add these loads to the lighting, receptacle, and other equip-
ment loads in the building and to calculate the connected electrical load for the build-
ing. The electrical engineer will then apply appropriate demand factors to the connected
loads (depending upon the type of load) to arrive at an estimated electrical demand for
the building. The electrical demand will be used to size the main electrical distribution
equipment and will also be supplied to the electrical utility for sizing of the electrical
service and transformer (if necessary), which supply electrical energy to the building.
The electrical demand of the HVAC systems in a building is a significant percentage of
the total electrical demand of the building. Therefore, it is important that the HVAC
system designer give the electrical engineer an accurate estimate of the electrical load of
the major pieces of HVAC equipment during the DD phase.
Preliminary Structural Loads

The structural engineer is responsible for designing the foundation, floors, roofs, and
supporting structure of the building. Therefore, it is necessary to communicate the size
and weight of major pieces of HVAC equipment to the structural engineer during the
DD phase. For HVAC equipment that will be mounted on the building floors or roofs,
the structural engineer will need to know the plan dimensions (or footprint) of the
HVAC equipment, as well as its operating weight. The operating weight of HVAC
equipment, given in the manufacturer’s product data, represents the weight of the
equipment during operation (e.g., for air handling units containing water coils, the
operating weight would include the weight of the coils filled with water). For major
pieces of HVAC equipment that will be suspended from the building structure, the
structural engineer will need to know the weight of the equipment, as well as the num-
ber of points of connection to the building structure.
It is not necessary to provide the structural engineer with the weights, dimensions,
and support points for minor pieces of HVAC equipment, such as small pumps or VAV
terminal units. The structural engineer will account for these minor loads, as well as the
weight of ductwork, piping, and other systems supported from the building structure,
in the standard estimate of the collateral load on the building structure. The collateral
load is a uniform dead load allowance (in addition to the dead weight of the building
structure) assessed by the structural engineer to account for the weight of all of the MEP
systems [i.e., ductwork, piping (HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler), lighting, and con-
duits] and sometimes includes the suspended ceiling. Collateral loads are typically set
between 10 and 30 pounds per square foot (psf) applied uniformly as an average area
load. Minor point loads less than 200 pounds are typically accommodated in this aver-
age loading, but highly concentrated point loads (dense duct configuration, pipe risers,
or cable trays, etc.) might require special loading consideration or locally increased col-
lateral load allowances.
Preliminary Openings in the Building Envelope

Openings in the building envelope are required for a building’s HVAC systems in order
to provide outdoor air ventilation, exhaust, and relief air from the building for indoor
air handling units. They may also be required for supply and return air ductwork asso-
ciated with outdoor air handling units. The sizes and locations of these openings need
to be coordinated with the architect and structural engineer. Also, the architect may have
a preference for the locations of these openings because they will affect the building’s
appearance.
Wall Openings Louvers are commonly used to protect openings in the exterior building
walls from water penetration. The performance of louvers differs based on type. For
example, louvers with drainable blades are able to limit water penetration at higher
free area velocities10 than louvers without drainable blades. For this reason, the required
sizes of louvers will differ based on the type of louver selected. However, a conserva-
tive method for sizing louvers is to limit the face velocity11 for intake louvers to 250 feet
per minute (fpm) and limit the face velocity for exhaust or relief louvers to 500 fpm. For
example, the louver area required for 1,000 cubic feet per minute (cfm) of outdoor air
intake would be: 1,000 cfm ÷ 250 fpm = 4 square feet (ft2). The louver area required for
1,000 cfm of relief or exhaust air would be: 1,000 cfm ÷ 500 fpm = 2 ft2. Louvers are
available in many standard sizes, and custom louvers can also be fabricated for special
24 Chapter Two T
Figure 2-7 Typical wall louver.
applications. The standard sizes and associated rough opening requirements for lou-
vers can be obtained from the manufacturer’s product data. In addition to the dimen-
sions (width and height) of the rough openings required, the architect and structural
engineer also need to know the elevations of the openings within the walls required for
the louvers. This information is typically given as an elevation above grade (or above
finished floor) to the head (top) of the louver. Figure 2-7 is a photo of a typical wall
louver, and Fig. 2-8 lists the wall opening information that needs to be communicated
to the architect and structural engineer.
Louvers are available in many different colors. Consequently, it is important to have
the architect select the proper color for each louver. Louvers should also be specified
with a bird screen, which is a ½-in. × ½-in. wire mesh, installed on the inside face of the
louver to prevent birds from entering the building or duct systems through the louvers.
Roof Openings In the same way that openings in the exterior building walls need to
be coordinated with the architect and structural engineer, so do openings in the
building roofs. Openings in the building roofs may be required for outdoor air venti-
lation, exhaust, relief, or for supply and return air ductwork associated with roof-
mounted air handling units. The architect and structural engineer need to show the
sizes of the rough openings on their plans, and the structural engineer must design
the appropriate structural reinforcement for the openings. Typically, the architect
Figure 2-8 Wall opening information for architectural/structural coordination.
will add notes to the architectural plans requiring the general contractor to coordi-
nate with the mechanical contractor in order to provide properly sized roof openings
for the HVAC systems. Openings in the building roof are commonly supported by
structural members below the roof deck and are surrounded by roof curbs above the
roof deck. Roof curbs provide a base for roof-mounted equipment and protect the
openings from water penetration. Various types of equipment may be mounted on
top of the roof curbs, including intake/exhaust/relief air hoods, ductwork goose-
necks, air handling units, and exhaust fans. Figure 2-9 shows a typical roof-mounted
hood, which can be used for outdoor air intake, exhaust, or relief air. Manufacturers’
product data should be used for actual roof-mounted hood selections. However, a
conservative method that can be used during the DD phase is to size the openings
26 Chapter Two T
Figure 2-9 Typical intake/exhaust/relief air hood.
required for roof-mounted intake/exhaust/relief air hoods so as to limit the throat

velocity to 500 fpm. Figure 2-10 lists the roof opening information that needs to be
communicated to the architect and structural engineer.
Coordination With Underground Site Utilities

Although it is more common for the plumbing engineer to coordinate with under-
ground utilities located on the building site (i.e., sanitary, storm water, and domestic
water services), the HVAC system designer may also have to coordinate the building
HVAC systems with underground site utilities if the building is served by heating and
cooling utilities whose source is located outside of the building in which the project is
located. Frequently, multiple-building campuses such as universities or hospitals gen-
erate steam, heating water, and/or chilled water in a remote central heating and cooling
plant and distribute these services to the various buildings on campus through under-
ground piping systems. Also, some cities have companies that own central heating and
cooling plants and offer heating and cooling utilities to building owners within the
limits of their district heating and cooling systems.
Typically, the civil engineer for the project is responsible for designing all underground
utilities on site. The line of demarcation between the underground site utilities and build-
ing systems is usually 5 ft outside of the exterior building wall. The HVAC system designer
is responsible for all piping within the building to a point 5 ft outside of the exterior build-
ing wall; the civil engineer is responsible for all underground utilities beyond that point.
For this reason, it is necessary for the HVAC system designer to provide the civil engineer
with the size, location, and elevation for all HVAC utilities that will penetrate the exterior
building walls below grade and continue underground on the project site.
Figure 2-10 Roof opening information for architectural/structural coordination.
Because all elevations on the civil drawings are referenced to sea level, elevations of
the HVAC utilities that penetrate the exterior building wall should also be provided to
the civil engineer in terms of the elevation above sea level to the invert of each pipe. The
invert of a pipe is the point on the inside surface of the bottom of the pipe. This eleva-
tion is referred to as the invert elevation of the pipe and is given in terms of feet above
sea level with two decimal places of precision. A sample invert elevation for a pipe
would be: 256.50’. All of this information should also be provided to the structural engi-
neer because the design of the building foundation will have to be coordinated with the
utilities below grade.
28 Chapter Two T
Figure 2-11 Coordination with site utilities.
It is necessary to provide this information to the civil and structural engineers at the
DD phase in order for the civil engineer to coordinate the locations and elevations of the
HVAC utilities with the other utilities on site and for the structural engineer to make
any necessary adjustments to the foundation design, such as lowering the elevation of
a wall footing, that may be required to accommodate the HVAC utilities. Figure 2-11 is
an example of a DD-level floor plan that would be developed and sent to the civil and
structural engineers for coordination with the site utilities. The floor plan shows the
4-in. heating water supply and return utilities and the 6-in. chilled water supply and
return utilities that are required to penetrate the exterior wall of the building. Also
given on the floor plan are the invert elevations of the heating and chilled water utilities
at the penetrations of the exterior wall.
Construction Documents
The final phase of the design process is the construction documents (CD) phase. The
CDs for a project consist of the final drawings and specifications for all disciplines
involved in the project. The CDs are often used to solicit competitive bids from multiple
contractors and are then used in the process of obtaining permits. Once all of the neces-
sary permits have been obtained, the CDs are used by the various contractors to con-
struct the building and all of its associated systems.
Although not covered in detail in this book, construction specifications are an
integral part of the construction documents. They normally follow the Construction
Specifications Institute (CSI) MasterFormat®, which organizes the work of the various
disciplines into 33 divisions. Each division is subdivided into sections, each of which
describes different components of that division. Each section is further subdivided into
three parts: Part 1—General, Part 2—Products, and Part 3—Execution. Part 1 of each
section describes the general conditions associated with that section such as related
documents, requirements for product submittals, and quality assurance requirements.
Part 2 of each section describes the physical characteristics of the items described in the
section, including construction materials, factory testing requirements, and acceptable
manufacturers. Part 3 of each section describes the requirements for installation,
start-up, and field testing. In the CSI MasterFormat, the HVAC systems are specified in
Division 23—Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning. Each of the HVAC system
components is specified in a separate section of Division 23. For example, indoor air
handling units are specified in Section 237313—Modular Indoor Central-Station Air
Handling Units.
The following is a brief discussion of the final design process and the various parts
of the construction drawings. These topics will be further developed in later chapters of
the book.
Final HVAC Load Calculations

Space-by-space HVAC calculations are required for the final HVAC system design. The
heating and cooling loads of each space (or room), as well as the heating and cooling
supply airflows, are required for the final design of the central HVAC equipment,
terminal equipment, and ductwork and piping distribution systems.
Final Equipment Selections

Once the final HVAC load calculations are completed, final equipment selections are
made by the HVAC system designer. For major pieces of HVAC equipment (such as air
handling units, boilers, chillers), the manufacturers’ equipment representatives for the
equipment that forms the basis of design should be consulted. The manufacturers’ rep-
resentatives have various resources, including equipment selection software and direct
contact with factory engineers, that enable them to make equipment selections accu-
rately and efficiently. These representatives are usually very cooperative with consult-
ing engineers because they want their equipment to be specified in the construction
documents as the basis of design. For minor pieces of HVAC equipment (such as air
devices, VAV terminal units, fan-coil units) the HVAC system designer can normally
consult the manufacturers’ product catalogs (and the associated equipment selection
guidelines contained within them) to make appropriate selections.
Final Coordination With Other Disciplines

Prior to completing the construction documents, it is necessary for the HVAC system
designer to communicate the final needs of the HVAC systems to the architect, electrical
engineer, structural engineer, and civil engineer on the design team. This information
should be communicated as early as possible in its final form so that these other disci-
plines can incorporate the needs of the HVAC systems into the final design of their
systems. Final information should be communicated to the architect, structural engi-
neer, and civil engineer in a similar fashion as the preliminary information was com-
municated in the DD phase. The structural engineer should review the MEP drawings
to confirm that the collateral load allowances are appropriate for the MEP systems.
30
Figure 2-12 Sample equipment list for electrical coordination.
T
However, the electrical requirements of the HVAC equipment should be communi-

cated to the electrical engineer through the use of an equipment list, manufacturers’ cut
sheets (product data sheets), and a highlighted set of HVAC plans that shows all of the
HVAC equipment requiring an electrical connection. Figure 2-12 is a sample equipment
list that can be used to communicate the electrical characteristics of the HVAC equip-
ment, such as voltage, phase, kilowatts, full load amps, and horsepower, to the electri-
cal engineer. The equipment list also identifies other electrical requirements of the
HVAC equipment, such as disconnect switches and starters, and the discipline (mechan-
ical or electrical) that is responsible for including these requirements in the construction
documents. In the sample equipment list shown in Fig. 2-12, the disconnect switches for
the exhaust fans and electric heating coils for the VAV terminal units will be specified
by the HVAC system designer to be furnished with this equipment, whereas the start-
ers for the air handling unit supply fan and roof exhaust fan will be designed by the
electrical engineer as part of the electrical power distribution system. The equipment
list can also be used for preliminary submissions. If this is done, it is important to keep
track of the revisions to the original equipment list by identifying the modified items
with the revision number in the revision column and maintaining a list of the revisions
(with the associated dates and descriptions) in the revision block at the top of the equip-
ment list.
Construction Drawings
The HVAC construction drawings generally consist of the following parts, listed in the
order they will appear in the HVAC drawing set.12
Legend, Abbreviations, and General Notes The legend, abbreviations, and general notes
are usually shown on the first drawing in the HVAC drawing set. Or, for smaller proj-
ects, the legend, abbreviations, and general notes can be presented on the first HVAC
floor plan drawing. The legend is a listing of the symbols used in the HVAC drawings,
abbreviations are a listing of the abbreviations used in the HVAC drawings, and general
notes describe the general requirements associated with the HVAC systems.
Floor Plans The HVAC floor plans show the arrangement of the HVAC ductwork and
piping distribution systems, as well as the HVAC equipment on each floor of the build-
ing. HVAC floor plans will be presented at the same scale as the architectural floor
plans. A scale of 1/8 in. = 1 ft is commonly used by architects to present the floor plans
for projects exceeding approximately 4,000 ft2. Architects use this scale because 16,000 ft2
of floor space can easily be presented on a 24-in. × 36-in. drawing at 1/8 in. = 1 ft,
whereas only about 4,000 ft2 of floor space can be presented on a 24-in. × 36-in. drawing
at ¼ in. = 1 ft. Also, a scale of 1/8 in. = 1 ft is large enough to show the detail that is com-
monly required for the HVAC ductwork and piping distribution systems and the HVAC
equipment. Areas requiring close coordination between disciplines, or where there is a
significant amount of HVAC work, will be presented on large-scale plans (see below).
It is common for HVAC ductwork and HVAC equipment with a ductwork connec-
tion (such as VAV terminal units) to be presented on one set of floor plans and for
HVAC piping (such as heating water piping) and HVAC equipment with HVAC piping
connection (such as VAV terminal units with hot water heating coils or finned-tube
radiators) to be shown on a separate set of floor plans. This is done where the HVAC
ductwork, HVAC equipment, and HVAC piping, if presented on the same set of floor
plans, would be cluttered and difficult to read.
32 Chapter Two T
Sections Sections are usually presented at a ¼ in. = 1 ft scale. These sections are used
to clarify the arrangement of HVAC systems in areas where close coordination between
disciplines is required or where there is a significant amount of HVAC work involved
that cannot be clearly conveyed through the use of floor plans alone, such as at the
branch connections to risers in vertical shafts and selected areas within equipment
rooms.
Large-Scale Plans Similar to sections, large-scale plans are also presented at a ¼ in. = 1 ft
scale and are used for areas where close coordination between disciplines is required or
where there is a significant amount of HVAC work involved. Equipment rooms are
almost always presented as large-scale plans because of the amount of HVAC work that
must be shown and because of the close coordination between disciplines that is
required. Because a larger scale is used, it is common for the HVAC ductwork, HVAC
equipment, and HVAC piping to be presented on the same large-scale plan. However,
if it would provide a clearer presentation, the HVAC ductwork and HVAC equipment
can be shown on one large-scale plan while the HVAC piping and HVAC equipment is
shown on a separate large-scale plan. Also, it is sometimes necessary to present the
HVAC ductwork, HVAC equipment, and HVAC piping at different elevations within
equipment rooms on separate large-scale plans when the equipment rooms are higher
than one story of the building.
Details Because it is not possible to show all of the details necessary for a proper instal-
lation of certain pieces of HVAC equipment on the floor plans or large-scale plans, it is
necessary for the HVAC system designer to show this information in equipment connec-
tion details. These details will show all of the required ductwork and piping connections,
as well as support requirements and miscellaneous appurtenances such as thermometers,
pressure gauges, and flexible pipe connectors. Also, it is common for details to be devel-
oped that describe miscellaneous items associated with the HVAC systems such as pipe
hangers, roof curbs, and penetrations through the building envelope.
Equipment Schedules Equipment schedules are used to present the pertinent informa-
tion associated with the HVAC equipment for a project in tabular format. The equip-
ment schedules list the identification numbers, capacities, electrical characteristics,
dimensions, weights, and manufacturers and model numbers that form the basis of
design for the HVAC equipment. Separate schedules are provided for each type of
HVAC equipment. For example, all of the pumps for a project will be presented in a
pump schedule and all of the air handling units will be presented in an air handling
unit schedule.
Diagrams Diagrams of the automatic temperature control (ATC) systems associated

with the HVAC systems for a project are necessary to show all of the components that
are required to ensure that the HVAC systems operate in accordance with the design
intent. A sequence of operation is developed for each ATC diagram to describe how the
HVAC system is to perform in all of its modes of operation. A direct digital control
(DDC) point list is also prepared for DDC ATC systems. Refer to Chap. 9 for a discus-
sion of ATC systems and their associated diagrams and DDC point lists.
For steam, heating water, and chilled water systems, flow diagrams are commonly
used to give an overview of the central plant for these systems. These diagrams show
all of the HVAC equipment that is required, as well as the arrangement of this
equipment within the systems. Pipe sizes, flow rates, and the HVAC equipment desig-
nations are shown on the flow diagrams. It is not necessary to show every equipment
isolation valve, thermometer, pressure gauge, or other equipment appurtenance on
the flow diagrams because this information is shown in the equipment connection
details. However, it is helpful to show shutoff valves that are used to isolate major
portions of each system. These valves will also be shown on the HVAC floor plans or
large-scale plans.
Finally, riser diagrams are often employed for projects having three or more stories.
These diagrams can be used for piping or ductwork systems to show the sizes of the
piping or ductwork risers, flow rates, and the branch connections at each floor of the
building.
Endnotes
1. A thermostat is an electrical device that performs an action (such as closing a con-
tact) in response to a change in temperature. The term thermostat is used in a generic
sense in the earlier chapters of this book to describe the device that controls the
space temperature. However, modern space temperature control systems serving
occupied areas commonly utilize electronic control systems, which would consist
of a space temperature sensor (senses temperature only) that is connected to a con-
troller. The controller is the device that actually performs the desired action based
upon the input it receives from the space temperature sensor.
2. The building envelope consists of the exterior walls, windows, doors, roofs, and
skylights, which enclose the building and separate the indoor environment from
the outdoors.
3. The types of air systems are usually finalized after the schematic design submission.
Prior to the final selection of the air systems, the simplest type of air systemconstant
air volumecan be used to perform the block load HVAC load calculations. Refer
to the Design Submissions section in this chapter for more information on the sche-
matic design submission and block load HVAC calculations.
4. Dew point is the temperature of moist air below which condensation will occur. The
dew point temperature of air gives an indication of the total amount of moisture
in the air. The higher the dew point, the more moisture is contained within the air
and vice versa.
5. A floor plan is a drawing that depicts a view of a floor, or partial floor, of a building
looking vertically downward.
6. A section is a drawing that depicts a view looking horizontally in a certain direc-
tion. Sections are identified on the floor plans by a number designation, a reference
arrow depicting the direction of the view, and the drawing where the section is
presented.
7. The finished ceiling is the underside of the ceiling that is exposed to the finished
space.
8. Wide flange steel beams are structural members that are mounted horizontally to
support the floors or flat roof of a building. Because they have a section that looks
like the letter I, they are sometimes referred to as I-beams. The top and bottom (hori-
zontal) portions of the beam are the flanges and the vertical portion of the beam,
which joins the flanges, is the web. Roof support beams can also be mounted at an
angle for sloped roofs.
34 Chapter Two
9. Bar joists are composite members, also mounted horizontally or at an angle, that
have an open web.
10. The free area velocity for a louver is the velocity of the air through the total open
area (free area) of the louver.
11. The face velocity for a louver is the velocity of the air across the entire face of the
louver, which includes the louver blade area and the louver free area.
12. A further discussion of construction drawings is given in Chap. 10.
Chapter 3
Piping, Valves, and
Specialties
P
iping systems are used to convey the heated and cooled fluids from the central
plant to the air systems and terminal equipment where the energy from these
fluids is used to heat and cool the building. Because piping systems are such an
integral part of HVAC systems, a basic understanding of their fundamental compo-
nents is necessary in order to properly design these systems.
Piping systems are used in industry for a variety of different purposes. Pipes, which
range in diameter (pipe size) from very small to very large, convey different types of
fluids, which exist over a wide range of temperatures and pressures. For this reason, we
will limit our discussion of piping systems by pipe size, working fluid, fluid tempera-
ture, and fluid pressure. This will enable us to focus on the piping system components
that are commonly used in HVAC systems for commercial buildings. The following is a
breakdown of these characteristics:
1. Pipe size: Pipe sizes used in commercial HVAC systems normally range from
¾ to 12 in. Pipes larger than 12 in. are used for very large commercial buildings,
industrial applications, and district heating and cooling systems, which are
beyond the scope of this book.
2. Working fluids: Common working fluids are water, steam, brine,1 and
refrigerant.
3. Fluid temperature: Fluid temperatures range from as low as 15°F for ice-making
brine systems to as high as 406°F for high-pressure steam systems [250 pounds
per square inch gauge (psig)].2 Common fluid temperature ranges for various
HVAC piping systems are listed below:
a. Cold water systems
(1) Ice-making brine: 15−32°F
(2) Chilled water: 35−65°F
(3) Heat pump water: 50−100°F
(4) Condenser water: 70−100°F
b. Hot water systems
(1) Heating water: 100−200°F
c. Steam systems
(1) Low-pressure (up to 15 psig) steam: 212−250°F
(2) Medium-pressure (above 15 psig, up to 125 psig) steam: above 250°F,
up to 352°F
35
36 Chapter Three P
(3) High-pressure (above 125 psig, up to 250 psig) steam: above 352°F, up
to 406°F
4. Fluid pressure: Fluid pressures are normally below 125 psig for water, steam,
and brine systems. However, pressures as high as 250 psig are possible for
high-pressure steam systems, water and brine systems in high-rise buildings,
and refrigerant systems. It is not desirable for water, steam, brine, or refrigerant
piping systems to operate below atmospheric pressure (negative gauge
pressure).
Piping systems comprise the following three basic parts, which will be discussed in
this chapter:
• Pipe, fittings, and joints

• Valves
• Specialties such as meters and gauges
Symbols and abbreviations are used to represent the piping systems, valves, and
specialties on the HVAC construction drawings. Refer to the sample legend and abbre-
viations (Figs. 10-1 and 10-2) in Chap. 10 for the piping system designations and sym-
bols for the valves and specialties discussed in this chapter.
Pipe, Fittings, and Joints

The two most common materials for HVAC pipe are carbon steel and copper. Carbon-
steel pipe is referred to as black steel pipe or simply steel pipe. Copper pipe is normally
referred to as copper tube.
Pipe fittings, such as elbows and tees, are required at all turns and branch connec-
tions in piping systems.
Joints refer to the connections between pipe and fittings, unions, flanges, valves,
specialties, and similar junctions. Joints in HVAC piping systems are normally threaded3
or welded for steel pipe and soldered or brazed for copper tube. Joints consisting of
grooved pipe and mechanical couplings are also used. However, this method of joining
has not gained universal acceptance in the HVAC industry.
It should be noted that steel pipe and copper tube used in HVAC piping systems are
not compatible for direct contact with each other.4 When it is necessary for steel pipe
and copper tube to connect in HVAC piping systems or for steel pipe to connect to cop-
per connections on HVAC equipment (or vice versa), dielectric fittings are required to
prevent direct contact of these two dissimilar metals. Dielectric fittings are normally
constructed of ferrous material (for connection to the steel component) and copper alloy
(for connection to the copper component), both of which are separated by a plastic com-
ponent that prevents metal-to-metal contact.
Steel Pipe
Steel pipe is often used in HVAC piping systems because it is readily available,
cost-effective, and durable. Steel pipe, manufactured in accordance with the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) specification A53,
P i p i n g , V a l v e s , a n d S p e c i a l t i e s 37
is available in two grades: Grade A and Grade B. Grade B steel pipe is commonly
used in HVAC piping systems because it has a higher tensile strength than Grade A
steel pipe.
Steel pipe is also available in two types: welded and seamless. Welded pipe is
manufactured by rolling a sheet of steel into a cylinder and welding the longitudinal
seam. The weld can be either furnace butt-welded (Type F) or electric-resistance-welded
(Type E). Type F pipe, which has a lower allowable stress than Type E pipe, is suitable
for HVAC applications where the pipe sizes are 2 in. and smaller. Type E pipe is typically
used for pipe sizes from 2½ to 12 in. Seamless pipe (Type S) is manufactured by extrud-
ing and, therefore, has no longitudinal seam. As a result, Type S pipe has a higher
allowable stress than welded pipe, but it is also more costly. Type S pipe is not required
for commercial HVAC piping systems unless the project requires a higher degree of
quality than normal.
Steel pipe is manufactured with different wall thicknesses, identified by schedule
(or weight class). Schedule 40 steel pipe is used for most HVAC applications for pipe
sizes up to 12 in. Schedule 80 steel pipe, which has a thicker wall than Schedule 40 steel
pipe, is commonly used for steam condensate piping because the thicker wall provides
some allowance for corrosion. Schedule 40 steel pipe and Schedule 80 steel pipe have
the same outside diameter for corresponding pipe sizes. Steel pipe is sold in straight
lengths.
Steel Pipe Fittings and Joints

Fittings for steel pipe used in HVAC piping systems are normally constructed of cast
iron,5 malleable iron,6 or wrought (worked) steel.
Fittings, as well as unions, flanges, valves, and specialties, used in steel piping
systems are rated for different working pressures, which are defined by class. Class,
followed by a dimensionless number, refers to the maximum allowable working
saturated steam gauge pressure measured in pounds per square inch (psi). Common
classes for steel pipe components used in HVAC piping systems are: Class 125, Class
150, Class 250, and Class 300.
Cast iron is commonly used in the construction of Class 125 and Class 250 compo-
nents. Cast iron components are normally constructed with threaded ends for connec-
tions to the adjoining pipe. Threaded joints are typically used in HVAC piping systems
for steel pipe components that are 2 in. and smaller, such as the cast iron elbow shown
in Fig. 3-1.
Malleable iron is used in the construction of Class 150 and Class 300 components.
Malleable iron fittings are normally constructed with threaded ends and are also used
for pipe sizes that are 2 in. and smaller. Malleable iron unions with threaded ends are
commonly used at connections of steel piping (2 in. and smaller) to HVAC equipment
where ease of disassembly is required (Fig. 3-2).
Welded joints are preferred for larger pipe sizes. Since cast iron and malleable
iron are not suitable materials for welding, wrought steel fittings of Class 150 and
Class 300 with butt welding (beveled) ends are commonly used for pipe sizes from
2½ to 12 in.
Flanges constructed of wrought steel with butt welding ends are commonly used
at connections of steel piping (from 2½ to 12 in.) to HVAC equipment where ease of
disassembly is required. Two flanges and a gasket7 are required to make a flanged joint.
38 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-1 Photograph of a cast iron elbow with threaded ends.
Figure 3-2 Photograph of a malleable iron union with threaded ends.
During installation, the gasket is placed between the two flanges, and through-bolts
and nuts are tightened to a specified torque thus completing the joint. Pipe fittings and
valves are also available with flanged ends for connection to the flanges welded to the
ends of pipe. Figure 3-3 is a photograph of a wrought steel flange welded to the end of
a steel pipe.
Figure 3-3 Photograph of a wrought steel flange with butt welding ends.
Steel pipe fittings, unions, and flanges are manufactured in accordance with
specifications defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and
ASTM. For example, Class 125 and Class 250 cast iron fittings with threaded ends are
manufactured in accordance with ASME B16.4, and Class 150 and Class 300 wrought
steel fittings with butt welding ends are manufactured in accordance with ASTM
A234.
It is common for Class 125 and Class 150 components to be used in the same
piping system, and for Class 250 and Class 300 components to be used in the same
piping system. The maximum working pressure at any point in a piping system
comprising Class 125 and Class 150 components should be 125 psig because the
lowest rated component establishes the operating limits of the system. Similarly,
250 psig should be the maximum working pressure at any point in a piping system
comprising Class 250 and Class 300 components. It is the responsibility of the HVAC
system designer to determine the maximum working pressure in the HVAC piping
system and specify the appropriate class of pipe fittings, unions, flanges, valves,
and specialties.
Specification for Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Joints

The following are typical specifications for steel pipe, fittings, and joints for steam,
water, or brine HVAC piping systems:
1. Piping 2 in. and smaller, above ground

a. ASTM A53, Grade B, Type F Schedule 40 black steel pipe with Class 125
(or Class 250) cast iron fittings and threaded joints, or
b. ASTM A53, Grade B, Type F Schedule 40 black steel pipe with Class 150
(or Class 300) malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.
40 Chapter Three P
2. Piping 2½ in. through 12 in., above ground

a. ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E Schedule 40 black steel pipe with Class 150
(or Class 300) wrought steel fittings and welded joints.
Copper Tube
Copper tube is seamless and is manufactured first by extruding8 a cast copper billet
into a tube. The tube is then drawn9 through a die in several stages to obtain the final
tube diameter and wall thickness. Copper tube that is used to convey water or brine
for HVAC piping systems is manufactured in accordance with ASTM specification
B88. The copper tube is available in different wall thicknesses, identified by Types K,
L, M, and DWV (drainage, waste, and vent), which designate descending wall thick-
nesses. All types of copper tube have the same outside diameter for corresponding
pipe sizes.
Copper tube is often used for water or brine HVAC piping systems because of its
inherent corrosion resistance and ease of installation. Copper tube can be used for
low-pressure steam systems (15 psig or less); however, it is customary to specify steel
pipe for steam service. Type L copper tube is usually specified as an option to steel
pipe for HVAC piping systems that are 2 in. and smaller for aboveground installa-
tions.10 Type K copper tube is used in HVAC piping systems that are installed below
ground or within concrete slabs because it is more durable than Type L copper. Also,
copper tube is more corrosion resistant than steel pipe, which is not recommended for
direct-buried installations. Type M copper tube is used predominately in residential
construction and is not recommended for use in commercial buildings. Type DWV
copper tube has the thinnest wall and is suitable for nonpressurized piping systems,
such as air-conditioning condensate drainage or plumbing drainage, waste, and vent
piping systems.
Type ACR (air-conditioning and refrigeration) copper tube, which is manufac-
tured by extruding and drawing, is also cleaned (to remove any traces of drawing
lubricants or contaminants) and capped prior to shipping from the factory. Type ACR
copper tube, which is used for refrigerant piping systems, is manufactured in accor-
dance with ASTM B280 and has a different set of wall thicknesses than Types K, L, M,
and DWV copper tube.
Copper tube is sold in either the hard-drawn or annealed (soft) state. Hard-drawn
copper tube is in the rigid state, which follows the drawing process. Annealed copper
tube undergoes a process of annealing11 at the factory after the drawing process in order
to soften the hard-drawn tube. Annealed copper tube differs in appearance from hard-
drawn copper tube in that it has a matte surface finish.
For HVAC piping systems in commercial buildings, hard-drawn Type L copper
tube is used above ground for water and brine systems due to its rigidity. Annealed
Type K copper tube used below ground or within concrete slabs because it requires
fewer joints than hard-drawn copper tube. Annealed Type ACR copper tube is gener-
ally used for refrigerant pipe sizes that are 1.5 in. and smaller; hard-drawn Type ACR
copper tube is used for pipe sizes from 2 to 4 in. Refrigerant pipe sizes larger than 4 in.
are rarely used for commercial HVAC applications.
Hard-drawn copper tube is usually sold in straight lengths, and annealed copper
tube is usually sold in coils.
Copper Fittings and Joints

Fittings for copper tube used in HVAC piping systems are normally constructed of
wrought copper, although cast copper and cast bronze fittings are also used for some
applications. Joints for copper tube used in HVAC piping systems are normally soldered
or brazed; however, threaded joints are also used for some applications such as equip-
ment connections. Fittings for soldered or brazed joints are constructed with sockets
that are sized to fit over the corresponding size of copper tube (Fig. 3-4). Sockets for
soldered joints are deeper than the sockets for brazed joints.
Soldered joints use filler metals that have a melting point below 800°F. The filler
metal used for soldered joints in copper tube for HVAC piping systems is an alloy of
95% tin and 5% antimony. Copper tube with soldered joints are acceptable for water or
brine HVAC piping systems that have a maximum working pressure of 250 psig and
are 2 in. and smaller because the joints are rated for a minimum of 250 psig at a service
temperature of 200°F. Therefore, it is acceptable to use Type K or Type L copper tube
(2 in. and smaller) with soldered joints in the same water or brine HVAC piping system
that utilizes steel pipe (2½ through 12 in.) having Class 125, Class 150, or Class 250 fit-
tings, valves, and specialties, provided the maximum temperature for the water or
brine is 200°F.
Brazed joints, which use filler metals having a melting point above 800°F, are
stronger than soldered joints. The filler metal used for brazed joints in copper tube
that is used for water or brine HVAC piping systems is an alloy of copper and phos-
phorus (Type BCuP). The filler metal used for brazed joints in copper tube that will
be used for refrigerant piping systems is a silver alloy (Type BAg1). Brazed joints are
recommended for underground water or brine piping and refrigerant piping of all
Figure 3-4 Photograph of a wrought copper elbow with socket ends for soldering. (Photo courtesy
of NIBCO INC.)
42 Chapter Three P
sizes because the rated pressure of the joints is equal to the working pressure of the
copper tube for temperatures up to 200°F. Therefore, it is acceptable to use Type K or
Type L copper tube of any size up through 12 in. with brazed joints in the same water
or brine HVAC piping system that utilizes steel pipe having up to Class 300 fittings,
valves, and specialties, provided the maximum temperature for the water or brine is
200°F.
Wrought copper unions with soldered, brazed, or threaded ends are commonly
used at connections of copper tube to HVAC equipment where ease of disassembly is
required.
Specification for Copper Tube, Fittings, and Joints

The following are typical specifications for copper tube, fittings, and joints for water or
brine HVAC piping systems:
1. Piping 2 in. and smaller, above ground12

a. ASTM B88, Type L, hard-drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings
and 95-5 tin/antimony soldered joints.
2. Piping 12 in. and smaller, below ground13
a. ASTM B88, Type K, annealed copper tube with wrought copper fittings
and BCuP brazed joints
The following are typical specifications for copper tube, fittings, and joints for
refrigerant piping systems:
1. Piping 1.5 in. and smaller, above ground

a. ASTM B280, Type ACR, annealed copper tube with wrought copper fittings
and BAg1 brazed joints.
2. Piping 2 in. through 4 in., above ground
a. ASTM B280, Type ACR, hard-drawn copper tube with wrought copper
fittings and BAg1 brazed joints
Valves
Valves are required to perform various functions in HVAC piping systems, including
shutoff, throttling (or balancing) of flow, prevention of flow reversal, pressure
regulation, and pressure relief. Different types of valves are available to perform
these functions, each with its own advantages and disadvantages depending upon
the requirements for the valve and the operating conditions in which it will be
installed. Furthermore, valves are constructed of various materials and are available
with different ends for connection to the piping system. Once again, the proper
selection of the construction material and end connections for the valve will depend
upon the operating conditions and the type of pipe to which it will be connected. For
example, the resilient seating material used to improve the shutoff capabilities of a
valve also imposes temperature and fluid limitations on the valve’s use. Valves
are constructed in accordance with specifications defined by the Manufacturer’s
Standardization Society (MSS).
Functions
Shutoff
As the name implies, shutoff valves perform the duty of shutting off the flow in a piping
system at the point where the valve is installed. Their position will be either fully
opened or fully closed. Shutoff valves are commonly installed at HVAC equipment
connections and are used to isolate the equipment for maintenance and replacement.
Shutoff valves are also installed at major branches in HVAC piping systems, such as a
branch serving the floor of a building. They are also installed in the service entrance
piping where a building is connected to a district heating and cooling system.
Throttling
HVAC piping systems that circulate water or brine normally consist of main supply
and return pipes that serve various branches in the piping system. The branches of the
piping system are connected in a parallel arrangement, similar to the connection of
components in a parallel electrical circuit. Pipe branches can serve a single piece of
equipment, multiple pieces of equipment, or an entire floor of a building.
Each branch in the piping system is designed to receive a certain portion of the over-
all system flow. Therefore, it is necessary to throttle (or balance) the fluid flow in each
pipe branch to the design flow for that branch. Valves that are suitable for balancing the
flow of the working fluid are installed in the pipe branches for this purpose. Balancing
valves are also installed in the discharge piping of pumps for the purpose of balancing
the pumps to their design flow. The flow through a balancing valve is usually measured
at a flow meter installed near the balancing valve. Refer to the Specialties section later in
this chapter for a description of flow meters. Calibrated balancing valves can also be
used to balance the flow through minor branches in the piping system (pipe sizes 2 in.
and smaller). Refer to the Calibrated Balancing Valves section later.
Prevention of Flow Reversal

Valves used to prevent the reversal of flow in a piping system include check valves,
double check assemblies, and reduced pressure zone backflow preventers (listed in the
order of increasing level of reverse flow protection). Check valves are most commonly
used in water, brine, and steam condensate systems because their purpose is solely to
prevent reverse flow in the HVAC piping system itself—they are not required to prevent
contamination of a potable water system by nonpotable water systems. Double check
valve assemblies (two check valves connected in series) and reduced pressure zone
backflow preventers have a higher level of protection against reverse flow and are typi-
cally used to protect potable water systems from contamination by nonpotable water
systems, such as in the makeup water connections to hydronic and steam systems. Dou-
ble check assemblies and reduced pressure zone backflow preventers are not used within
steam piping systems; however, check valves are used in steam condensate piping
systems and may also be used in the steam supply connections of multiple boilers to a
common header.
Pressure Regulation
Pressure regulating valves perform the duty of maintaining a constant pressure
of the working fluid at a location upstream or downstream of the valve or of main-
taining a constant differential pressure between the inlet and outlet of the valve.
44 Chapter Three P
They accomplish this by controlling the position of the valve, thereby throttling the
fluid flow to maintain the desired pressure.
Pressure Relief
Pressure relief valves are used as safety devices to prevent overpressurization of the
components within HVAC piping systems.
Types
The following sections list some of the more common types of valves used in HVAC
piping systems. For each valve type, a general description is provided along with a
recommended application. The list is not exhaustive of all types of valves that are
available, and the applications for the valves may be expanded based on the judgment
of the design professional and the standard practices of a particular design firm.
Multi-turn Valves
Multi-turn valves require multiple rotations of the valve stem to change the position the
valve from fully opened to fully closed and vice versa. Two types of multi-turn valves
commonly used in HVAC piping systems are gate valves and globe valves.
Gate Valve
Description Gate valves consist of a solid wedge mounted within the valve body,
which is connected to the internal end of the valve stem. A handwheel actuator is con-
nected to the external end of the valve stem for manual operation. When the valve stem
is turned completely in the counterclockwise direction, the wedge is raised to the open
position. When the valve stem is turned completely in the clockwise direction, the
wedge is lowered to the closed position. Gate valves have a straight-through body con-
figuration; that is, the flow exits the valve in the same direction that it enters the valve.
Gate valves are intended to be fully opened or fully closed; they are not suitable for
throttling (i.e., functioning in a partially open position). When in the closed position,
the metal-to-metal contact of the wedge within the seat does not provide absolute
(bubble-tight) shutoff. Bubble-tight shutoff can be achieved by adding a resilient coating
to the wedge. However, resilient wedge gate valves are normally rated for a maximum
of 160°F, so their applications for HVAC piping systems are limited.
Gate valves are available in both rising-stem and nonrising-stem configurations.
The rising-stem configuration (Figs. 3-5 and 3-6) is preferred because the stem threads
are protected from the fluid flow. However, clearance must be provided external to
the valve in order to allow for the raised stem when the valve is in the open position.
Rising-stem gate valves provide an indication of the valve’s position. If the stem is in
the raised position, the valve is open; if the stem is in the lowered position, the valve
is closed.
Nonrising-stem gate valves (Figs. 3-7 and 3-8) are used when clearance for the raised
stem is not available. However, the threads of the valve stem on which the wedge travels
are always exposed to the fluid flow. As a result, these threads can become eroded14 or
corroded15 over time, which can prevent the valve from functioning properly.
Application Gate valves are recommended for use as shutoff valves for piping up to
12 in. in steam or steam condensate systems.
Figure 3-5 Drawing of a rising-stem gate valve with flanged ends. (Reprinted with permission
from Crane Co. All Rights Reserved.)
Figure 3-6 Photograph of a rising-stem gate valve with flanged ends.
46 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-7 Drawing of a nonrising-stem gate valve with threaded ends. (Reprinted with
permission from Crane Co. All Rights Reserved.)
Figure 3-8 Photograph of a nonrising-stem gate valve with threaded ends. (Photo courtesy of
NIBCO INC.)
Globe Valve
Description Globe valves consist of a solid disc mounted within the valve body,
which is connected to the internal end of the valve stem. A handwheel actuator is con-
is turned completely in the counterclockwise direction, the disc is raised to the open
position. When the valve stem is turned completely in clockwise direction, the disc is
lowered to the closed position. Globe valves, which are intended to be used for throt-
tling, can also provide bubble-tight shutoff when equipped with resilient seating. Globe
valves are normally installed with the flow and higher pressure under the disc. There-
fore, care must be taken during installation to ensure they are installed with the flow in
the proper direction.
Globe valves are available in either a straight-through (Figs. 3-9 through 3-11) or
angled body configuration (Fig. 3-12). In the angled configuration, the flow exits the
valve perpendicular to the direction that it enters the valve.
Globe valves have a higher fluid pressure drop than gate valves because the disc is
always in the fluid stream.
Application Globe valves are recommended for use as throttling valves for piping
up to 12 in. in water, brine, or steam systems. Globe valves with resilient seating can
also be used as shutoff valves in water or brine systems. However, less expensive valves
are more suitable for this purpose.
Quarter-Turn Valves
Quarter-turn valves require only a quarter rotation of the valve stem to change the posi-
tion the valve from fully opened to fully closed and vice versa. Two types of quarter-
turn valves commonly used in HVAC piping systems are butterfly valves and ball
valves.
Figure 3-9 Drawing of a straight-through globe valve with threaded ends. (Reprinted with
48 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-10 Photograph of a straight-through globe valve with soldered ends. (Photo courtesy of
NIBCO INC.)
Figure 3-11 Drawing of a straight-through globe valve with flanged ends. (Reprinted with
Figure 3-12 Photograph of an angle globe valve with threaded ends. (Photo courtesy of NIBCO
INC.)
Butterfly Valve
Description Butterfly valves consist of a solid disc mounted within the valve body,
which is connected to the internal end of the valve stem. A hand-lever actuator is con-
is turned such that the disc is parallel to the fluid flow, the valve is in the open position.
When the valve stem is turned such that the disc is perpendicular to the fluid flow, the
valve is in the closed position. The disc closes against a resilient seat mounted within
the valve body, providing bubble-tight shutoff. Because the hand-lever actuator is
installed on the valve stem parallel to the disc, the actuator provides an indication of the
valve’s position. Butterfly valves have a straight-through body configuration and are
suitable for throttling and bubble-tight shutoff.
Butterfly valves are available in lug-style (or single-flange) (Figs. 3-13 and 3-14)
and wafer-style bodies. Lug-style bodies have tapped lugs that align with the bolt
holes in ASTM pipe flanges, allowing them to be bolted to a single flange on one side
of the valve. This capability makes lug-style butterfly valves suitable for dead-end
service; that is, they can be mounted on a flange at the open end of a pipe and provide
bubble-tight shutoff. For this reason, lug-style butterfly valves can be used as shutoff
valves for HVAC equipment, enabling the removal of the equipment and piping up to
the valve.
Wafer-style butterfly valves (Fig. 3-15) are designed to be installed between two pipe
flanges. They do not have tapped lugs that align with the bolt holes in the pipe flanges.
Rather, they are held in place by means of compression; that is, the bolts join the two
50 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-13 Photograph of a lug-style butterfly valve. (Photo courtesy of NIBCO INC.)
Figure 3-14 Photograph of a lug-style butterfly valve—installed.
Figure 3-15 Photograph of a wafer-style butterfly valve. (Photo courtesy of NIBCO INC.)
flanges on both sides of the valve. Wafer-style butterfly valves are not suitable for dead-
end service and should not be used as shutoff valves for HVAC equipment because the
flange on the equipment side of the valve cannot be removed independent of the valve.
Butterfly valves have a slightly higher fluid pressure drop than gate valves but a
lower pressure drop than globe valves.
Application Lug-style butterfly valves are recommended for use as shutoff valves for
2½- through 12-in. piping in water or brine systems.16 When the hand-levers are equipped
with memory stops, butterfly valves can be used as balancing valves for 2½- through
12-in. pipe branches in water or brine systems. Wafer-style butterfly valves are a less
expensive option to lug-style butterfly valves, having the same throttling and shutoff
characteristics. However, they should not be used where dead-end service is required.
Ball Valve
Description Ball valves consist of a solid ball held in place within the valve body
between two circular resilient seats. The ball is connected to the internal end of the
valve stem, and a hand-lever actuator is connected to the external end of the valve stem
for manual operation. The ball has a hole (port) in the middle of it. When the valve stem
is turned such that the port is parallel to the fluid flow, the valve is in the open position.
When the valve stem is turned such that the port is perpendicular to the fluid flow, the
valve is in the closed position. Because the hand-lever actuator is installed on the valve
stem parallel to the port, the actuator provides an indication of the valve’s position. Ball
valves have a straight-through body configuration and are suitable for bubble-tight
shutoff. Ball valves should not be used for throttling duty.
52 Chapter Three P
Ball valves are available in one-piece, two-piece (Figs. 3-16 and 3-17), and three-
piece body designs (Fig. 3-18) (listed in the order of increasing cost). One-piece valves
cannot be repaired and must be replaced when they fail to function properly. Also,
one-piece valves are only available with a reduced-port ball; that is, the port is more
than one pipe size smaller than the nominal pipe size. Due to the higher fluid pressure
drop associated with the reduced-port, one-piece ball valves are not recommended for
use in HVAC piping systems. Repair of two-piece valves is not recommended. How-
ever, this type of valve is available with a full- or standard-port ball.17 Three-piece valves
offer in-line reparability and are available with a full- or standard-port ball; however,
they are also the most expensive option for ball valves.
Figure 3-16 Photograph of a two-piece ball valve with solder ends. (Photo courtesy of NIBCO INC.)
Figure 3-17 Photograph of a two-piece ball valve with solder ends—installed.
Figure 3-18 Photograph of a three-piece ball valve with threaded ends. (Photo courtesy of
NIBCO INC.)
Application Two-piece or three-piece, full-port ball valves are recommended for use
as shutoff valves for piping up to 2 in. in water or brine systems. Extended valve stems
are required for installation in insulated piping systems.
Calibrated Balancing Valves

Description Calibrated balancing valves (Fig. 3-19), also referred to as circuit balancing
valves, are available in different configurations. A common configuration consists of a
globe valve with pressure taps on the upstream and downstream sides of the valve. During
Figure 3-19 Photograph of a calibrated balancing valve with solder ends. (Photo courtesy of
NIBCO INC.)
54 Chapter Three P
the balancing operation, a pressure gauge is connected to the pressure taps to measure the
differential pressure across the valve. Flow is balanced through the valve by adjusting the
position of the valve until the differential pressure corresponds to the desired flow, as
given in the pressure drop/flow data furnished by the valve manufacturer.
Application Calibrated balancing valves are recommended for balancing the flow
through minor branches in the piping system (pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller) and through
individual pieces of equipment. A flow meter and associated balancing valve will nor-
mally be used for pipe sizes 2½ and larger (refer to the Flow Meters section later).
Check Valves
Check valves are available in various types. The most common types are swing check,
lift check, and center-guided check.
Swing Check Valves
Description Swing check valves (Figs. 3-20 and 3-21) are constructed with a disc that
swings by a hinge mounted at the top of the disc. The disc swings open when the fluid
flows in the intended direction and swings closed when the fluid flow reverses. Swing
check valves have the lowest fluid pressure drop of all check valves. The seating surface
of the disc can be equipped with a resilient disc ring to improve the seal against reverse
flow. Swing check valves must be mounted horizontally with the hinge pin level to
allow gravity to assist in the closing of the disc.
Application Swing check valves are recommended for use in water, brine, or steam
systems where the valve can be mounted horizontally and where silent operation is not
required (refer to the description of center-guided check valves later).
Lift Check Valves
Description Lift check valves (Fig. 3-22) utilize a straight-through globe-style body
pattern and consist of a disc that lifts vertically off of a seat when the fluid flows in the
intended direction and closes when the fluid flow reverses. Lift check valves have a
higher fluid pressure drop than swing check valves because the disc is always in the
Figure 3-20 Drawing of a swing check valve with flanged ends. (Reprinted with permission from
Crane Co. All Rights Reserved.)
Figure 3-21 Photograph of a swing check valve with flanged ends.
Figure 3-22 Photograph of a lift check valve with threaded ends. (Photo courtesy of NIBCO INC.)
56 Chapter Three P
fluid stream. Lift check valves can also be equipped with resilient seating materials to
improve their seal against reverse flow. Lift check valves must be mounted horizontally
with the disc stem in the upright position.
Stop check valves, a type of lift check valve, have the added capability of providing
positive shutoff. These valves are available in straight-through, Y-pattern, and angled
body styles. Stop check valves with a straight-through body style must be mounted
horizontally with the disc stem in the upright position. Those with a Y-pattern body
style can be mounted horizontally or vertically. Stop check valves with an angled body
style are installed in place of a 90° pipe elbow.
Application Lift check valves have the same applications as swing check valves,
although they have no real advantages over swing check valves.
Stop check valves can be used in the discharge piping of pumps or in the piping
connections of multiple pieces of equipment to a common header. Stop check valves are
commonly used in the steam supply connections of multiple boilers to a common
header.
Center-Guided Check Valves
Description Center-guided check valves (Fig. 3-23) utilize an in-line body style and
consist of a center-guided disc that lifts off of a seat when the fluid flows in the intended
direction and closes when the fluid flow reverses. Center-guided check valves can be
equipped with a spring that actuates the closure of the disc before gravity and fluid
reversal slam the valve closed. Spring-actuated, center-guided check valves are referred
to as nonslam or silent check valves for this reason. Center-guided check valves have a
higher fluid pressure drop than swing check valves because the disc is always in the
fluid stream. Spring-actuated, center-guided check valves have an additional fluid
Figure 3-23 Photograph of a center-guided check valve with flanged ends.
pressure drop associated with the closing spring. Center-guided check valves can also
be equipped with resilient seating materials to improve their seal against reverse flow.
Center-guided check valves can be mounted either horizontally or vertically.
Center-guided check valves are generally used for larger pipe sizes (2½ through
12 in.) and are available with flanged ends or in a wafer-style (similar to wafer-style
butterfly valves) for connection between two pipe flanges.
Application Spring-actuated, center-guided check valves are recommended for use

in pump discharge piping (for pipe sizes 2½ through 12 in.) because of their silent
operation and also because they can be mounted in either a horizontal or vertical
arrangement.
Multi-purpose Valves
Description Multi-purpose valves (Fig. 3-24), sometimes referred to as triple-duty
valves, combine shutoff, check, and balancing duty into a single valve. They consist of
a spring-actuated, lift check valve mounted within a straight-through or angled body
configuration. The disc stem is equipped with screw threads, which enable adjustment
of the spring force on the disc. A calibrated nameplate and stem-position indicator
provide a direct reading of the flow through the valve based on the stem position.
Pressure taps are provided upstream and downstream of the disc so that the differen-
tial pressure across the disc can be measured to verify the stem-position flow mea-
surement against the pressure drop/flow data furnished by the valve manufacturer.
Figure 3-24 Photograph of a multi-purpose valve with flanged ends.
58 Chapter Three P
Application Multi-purpose valves are recommended for use in pump discharge piping,
particularly where space for the piping connections to the pump is limited or the length
of straight pipe required for proper installation of a flow meter is not available.
Pressure Regulating Valves

Description Pressure regulating valves are grouped into three categories: direct-acting,
pilot-operated, and automatic control valves.
For a direct-acting valve, the desired pressure is set by adjusting a spring that con-
trols the pressure exerted on one side of a main diaphragm located within the valve
body. The working fluid exerts a pressure on the other side of the main diaphragm, and
the valve is opened to a point where these two pressures equalize. However, direct-
acting valves do not have the capability to sense the actual pressure they are controlling
and cannot maintain precise pressure control of the working fluid.
Pilot-operated valves also use a spring and main diaphragm to maintain the desired
pressure. However, they have an additional pilot diaphragm and pressure control pipes
that utilize the actual fluid pressure to maintain more precise pressure control of the
working fluid. They are also capable of operating at higher flow rates than direct-acting
valves.
Automatic control valves must be controlled by an automatic temperature control
(ATC) system and can be either electrically or pneumatically actuated. The ATC system
modulates the position of the valve through the valve actuator to maintain the setting
of a pressure sensor. The sensor is mounted either upstream or downstream of the valve
or is piped to sense the differential pressure between the inlet and outlet of the valve.
The two most common types of pressure regulating valves used in HVAC systems
are the pressure reducing valve, which maintains a constant downstream pressure, and
the differential pressure valve, which maintains a constant differential pressure between
the inlet and outlet of the valve.
Pressure Reducing Valves
Application For water and brine systems, pressure reducing valves are most com-
monly used as part of the domestic water make-up assembly. The purpose of the pres-
sure reducing valve is to maintain a constant (downstream) fill pressure for the HVAC
piping system regardless of the fluctuating (upstream) pressure in the domestic water
system. Figure 3-25 is a photograph of a direct-acting water pressure reducing valve
that is used as part of a domestic water make-up assembly.
For steam systems, pressure reducing valves are used to reduce the steam pressure
from the (higher) distribution pressure to the (lower) utilization pressure.
Differential Pressure Valves
Application Differential pressure valves are used in water and brine HVAC piping
systems to ensure that the pressure in the system does not exceed a maximum value.
For example, an HVAC piping system that consists of a constant speed pump and 2-way
automatic control valves,18 which modulate the fluid flow through the branch piping
components of the system, will require a differential pressure valve to be installed in the
system to protect the pump from a dead-head (or zero-flow) condition. A dead-head
condition could occur if all of the automatic control valves in the system were closed.
Figure 3-25 Photograph of a direct-acting water pressure reducing valve with threaded ends.
Although some types of pumps are able to operate in this condition, the pumps com-
monly used in HVAC piping systems are not. It is necessary for these pumps to circu-
late a minimum flow, which is why a bypass pipe with a differential pressure valve
would be required.
In this case, a differential pressure valve would be installed in a bypass pipe con-
necting the main supply and return pipes. The differential pressure valve would have
to be selected such that the pressure through the bypass piping and the valve was equal
to the maximum head of the pump corresponding to its minimum flow.19 The differen-
tial pressure valve can be installed between the discharge and suction piping at the
connection of the system pump or between the main supply and return pipes at the end
of the piping system to bypass the minimum pump flow.
Pressure Relief Valves

Description Pressure relief valves are available in different configurations, the selection
of which depends upon the working fluid and the operating conditions (Fig. 3-26).
Application Generally, pressure relief valves are used to protect pressure vessels
(such as boilers and heat exchangers) and steam systems from overpressurization.
Under normal operating conditions, pressure relief valves are closed. However, in the
case where the pressure at the point of connection to the system exceeds the rating of
the valve, the relief valve opens and discharges the working fluid through the dis-
charge pipe to a safe location, thereby relieving the excess pressure in the system. For
example, if a burner for a boiler fails to shut off or a steam pressure reducing valve
hangs open, the pressure relief valve would open to protect the HVAC piping system
components from exposure to pressures exceeding their rated values.
60 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-26 Photograph of a hot water pressure relief valve.
Operating Conditions
Operating conditions that affect the selection and installation of valves include the
working fluid, fluid pressure, fluid temperature, requirement for bubble-tight shutoff,
space available for installation, frequency of operation, and whether the valve will be
manually or automatically controlled.
Working Fluid
Proper valve selection depends upon the working fluid in the piping system. The
valves used in HVAC piping systems need to be capable of handling fluids in the liq-
uid state for water and brine systems, the gaseous state for steam systems, and both
the liquid and gaseous states for steam condensate return systems. The characteristics
inherent to the design of some valve types make them more suited to handling liquids
than gases, although the inverse is not always true. Valves that are suitable for han-
dling gases are normally suitable for handling liquids as well. Manufacturers’ product
data should be consulted to determine the suitability of a particular valve for the work-
ing fluid.
Fluid Pressure
Valves are constructed to different specifications that determine their pressure rating at
a certain temperature. Valves that are suitable for steam service will be rated by satu-
rated steam working pressure (SWP) or pressure class (the two terms are synonymous).
Pressure classes such as Class 125, Class 150, Class 250, or Class 300 (which are the same
ratings that apply to steel pipe fittings) are common for valves used in HVAC piping
systems. For example, a Class 125 valve would be rated for 125 psig steam at the satu-
rated steam temperature of 352°F.
Valves may also have a rating for cold-working pressure (CWP). The CWP rating is
the maximum water working pressure of the valve for fluid temperatures up to 150°F
for bronze and cast iron body valves and up to 100°F for steel body valves. The CWP
rating of a valve can be used for cold water HVAC systems, such as chilled water and
condenser water systems. Valves that have only a CWP rating are not suitable for steam
service or for HVAC piping systems operating at water (or brine) temperatures in excess
of the rated temperature for the CWP.
However, valves that are suitable for steam service will also be suitable for water or
brine service. The SWP or pressure class of a valve is used to determine its applicability
for use in a water or brine system. For example, a heating water system that has a
maximum working pressure of 250 psig would require valves with a minimum rating
of Class 250 (or an SWP of 250 psig).
Fluid Temperature
Fluid temperature is also a determining factor in the proper selection of valves because
the seating materials used in the valves have both high and low temperature limitations
and also have optimum temperature ranges for operation. For example, globe valves
with polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)20 seats provide bubble-tight shutoff for heating
water systems operating at temperatures between 100 and 200°F. However, softer
nitrile-butadiene rubber (NBR) seats are more suitable for chilled water systems operat-
ing at temperatures between 35 and 65°F.
Requirement for Bubble-Tight Shutoff

Bubble-tight shutoff is a requirement for shutoff valves but is not a requirement for
balancing valves, unless the balancing valves will also be used for shutoff duty.
Space Available for Installation

All valves need to be installed in accessible locations; however, the available space
required for proper installation depends upon field conditions. Some valves, such as
butterfly valves, require very little pipe length for installation, although they do require
space for the lever handle to rotate in a direction that is perpendicular to the pipe. Other
valves, such as nonrising-stem gate valves, do not require space above the valve hand-
wheel actuator, which makes them a good choice where space is limited in this area.
Pressure regulating valves and calibrated balancing valves will often have requirements
for straight piping lengths both upstream and downstream of the valves to ensure
proper operation. Also, space must be provided for the discharge piping of pressure
relief valves. This piping must be routed to a point, sometimes exterior to the building,
where the valves can safely discharge the working fluid when necessary to relieve
excess pressure.
Frequency of Operation
Normally, shutoff valves and balancing valves remain in the same position for extended
periods of time. For this reason, care should be taken to select valves that do not have
moving parts located within the fluid stream because these parts will be subject to ero-
sion and corrosion from the working fluid. On the other hand, automatic control valves
may have to change their position multiple times every hour. Therefore, automatic con-
trol valves, and other valves that require a high number of opened/closed cycles, should
be rated for high-cycle operation.
62 Chapter Three P
Manual or Automated Control

Valves used in HVAC piping systems will be either manually or automatically oper-
ated. Multi-turn valves requiring manual operation will normally be equipped with
handwheel actuators. Chain-wheel actuators are often used in mechanical equipment
rooms for valves that are 4 in. and larger and are installed higher than 8 ft above the
floor.
Multi-turn valves are typically not used for automatic operation. However, globe
valves that have a nonthreaded stem are frequently used for automatic control valves
that are 2 in. and smaller. In this case, the automatic actuator opens or closes the valve
by stroking the valve stem in and out. Globe valves in both 2-way and 3-way body
patterns are used for both two-position and modulating automatic control valves
(Figs. 3-27 through 3-29).
Figure 3-27 Drawing of a globe valve with a 2-way body pattern.
Figure 3-28 Drawing of a globe valve with a 3-way body pattern (mixing valve).
Figure 3-29 Drawing of a globe valve with a 3-way body pattern (diverting valve).
Figure 3-30 Photograph of linked butterfly valves used as a 3-way valve.
Quarter-turn valves that require manual operation will normally be equipped with
hand-lever actuators for valves that are 6 in. and smaller. Gear actuators are recom-
mended for valves that are 8 in. and larger. Chain-wheel actuators are often used in
mechanical equipment rooms for valves that are 4 in. and larger and are installed higher
than 8 ft above the floor. Quarter-turn valves are well suited for automatic operation
and provide bubble-tight shutoff. Butterfly valves are commonly used for automatic
control valves that are 2½ in. and larger. Where 3-way automatic control is required,
two butterfly valves will be interconnected by a linkage that synchronizes the operation
of the two valves (Fig. 3-30); when one valve opens, the other valve closes and vice
versa.
Materials
Valves used in HVAC piping systems generally fall into two categories: bronze body
and iron body. Bronze body valves are used for connection to copper tube, and iron
body valves, constructed of either cast iron or ductile iron,21 are used for connection to
steel pipe. Valve bodies are made of different materials in order to ensure that the valves
are compatible with the piping materials to which they are connected.
The internal metal components of valves, including the wedges for gate valves;
discs for globe valves, butterfly valves, and check valves; and valve stems are com-
monly constructed of bronze. The ball for ball valves can be constructed of chrome-
plated bronze or solid stainless steel. For higher quality, stainless steel can be used for
the valve stems in globe, butterfly, and ball valves and can also be used for the discs in
globe and butterfly valves.
64 Chapter Three P
Valve seats can be constructed of metal, but resilient (nonmetallic) seats provide a
better seal. Resilient materials commonly used for valve seats include:
1. Ethylene-propylene-diene monomer (EPDM) rubber

a. EPDM seats are commonly used in butterfly valves. EPDM is known for its
use in weather seals, such as window and door seals for vehicles.
2. Tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) or polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
a. TFE and the higher-quality PTFE (or Teflon®) are used as seating materials
in globe valves, ball valves, and check valves. PTFE is a hard, slick, chemical-
resistant material that has many industrial and consumer applications.
Most people are familiar with PTFE’s use as a nonstick surface for cookware.
Higher-strength, glass-reinforced PTFE (or RPTFE) seats are used in high-
performance ball valves and butterfly valves.
3. Nitrile-butadiene rubber (NBR)
a. NBR, also known as nitrile rubber or Buna-N, is a common seating material
for valves used in water or brine HVAC piping systems having a fluid
temperature of 100°F or lower. Gate valves can be constructed with NBR-
coated wedges. NBR seats can be used in globe, butterfly, and check valves.
Nitrile rubber gloves, commonly blue or purple in color, are an application
of NBR that many people are familiar with.
4. Viton®
a. Viton is a high-quality, high-temperature seating material normally used in
high-performance valves.
Globe and check valves can be constructed with a metallic (normally bronze) disc
and a metallic or resilient seat. The disc itself can also be constructed of a resilient mate-
rial, such as PTFE, in which case the seat would be metallic.
Ends
Bronze body valves typically have threaded or soldered ends. Iron body valves typi-
cally have flanged ends.
Specialties
The term specialties, as used in this book, defines a broad category of piping compo-
nents, which includes anything that is not a pipe, fitting, valve, union, or flange. The
specialties we will discuss include meters, pressure gauges, test plugs, strainers,
suction diffusers, flexible pipe connectors, air vents, and drains. There are other com-
ponents that could be classified as specialties, but these are the ones most commonly
used.
Meters
The meters most commonly used in HVAC piping systems are thermometers and flow
meters.
Figure 3-31 Photograph of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
Thermometers
The thermometers used to measure the fluid temperature within pipes are installed
within fluid-filled thermometer wells. For pipes 4 in. and smaller, these wells extend to
the center of the pipe; for pipes larger than 4 in., the wells extend a minimum of 2 in.
into the fluid. The most commonly used types of thermometers are bimetallic-actuated
dial thermometers and liquid-in-glass thermometers (Fig. 3-31).
Flow Meters
Flow meters are used primarily in commercial HVAC water and brine systems in conjunc-
tion with throttling valves to enable balancing of the system, that is, to ensure that the
proper flow is being circulated by the system pump and that the proper flow is being
delivered to the major branches in the piping system. Calibrated balancing valves are nor-
mally used to balance the flow through minor branches in the piping system and through
individual pieces of equipment (refer to the Calibrated Balancing Valves section earlier).
Balancing of steam systems is not required as long as the steam distribution piping
is properly sized. Therefore, flow meters would not be required in steam systems unless
it was necessary to continuously measure the steam flow and assess a charge for it.
Although it is not common to continuously measure water or steam flow in commercial
HVAC systems, a brief discussion of flow measurement is given in Chap. 9.
The two most common types of flow meters used in HVAC water or brine systems are
orifice and venturi meters. Both types are differential pressure meters; this means that
the flow rate through the meter is determined by measuring the differential pressure
across the meter.
An orifice flow meter (Fig. 3-32) consists of a flat plate with a specific-sized hole
bored in it (usually about 50% of the cross-sectional area of the pipe). The orifice plate
66 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-32 Photograph of an orifice flow meter. (Photo courtesy of NIBCO INC.)
is installed between two pipe flanges. Pressure taps are either an integral part of the
meter or they are installed in the upstream and downstream pipe flanges. The pressure
taps are used to measure the differential pressure across the orifice plate. The orifice
meter is furnished with either a permanent indicator (mounted to the flow meter) or a
portable indicator and hoses for connection to the pressure taps. The indicators must be
calibrated for the particular orifice meter. Because orifice meters have a high pressure
drop (in the range of 5 psi), they are normally used to balance the flow in the major
branches of the piping system, not the system pump.
A venturi flow meter consists of a steep converging cone on the inlet side of a short
reduced-diameter throat section and a shallow diverging cone on the outlet side of the
throat section. This configuration allows most of the kinetic (velocity) energy that is
developed in the throat section to be converted back to potential (pressure) energy,
resulting in a low pressure drop for the meter. The differential pressure is measured
between the inlet flange and the throat. The venturi meter is also furnished with either
a permanent or portable indicator calibrated for the particular venturi meter. Venturi
meters are capable of handling high flow rates with a low pressure drop (in the range
of 2 to 3 psi). Thus, they are normally used in the main system piping to balance the
flow of the system pump, but can also be used in the major branches of the piping sys-
tem as well.
The accuracy of both orifice and venturi flow meters is affected by the presence of
elbows and/or throttled valves both upstream and downstream of the flow meters.
Although the actual requirements vary depending upon the piping configuration,
approximately five pipe diameters of straight pipe are required upstream and two pipe
diameters of straight pipe are required downstream of orifice and venturi flow meters
for accurate measurement of fluid flow. The manufacturer’s product data should be
consulted for the installation requirements for each flow meter and for the actual pres-
sure drop through the flow meters in the system at the design flow rates.
Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges measure the difference in pressure between two points. It is common
for one of these two points to be the atmosphere,22 in which case the measured pressure
is based on the reference of atmospheric pressure. This is called gauge pressure. Pres-
sure gauges in commercial HVAC systems are most commonly used to measure the
gauge pressure of fluids in pipes, such as chilled water, heating water, and steam. How-
ever, pressure gauges can also measure the difference in the pressure of the fluid at two
points in a piping system, such as the differential pressure between the inlet and outlet
of a strainer. In this case, the differential pressure would provide an indication of the
extent that the strainer is clogged with debris.
Pressure gauges are connected with ¼-in. brass tubing in threaded openings in large
pipes or in pipe tees for smaller pipes. A pressure snubber should be installed between
the pipe and the pressure gauge for pipes with liquid flow, and a pressure siphon should
be installed between the pipe and the pressure gauge for pipes with steam flow. Pres-
sure snubbers consist of a porous metal disc that dampens the fluctuations in the fluid
pressure and reduces wear on the gauge mechanism. Pressure siphons consist of a sin-
gle coil of brass tubing that is filled with water to prevent live steam from entering the
pressure gauge Bourdon tube. A gauge cock, which is typically a needle-type shutoff
valve, should also be installed between the pipe and the pressure gauge to enable the
pressure gauge to be isolated from the fluid in the pipe. Figure 3-33 shows a typical
pressure gauge installation.
Figure 3-33 Photograph of a pressure gauge mounted in pipe.
68 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-34 Photograph of a test plug (the plug is located just to the right of the pipe hanger).
Test Plugs
Test plugs (Fig. 3-34) are used where fluid temperature and/or pressure readings are
required and the cost of permanent thermometers and/or pressure gauges is not war-
ranted. Test plugs consist of a ¼-in. brass or stainless steel body with an EPDM insert.
The insert has a small, self-closing opening in the center, which allows for the tempo-
rary insertion of a test thermometer or pressure gauge with gauge adapter. The test
plug is mounted in a threaded opening in large pipes or in a pipe tee in smaller pipes.
A protective cap is placed over the test plug to prevent any leakage when the test plug
is not in use. Test plugs are commonly used in the piping connections for minor pieces
of HVAC equipment, such as the heating water coils in VAV terminal units and finned-
tube radiators.
Strainers
Strainers are used to remove any sediment that may be entrained in the fluid stream
of the water, brine, or steam system. Strainers are commonly installed at the main
system pumps in water or brine systems and also upstream of sensitive components,
such as control valves and pressure regulating valves. Strainers used in commercial
HVAC systems typically have a Y-pattern body23 and are constructed of bronze with
soldered or threaded ends for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. For pipe sizes 2½ in. and
larger, strainers are constructed of cast iron with flanged ends. Sediment is trapped
within the strainer by a 20-mesh stainless steel screen.24 The water pressure drop
through a clean strainer depends upon the pipe size and the fluid flow rate and is
generally in the range of 1 psi. A water pressure drop of about 2 to 4 psi should be
included in the pump head calculation for the main system strainer to account for
some loading of the strainer.
Figure 3-35 Photograph of a strainer with a Y-pattern body, flanged ends, and a blow-down
valve.
Strainers must be flushed periodically to blow-down the trapped sediment. Small

strainers (1 in. and smaller) are typically furnished with a plugged blow-down outlet.
The blow-down outlet of larger strainers (1¼ in. and larger) is commonly specified with
a ½- or ¾-in. blow-down pipe that is equipped with hose-end drain valve.25 Thus, for
small strainers, it is necessary to close a shutoff valve upstream of the strainer before
removing the blow-down plug. Then, the shutoff valve can be slowly throttled open to
flush the sediment from the strainer. For larger strainers, the blow-down valve enables
the strainer to be flushed without shutting off the equipment. Figure 3-35 shows a
strainer with flanged ends and a blow-down valve.
Suction Diffusers
Suction diffusers (also called inlet guide fittings) are used to connect the suction piping
to end-suction pumps where there is insufficient space for the recommended five pipe
diameters of straight pipe upstream of the pump suction connection. A suction diffuser
(Fig. 3-36) contains an orifice cylinder and straightening vanes that allow the pipe con-
nection to the pump suction to be made approximately within the distance of a long
radius 90° elbow. A pressure drop of about 0.5 psi should be allowed for the suction
diffuser in the pump head calculation. The manufacturer’s product data should be con-
sulted for the actual pressure drop through the suction diffuser; this value varies
depending upon the pipe size and the water flow rate.
70 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-36 Photograph of a suction diffuser.
Flexible Pipe Connectors

Flexible pipe connectors, which are used to attenuate the noise and vibration generated
by motor-driven equipment such as pumps, chillers, and cooling towers, are con-
structed of a flexible piping material [either Kevlar®-reinforced EPDM (rubber) or stain-
less steel hose and braid] that is equal to the pipe size. Flexible pipe connectors are
approximately 14 to 28 in. long (depending upon the pipe size) and are available with
threaded or flanged ends. They are connected between the shutoff valves and the equip-
ment they serve and are able to compensate for some misalignment between the equip-
ment and piping connections.
Rubber is the preferred material for flexible pipe connectors (Fig. 3-37) because it
provides better noise and vibration attenuation than stainless steel hose and braid.
However, rubber flexible pipe connectors are limited by their pressure and temperature
rating (typically 215 psig at 250°F). As a result, they are acceptable for use in Class 125
and Class 150 water or brine systems for temperatures up to 250°F. For systems with
temperatures exceeding 250°F, such as steam systems in excess of 15 psig, stainless steel
hose and braid flexible pipe connectors should be used (Fig. 3-38). The manufacturer’s
product data should be consulted for the actual pressure and temperature ratings of
flexible pipe connectors.
Air Vents and Drains

Air vents are required at all high points in water and brine HVAC systems to enable air
to be purged from the systems during the initial start-up and subsequent operation and
maintenance of the systems. Drains are required at all low points in water, brine, and
Figure 3-37 Photograph of a rubber flexible pipe connector.
Figure 3-38 Photograph of a stainless steel hose and braid flexible pipe connector.
72 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-39 Photograph of a manual air vent.
steam systems to enable the systems to be drained for repair or replacement of system
components.
Manual Air Vents

Manual air vents are used to purge large quantities of air from water and brine sys-
tems (Fig. 3-39). This is normally required during the initial start-up and after drain-
ing and refilling portions of the systems due to repair or replacement of system
components. Manual air vents consist of a needle valve that is manually operated
with a thumb screw or screwdriver. Manual air vents typically have a ½-in. inlet con-
nection and a 1/8-in. outlet connection. Manual air vents should be installed at all
high points in the distribution piping, as well as at the high points in the equipment
piping connections.
Automatic Air Vents

Automatic air vents are used to purge small quantities of air from water and brine sys-
tems required during normal operation of the system (Fig. 3-40). An automatic air vent
should be installed on the air separator in the system (refer to the Air Separator section
in Chap. 4) and anywhere else it is suspected that air may accumulate during normal
system operation. Automatic air vents consist of a float-actuated needle valve that
opens to discharge any air that enters the valve. Automatic air vents typically have a
½-in. inlet connection and a ½-in. outlet connection. A hose should be connected to the
outlet and routed to a point where small quantities of water can be safely discharged
during normal operation of the vent.
Figure 3-40 Photograph of an automatic air vent.
Drains
Drains in water, brine, and steam systems normally consist of a ½- or ¾-in. pipe con-
nected to a tee or threaded insert in the system piping at the low points in the system.
The drain pipe should be equipped with a hose-end drain valve (Figs. 3-41 and 3-42).
This valve allows for connection of a hose for discharging the system fluid to a nearby
floor drain or other receptacle connected to the building sanitary drainage system.
Figure 3-41 Photograph of a hose-end drain valve. (Photo courtesy of NIBCO INC.)
74 Chapter Three P
Figure 3-42 Photograph of a hose-end drain valve—installed.
Endnotes
1. The term brine is used to describe a mixture of water and a salt or glycol. Brines, which
have a lower freezing point than water, are used in HVAC piping systems to prevent
freezing of the solution in outdoor piping and equipment. Solutions of propylene
and ethylene glycol are the most common types of brine used in HVAC systems.
2. Gauge pressure is the pressure of a fluid with respect to atmospheric pressure. Thus,
atmospheric pressure, which is 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (psia), is equal
to 0 psig.
3. The threaded ends of steel pipe, fittings, valves, unions, etc., are American
Standard Taper Pipe Thread [also referred to as National Pipe Thread (NPT)].
The tapered thread causes the threaded joint to tighten as the male threaded end
is screwed into the female threaded end. The male threaded end is referred to
as male pipe thread (MPT) and the female threaded end is referred to as female
pipe thread (FPT).
4. An electrochemical process called galvanic action occurs when two dissimilar
metals are coupled together and are immersed in an electrolyte. The more active
(less noble) metal will act as an anode and will corrode. The less active (more noble)
metal will act as a cathode and will remain unchanged. Such is the case when steel
pipe and copper tube are coupled together in a water or brine piping system. The
water or brine acts as the electrolyte; the copper tube becomes the cathode; and the
steel pipe becomes the anode that corrodes.
5. The cast iron used in the construction of pipe fittings, flanges, and valves is gray
cast iron, or “gray iron,” which derives its name from the gray color of its fracture.
Gray cast iron is a brittle material, which means, under stress, it yields very little
before fracturing.
6. Malleable iron is an alloy of white cast iron that, after casting, is heat treated to
increase its tensile strength and ductility (flexibility).
7. The gasket material must be compatible with the working fluid and have the same
pressure classification as the flanges.
8. Extruding of copper tube is a hot-working process. Hot-work is performed at tem-
peratures above the thermal critical range of the metal.
9. Drawing of copper tube is a cold-working process. Cold-work is performed at
temperatures below the thermal critical range of the metal (usually atmospheric
temperature).
10. Type L copper tube can be used for all pipe sizes up to 12 in. for aboveground
installations; however, steel pipe is usually more cost-effective for pipe sizes 2½ to
12 in.
11. Annealing is a form of heat treatment in which a cold-worked material is heated
to a temperature below the melting point and then slowly cooled. The effects of
annealing are the relief of stresses in the material that were imparted during the
cold-working process and an increase in the softness of the material.
12. Steel pipe is normally specified for piping 2½ in. and larger.
13. Ductile iron pipe is also suitable for below ground installations due to its corrosion
resistance; it is not recommended for below-slab installations because of the joints
that are required.
14. Erosion is the physical wearing away of the internal valve surfaces by the fluid
stream.
15. Corrosion is the result of the chemical reaction between the fluid and the valve
surfaces.
16. Butterfly valves of the high-performance design may be suitable for steam service.
17. A standard-port ball is one in which the port is up to one pipe size smaller than the
nominal pipe size.
18. Automatic control valves can be 2-way (having a single inlet and single outlet) or
3-way (having two inlets and one outlet, or one inlet and two outlets). Automatic
control valves are either two-position (opened/closed) or modulating (capable of
positioning to any point between opened and closed).
19. This information can be obtained from the pump curve for the selected pump.
20. PTFE is also known by the DuPont brand name Teflon.
21. Ductile (or nodular) iron is an iron alloy in which the carbon in the metal occurs in
spheroids (or nodules), as opposed to flakes, which is how the carbon occurs in cast
iron. The carbon spheroids in ductile iron make it more ductile (flexible) than cast iron
and also give it a higher tensile strength. Ductile iron is preferred over cast iron in
applications where severe physical impact or hydraulic or thermal shock may occur.
22. Atmospheric pressure is sensed by a port on the pressure gauge itself.
23. Basket strainers are available for increased holding capacity where large amounts
of sediment must be removed from the fluid stream.
24. A 20-mesh screen has 0.035-in. square openings with an overall 49% opening area.
Other screens having different sized openings are available for strainers, but a
20-mesh screen is the most common size for HVAC piping systems.
25. A hose-end drain valve has a male threaded connection on the outlet of the valve
to which a hose can be connected for safely draining the system fluid.
Chapter 4
Central Plant
T
he central plant is the part of the HVAC system that converts energy from fuel
sources, such as gas, fuel oil, or electricity, into heating and cooling energy. This
energy is transferred from the central plant through the heating and cooling pip-
ing systems to the air systems and terminal equipment where it is used to heat and cool
the building. In this chapter we will discuss centralized HVAC systems, that is, HVAC
systems in which the central plant is remote from the air systems. Decentralized HVAC
systems in which the central plant equipment is an integral part of each air system are
discussed in Chap. 5.
The main components of a central plant are the heat-generating (heating) equip-
ment and heat-rejecting (cooling) equipment. An example of a piece of central plant
heating equipment is a gas-fired or fuel-burning boiler, which produces either hot water
(referred to as heating water) or steam. This heating water or steam is distributed from
the central plant through the heating piping system to the air systems and terminal
equipment where it is used to heat the building. An example of a piece of cooling cen-
tral plant equipment is an electric water chiller, which produces chilled water. This
chilled water is distributed from the central plant through the cooling piping system to
the air systems and terminal equipment where it is used to cool the building.
Central plants also consist of equipment that is supplemental to the main heating
and cooling equipment, such as a cooling tower for a water-cooled chiller or a feedwater
pump for a steam boiler. Pumps and their auxiliary components, which are required for
heating and chilled water systems, are also part of central plants. A steam pressure-
reducing station and steam-to-hot water heat exchanger are examples of central plant
equipment that are commonly used when the building receives its heating energy from
a campus steam system or steam utility.
Heating Equipment
The two types of centralized heating equipment we will discuss in this chapter are
boilers and heat exchangers.
Boilers
Boilers are commonly used in centralized heating systems to transfer heat from a fuel
source to the working fluid of the building heating system. Gas-fired and fuel-burning
boilers are the most common types of boilers used in centralized heating systems. Boilers
which utilize electricity as the fuel source are rarely used in centralized heating systems
because it is usually more practical to utilize (decentralized) electric resistance heaters in
the air systems and terminal equipment if electricity is used to heat the building.
77
78 Chapter Four
Purpose
The purpose of a boiler is to transfer the heat that is released through the combustion of a
fuel, such as natural gas, propane,1 or fuel oil,2 to the working fluid of the building heating
system, which could be water, brine, steam, or a combination of these fluids. This heating
water3 or steam is used by the air systems and terminal equipment to heat the building.
Physical Characteristics
Boilers can be classified in different ways by the following characteristics:
1. Working fluid
a. Hot water
b. Steam
2. Fuel
a. Gas
(1) Natural gas
(2) Propane
b. Liquid
(1) Fuel oil
3. Draft4
a. Natural draft
b. Mechanical draft
(1) Induced draft
(2) Forced draft
4. Condensing5 or noncondensing
5. Construction
a. Condensing
(1) Stainless steel
(2) Aluminum
b. Noncondensing
(1) Cast iron sectional
(2) Steel
(3) Copper
6. Operating pressure: Boilers are normally constructed to meet the requirements
of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section IV, which defines the operating pressures of boilers as follows:
a. Low pressure: up to 15 psig steam and up to 160 psig hot water6
b. High pressure: above 15 psig steam, or above 160 psig and/or 250°F hot water
Boilers are also available in a range of heating capacities, which are defined for full-
load conditions by the input, gross output, and net output ratings. The input rating
defines the amount of heat produced by combustion of the fuel. The gross output rating
defines the amount of heat that is actually transferred to the working fluid.7 The net
output (or I-B-R8) rating is the gross output rating minus an allowance for the operating
heat losses and pickup9 of an average piping system.
Boilers generally consist of the following parts:
1. Burner
2. Control panel
Central Plant 79
3. Combustion chamber (or firebox)

4. Fluid pressure vessel
5. Ancillary systems
a. Gas train or fuel oil delivery system
b. Operating controls
c. Possible induced draft fan
d. Vent
(1) Positive or negative pressure
(2) Condensing or noncondensing
(3) Possible power venting equipment and controls
e. Safeties
(1) Pressure relief
(2) Low water cutoff
(3) High-limit temperature (hot water) or pressure (steam)
(4) Gas train or fuel oil delivery system safeties
(5) Burner safeties
(a) Flame monitor
(b) Air proving switch
(c) Others
Connections
Hot water boilers have the following connections:
• Water inlet
• Water outlet
• Gas or fuel oil
• Pressure relief
• Vent
• Combustion air (normally for condensing-type boilers)
• Condensate drain (condensing-type boilers only)
• Automatic temperature controls
• Electrical
Figures 4-1 through 4-3 illustrate a hot water boiler on a floor plan drawing, a hot
water boiler, and a connection detail for a hot water boiler, respectively.
Figure 4-1 Floor plan representation of a hot water boiler.

Figure 4-2 Photograph of a hot water boiler.
Figure 4-3 Connection detail for a hot water boiler.
80
Central Plant 81
Steam boilers have the following connections:
• Water (steam condensate return) inlet

• Steam outlet
• Gas or fuel oil
• Pressure relief
• Vent
• Electrical
Design Considerations
Boilers have the same design considerations as all gas-fired and fuel-burning appli-
ances. Therefore, we will discuss these design considerations first and then discuss the
design considerations that are specific to boilers.
All Gas-Fired and Fuel-Burning Appliances The following design considerations are com-
mon for all gas-fired and fuel-burning appliances.
Combustion Air The combustion of fuel by all gas-fired and fuel-burning appliances10
requires a supply of air (referred to as combustion air). Combustion air can be (1) obtained
from the room in which the appliances are installed, (2) transferred from spaces that
are adjacent to the room in which the appliances are installed, (3) obtained from the
outdoors by openings in the room, (4) obtained from the outdoors by a mechanical
forced-air system, or (5) obtained by a direct connection of outdoor combustion air to
each appliance.
The amount of combustion air that is required for proper operation of gas-fired and
fuel-burning appliances is proportional to the combined input rating of the burners for
all appliances installed within the room. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Standard 54 —National Fuel Gas Code defines the combustion air requirements for gas-
fired appliances. NFPA Standard 31—Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equip-
ment defines the combustion air requirements for fuel-burning appliances.
Draft All gas-fired and fuel-burning appliances fall into one of three categories:
• Natural draft: No draft is applied to the flue gas outlet of the appliance. A draft
hood (Fig. 4-4) is normally installed on the flue gas outlet to maintain this point at
atmospheric pressure and also to isolate the combustion process in the combustion
chamber of the appliance from variations in the draft of the vent system.
• Induced draft: Draft is applied at the flue gas outlet of the appliance to induce
the flow of flue gas through the combustion chamber. This is accomplished
either through the buoyancy of the flue gas in the vent system, through an
induced draft fan mounted on the flue gas outlet of the appliance, or both. A
barometric draft regulator (Fig. 4-5) is often used in the absence of an induced
draft fan to control excessive draft from the vent system. It does this by allowing
room air to enter the vent system when the draft exceeds the setting of the
weighted damper in the barometric draft regulator.

Figure 4-4 Photograph of a draft hood.
Figure 4-5 Photograph of a barometric draft regulator.
82
Central Plant 83
• Forced draft: The blower on the appliance burner forces the flue gas through
the combustion chamber with a positive pressure that results in a positive
pressure at the flue gas outlet. This pressure may be sufficient to force the flue
gas through the vent system to the outdoor vent terminal. However, it does not
need to do this (it depends upon the static pressure capabilities of the burner
blower and the vent system design). Forced draft appliances do not have a draft
hood or barometric draft regulator on the flue gas outlet; the vent connects
directly to the flue gas outlet.
Vent System A vent system is required for all gas-fired and fuel-burning appliances
to safely convey the flue gas from the appliances to the outdoors. A properly designed
vent system must address the following factors:
• The type of fuel utilized by the appliances

• The temperature of the flue gas
• The height of the chimney11
• The length of each section of the vent system and the combined input rating of
the appliances that are connected to each section
• The type of draft of the appliances (natural, induced, or forced)
• The pressures at the appliance flue gas outlets
• The presence of draft regulating devices for the appliances such as draft hoods
or barometric draft regulators
• The potential for condensation within the vent system
• The potential need for power venting equipment in the vent system to
supplement the draft created by the height of the chimney and the buoyancy of
the flue gas
Incorporating these factors into the vent system design is an involved process, the
details of which are beyond the scope of this book. The HVAC system designer should
contact a representative of a manufacturer of factory-prefabricated vent systems to assist
in the design of the vent system for each project. These representatives are commonly
skilled in the design of vent systems and also have access to computer programs, which
assist in this task. The HVAC system designer should provide the manufacturer’s repre-
sentative with a floor plan showing the locations of the appliances and the desired out-
door vent terminal, as well as the other pertinent information listed above. This will
enable the manufacturer’s representative to design a proper vent system for the project.
Although it is not important for the HVAC system designer to fully understand all of
the details associated with designing the vent system, it is important to have a basic under-
standing of the various types of vent systems. NFPA Standard 211—Standard for Chimneys,
Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances defines the requirements for vent systems,
which vary depending upon the type of appliance and the fuel utilized; NFPA Standard
54 —National Fuel Gas Code describes the requirements for the installation of gas-fired appli-
ances; and NFPA Standard 31—Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment describes
the requirements for the installation of fuel-burning appliances.
Gas-Fired Appliances Vented gas-fired appliances have been grouped by NFPA

Standard 54 —National Fuel Gas Code into the following four categories, depending upon
84 Chapter Four
whether the static pressure in the vent system is positive or nonpositive (negative or
neutral) and also whether the flue gas temperature is sufficiently high enough to pre-
vent condensation or not:
• Category I: nonpositive, noncondensing

• Category II: nonpositive, condensing
• Category III: positive, noncondensing
• Category IV: positive, condensing
Appliances with dissimilar vent characteristics should be vented separately; that

is, each vent system should only serve the same category of appliances. For example,
multiple Category I appliances may be combined into a single Category I vent system
and multiple Category IV appliances may be combined into a single Category IV vent
system provided the vent systems are designed properly. However, Category I appli-
ances should not be combined into the same vent system as Category IV appliances
because the positive pressure of the Category IV appliances will affect the pressure at
the flue gas outlet of the Category I appliances. This could cause the flue gas from the
Category I appliances to spill out into the equipment room and could also affect the
operation of the Category I appliance burners. Similarly, condensing appliances should
not be combined into the same vent system as noncondensing appliances because the
low flue gas temperatures of the condensing appliances could cause undesirable con-
densation within the vent system and will also affect the buoyancy of the flue gas
within the vent system, which may be required for proper operation of the noncon-
densing appliances.
It is common for all categories of vent systems to be double-walled; that is, they are
constructed of an inner conduit, which carries the flue gas, and an outer conduit, which
is separated from the inner conduit by an air space or insulation. This double-wall con-
struction lowers the temperature drop of the flue gas in the vent system, which is an
important factor in maintaining the buoyancy of the flue gas and in preventing conden-
sation of the flue gas for noncondensing appliances. It also allows the clearance from
the outer wall of the vent to combustible building materials to be greatly reduced
depending upon the applicable building code.
Category I gas-fired appliances normally utilize a draft hood at the connection of
the vent to each appliance. The draft hood, which allows room air to be entrained into
the vent system to compensate for variations in the draft of the vent system, ensures
that the vent system remains under neutral or negative pressurization. The type of vent
utilized for Category I gas-fired appliances is referred to as Type B gas vent.
The seams in the vent system for Category I gas-fired appliances are not required to
be pressure-tight because any leakage in the vent system would allow room air to leak
into the vent system and not vice versa. The seams in the vent system for Category III
and Category IV gas-fired appliances must be pressure-tight in order to prevent the
leakage of flue gas out of the vent system. The seams in the vent system for Category II
and IV gas-fired appliances must be liquid-tight to prevent the leakage of condensation
out of the vent system.
Fuel-Burning Appliances A Type L vent is utilized for venting oil-burning appliances.

Refer to Chap. 6, NFPA Standard 31—Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning
Equipment for the venting requirements of oil-burning appliances.
Central Plant 85
Power Venting Power venting may be required if there is insufficient draft in the vent
system to convey the flue gas from the appliances to the outdoor vent terminal. Power
venting may consist of a fan12 mounted in the vent system between the appliances and the
vent terminal or it could consist of a fan mounted on the vent terminal itself. The purpose
of the power venting fan is to provide the required boost for the draft in the vent system
to convey the flue gas safely to the outdoors. In order to provide the proper amount of
boost, the power venting fan must have a means of controlling its capacity based on the
need for draft in the vent system. Typically, a static pressure sensor is installed in the vent
system and a variable frequency drive is utilized to control the capacity of the power
venting fan. A control system is required to vary the speed of the fan in order to maintain
the setpoint of the static pressure sensor. The setpoint can be estimated during the design,
but it will need to be adjusted to the appropriate setting during start-up of the appliances.
Once again, the HVAC system designer should consult with a representative of the vent
system manufacturer for assistance in determining the need for power venting and
designing the appropriate vent system for the project.
Outdoor Vent Terminals NFPA Standard 54 —National Fuel Gas Code, NFPA Standard
31—Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment, and applicable local codes
describe clearances that must be maintained between vent terminals for gas-fired and
fuel-burning appliances and outdoor air intakes for HVAC systems, doors, operable
windows, and the like. The purpose of these clearances is to minimize the re-entrainment
of flue gas into the building.
Gas Piping and Delivery Pressure It is common for the burners on gas-fired appliances
to require a minimum gas pressure of approximately 4 to 6 in. water column (w.c.) and
a maximum gas pressure of 12 to 14 in. w.c. Since the typical delivery pressure for a
low-pressure gas system is approximately ¼ psig (7 in. w.c.), direct connection of the
low-pressure gas piping to the burner is acceptable. However, if a medium-pressure gas
distribution system is utilized in the building, such as a 2-psig (56-in. w.c.) gas system,
a 2-psig to ¼-psig regulator will be required at each gas-fired appliance. Also, most
2-psig gas regulators require that the regulator be vented through a pipe to the out-
doors. The vent pipe allows the regulator to vent gas to the outdoors should the regula-
tor fail or need to relieve excess pressure. NFPA Standard 54 —National Fuel Gas Code and
applicable local codes should be consulted for all gas piping requirements.
Boilers The following design considerations are specific to boilers.
Capacity Control Because the load of any heating system fluctuates over time, it is
necessary to vary the heat output of each boiler in the system to match the system load
as closely as possible. The heat output of a boiler is controlled by varying the amount of
fuel that is burned by the burner (referred to as the firing rate of the burner). There are
several ways to control a burner’s firing rate, each of which requires a different control
system and burner configuration. These methods are as follows:
• On/off control: The simplest form of controlling the firing rate is by cycling the
burner on and off. This is referred to as on/off control. When the outlet water
temperature (or steam pressure) drops below the setpoint of the outlet water
temperature (or steam pressure) sensor, the burner fires at full capacity (high
fire). When the outlet water temperature (or steam pressure) rises above the
86 Chapter Four
setpoint, the burner is shut off. On/off control is the least energy-efficient means
of capacity control because the pre- and postpurge airflows of the boiler required
for each cycle remove the heat stored in the boiler and send it to the outdoors.
• Low/high/off control: For somewhat closer capacity control (and increased
energy efficiency), the burner can be energized at a low fire setting when the
outlet water temperature (or steam pressure) drops below the low fire setpoint.
When the outlet water temperature (or steam pressure) drops below the high
fire setpoint, the firing rate is increased to the high fire setting. When the outlet
water temperature (or steam pressure) rises above the high fire setpoint, the
firing rate is reduced to low fire. Upon a further rise in the outlet water
temperature (or steam pressure) above the low fire setpoint, the burner is shut
off. Low/high/off control reduces the on/off cycles, thereby reducing the heat
lost during the pre- and postpurge airflows of the boiler. Keeping the boiler
online also improves the response of the boiler to changes in the heating load.
• Modulating control: The most energy-efficient means of capacity control is full
modulation of the burner firing rate. The firing rate is modulated by the outlet
water temperature (or steam pressure) sensor in proportion to the deviation
from the temperature or pressure setpoint. A modulating burner most closely
matches the heat output of the boiler to the load of the heating system.
Efficiencies The efficiency of the boiler(s) in a centralized heating system is an

important design consideration because it directly affects the operating cost of the heat-
ing system. The type of boiler that is selected, either noncondensing or condensing, is a
major factor in the boiler efficiency that can be achieved.
Noncondensing Boilers Noncondensing boilers (typically cast iron sectional, steel, and
copper boilers) must maintain a flue gas temperature that is at least 140°F above the dew
point13 of the water vapor in the flue gas in order to keep this water vapor in the gaseous
phase. The typical flue gas temperature for noncondensing boilers is approximately 360°F
for typical natural gas combustion. The stack loss associated with this high flue gas tempera-
ture results in combustion efficiencies14 of noncondensing boilers in the range of 70 to 86%
and in thermal efficiencies15 generally in the 80% range. If the flue gas temperature is allowed
to drop below 140°F above the dew point of the water vapor in the flue gas, the water vapor
may condense in the combustion chamber of the boiler or vent system and cause corrosion
of these elements. Noncondensing boilers can produce either hot water or steam.
Condensing Boilers Condensation of the water vapor in the flue gas within the combus-
tion chamber is not a concern for condensing boilers (typically stainless steel and alumi-
num boilers) whose flue gas temperatures are less than 140°F above the dew point of the
water vapor in the flue gas. In fact, these boilers are designed to condense and drain the
water vapor in the flue gas in the combustion chamber of the boiler in order to extract
the latent heat of vaporization from the condensed water vapor. This additional heat ex-
traction (and resulting low stack loss) gives condensing boilers combustion and thermal
efficiencies in excess of 95%, with higher efficiencies achieved at lower return water tem-
peratures. Condensing boilers must produce hot water—they cannot produce steam.
Instead of discharging flue gas that is 200°F warmer than the return water tempera-
ture (as is the case with noncondensing boilers), the flue gas that is discharged by con-
densing boilers is in the range of 0 to 100°F warmer than the return water temperature
for condensing boilers (depending upon the firing rate and return water temperature).
Central Plant 87
This reduction in stack loss and lower average water temperature within the boiler is
the reason condensing boilers have higher combustion and thermal efficiencies than
noncondensing boilers.
Swing Joints on Supply Piping Swing joints are used to minimize the stresses on the
piping connections to boilers. A swing joint is constructed with standard piping elbows.
However, its geometry is such that any expansion in the return or supply pipes has the
effect of torsionally rotating the pipe within the tapping of the boiler, as opposed to
imposing a bending moment on the tapping.
Clearances Clearances must be maintained around boilers for inspection and main-
tenance, as required by the manufacturer and also by the applicable codes. Section
1004.3 of the 2009 International Mechanical Code requires 18 in. of clearance on all sides,
unless otherwise approved. Therefore, if the boiler manufacturer allows less than 18 in.
clearance around the boiler, the authority having jurisdiction should be consulted
before incorporating this clearance into the design.
Hot Water Boilers The following design considerations are specific to hot water
boilers.
Full-Load (System) Design Temperature Difference Typical (full-load) design water tem-
peratures for heating water systems are 180 to 200°F heating water supply and 140 to
180°F heating water return. The temperature difference between the heating water sup-
ply and heating water return is referred to as the delta t (Δt). A heating water Δt of 20 to
40°F is common for all heating water boilers (noncondensing and condensing). Although
a higher Δt can be used for condensing boilers, this is not customary because the termi-
nal heating equipment is usually designed to accommodate a 20 to 40°F Δt.
The higher (full-load) design heating water supply temperature of 200°F may be
desirable in colder climates to increase the heat transfer efficiency16 of the heating equip-
ment, thus reducing the first cost of this equipment. That is, a heating coil with 200°F
heating water supply will transfer more heat to the surrounding air than the same heat-
ing coil with 180°F heating water supply (assuming equal heating water flows, airflows,
and entering air temperatures). This increased heat transfer will result in a greater heat-
ing water Δt for the coil with 200°F heating water supply temperature than the coil with
the 180°F heating water supply temperature. However, heat losses from the boilers and
piping system also increase with an increase in the heating water supply temperature,
thus increasing the operating cost.
Operating Pressure When a heating water system is initially filled, the water is at its cold-
est temperature and the heating water system pump is not operating, the water pressure in
the boiler will be equal to the static water pressure of the piping system on the boiler (the
height of the water column of piping installed above the boiler). Once the system has been
filled and most of the air has been released from the high points, it is common to adjust the
fill pressure of the cold water makeup to ensure that a positive pressure of approximately
10 psig is measured at the highest point in the system when it is cold and not operating.
When the water in the heating water system is heated to the operating tempera-
ture and the heating water system pump is operating, the static water pressure in the
entire heating water system will increase due to the expansion of the heated water.17
In addition, the static water pressure everywhere in the system [except at the point
where the (closed) expansion tank connects to the system18] will increase due to the
total dynamic head of the heating water system pump. Because heating water boilers
88 Chapter Four
are rated by the maximum water temperature and pressure they are designed to with-
stand, a high-limit temperature sensor and pressure relief valve are required to be
installed on the boiler with settings that do not exceed these ratings of the boiler.
Although the purpose of these safeties is to protect the boiler, it is important for the
HVAC system designer to ensure that the static water pressure in the boiler does not
exceed the pressure setting of the pressure relief valve when the heating water system
is hot and operating.
Location of Boiler in Heating Water System In most cases, it is appropriate for the boiler
to be installed on the suction side of the heating water system pump with the point
where the (closed) expansion tank connects to the system located between the boiler
and the pump. The reason is that the pressure at this point is not affected by the total
dynamic head of the heating water system pump. Therefore, the difference between the
static pressure rating of the boiler and the (hot) operating static pressure of the system
on the boiler can be developed by the system pump to overcome the friction losses of
the heating water system. However, if the boiler is installed on the discharge side of the
system pump, the static water pressure in the boiler will be equal to the (hot) operating
static pressure of the system on the boiler plus the total dynamic head of the pump. This
configuration decreases the total dynamic head that the system pump can develop to
overcome the friction losses of the heating water system.
Noncondensing Boilers The following design considerations are specific to noncon-

densing hot water boilers.
Minimum Return Water Temperature The cast iron, steel, and copper combustion chambers
of noncondensing boilers can be corroded if the water vapor in the flue gas is allowed to
condense within the combustion chamber. Condensation will occur within the combustion
chamber when the return water temperature is at or below the dew point of the water vapor
in the flue gas, which is approximately 130°F for typical natural gas combustion. Further-
more, cast iron and steel boilers are susceptible to thermal shock,19 which can occur when
the return water temperature is too low. As a result, a minimum return water temperature
of 140°F is generally recommended for noncondensing boilers not only to prevent conden-
sation in the combustion chamber but also to minimize the risk of thermal shock.
Constant Outlet Water Temperature The firing rate of the burner on a noncondensing
boiler is usually controlled to maintain a constant outlet water temperature, typically
either 180 or 200°F. The heating water supply temperature and heating water system Δt
need to be selected to ensure that the heating water return temperature does not drop
below 140°F.
Heating Water Temperature Reset Because the maximum heating water supply tempera-
ture of 180 to 200°F is only needed to meet the design heating load of the building (when
the outdoor temperature is at its lowest), it is common for the heating water supply tem-
perature to be automatically reset20 (or adjusted) by the heating water control system to
a lower temperature during part-load heating conditions. During part-load conditions,
the cooler heating water supply temperature enables the control systems for the heating
equipment to more closely match the heat output of this equipment to the loads they
serve. If the heating water supply temperature is not reset for part-load conditions, the
heating equipment control systems may overshoot the controlled variable (such as space
temperature), causing uncomfortable conditions in the spaces they serve.
Central Plant 89
For noncondensing boilers, the heating water supply temperature at the outlet of the
boiler must remain constant for the reasons stated earlier. Reset of the heating water sup-
ply temperature for the heating water system must be accomplished by mixing a portion
of the heating water that is returned from the building with the heating water that is
supplied by the boilers. This is accomplished by installing a 3-way mixing valve in the
heating water supply pipe, with one inlet port connected to the heating water returned
from the building and the other inlet port connected to the heating water supplied by the
boiler (Fig. 4-37). The outlet port is connected to the heating water that is supplied to the
building. A temperature sensor is installed in the heating water supply to the building
downstream of the 3-way mixing valve. This heating water supply temperature is input
to the control system, and the 3-way mixing valve is modulated as required to maintain
the (varying) setpoint of the heating water supply temperature, which is reset based on
the outdoor temperature. A common heating water supply temperature reset schedule
supplies heating water to the building at 180°F when the outdoor temperature is 0°F and
supplies 110°F heating water to the building when the outdoor temperature is 50°F.
Condensing Boilers The following design considerations are specific to condensing

hot water boilers.
Flue Gas Condensate Because the acids in the flue gas condensate are corrosive, the
combustion chamber (also referred to as the heat exchanger) in condensing boilers
must be constructed of corrosion-resistant materials such as stainless steel or alumi-
num. Condensing boilers have a condensate drain connection that must be piped to
the building sanitary system, in most cases (depending on the applicable local code).
All condensate that is discharged to the building sanitary system must be below 140°F.
Therefore, a condensate cooler may be required. The cooler mixes domestic water with
the hot flue gas condensate to maintain a maximum discharge temperature of 140°F.
Also, because the flue gas condensate is acidic, an acid neutralizer (which normally
consists of a canister filled with limestone) is often utilized to neutralize the pH of the
condensate before it is discharged to the building sanitary system. This is of particular
concern if the building sanitary piping is constructed of cast iron.
Low Return Water Temperature Desirable Thermal shock is not an issue with condens-
ing boilers. In fact, return water temperatures below 140°F are desirable to increase the
condensation of water vapor in the flue gas.
Constant Water Flow Because condensing boilers generally contain a smaller volume
of water than noncondensing boilers, it is necessary for the water flow through these
boilers to remain constant in order to prevent “hot spots” in the heat exchangers. Some
condensing boilers are equipped with factory-installed circulating pumps that are inte-
gral to the boiler; others require a pump to be field-installed external to the boiler.
One method of ensuring a constant water flow through each boiler is to utilize a pri-
mary-secondary pumping system (Fig. 4-38). In this type of system, there are two loops:
the primary loop, which includes the boiler, and the secondary loop, which includes the
heating water system in the building. The two loops are connected by the “common
pipe.” Normally, the primary pumps circulate a constant water flow through the boilers,
while the secondary pump can circulate either a constant or variable flow through the
heating water system. Flow through the common pipe will vary depending upon the
number of primary pumps that are operating and the flow through the secondary loop.
90 Chapter Four
Variable Outlet Water Temperature In contrast to noncondensing boilers, the outlet wa-
ter temperature for condensing boilers can be varied to reset the heating water tem-
perature based on the outdoor temperature (as discussed in the Noncondensing Boiler
section earlier). This capability of varying the outlet water temperature eliminates the
need for the 3-way mixing valve in the heating water supply pipe and also results in
higher thermal efficiencies at part-load heating conditions because the lower return
water temperature is capable of extracting more latent heat from the flue gas than a
higher return water temperature can.
Steam Boilers The following design considerations are specific to steam boilers.
Operating Pressure Typically, commercial steam boilers in the sizes required to serve
a single building are rated for a maximum operating pressure of 15 psig. A common
operating pressure for commercial steam boilers serving a single building is 2 psig. This
steam pressure is adequate to overcome the pressure losses in the distribution piping
for the relatively small heating system contained within a single building with a mini-
mum amount of wasted energy due to flash steam.21 Also, the 219°F saturation tem-
perature of 2 psig steam is not so hot that certain pieces of heating terminal equipment,
such as finned-tube radiators, cannot be safely enclosed and mounted within the occu-
pied areas of the building.
However, district or campus steam heating systems, which may utilize miles of
steam piping to serve multiple buildings, require a higher initial steam pressure to
overcome the significant pressure losses in the distribution piping. For this reason, the
boilers serving district or campus steam heating systems commonly operate at steam
pressures in excess of 100 psig.
Condensate Recovery For most commercial buildings, the steam condensate that is
formed at the steam utilization equipment (air system heating coils, terminal heating
equipment, heat exchangers, humidifiers, etc.), as well as condensate that is formed in
the steam distribution piping itself, is returned to the central plant where it is reused as
feedwater for the steam boiler.
The steam condensate is usually returned by steam pressure motivation22 from the
steam utilization equipment to the condensate transfer equipment, which consists of
one or more condensate receiver/pump sets located within the building. Each conden-
sate receiver/pump set consists of a receiver (tank) and either a single condensate
pump (simplex arrangement) or two condensate pumps (duplex arrangement). A float
switch installed in the receiver energizes the condensate pump at the high level and
de-energizes the pump at the low level. Steam condensate is pumped by the conden-
sate pump through the pumped condensate return piping to the boiler feedwater
receiver located in the central plant. If the central plant is located below all of the steam
utilization equipment, the steam condensate may return directly to the boiler feed
water receiver, eliminating the need for the condensate receiver/pump sets.
Makeup water is added to the boiler feedwater receiver as required by the water
level controls in the receiver. The boiler feedwater is pumped from the boiler feedwater
receiver to the steam boiler(s) by the boiler feed pump(s). Typically, each boiler is fed by
a dedicated feedwater pump. These pumps are controlled by the water level controls in
the steam boilers to maintain the proper water levels in the boilers.
The advantages of recovering condensate, as opposed to discharging it to the sani-
tary drainage system, are as follows: the recovery of the heat contained within the hot
Central Plant 91
steam condensate, lower makeup water requirements, and reduced water treatment. If
it is anticipated that more than 10% of the feedwater will consist of makeup water, a
feedwater heater should be added to the boiler feedwater receiver to keep the water in
this receiver at 180 to 200°F. Maintaining the feedwater at this temperature ensures that
the dissolved oxygen23 in the feedwater is removed before it is pumped to the boilers.
This also minimizes the risk of thermal shock to the boilers.
Heat Exchangers
Heat exchangers are commonly used in centralized heating systems and water-source
heat pump systems.
Purpose
Heat exchangers are used in HVAC systems where it is necessary to transfer heat from
one fluid stream to another without mixing the two fluid streams. Heat exchangers can
be used to transfer heat from steam to water, water to water, water to brine, or brine to
water. A common application of a steam-to-water heat exchanger is in the transfer of
heat from a district or campus steam heating system to a heating hot water system
within a building. Another application of a heat exchanger—where separation of the
two fluid streams is of primary concern—is in the transfer of heat from a closed heat
pump water system to an open cooling tower system. Heat exchangers can also be used
to isolate fluid systems in tall buildings, thereby preventing overpressurization of these
systems due to static head.
There are two types of heat exchangers commonly used in HVAC systems: U-tube shell
and tube heat exchangers and plate and frame heat exchangers.
U-tube Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers U-tube shell and tube heat exchangers consist of a
copper U-tube bundle mounted within a steel cylindrical shell. The cold fluid stream nor-
mally circulates through the tubes of the tube bundle, and the hot fluid stream normally
circulates through the shell (around the tube bundle). Heat is transferred from the hot fluid
to the cold fluid through the walls of the tubes. Shell and tube heat exchangers are com-
monly used to transfer heat from steam to water or brine. However, they can also be used
to transfer heat from water to water, water to brine, or brine to water. Baffles are installed
in the shell to direct water flow across the tubes if the heat exchanger is used to transfer
heat from water to water, water to brine, or brine to water. A minimum of two passes of the
fluid through the tube bundle are required for U-tube shell and tube heat exchangers. For
most HVAC applications, shell and tube heat exchangers are between 3 and 6 ft long and
6 and 12 in. in diameter, although larger heat exchangers are available. Figure 4-6 illus-
trates the piping connections to a steam-to-hot water shell and tube heat exchanger.
Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers Plate and frame heat exchangers consist of two main
components:
• Plates: Multiple plates, normally constructed of stainless steel, form the surface
through which heat is transferred from the hot fluid to the cold fluid. Channels
formed between the stainless heat exchanger plates provide the narrow passages
through which the two fluid streams circulate. The hot fluid circulates through
the channels on one side of each plate while the cold fluid circulates through the
92 Chapter Four
Figure 4-6 Connection detail for a steam-to-hot water shell and tube heat exchanger.
channels on the other side of each plate. The heat exchanger plates separate the
two fluid streams and conduct heat from the hot fluid to the cold fluid. Elastomer
gaskets are used to seal the joints between the plates. Plate and frame heat
exchangers are used strictly to transfer heat from water to water, water to brine,
or brine to water; they cannot be used to transfer heat from steam to water. A
steel shroud surrounds the plate pack to protect the plates from damage.
• Frame: The frame is normally constructed of steel and holds the plates together.
The frame consists of a fixed steel front plate (called the fixed head) and a movable
steel rear plate (called the movable head). The stainless steel heat exchanger plates
are sandwiched between the two heads with compression bolts. There may also be
a top carrying bar and a bottom guide bar; these bars support the plates. The
carrying bar and guide bar are connected between the fixed head and a rear vertical
support frame. Heat exchanger plates can be added after the initial installation if
additional capacity is required as long as the carrying bar, guide bar, and compression
bolts are long enough to accommodate the additional plates and the system pump
has sufficient capacity for the increased flow rates and pressure losses.
Plate and frame heat exchangers are commonly 5 to 7 ft high, 5 to 8 ft long, and 3 to
5 ft wide, although larger heat exchangers are available.
Central Plant 93
Refer to Chap. 47 of the 2008 ASHRAE Handbook—HVAC Systems and Equipment for
more information on the physical characteristics of various types of heat exchangers.
Connections
Connections to heat exchangers are limited to the piping for the entering and leaving
hot and cold fluids, and a pressure relief valve (for shell and tube heat exchangers).
U-tube Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers For shell and tube heat exchangers, there is a con-
nection on the top of the shell for the entering hot fluid and a connection on the bottom
of the shell for the leaving hot fluid. If the shell and tube heat exchanger is used to trans-
fer heat from steam to water (or brine), the steam supply connection is on the top of the
shell and the steam condensate return connection is on the bottom of the shell. The tube
bundle (through which the cold fluid circulates) is mounted to a tube sheet that is sand-
wiched between the shell and head flanges. The shell flange is mounted to the shell of
the heat exchanger, and the head flange contains the entering and leaving cold fluid
piping connections. This connection of the tube sheet between the shell and head flanges
facilitates the removal of the tube bundle for maintenance or replacement. Also, a tap-
ping is normally provided in the top of the shell for installation of a pressure relief
valve, which functions to protect the shell from overpressurization. If there is no pres-
sure relief valve tapping in the shell, the pressure relief valve is connected to the hot
entering fluid piping on the equipment side of the isolation valve.
Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers Connections for plate and frame heat exchangers are
limited to the entering and leaving hot and cold fluid connections, which are normally
an integral part of the (front) fixed head of the heat exchanger [although connections can
also be provided in the (rear) movable head of the heat exchanger]. Depending upon the
channel configuration of the heat exchanger plates, the entering and leaving connections
for the hot and cold fluids can be located either on the same side of the heat exchanger
fixed head or in a diagonal arrangement. It is common for the hot and cold fluids to cir-
culate through plate and frame heat exchangers in a counterflow configuration; that is,
the hot and cold fluids flow in opposite directions through the heat exchanger. This
arrangement, in which the temperature gradient between the hot and cold fluids remains
essentially constant, maximizes the heat transfer efficiency of the heat exchanger and
also allows for a crossover temperature between the hot and cold fluids. Crossover
temperature will be discussed in the Design Considerations section later. Figures 4-7
through 4-9 are graphical representations of a plate and frame heat exchanger. Note that
Figure 4-7 Floor plan representation of a plate and frame heat exchanger.
94 Chapter Four
Figure 4-8 Photograph of a plate and frame heat exchanger.
Figure 4-9 Connection detail for a plate and frame heat exchanger.
Central Plant 95
in Fig. 4-7, only two pipes are shown connecting to the heat exchanger on the floor plan
because two of the four pipes connected to the heat exchanger are directly over the other
two pipes. All four pipes could have been shown on the floor plan slightly staggered, but
it is clear that there are actually four pipes connected to the heat exchanger by the pipes
shown in the adjacent room and also by the connection detail.
The following are design considerations for heat exchangers.
Definitions
1. Approach temperature
a. Heating: The difference between the entering hot-side fluid temperature
and the leaving cold-side fluid temperature. For example, the approach
temperature for a heat exchanger designed to utilize 200°F (entering)
heating water to produce 180°F (leaving) brine is 20°F.24
b. Cooling: The difference between the leaving hot-side fluid temperature and
the entering cold-side fluid temperature. For example, the approach
temperature for a heat exchanger designed to utilize 38°F (entering) brine to
produce 45°F (leaving) chilled water is 7°F.25
2. Crossover temperature
a. Crossover temperature occurs when the fluid leaving the cold-side of a heat
exchanger is warmer than the fluid leaving the hot-side of the heat exchanger.
Refer to the discussion of crossover temperature in the Plate and Frame
Heat Exchanger section later.
3. Fouling factor
a. Over time, scale and other deposits coat the heat transfer surfaces of heat
exchangers. In order to account for this increase in thermal resistance of the
heat transfer surfaces and the resultant loss of capacity, a fouling factor26 is
used during the selection process to ensure that the heat exchanger retains
sufficient capacity for the life of the equipment. Fouling factors vary for
different fluids and depend upon the nature and temperature of the fluid and
the fluid velocity through the heat exchanger. Typical fouling factors for fluids
flowing at a velocity of 3 feet per second (fps) or higher are as follows:
(1) Treated water, closed system: 0.0005 ft2·h·°F/Btu (125°F or less),
0.0010 ft2·h·°F/Btu (over 125°F)
(2) Treated water, open system (125°F or less): 0.0010 ft2·h·°F/Btu
(3) Untreated water, open system (125°F or less): 0.0030 ft2·h·°F/Btu
b. The heat exchanger manufacturer’s product data and/or the manufacturer’s
representative should be consulted to determine the appropriate fouling
factors that should be used for each fluid.
U-tube Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers
1. Capacity
a. The heat transfer capacity of shell and tube heat exchangers is proportional
to the surface area of the tubes. Therefore, utilizing a larger tube bundle
(which requires either a larger diameter or longer shell) increases the heat
transfer capacity of the shell and tube heat exchanger.
96 Chapter Four
2. Tube bundle—Number of passes
a. U-tube heat exchangers utilize either two- or four-pass tube bundles.
Typically, a two-pass tube bundle is sufficient for most applications.
However, if length is a concern, a four-pass tube bundle can be utilized; this
would increase the diameter of the shell. Conversely, if length is not a
concern, but the diameter of the shell is, a longer heat exchanger with a two-
pass tube bundle can be utilized.
b. The entering and leaving fluid connections to the U-tube bundle are on the
head end of the heat exchanger.
3. Pressure rating
a. The shell of a shell and tube heat exchanger is normally constructed to meet
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, as
an unfired pressure vessel. The operating pressure of the heat exchanger
shell cannot exceed the ASME rating of the shell.
b. Heat exchanger shells and tubes are typically rated for an operating pressure
of 150 psig at 375°F.
c. A pressure relief valve is required to protect the shell from over
pressurization.
4. Vacuum breaker
a. A vacuum breaker is required to be installed in the shell of a steam-to-hot
water shell and tube heat exchanger if the steam flow through the heat
exchanger is controlled by a 2-way control valve. The vacuum breaker
prevents negative pressurization of the shell, which can occur when there is
no steam flow and the steam within the shell cools and contracts. If a negative
pressure develops within the shell of the heat exchanger, it can inhibit proper
operation of the steam trap (which requires a positive pressure to operate)
and cause condensate flooding within the shell of the heat exchanger.
5. Flow rates
a. It is common for both the hot- and cold-side fluid flow rates and temperature
differentials to be equal. However, unequal flow rates and temperature
differentials can be designed if one fluid is water and the other fluid is brine
or for other reasons that may be necessary.
6. Fluid velocity
a. The fluid velocity within the tubes should be a minimum of 3.3 fps to reduce
the potential for fouling and a maximum of 11 fps to minimize erosion of
the tubes.
b. The manufacturer’s product data and/or the manufacturer’s representative
should be consulted for recommended fluid velocities.
7. Pressure loss
a. Reasonable fluid pressure losses for both the shell and tube sides of a water-
to-water shell and tube heat exchanger are between 1 and 5 ft w.c.
8. Mounting
a. Shell and tube heat exchangers are usually mounted approximately 4 ft
above the floor on a steel frame. This mounting height facilitates maintenance
and provides elevation for the steam condensate piping to be pitched to the
condensate receiver.
Central Plant 97
9. Steam trap selection

a. If a 2-way control valve is used to control the steam flow through the heat
exchanger (which is normally the case), the steam pressure within the
shell of a shell and tube heat exchanger will fluctuate depending upon the
load on the heat exchanger. Therefore, a float and thermostatic (F&T) trap
is the appropriate type of steam trap for this application because it adjusts
automatically to the condensate load and is not adversely affected by
changes in steam pressure. The F&T trap should be mounted a minimum
of 15 in. below the bottom of the shell in order for there to be 15 in. of
water column (approximately 0.5 psi) of positive pressure (minus the
approximately 0.25 psi pressure loss through the vacuum breaker) on the
trap to facilitate its operation should the pressure within the heat exchanger
drop to 0 psig.
a. Shell and tube heat exchangers are typically utilized for systems having
approach temperatures greater than 10°F.
11. Crossover temperature not possible
a. Although a crossover temperature is possible for a plate and frame heat
exchanger (see discussion below), it is not possible for a shell and tube heat
exchanger. The fluid leaving the cold side of a shell and tube heat exchanger
must be cooler than the fluid leaving the hot side of the heat exchanger.
12. Automatic temperature control
a. Typically, the fluid temperature leaving the load side of a heat exchanger is
the controlled variable. In order to maintain this temperature, the flow rate
of the source fluid through the heat exchanger is modulated.
b. If the hot-side fluid is steam, a 2-way control valve is used to modulate the
steam flow rate through the shell of the heat exchanger. In cases where the
required steam flow rate exceeds the capacity of a 2½-in. steam control
valve, two steam control valves connected in a parallel arrangement are
recommended to control the steam flow rate. This parallel arrangement
allows for closer control of the steam flow rate at part-load conditions.
13. Clearances
a. Clear space equal to the length of the shell should be provided beyond the
head end of the heat exchanger to allow the tube bundle to be removed for
maintenance or replacement. In order to provide this clear space, the shutoff
valves, specialties, and unions or flanges for the tube inlet and outlet
connections should be installed in the vertical pipe drops at an elevation
above the heat exchanger. Sufficient access should also be provided for piping
connections to the shell, which will be on the top and bottom of the shell.
Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers
1. Capacity
a. The heat transfer capacity of plate and frame heat exchangers is
proportional to the surface area of the heat exchanger plates. Therefore,
more plates and/or larger plates increase the heat transfer capacity of the
heat exchanger.
98 Chapter Four
2. Pressure rating
a. Plate and frame heat exchangers are normally constructed to meet the
requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, as an
unfired pressure vessel and are typically rated for an operating pressure of
150 psig.
3. Flow rates
a. Similar to shell and tube heat exchangers, unequal hot- and cold-side fluid
flow rates and temperature differentials can be accommodated with plate
and frame heat exchangers.
4. Pressure loss
a. The passages through which fluid flows in a plate and frame heat exchanger
are much smaller than those in the shell or tubes of a shell and tube heat
exchanger. Consequently, the fluid pressure loss for a plate and frame heat
exchanger will be much higher than the fluid pressure loss through a shell
and tube heat exchanger.
b. The fluid pressure loss through a plate and frame heat exchanger is
proportional to the fluid velocity through the channels between the plates.
c. A reasonable fluid pressure loss through a plate and frame heat exchanger
is 5 psi.
5. Mounting
a. Plate and frame heat exchangers are usually mounted on a concrete
housekeeping pad that is 4 in. high and 4 in. larger than the equipment on
all sides.
6. Temperature rating
a. The temperature rating of plate and frame heat exchangers is determined based
on the elastomer gasket material that is used to seal the joints between the
plates. These gaskets are typically constructed of NBR, but EPDM and Viton®
gaskets can also be utilized for higher operating temperatures. NBR has a
maximum temperature rating of 230°F, EPDM has a maximum temperature
rating of 300°F, and Viton has a maximum temperature rating of 365°F.
a. Plate and frame heat exchangers are typically utilized for systems having
approach temperatures less than 10°F.
b. The approach temperature can be reduced by utilizing more plates and/or
larger plates.
8. Crossover temperature possible
a. A crossover temperature is possible with a plate and frame heat exchanger.
The fluid leaving the cold side of a plate and frame heat exchanger can be
warmer than the fluid leaving the hot side of the heat exchanger. This is
often desirable, particularly when the approach temperature is less than
10°F. A 5°F crossover temperature is common for a water-source heat pump
application, as illustrated in Fig. 4-10.
9. Automatic temperature control
a. Depending upon the pumping arrangement and control of the source- and
load-side fluid systems, either the temperature or flow rate through the hot
or cold sides of the heat exchanger may be modulated to control the heat
that is absorbed or rejected by the heat exchanger. For example, if the heat
Central Plant 99
Figure 4-10 Crossover temperature for a typical water-source heat pump application.
exchanger is used in a water-source heat pump system to reject heat to a

cooling tower, the temperature of the hot-side fluid (cooling tower loop)
entering the heat exchanger will be modulated by varying the flow of air
through the cooling tower to maintain a maximum leaving cold-side water
temperature. Thus, the hot-side fluid flow rate will remain constant and the
cold-side fluid flow rate may be modulated or remain constant.
b. Modulation of the hot- or cold-side fluid flow rates through the heat
exchanger can be accomplished by using a 2-way or 3-way control valve,
the choice of which depends upon the pumping arrangement and control of
the fluid systems.
10. Clearances
a. Clear space should be provided behind the heat exchanger for removal
of the movable head and heat exchanger plates for maintenance or
replacement.
b. Approximately 3 to 6 ft of space (depending upon the pipe sizes) should be
allowed in front of the heat exchanger for the elbows, valves, and specialties
that are associated with the hot- and cold-side fluid pipe connections to the
fixed head. Space should also be provided in the rear of the heat exchanger
for piping connections to the movable head, if required.
Cooling Equipment
The two types of centralized cooling equipment we will discuss in this chapter are chill-
ers and cooling towers.
Chillers
Chillers are commonly used in centralized cooling systems to extract heat from the work-
ing fluid of the building cooling system and reject this heat to the outdoors. Electric chill-
ers are the most common types of chillers used in centralized cooling systems. Chillers
which utilize steam or natural gas as the fuel source are also used, but are less common.
Purpose
Most people are familiar with the air-conditioning system in their home, which uses a
cooling coil containing refrigerant to cool the air that is blown across it by the supply
fan. This type of cooling coil, which is referred to as a direct expansion (DX) coil,27 is
also used in HVAC systems for commercial buildings. However, DX coils, and their
100 Chapter Four
associated refrigeration systems, have certain limitations (particularly limits on the dis-
tance between the cooling coil and the heat rejection equipment), which make them
unsuitable for certain HVAC systems, particularly centralized HVAC systems. Chilled
water cooling systems, on the other hand, do not have the limitations of DX cooling
systems. These systems are utilized extensively in commercial HVAC systems because
water can be cooled in a central location and distributed at great lengths to the various
air systems and terminal equipment, which utilize this chilled water to cool the building.
At the heart of a chilled water system is the chiller. A chiller is a central piece of
equipment whose sole purpose is to cool (or chill) the water returned from the building
cooling equipment to a temperature usually between 42 and 45°F. This water is then
pumped from the central chilled water plant to the building cooling equipment where
it is used to cool the building.
If the chiller is used as part of a thermal storage system, it will produce approximately
18°F brine during off-peak (nighttime) hours. The brine is circulated through the thermal
storage system to store thermal (cooling) energy in the thermal storage media, which is
typically either ice or brine. During on-peak (afternoon) hours, the cooling energy stored
in the thermal storage media is used to cool the building, which reduces the electrical
demand of the facility and the associated energy cost during the cooling season.
There are many different types of chillers. However, all chillers essentially consist of
equipment that utilizes energy to extract heat from the chilled water loop and reject this
heat to the outdoors. The energy source can be electricity, steam, or even natural gas. In
this book, we will focus on chillers that utilize electricity as the source of energy to com-
press a refrigerant in a closed vapor compression system to produce chilled water.
Chillers that utilize steam or natural gas as the energy source are called absorption
chillers. Absorption chillers use an absorption process that occurs between a refrigerant
(typically water) and an absorbent (typically lithium bromide) to produce chilled water.
Absorption chillers are suitable for applications where there is an abundant source of steam
or natural gas to drive the absorption process or where it is not desirable to utilize electric-
ity for cooling. Although these types of chillers will not be discussed in this book, their
application within a central chilled water plant is similar to that of an electric chiller.
Electric chillers contain the four main components that are a necessary part of a
vapor compression system: the evaporator, the compressor, the condenser, and the
expansion device.
The evaporator is contained within the cooler, which is one part of a chiller. The
cooler is a shell and tube heat exchanger in which the refrigerant circulates through
either the shell or the tubes of the cooler28 and is boiled (or evaporated) by the warmer
chilled water that is circulated through the other component of the cooler. The chilled
water is cooled by the heat that is absorbed by the evaporation of the refrigerant.
The compressor draws the low-pressure gaseous refrigerant from the evaporator,
compresses it, and discharges it at high pressure to the condenser. The most common
types of compressors used for electric chillers are reciprocating, scroll, screw, and cen-
trifugal compressors. Each of these compressors utilizes a different approach for com-
pressing the refrigerant and each has characteristics that make it suitable for certain
applications and size ranges of chillers.
The condenser rejects all of the heat from the vapor compression system, including
the heat that is absorbed by the evaporator in the cooler and the heat that is added to
Central Plant 101
the system by the compressor. Condensers can be water-cooled, air-cooled, or evapora-

tive (air-cooled with water spray). A water-cooled condenser is usually part of a pack-
aged indoor chiller and normally consists of a shell and tube heat exchanger in which
the (warmer) refrigerant circulates through the shell of the heat exchanger and is con-
densed by the (cooler) condenser water that is circulated through the tubes of the heat
exchanger. The condenser water is warmed by the heat that is rejected by the condensa-
tion of the refrigerant. The heat that is absorbed by the condenser water is commonly
rejected to the outdoors through a cooling tower.
An air-cooled condenser is usually part of a packaged outdoor chiller, although it
may also be the outdoor component of an indoor chiller. It consists of a finned-tube coil
through which the refrigerant is circulated and condensed by outdoor air that is drawn
across the coil by one or more condenser fans. An evaporative condenser is an air-
cooled condenser which has an additional recirculating water spray system. The evapo-
rative cooling effect of the water sprayed over the condenser coil increases the heat
rejection capacity of the condenser.
A thermostatic expansion valve is installed in the refrigerant liquid line between the
condenser and the evaporator, which throttles (or regulates) the liquid refrigerant flow
to the evaporator. As a result, the pressure in the evaporator is below the saturation
pressure of the liquid refrigerant, which causes the refrigerant to boil. The heat required
to boil the refrigerant is absorbed from the chilled water circulating through the water-
side of the cooler, thereby cooling the chilled water. The thermostatic expansion valve
regulates the refrigerant flow through the evaporator to maintain a constant refrigerant
suction temperature, ensuring that only refrigerant gas leaves the evaporator.
Connections
Connections for electric chillers consist of the following:
1. Water-cooled chiller (Figs. 4-11 and 4-12)

a. Chilled water supply and return piping connections to the cooler.
b. Condenser water supply and return piping connections to the condenser.
c. Refrigerant pressure relief piping connection.
(1) The refrigerant pressure relief piping will be connected to the refrigerant
pressure relief device (a relief valve, rupture disk, or both) on the chiller
and will be routed to the outdoors in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-2010 —Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.
d. Electrical power connection: The electrical power connection can be either
single-point or dual-point.
(1) Single-point electrical power connection
(a) In order to simplify the electrical power connection, a single-point
electrical connection and unit-mounted disconnect switch are often
available as optional accessories. In this case, the three-phase
electrical power from the building electrical power distribution
system would connect to the chiller at a single point: the unit-
mounted disconnect switch. All wiring, unit controls, safeties,
starters for the compressor(s) and oil pump, and other electrical
components necessary for proper operation of the chiller would
be factory-installed so the only field electrical connection required
would be made at the unit-mounted disconnect switch. Also, a
120 volt (V)/1 Phase (Ø) control transformer is often available as an
102 Chapter Four
Figure 4-11 Floor plan representation of a water-cooled chiller and auxiliary hydronic equipment.
optional accessory so that the 120V/1Ø power required for the

120V/1Ø components on the chiller is derived through this trans
former from the three-phase power supply. This option avoids the
requirement for a separate 120V/1Ø electrical power connection
from the building electrical power distribution system.
(2) Dual-point electrical power connection
(a) If the chiller has two compressors, the standard offering is normally a
dual-point electrical connection. In this case, two three-phase electrical
power connections are required for the chiller, one for each compressor.
(b) Unit-mounted disconnect switches are normally available for this
configuration as an optional accessory and so is the 120V/1Ø control
transformer.
(3) Whether the electrical power connection to the chiller is single point or
dual point should be coordinated with the project electrical engineer
because the design of the building electrical power distribution system
may favor one configuration over the other.
Central Plant 103
Figure 4-12 Photograph of a water-cooled chiller.
e. Automatic temperature controls (ATC) connection.

(1) The ATC connection will be made at the chiller control panel and will
integrate the operation of the chiller into the overall chilled water system.
2. Air-cooled chiller (Figs. 4-13 through 4-15)
a. Chilled water supply and return piping connections to the cooler.
b. Electrical power connection.
(1) The electrical power connection is the same as is required for a water-
cooled chiller, except additional factory-installed wiring and starters
will be provided for the condenser fans.
c. ATC connection.
(1) The ATC connection is the same as is required for a water-cooled chiller.
The following are design considerations for chillers.
1. Chiller selection
a. Type of compressor: Although it varies from one manufacturer to another,
the type of compressors used and the associated range of chiller capacities
are generally as follows:
(1) Reciprocating compressors: 25- to 75-ton chillers
(2) Scroll compressors: 25- to 500-ton chillers

Figure 4-13 Floor plan representation of two air-cooled chillers.
Figure 4-14 Photograph of an air-cooled chiller.
104
Central Plant 105
Figure 4-15 Connection detail for an air-cooled chiller.
(3) Screw compressors: 75- to 800-ton chillers

(4) Centrifugal compressors: 100- to 4,000-ton chillers
A chiller manufacturer’s representative should be consulted to determine
the appropriate type of chiller for each application.
b. Refrigerant: Refrigerants most commonly used in HVAC equipment fall
into one of the following three categories: chlorofluorocarbon- (CFC),
hydrochlorofluorocarbon- (HCFC), and hydrofluorocarbon- (HFC) based
refrigerants.
In accordance with the Montreal Protocol, an international treaty
administered by the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP),
which controls the consumption and production of ozone-depleting
substances, CFC-based refrigerants, such as R-11 and R-12, are no longer
produced due to their ozone-depletion potential (ODP). Today, CFC-based
refrigerants are available only through stockpiled resources and are used to
replenish refrigerant in existing equipment. HCFC-based refrigerants, such
as R-22 and R-123, have a lesser ODP and are therefore not scheduled to
cease production until the year 2030. HFC-based refrigerants, such as R-134a
and R-410A, do not have any ODP and are therefore not regulated by the
Montreal Protocol.
Chillers utilizing HFC-based refrigerants should be selected for use
because they are not regulated by the Montreal Protocol. Chillers utilizing
HCFC-based refrigerants should not be selected for use because, according
to ASHRAE, the expected service life of chillers is 20 years or more, which
would mean this equipment may still be operational after the year 2030
when HCFC-based refrigerants have ceased production.
Cost, availability in competing manufacturers’ equipment, equipment
efficiency, and the owner’s requirements should also be given careful
consideration when selecting the refrigerant for a chiller.
c. Capacity: Chiller capacity should equal the estimated peak cooling load of
the areas served by the chiller. Some excess capacity can be allowed for
future loads if these loads will be added within 5 years or so of the chiller
installation. However, it is not advisable to oversize a chiller because of the
106 Chapter Four
added cost of the larger equipment and also because chillers typically
operate most efficiently when they are fully loaded.
d. Multiple chillers: It is not common for there to be any redundancy in chiller
capacity when the chilled water system serves cooling equipment providing
comfort cooling only. Multiple chillers, each sized for the full load or some
percentage thereof, are only necessary if the areas served have a critical
requirement for cooling. Examples include certain areas of hospitals and
data centers. Multiple chillers may also be desired for large-capacity cooling
systems where the owner may want to limit each individual chiller to some
maximum size. Finally, multiple chillers may be justified for a chilled water
system that utilizes a thermal storage system. In this case, one chiller may
be dedicated to producing chilled brine for the thermal storage system and
another chiller may be dedicated to producing chilled water for the air
systems and terminal equipment.
e. Capacity control: Because a chiller is seldom fully loaded, it is necessary
for the chiller to be able to reduce its cooling capacity during part-load
operation. The simplest way to reduce chiller capacity is to cycle the
compressor. However, if this occurs too frequently, the life of the compressor
will be shortened. If the only means of reducing the chiller capacity is
through compressor cycling, multiple compressors for each chiller are
recommended. This will reduce the frequency of cycling for each compressor
and provide closer control of the chilled water supply temperature. Other
means of controlling chiller capacity are available and depend upon the
type of compressor used. Individual cylinders can be unloaded for
reciprocating compressors, a slide valve can be used for screw compressors,
and prerotation vanes can be used for centrifugal compressors. Although
the HVAC system designer should know how the capacity is controlled, it
is more important to know that it can be controlled and to what degree.
Capacity control to 25% of a chiller’s full-load capacity is normally adequate
for HVAC applications. For example, a 100-ton chiller should be capable of
reducing its capacity down to 25 tons.
f. Efficiency: A chiller’s energy performance is rated in accordance with the
guidelines established by the Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration
Institute (AHRI) Standard 550/590 (formerly ARI Standard 550/590). The
two most common measures of a chiller’s full-load energy performance
are:
(1) kW/ton: Electrical power input expressed in terms of kilowatts (kW)
per cooling output expressed in terms of tons.29 A lower kW/ton
indicates better energy performance.
(2) Energy efficiency ratio (EER): Cooling output expressed in terms of
British thermal units per hour (Btuh) per electrical power input
expressed in terms of watts (W). A higher EER indicates better energy
performance.
For example, a 100-ton air-cooled chiller that requires 110 kW input has a
full-load energy performance of 1.10 kW/ton or 10.9 EER.30
Generally, water-cooled chillers have better energy performance than air-
cooled chillers. However, one must be careful when comparing the energy
performance ratings of water-cooled chillers to air-cooled chillers because
Central Plant 107
the full-load electrical power input for water-cooled chillers is limited to the
compressor power only. For air-cooled chillers, the full-load electrical power
input includes the compressor power plus the condenser fan power. For
example, a water-cooled chiller (unit) may be rated at 0.65 kW/ton compared
to the same size air-cooled chiller (package) rated at 1.10 kW/ton. This is
not a valid comparison because other equipment is associated with the
water-cooled chiller system in addition to the chiller itself. When comparing
the overall energy performance (kW/ton) of a water-cooled chiller (system)
to an air-cooled chiller (package), the electrical power input (kW) for all of
the equipment associated with the water-cooled chiller (system) must be
included in the comparison. This includes the water-cooled chiller
compressor(s), condenser water pump, and cooling tower fan(s). The
combined electrical input (kW) of all of this equipment should be divided
by the water-cooled chiller’s full-load cooling output in tons. This value can
be used to compare the energy performance (kW/ton) of the water-cooled
chiller (system) to the air-cooled chiller (package).
g. Voltage: Chillers used for HVAC applications will utilize three-phase
electrical power. The highest secondary three-phase voltage available in the
building will normally be used to serve the chiller in order to keep the wire
sizes of the feeder serving the chiller as small as possible. For example, if a
building has both 480V/3Ø and 208V/3Ø power available, the chiller will
normally be selected to utilize 480V/3Ø power. The project electrical
engineer should be consulted to determine the appropriate voltage for the
chiller. The HVAC system designer should also ensure that the chiller can
be furnished by the manufacturer at the desired voltage.
2. Freeze protection for outdoor chiller installations: For areas subject to freezing
temperatures, chillers installed outdoors must have some means of protecting
the water in the outdoor pipes and cooler from freezing. There are three ways
to accomplish this:
a. Drain the outdoor piping and cooler if the chiller will not be used during
freezing conditions.
(1) If the outdoor piping and cooler are empty, freezing is not a concern.
Isolation valves for the outdoor components must be provided indoors
and drains must be provided in the low points of the outdoor
components. Draining of the outdoor components becomes a main
tenance responsibility for the owner and must be performed every year
prior to the onset of freezing temperatures. Refilling of the outdoor
components must also be performed prior to the onset of cooling
operation in the spring of each year.
b. Provide electric heating for all components subject to freezing if water is
used in the chilled water loop.
(1) Thermostatically controlled heat tape is required on all outdoor piping,
valves, and specialties. The heat output of the heat tape, expressed in
terms of watts/foot (W/ft), depends upon the size of the pipe, thickness
of insulation, and the design winter outdoor temperature. The HVAC
system designer should consult with the heat tape manufacturer’s
representative or catalog data and specify the level of protection (W/ft)
required for all exterior chilled water piping. Heat output of 5 W/ft is
108 Chapter Four
typical for heat tape applications. The manufacturer’s installation
instructions must also be followed by the installing contractor because it
is necessary to wrap the heat tape around the piping, valves, and
specialties in an appropriate fashion in order to provide effective freeze
protection. Furthermore, the chiller should be specified with an electric
heater in the cooler in order to provide freeze protection down to 0°F.
Freeze protection can also be provided down to −20°F if the chiller controls
are able to start the chilled water pump and circulate chilled water through
the cooler. The HVAC system designer should be aware that electric heat
tape and an electric heater in the cooler do not provide any freeze
protection in the event of a power outage unless these electric freeze
protection components are connected to a backup electric power system.
c. Utilize brine (typically a solution of propylene or ethylene glycol) in the
chilled water loop.
(1) The freezing point of the brine should be 15°F below the lowest expected
ambient temperature. A solution of 40% propylene glycol is common
because it provides freeze protection down to about −8°F.
(2) Although glycol solutions provide effective freeze protection, the brine
has a higher specific gravity, higher viscosity, and lower specific heat
than water. Therefore, glycol solutions are less-efficient fluids than water
for the following reasons:
(a) The higher specific gravity means glycol solutions are more dense
than water and therefore require more pumping power to circulate
the same flow rate of water.
(b) The higher viscosity of the glycol solution increases the friction
losses in the system, which cause the overall system head to be
higher than the same flow rate of water. Also, the higher viscosity
reduces the heat transfer efficiency of the heat exchangers within
the system, such as the cooler in the chiller(s) and cooling coils in
the air systems and terminal equipment. This requires the chilled
water system flow rate for glycol solutions to be greater than that
of water. These two factorshigher system head and greater chilled
water flow raterequire more chilled water pumping power than
the same system circulating water.
(c) The lower specific heat of the glycol solution means less heat can be
transferred by 1 gal of glycol solution than by 1 gal of water. Thus, a
greater flow rate of glycol solution is required to transfer the same
amount of heat as a system utilizing water as the heat transfer fluid.
(3) Some further considerations for glycol systems are:
(a) A glycol solution must be used to make up for leaks in the system;
domestic water alone cannot be used. This requires a glycol feed
system consisting of a glycol solution storage tank and feed pump.
(b) The glycol should be diluted with soft water31 and have a low
concentration of chloride and sulfate ions. This may require the
addition of a water softener32 to pretreat the (domestic) fill water
used to dilute the glycol. Inappropriate fill water chemistry can lead
to a number of problems, including the creation of sludge in the
glycol solution (which can reduce heat transfer efficiency) and the
depletion of the corrosion inhibitor in the glycol solution.
Central Plant 109
3. Primary-secondary pumping: All chillers have a certain minimum chilled water

flow rate that must be maintained through the cooler. The easiest way to meet
this requirement is to maintain a constant chilled water flow rate through each
chiller cooler regardless of the building cooling load. In order to ensure constant
chilled water flow rate through the coolers of all chillers in a system, a primary-
secondary pumping system is normally employed. A primary pump is
dedicated to each chiller, and the secondary pump (which can be a variable
speed pump) circulates flow through the chilled water system in the building.
The primary and secondary pumping loops share a common pipe that joins the
primary and secondary pumping loops.
Variable speed pumps should not be used to circulate chilled water through
the chiller coolers unless the chilled water system is specially designed as a
variable primary flow system, as described below.
4. Variable primary flow: If the chillers are suitable for variable chilled water flow
rates through the coolers, a variable speed pumping system, consisting of a
single, variable speed primary (system) pump, can be utilized for greater
energy efficiency. In this arrangement, the chilled water flow rate is modulated
to meet the fluctuating cooling load of the building. Pumping energy is saved
because there is only one pump in the system and also because the total system
flow rate, including the flow rates through the chillers, is reduced during part-
load conditions. Again, it is very important that the chillers be suitable for
variable chilled water flow rates through the coolers, otherwise the chillers may
shut down due to a low refrigerant pressure safety.
5. Space requirements: The space required for proper installation of indoor and
outdoor chillers must be carefully coordinated with the chillers that form the
basis of the system design. The HVAC system designer must realize that the
actual chillers installed for the project may be from a different manufacturer
than the basis of design and, as a result, will have somewhat different physical
dimensions and characteristics. Some allowance should be made in the layout
of the mechanical room for these differences between equipment manufacturers.
However, if a two-pass cooler (having piping connections on the same end of
the cooler) is used as the basis of design, it is not reasonable to assume that a
one-pass or three-pass cooler (having piping connections on opposite ends of
the cooler) will be acceptable. The owner and installing contractor must
understand that the HVAC system design cannot be capable of accommodating
drastic departures from the design intent.
6. Clearances
a. Maintenance: Refer to the manufacturer’s product data for the maintenance
clearances required on all sides of the chiller. Typically, 36 in. of clearance is
recommended on all sides of the chiller. If two chillers are installed side
by side, the space between the chillers can usually be shared for mainte
nance clearance so that a double-wide clearance is not required between
the chillers.
b. Tube pull: Sufficient clearance, usually the full length of the cooler or
condenser, is required for the tubes in either of these heat exchangers to be
cleaned or removed and replaced. The manufacturer’s product data will
identify the appropriate end of each heat exchanger for this clearance to be
provided. It is common for this clearance requirement to be accommodated
110 Chapter Four
through the equipment room doorway so that all of the clear space is not
required within the equipment room.
c. Electrical: Article 110.26 of the National Electric Code (NEC) defines working
space requirements around electrical equipment that is 600 V nominal, or
less. The depth of the working space required in front of the point(s) where
the electrical power wiring connects to the chiller will be 36 in., 42 in., or
48 in., depending upon the voltage of the live parts and whether the parts
on the other side of the working space are: (1) guarded by insulating
materials, (2) grounded, or (3) live. The project electrical engineer should be
consulted to determine the appropriate working space required for the
electrical connections to the chiller.
7. Installation
a. Indoors: An indoor chiller is normally installed on a concrete housekeeping
pad that is 4 in. high and 4 to 6 in. larger than the chiller base frame on all
sides. The concrete pad is reinforced with wire mesh, and anchor bolts are
cast into the pad in the locations of the bolt holes in the chiller base frame.
Neoprene vibration isolation pads, typically ¾ in. thick and of the quantity
required to support the load, should be used to provide vibration isolation
between the chiller base frame and the housekeeping pad.
b. Outdoors: An outdoor chiller installed on grade will normally be installed
on a reinforced concrete pad that is thick enough to support the weight of
the chiller. The project structural engineer normally designs the concrete
pad, including the appropriate reinforcement. Similar to an indoor
housekeeping pad, anchor bolts are cast into the pad and neoprene
vibration isolation pads are used to isolate the chiller base frame from the
concrete pad. If vandalism is a concern, the chiller may be surrounded by
a fence in order to maintain the appropriate maintenance and electrical
clearances around the chiller and also to allow for tube pull clearance
(usually through a gate in the fence). The manufacturer’s product data
should be consulted to determine the minimum clearance from solid
walls, fences, or other heat-rejecting equipment to ensure that adequate
space for airflow and heat rejection is provided around the outdoor
chiller.
An outdoor chiller that is installed on a building roof will normally
be installed on a horizontal structural steel frame that is supported 12
to 18 in. above the roof by vertical members that are rigidly attached to
the roof structure. This height above the roof allows sufficient clearance
for the roofing system to be replaced under the steel frame without
disturbing the chiller. Holes are provided in the horizontal structural
steel frame to coordinate with the locations of the bolt holes in the chiller
base frame. The chiller is connected to the steel frame with anchor bolts,
and neoprene pads are used to isolate the chiller base frame from the steel
frame.
c. Coordination: The project structural engineer will design the indoor
housekeeping pads, outdoor concrete pads on grade, and structural steel
equipment supports for roof-mounted equipment. Therefore, the HVAC
system designer must communicate the physical dimensions, weight, and
anchor bolt locations of the chiller(s) that form the basis of design with
Central Plant 111
the project structural engineer during the design phase. During con
struction, the project structural engineer should also review and approve
the chiller equipment submittal and modify the design of the equipment
bases as required to coordinate with the physical dimensions, weight, and
anchor bolt holes of the actual chillers that will be installed for the
project.
8. Compressor starter: Normally, a full-voltage, across-the-line starter is provided
for each compressor as a standard feature by the chiller manufacturer. However,
the full-voltage starting (or inrush) current of compressors can be quite high,
making the use of this type of starter undesirable from an electrical power
distribution standpoint. Therefore, it is common for chiller manufacturers to
offer a wye-start, delta-run reduced-voltage starter for each compressor as an
option to accomplish what is referred to as a “soft” start of the chiller
compressors. This type of starter, commonly referred to as a wye-delta starter,
can only be utilized if the compressors are allowed to start unloaded. That is
because the reduced voltage of the wye-start configuration (58% of full voltage)
applies only about one-third the starting torque of a full-voltage starter. Once
the compressor attains full speed, the windings are reconfigured to the delta-
run configuration, which applies full voltage to the motor windings and allows
the motor full torque capability.
A variable frequency drive (VFD) can also be used to accomplish a soft start
for certain types of compressor; however, VFDs are rarely used for their soft-
start characteristics only. The benefit of varying the speed of a compressor
through a VFD is the reduction in energy use that can be realized during part-
load operation of the chiller. The chiller manufacturer should be consulted to
determine whether VFDs for the compressors are an option and, if so, how to
design the chilled water system to take full advantage of their energy-saving
potential.
9. Water temperatures
a. Chilled water: A chilled water supply temperature of 45°F is common,
although a lower chilled water supply temperature can be used if required
by the chilled water system.33 A chilled water temperature rise of 10°F is
common, although a chilled water temperature rise as high as 15 to 17°F can
be used to reduce chilled water pumping energy as long as the chiller and
the chilled water coils in the air systems and terminal equipment are selected
based on these operating parameters.34
b. Condenser water: A maximum condenser water supply temperature of 85°F
with a 10°F temperature rise through the chiller condenser is a common
criterion for selecting water-cooled chillers and their associated cooling
towers.35 In addition to ensuring the chiller and cooling tower have sufficient
capacity at the maximum condenser water supply temperature, it is also
necessary to determine the minimum condenser water supply temperature
allowed by the chillers selected for the project. Generally, chillers cannot
receive condenser water with a temperature below approximately 70°F
without shutting down through a low refrigerant pressure safety. Constant-
speed condenser water pumps are normally used to circulate condenser
water through the chiller condenser and cooling tower because it is not
desirable to vary the condenser water flow rate through cooling towers. For
112 Chapter Four
this reason, the cooling tower fan(s) must be cycled on and off or the speed
of the fans must be modulated through two-speed motors or variable
frequency drives to maintain the temperature of the condenser water
supplied to the chiller condenser between its maximum and minimum
levels.
10. Chemical treatment: Proper chemical treatment of the water in both the chilled
water and condenser water loops is necessary to reduce corrosion and scaling
of the internal pipe walls and heat exchange surfaces in these systems.
a. Chilled water: Refer to the Chemical Treatment subsection of the Auxiliary
Hydronic Equipment section of this chapter for a discussion of the chemical
treatment required for the closed chilled water loop.
b. Condenser water: Refer to the Design Considerations subsection of the
Cooling Tower section of this chapter for a discussion of the chemical
treatment required for the open condenser water loop.
11. Chilled water loop volume: The volume of the chilled water loop should exceed
3 gal/ton of chiller capacity in order to achieve stability and accuracy of the
chilled water supply temperature. If the chilled water loop volume is less than
3 gal/ton, the chiller may have to cycle frequently at part-load conditions and
the chilled water supply temperature may fluctuate unacceptably as a result. In
order to compensate for a low chilled water system volume, it may be necessary
to design a chilled water storage tank to add the necessary water volume to the
chilled water system.
12. Fouling factor: A fouling factor should be utilized in the selection of both
the cooler and water-cooled condenser for chillers. AHRI Standard 550/590
recommends a fouling factor of 0.0001 ft2·h·°F/Btu for the cooler selection and
0.00025 ft2·h·°F/Btu for the water-cooled condenser selection.
13. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-2010—Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems
requirements:
a. Because refrigerants have varying levels of toxicity and flammability,
ASHRAE has developed the guidelines contained within ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 15-2010 for their safe use indoors.
b. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-2010, Section 8.11, describes the refrigerant
detection, exhaust, and alarm requirements if a machinery room is required
by Section 7.4 to house all of the components containing refrigerant. The
formula in Section 8.11.5 is used to calculate the exhaust airflow.
c. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-2010, Section 8.11.6, prohibits combustion
equipment from being installed in the same room as refrigerant-containing
equipment unless the combustion equipment has a direct combustion air
connection to the outdoors or the room is equipped with a refrigerant
detection system that will automatically shut down the combustion process
if a refrigerant leak is detected.
d. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-2010, Section 9.7.8, requires refrigerant pressure
relief piping to be routed from the refrigerant pressure relief device on the
chiller to the outdoors and “discharge to the atmosphere at a location not
less than 15 ft above the adjoining ground level and not less than 20 ft from
any window, ventilation opening, or exit in any building.” This piping
must be sized for a maximum back pressure in the refrigerant pressure
Central Plant 113
relief piping, which depends upon the refrigerant flow and the total
equivalent length of the piping. The manufacturer’s product data should be
consulted for pipe sizing guidelines.
14. Noise: Refer to Chap. 8 for recommendations to control noise from chillers.
15. Controls: Chillers are equipped with on-board systems that control the internal
functions of the chiller. These functions include control of the refrigeration
system to maintain the setpoint of the controlled variable (normally leaving
chilled water temperature). In addition, the on-board control system regulates
other necessary operating parameters that are not of particular interest to the
HVAC system designer, such as oil temperature and refrigerant suction
pressure. Many of the on-board control system parameters can be accessed
and adjusted through the chiller control panel or they can be communicated to
the building automation system (BAS) (if there is one) for central monitoring
and control.36 Of particular concern for the HVAC system designer is how the
chiller operates within the overall chilled water system. This is summarized as
follows:
a. First, the chiller must be placed into the “ready” mode. This can be
performed automatically by sending a signal to the chiller control panel
from the BAS or can be performed manually at the chiller control panel. If
the chiller operates only during the cooling season, it will be placed into the
ready mode at the beginning of the cooling season and deactivated at the
end of the cooling season of each year. While in the ready mode, the chiller
will operate under its on-board control system.37
b. Prior to starting the chiller refrigeration system, the chiller control panel
will start the chilled water pump (and condenser water pump if the chiller
is water-cooled) and verify that there is water flowing through the cooler
(and condenser if the chiller is water-cooled). Chilled water (and condenser
water) flow is proven either by a flow switch installed in the inlet or outlet
connections to the cooler (and condenser) or by a differential pressure
switch that is piped between the inlet and outlet connections on the cooler
(and condenser).38 After receiving the start signal, starting the associated
pumps, and proving water flow, the chiller refrigeration system will be
started.
c. During operation, the chiller varies its cooling capacity (as discussed
previously) through its on-board control system to maintain the setpoint of
the controlled variable (normally leaving chilled water temperature). It is
also necessary to control the entering condenser water temperature for
water-cooled chillers. This is done by cycling the cooling tower fan(s) on
and off, by varying the speed of the cooling tower fan(s), or by diverting
condenser water from the cooling tower distribution nozzles to the cooling
tower sump.39 Simple on/off control of a single cooling tower fan and
control of a bypass valve can be accomplished by the chiller control panel.
However, on/off or variable speed control of multiple cooling tower fans is
normally accomplished by the cooling tower control panel.
d. When one of the operating parameters of the chiller deviates beyond
established limits, an alarm will signal at the chiller control panel and may
also signal at the BAS if designed to do so. The fault can be either critical,
114 Chapter Four
requiring a shutdown of the chiller, or noncritical, requiring notification
only. Upon experiencing a critical fault, the redundant chiller (if there is
one) will be placed into the ready mode through a communication link
between the two chiller control panels or through the BAS and a start signal
will be given. If there is no redundant chiller, chilled water will not be
produced until the problem that caused the critical fault is resolved and it is
cleared in the chiller control panel. Alarms are typically logged electronically
at the chiller control panel and can also be logged at the BAS.
Cooling Towers
Cooling towers are common components of centralized cooling systems. Cooling
towers are used either in conjunction with water-cooled chillers for chilled water
systems or with plate and frame heat exchangers for water source heat pump systems.
Purpose
Cooling towers are used for HVAC applications in conjunction with water-cooled HVAC
equipment to cool water by exposing it either directly or indirectly to the ambient air.
Cooling towers that expose the cooling water directly to the ambient air are called open
cooling towers. Those that expose the cooling water indirectly to the ambient air are
called closed-circuit cooling towers.
For open cooling towers, the water circulating through the water-cooled equipment
is the same water that is circulated through the cooling tower; this water is in direct
contact with the ambient air. Thus, for open cooling towers, the cooling water system is
an open system.40 An open cooling tower is illustrated in Chap. 39, Fig. 3 of the 2008
ASHRAE Handbook—HVAC Systems and Equipment.
For closed-circuit cooling towers, the water circulating through the water-cooled
equipment is circulated through a separate heat exchanger coil mounted within the
cooling tower. This water is not in direct contact with the ambient air. Water circulated
within a separate open system within the cooling tower is in direct contact with the
ambient air and is sprayed over the heat exchanger coil. Thus, for closed-circuit cooling
towers, there are two separate cooling water systems: the closed system,41 which circu-
lates water through the water-cooled equipment, and the open system, which circulates
water through the cooling tower and is sprayed over the heat exchanger coil. A closed-
circuit cooling tower is illustrated in Chap. 39, Fig. 4 of the 2008 ASHRAE Handbook—
HVAC Systems and Equipment.
Cooling towers do not have any refrigeration components. For open cooling
towers, water is distributed through nozzles over the fill, which is typically corrugated
polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Air is drawn or blown through the fill by a fan. As some of
the water in contact with the air evaporates (normally about 1.1% of the total water flow
at design conditions), the water remaining in the liquid state is cooled through the latent
heat of vaporization (the heat absorbed by the evaporated water during the evapora-
tion process) and flows through the fill to the sump located at the bottom of the cooling
tower. This water is piped to the circulating pump, which circulates it through the
water-cooled equipment. The water that is lost through evaporation is replaced by
domestic water through the makeup water connection. Closed-circuit cooling towers
do not have any fill. Instead, the open-loop water is sprayed through the distribution
Central Plant 115
nozzles across the closed-loop heat exchanger coil. The open-loop water also flows to
the cooling tower sump and is circulated from the sump to the distribution nozzles by
a pump normally located below the cooling tower.
There are various types of mechanical-draft42 cooling towers, which are defined by
the orientation of the water flow with respect to the air flow and by the arrangement of
the fan with respect to the fill. The types of mechanical-draft cooling towers are described
as follows:
Crossflow: Air and water flow in opposite directions.
Counterflow: Air and water flow at right angles to each other (Figs. 4-16 and 4-17).
Forced air: Air is blown through the fill.
Induced air: Air is drawn through the fill.
The various types of mechanical-draft cooling towers are illustrated in Chap. 39,
Fig. 10 of the 2008 ASHRAE Handbook—HVAC Systems and Equipment.
Connections
Because cooling towers are frequently used to reject heat from water-cooled refrig-
eration equipment, the pipe conveying water from the cooling tower is often referred
to as the condenser water supply pipe and the pipe conveying water to the cooling
tower is often referred to as the condenser water return pipe. This is the naming con-
vention that will be used in this section. However, cooling towers may also be used
to reject heat from nonrefrigeration equipment, such as a heat exchanger. In this case,
a naming convention for the piping (such as cooling tower supply and cooling tower
return) must be developed by the HVAC system designer and used consistently for
the project.
Connections for cooling towers consist of the following:
1. Condenser water return piping connection.

2. Condenser water supply piping connection.
3. Equalizer piping connection (where multiple cooling towers will be installed).
Figure 4-16 Floor plan representation of a forced draft counterflow cooling tower.
116 Chapter Four
Figure 4-17 Photograph of a forced draft counterflow cooling tower.
4. Makeup water piping connection.

5. Drain piping connection.
6. Overflow piping connection.
7. Electrical power connection.
a. Typically, the electric power connection to a cooling tower will be a single-
point, three-phase electrical power connection to a unit-mounted control
panel that contains the starters or VFDs for the fans, contactors43 for the
sump heaters (if winter operation is required), water level controls, fan
controls, and safeties. Wiring from the control panel to the various unit-
mounted components will be installed at the factory. Other wiring, such as
the connection to the field-installed condenser water supply temperature
sensor, will be field-installed.
b. A separate electrical power connection, typically single-phase, for freeze-
protection heat tape on insulated exterior piping will also be required if the
cooling tower will be operated during the winter.
8. ATC connection.
a. The ATC connection will be made at the control panel and will integrate the
operation of the cooling tower into the overall cooling system.
Central Plant 117
For all cooling tower systems (open and closed-circuit), cooling water is pumped
through the water-cooled equipment where it absorbs the heat rejected by the equip-
ment. This water is then circulated to the cooling tower where it is cooled (directly or
indirectly) mainly by the evaporation of a portion of the water that is in direct contact
with the ambient air. For closed-circuit cooling towers, the water contained within the
closed-loop heat exchanger coil is cooled by the evaporative effect of the open-loop
cooling tower water. The greater the rate of evaporation, the closer the leaving water
temperature will approach44 the wet bulb temperature of the ambient air.45 The rate at
which the water evaporates in the cooling tower is proportional to the surface area of
the water in the cooling tower and the airspeed, and is inversely proportional to the wet
bulb temperature of the ambient air. Thus, an increase in the surface area of the water
and/or airspeed in the cooling tower and/or a decrease in the wet bulb temperature of
the ambient air results in a decreased approach temperature. A typical approach tem-
perature for HVAC applications is between 5 and 10°F.
Range is defined as the difference between the water temperatures entering and
leaving the cooling tower and is determined by the heat load on the cooling tower and
the water flow rate.
Typical design temperatures for a cooling tower system are as follows:
• Cooling tower entering water temperature: 95°F

• Cooling tower leaving water temperature: 85°F
• Ambient wet bulb (wb) temperature: 78°F
From these design temperatures, it can be seen that the approach is 7°F46 and the
range is 10°F.47
Other design considerations are as follows:
1. The entering and leaving water temperatures and the water flow rate through
a cooling tower must be consistent with the water-cooled equipment that it
serves.
2. A typical flow rate for a cooling tower serving water-cooled refrigeration
equipment is 3 gpm per ton of refrigeration capacity.
3. The water flow rate through a cooling tower should be full flow to the
distribution nozzles or full bypass to the cooling tower sump.
4. Cooling tower capacity is modulated by varying the airflow through the
cooling tower in order to maintain a constant leaving water (condenser water
supply) temperature. This is accomplished by cycling the cooling tower fan(s)
on and off, by varying the speed of the cooling tower fan(s) or by diverting
condenser water from the cooling tower distribution nozzles to the cooling
tower sump.
5. During start-up of a water-cooled chiller, condenser water should be diverted
from the distribution nozzles in the cooling tower to the cooling tower sump
until the condenser water supply temperature rises to the desired temperature,
which must be above the minimum condenser water supply temperature
required by the chiller.
118 Chapter Four
6. The condenser water supply temperature is typically maintained at 85°F.
However, because refrigeration equipment typically operates more efficiently
at a lower condenser water supply temperature, one way to improve energy
performance is to allow the condenser water temperature to float down to the
minimum condenser water supply temperature (approximately 70°F) whenever
possible.
7. If winter operation of the cooling tower is required, the cooling tower and all
exterior piping will need to be winterized. Winterization includes the installation
of a heater in the cooling tower sump, which can be electric, steam, or hot water.
The heater should be sized to keep the water in the sump at 40°F at the design
winter outdoor temperature. Also, the exterior piping, including the condenser
water piping, drain piping, and overflow piping, should be heat-taped and
insulated to prevent it from freezing. Typically, heat tape is self-regulating and
does not require any external controls, only an electrical power connection.
8. Some types of cooling towers are more suitable for winter operation than others.
The manufacturer’s representative should be contacted to determine which
type is most suitable for each application.
9. Cooling towers can be used for waterside economizer operation in the winter.
During waterside economizer operation, both condenser water and chilled
water are diverted from the chiller to a plate and frame heat exchanger by
3-way diverting valves installed in the condenser water and chilled water
loops. In this configuration, the hot-side chilled water loop is cooled through
the plate and frame heat exchanger by the cold-side cooling tower loop. Typical
temperatures for the plate and frame heat exchanger during waterside
economizer operation are:
a. Hot side (chilled water):
(1) 55°F entering water temperature (EWT)
(2) 45°F leaving water temperature (LWT)
b. Cold side (cooling tower water):
(1) 38°F EWT
(2) 48°F LWT
Further details regarding the design of waterside economizer operation are
beyond the scope of this book.
10. If the cooling tower is used for waterside economizer, the exterior cooling tower
piping should be heat taped and insulated for freeze protection. The interior
cooling tower piping should be insulated to prevent condensation on the
surface of the piping.
11. Condenser water piping does not need to be insulated (either indoors or outdoors)
unless the cooling tower is used for winter operation utilizing standard condenser
water temperatures (outdoor insulation required) or waterside economizer using
depressed condenser water temperatures (indoor and outdoor insulation
required). (Uninsulated condenser water piping assumes the cooling tower sump
and the outdoor piping will be drained during the winter to prevent freezing.)
12. Because cooling towers are open systems, the following should be observed:
a. The cooling tower sump must be higher in elevation than the condenser
water pump. This will ensure that the pump suction is always flooded.
Central Plant 119
b. Piping and fittings between the cooling tower and the condenser water
pump should be minimized to reduce friction losses. This will minimize the
reductions to the net positive suction head that is available for the pump.
c. The net positive suction head available (NPSHA) for the condenser water
pump must exceed the net positive suction head required (NPSHR) by the
condenser water pump.48
d. The height of the distribution nozzles above the surface of the water in the
sump (i.e., the elevation head of the system) must be included in the
condenser water pump head calculation because the condenser water pump
will have to lift the condenser water this height. The pump head calculation
for the rest of the condenser water piping system is the same as for a closed
system.
13. If makeup water piping is not connected to the makeup water connection on
the cooling tower, it may be connected to the piping between the cooling tower
and the condenser water pump, preferably indoors to avoid the need for freeze
protection. A slow-acting solenoid valve should be specified to reduce the
potential for water hammer in the makeup water piping. An electric water level
sensor in the cooling tower would be required for this configuration.
14. A backflow preventer is required in the connection of the makeup water piping
to the domestic water system.
15. The water in the sump of the cooling tower must be maintained at a certain
level. In order to maintain an appropriate water level, the cooling tower must
be equipped with a water level sensor, which is either the (standard) mechanical
float with integral makeup water valve or an (optional) electric water level
sensor. For the electric water level sensor, the water level controller (normally
located in the cooling tower control panel) receives an input signal from the
electric water level sensor and sends an output signal to the solenoid valve on
the makeup water line to open or close the valve as required to maintain the
proper water level in the cooling tower sump.
16. The following should be observed for multiple cooling tower (or multiple-cell
cooling tower) installations with common supply and return piping:
a. The piping between the cooling towers and condenser water pumps should
be as symmetrical as possible to obtain balanced flow through the cooling
towers (or cooling tower cells).
b. Balancing valves should be designed for the return piping connection to
each cooling tower (or cooling tower cell) to balance the water flow to the
distribution nozzles.
c. An equalizing pipe with shutoff valve should be designed to connect
multiple cooling towers. The equalizing pipe will correct any flow
imbalances that may arise due to clogged distribution nozzles or strainers.
The equalizing pipe should be designed in accordance with the cooling
tower manufacturer’s instructions. The general rule is that the equalizing
pipe should accommodate approximately 15% of the largest cooling tower’s
flow at a pressure differential, including valves and fittings, not to exceed
1 in. water column. This will ensure that the water level in the cooling tower
sumps will differ by no more than 1 in.
120 Chapter Four
d. Automatic shutoff valves should be designed for the supply, return, and
equalizer piping connections to isolate idle cooling towers (or cooling
tower cells).
e. Separate condenser water pumps should be designed for each cooling tower
(or cooling tower cell) to be energized in conjunction with each cooling
tower (or cooling tower cell).
f. The cooling tower overflow pipes should be installed at the same elevation.
17. Flexible pipe connectors are required for all pipe connections to cooling towers
to isolate the vibration generated by the cooling tower fan(s) from the piping
systems.
18. An immersion-type temperature sensor is required in the condenser water supply
pipe which is common to all cooling towers. The condenser water supply tempera
ture is used as input for the condenser water supply temperature controller.
19. A strainer in the outlet connection is standard equipment for cooling towers to
prevent debris from entering the condenser water system. Therefore, it is not
necessary to design a strainer in the suction piping connection for the condenser
water pump.
20. If additional filtration of the condenser water is desired, the following options
are available:
a. A side-stream filtration system that circulates a portion of the condenser
water flow through a sand filter using the head developed by the condenser
water pump. The sand filter must be backwashed periodically when it
becomes clogged.
b. A sump water filtration system that consists of discharge nozzles installed
in the cooling tower sump. These nozzles force high-velocity water jets
across the bottom of the sump to inlet openings also mounted at the bottom
elevation of the sump. This water is circulated by a separate filtration system
pump through a sand filter, which traps the debris. The sand filter must be
backwashed periodically when it becomes clogged.
21. Typically, cooling towers are mounted on posts at an elevation of at least 18 in.
above grade or the building roof to allow access under the cooling towers for
inspection and maintenance.
22. Noise generated by cooling towers is a major concern. Induced draft cooling
towers with propeller fans are typically the noisiest type of cooling tower.
Forced draft cooling towers with centrifugal fans are typically the quietest
mechanical-draft cooling towers.49 A sound attenuator may be available to
reduce the noise generated by a cooling tower. The manufacturer’s represen
tative should be contacted to discuss the availability and suitability of sound
attenuators for each application.
23. Drift, which is the entrainment of water droplets in the air passing through a
cooling tower, is largely eliminated by the drift eliminator in the cooling tower.
However, some drift escapes from cooling towers (known as drift loss).
Therefore, cooling towers should not be placed too close to large windows or
building components, which are sensitive to staining or scale deposits.
24. The warm, saturated air leaving cooling towers may produce fog (cooling
tower plume) during conditions when the ambient air is unable to absorb all of
Central Plant 121
the moisture in the discharge air. Consideration should be given to the place
ment of cooling towers so that the cooling tower plume will not be objectionable.
25. Section 908.3 of the 2009 International Mechanical Code requires the plume
discharge from cooling towers to “… be not less than 5 ft above or 20 ft away
from any ventilation inlet to a building.”
26. It is necessary to chemically treat cooling tower water to control the alkalinity
(pH) of the water, corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth (such as
bacteria and algae). Typically, the makeup water flow is measured by a water
meter and chemicals are injected into the system (in proportion to the makeup
water flow) by a pump that is mounted on the top of a 50-gal polyethylene
chemical storage tank. The conductivity of the cooling tower water is also
measured to determine the level of dissolved solids in the water (the greater the
conductivity, the greater the level of dissolved solids). When the water conductivity
exceeds a certain level, a portion of the cooling tower water is bled to a sanitary
drain so that fresh makeup water can be added to the system, thus controlling the
level of dissolved solids in the water. Water bleed is performed by opening a
solenoid valve in the bleed line, which discharges to a funnel-type floor drain
connected to the building sanitary system.50 The amount of makeup water
required is equal to the sum of the bleed water and the water that is evaporated
by the cooling tower. Makeup water flow is approximately 2.2% of the total
condenser water flow for electric chillers (1.1% bleed and 1.1% evaporation).
27. Galvanized steel is the standard construction material for cooling towers. One
manufacturer offers epoxy-coated galvanized steel to provide improved
corrosion resistance. Stainless steel is the best, though most expensive, material
for cooling towers. A good compromise is to specify a cooling tower constructed
of epoxy-coated galvanized steel with a stainless steel sump.
28. Some oxidation of the galvanized surfaces of cooling towers is normal. In fact, if
allowed to form properly, the normal zinc oxide layer provides a protective
barrier against the effects of the environment. However, if proper water treatment
is not maintained, this zinc oxide layer is not allowed to form and a harmful type
of corrosion, called white rust, may occur.51 The risk of white rust formation can
be reduced through the use of epoxy-coated galvanized steel and/or an ongoing
program of proper water treatment. The problem of white rust can be avoided
altogether by specifying cooling towers that are constructed of stainless steel.
29. A remote sump, an option that is available with many cooling towers, allows
the sump of the cooling tower to be located indoors. This is particularly
desirable for cooling towers that must operate during the winter because the
sump would not have to be protected from freezing. Obviously, the cooling
tower would have to be located at a higher elevation than the remote sump.
This is quite feasible for a cooling tower that is mounted on the roof of a
building, but may be a problem for a cooling tower that is mounted on
grade.
30. Freeze protection for closed-circuit cooling towers includes not only an
immersion heater in the sump and heat tape on the exterior piping but also
freeze protection for the heat exchanger coil. This typically requires the use of a
glycol solution within the closed-loop system.
122 Chapter Four
31. Coordination with other disciplines includes the following:
a. Architectural
(1) The location of the cooling tower should be coordinated, whether it is
mounted outside on grade or on the roof. If the cooling tower will be
mounted on grade, the project architect will most likely want to locate
it in the rear of the building or near a service entrance. If the cooling
tower will be mounted on the roof, the architect will most likely want to
locate it near the center of the roof.
b. Structural
(1) The structural engineer will need the weight and footprint of the cooling
tower and will also need to coordinate the mounting points of the
cooling tower for design of the structural steel support. The cooling
tower should be mounted at least 18 in. above grade or above the roof
to allow access under the cooling tower for inspection and
maintenance.
(2) Normally, the fans for cooling towers are furnished with internal
vibration isolation; that is, the fans are mounted on spring vibration
isolators within the cooling towers. If so, external spring vibration
isolators between the cooling tower and the support structure are not
required or desired. Neoprene pads are all that are required to isolate
any minor vibrations of the cooling tower from the support
structure.
c. Electrical
(1) Cooling towers will require three-phase electrical power for all electrical
components, except electric heat tape, which requires single-phase
electrical power.
(2) The electrical engineer will need the following information:
(a) The size (hp) of the cooling tower fan motor(s).
(b) The voltage (V) and phase (Ø) of the fan motor(s).
(c) The wattage, V, and Ø of electric sump heaters and heat tape,
if any.
(3) The electrical engineer will also need to know if a control panel will
be furnished with the cooling tower, requiring a single-point elec
trical connection, and whether it would include the necessary
disconnect switches, starters, or VFDs for the fan motors, and contactor
for the electric sump heater. If a control panel is not furnished with the
cooling tower, the electrical engineer will have to design these
components to be located either indoors or outdoors, depending upon
the requirements. The electrical engineer will also need to know if a
separate 120V/1Ø power connection is required for the automatic
temperature controls or if this 120V/1Ø power will be derived from
the cooling tower’s three-phase power source through a step-down
control transformer.
(4) Any exterior electrical components will have to be enclosed in a
minimum National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 3R
(rainproof) enclosure. For a more durable enclosure, a NEMA 4
(watertight) enclosure should be specified.
Central Plant 123
Figure 4-18 Floor plan representation of auxiliary hydronic equipment.
Auxiliary Hydronic Equipment

In this section we will look specifically at the auxiliary equipment used in heating,
chilled, and heat pump water systems (commonly referred to as hydronic systems).
Some examples of auxiliary hydronic equipment are air separators, chemical treatment
(chemical feed), expansion tanks, makeup water assemblies, and pumps. Figure 4-18
shows how this equipment would appear on a mechanical room floor plan.
Air Separator
Purpose
Air separators are used to remove the air that is released when the hydronic system
water is heated (Figs. 4-19 and 4-20).
124 Chapter Four
Figure 4-19 Floor plan representation of an air separator.
Figure 4-20 Photograph of an air separator.
Air separators range in diameter from about 12 to 24 in., with the diameter increasing
in proportion to the flow. The height of air separators ranges from 24 to 48 in., again
with the larger sizes required for increased flow.
Connections
Connections to air separators are piping connections only; there are no electrical or ATC
connections.
The air separator is usually located on the suction side of the system pump because air
should be eliminated from the water prior to being circulated by the system pump. This
Central Plant 125
ensures that the pump impeller is not handling water that is entrained with air. Also, the
makeup water connection is usually made at the air separator. This location is desirable
because makeup water should be added to the system near the expansion tank connection
to the system, which is normally located between the air separator and the pump.
The inlet and outlet sizes of the air separator are usually the same size as the system
piping. Connections are made to the air separator with unions for sizes 2 in. and smaller
and with flanges for connection sizes 2½ in. and larger.
Makeup water piping, typically ¾ or 1 in. in size, is connected to a threaded fitting
in the top of the air separator (Fig. 4-21). The makeup water assembly, which consists of
a backflow preventer, pressure-reducing valve, and shutoff valves, is shown on the
mechanical room floor plan.
An automatic air vent, typically ½ in. in size, is connected to a threaded fitting in the
top of the air separator for elimination of the air that is removed from the system water.
The automatic air vent is not shown on the mechanical room floor plan. It is shown in
the detail for the air separator/makeup water assembly.
Selection of the air separator is based on the water pressure drop through the unit. A
general design criterion is to keep the pressure drop through the air separator to 2 psi
or less. This usually results in the inlet and outlet connections being the same size as the
system piping.
It is generally not recommended to select the air separator with an integral strainer
because a strainer should be located at the suction connection to the system pump.
Therefore, an additional strainer in the air separator would be redundant and would
require additional maintenance.
Figure 4-21 Detail of air separator/makeup water assembly.
126 Chapter Four
The operating weight of air separators (the weight of the air separator plus the
weight of the system water contained within it) ranges from 100 to 400 lb. Typically,
there is no special structural support required. Pipe hangers are used to suspend the
air separator from the structure above, which should be designed by the structural
engineer for the collateral load of the mechanical equipment in the equipment room.
Chemical Treatment
Purpose
The purpose of providing chemical treatment (chemical feed) for water in closed
hydronic systems is to reduce corrosion of the system piping and equipment that occurs
as a result of the air within the system. Proper chemical treatment also reduces the
deposition of minerals contained within the system water onto the inner walls of the
system piping and equipment, which is known as scaling. Failure to provide adequate
chemical treatment of closed hydronic systems will hasten the deterioration of the sys-
tem piping and equipment and will also reduce the heat transfer capabilities of the
equipment through the corrosion and scale. Reduced heat transfer equates to reduced
system efficiency and increased energy costs.
Chemicals are usually added manually to closed hydronic systems through a chem-
ical shot feeder (Figs. 4-22 and 4-23). These types of chemical feed systems require the
manual addition of chemicals by either the on-site maintenance personnel or a con-
tracted water treatment company. The chemical composition of the system water should
be checked semi-annually and chemicals added, as required, to maintain proper levels
of corrosion inhibitors and alkalinity (pH).
The 5-gal shot feeder (typical for hydronic systems) is approximately 12 in. in diameter
and 36 in. high. The chemicals are introduced to the system through the funnel at the
top. There are no special structural considerations because the equipment is floor-
mounted and the weight of the shot feeder is minimal. Access needs to be provided to
the shot feeder for routine monitoring and chemical addition.
Connections
There are no electrical or ATC connections to shot feeders. Shot feeders are connected to
the system piping in a bypass arrangement. The inlet piping of the shot feeder is con-
nected to the system pump discharge piping and the outlet piping of the shot feeder is
connected to the system pump suction piping. The system pump pressure is used to
circulate flow through the shot feeder, which flow is only required during routine mon-
itoring and chemical addition. Connections are made to the shot feeder with unions and
shutoff valves. The location of the inlet and outlet connections on a shot feeder will
Figure 4-22 Floor plan representation of a 5-gal shot feeder.
Central Plant 127
Figure 4-23 Photograph of a 5-gal shot feeder.
differ from one manufacturer to another. A drain pipe with a hose-end drain valve
should be provided at the bottom of the shot feeder to enable draining of the shot feeder
and bleed-off of the system water, if necessary. The inlet and outlet connections for a
shot feeder are typically ¾ in. since it is not necessary for a high flow rate of system
water to be circulated through the shot feeder. The drain connection is also typically
¾ in., a common size for an equipment drain.
Expansion Tank
Purpose
An expansion tank is a necessary component in any closed hydronic system. Its pur-
pose is to provide a means for the system water to expand when it is heated without
creating excess pressure in the system. It also serves as the reference point for the sys-
tem pressure, similar to the ground in an electrical circuit.
Within a closed expansion tank is a closed volume of air that may be separated from the
system water by a rubber bladder. This volume of (compressible) air provides a means
by which the system water can safely expand when it is heated without creating excess
pressure in the system.
Expansion tanks range in size from about 8 to more than 100 gal. The diameter of
expansion tanks ranges from 12 to more than 48 in. and the height can be from 12 to
more than 96 in.
128 Chapter Four
Connections
The expansion tank is connected to the system piping through a piping connection
only; there are no electrical or ATC connections (Figs. 4-24 through 4-26). The connec-
tion to the system piping should be the same size as the connection on the expansion
tank. A 12-in. anti-thermosiphon trap is recommended in the connection to the system
piping to prevent gravity heating of the water in the tank. The expansion tank is nor-
mally connected between the air separator and the system pump.
As the hydronic system water is heated, it expands. As the system water expands, the
pressure exerted on the system by a closed expansion tank will increase. The pressure
exerted by the expansion tank increases because the air trapped within the expansion
Figure 4-24 Floor plan representation of an expansion tank.
Figure 4-25 Photograph of an expansion tank.
Central Plant 129
Figure 4-26 Detail of expansion tank connection to hydronic system piping.
tank is being compressed. According to the ideal gas law, if the volume of air trapped
within the expansion tank is halved, the pressure exerted by the expansion tank on the
hydronic system will be doubled. However, the pressure where the expansion tank
connects to the hydronic system does not depend upon whether the system pump is
operating or not, it only depends upon the temperature of the system water. For this
reason, the expansion tank should be connected on the suction side of the system pump
so that the pressure on the discharge side of the pump is equal to the pump pressure
added to the pressure exerted by the expansion tank when the system pump is operating.
If the expansion tank were connected to the discharge side of the system pump and,
as we have previously stated the pressure exerted by the expansion tank at that point
does not change due to the system pump pressure, the pressure on the suction side of
the system pump when the system pump is operating would be equal to the pump
pressure subtracted from the pressure exerted by the expansion tank. This configura-
tion would create the possibility for negative gauge pressure within the hydronic sys-
tem, particularly at the point where the system pressure would be the lowest—at the
suction connection to the pump. This is highly undesirable because it could cause pump
cavitation, and could cause air to be drawn into the system water through leaks in the
piping or equipment connections wherever a negative gauge pressure exists.
Also, in order to avoid serious consequences, there should only be one expansion
tank connection to any closed system. Typically, if a large volume of expansion is antic-
ipated, multiple expansion tanks will be connected together by a common header,
which will connect to the system piping at one point.
Expansion tanks can be either floor-mounted or suspended from the building struc-
ture. The weight of expansion tanks is a serious consideration since it is possible for the
130 Chapter Four
full tank volume to be filled with the system water. Although this is not the design con-
dition, it is necessary to consider the weight of the completely full expansion tank
(known as the water-logged weight) when coordinating with the structural engineer.
Makeup Water Assembly

Purpose
The makeup water assembly (Fig. 4-27) for hydronic systems is the source of water
supply for the initial system fill and ongoing replenishment of the system water to make
up for leaks. The makeup water assembly consists of a backflow preventer (Fig. 4-28),
Figure 4-27 Floor plan representation of a makeup water assembly.
Figure 4-28 Photograph of a backflow preventer.
Central Plant 131
Figure 4-29 Photograph of a pressure-reducing valve.
pressure-reducing valve (Fig. 4-29), and shutoff valves. A backflow preventer and
pressure-reducing valve are necessary components of the makeup water assembly
because the makeup water supply pressure, whether originating from a municipality or
private source, fluctuates.
During periods when the makeup water pressure is lower than the hydronic system
pressure, it is necessary to protect the potable water supply from the contamination that
would occur from reverse flow (back siphonage) of the hydronic system water into the
potable water system. The backflow preventer is specially designed to prevent the
reverse flow of nonpotable hydronic system water from entering the potable water sys-
tem due to back siphonage or back pressure. The most common type of backflow pre-
venter used for hydronic systems is a reduced pressure zone assembly, which consists
of two check valves separated by a relief valve assembly.
During periods when the makeup water pressure is higher than desired for the
hydronic system, it is necessary to protect the hydronic system from overpressuriza-
tion. The pressure-reducing valve accomplishes this and maintains a constant (adjust-
able) makeup water pressure for the hydronic system.
The purpose of the shutoff valves is simply to isolate each of the components for
maintenance or replacement.
Makeup water assemblies range in pipe size from ¾ to 2 in., depending upon the water
flow that is desired for the initial hydronic system fill. A ¾-in. makeup water piping
connection is common because the flow through a ¾-in. pipe is usually adequate to fill
the system within a reasonable amount of time. Larger hydronic systems require larger
makeup water assemblies in order to reduce the time required to fill the system. A ¾-in.
backflow preventer is approximately 18 in. long and 9 in. high.
132 Chapter Four
Connections
Connection of the makeup water assembly to the hydronic system piping is through
a piping connection only; there are no electrical or ATC connections. The makeup
water assembly is usually connected to the hydronic system at the system air separa-
tor. The connection to the system piping should be the same size as the backflow
preventer. Backflow preventers are typically fitted with shutoff valves on the inlet
and outlet connections and have a relief valve drain connection. The backflow pre-
venter is also equipped with multiple pressure test connections to facilitate the test-
ing of each of the two check valves and the relief valve assembly within the backflow
preventer. Most jurisdictions require testing of backflow preventers on an annual
basis. Testing of the backflow preventer is performed with a portable differential
pressure gauge.
The direct-acting pressure-reducing valve, located downstream of the backflow
preventer, also requires shutoff valves to isolate it for maintenance or replacement. The
desired outlet pressure is set through a manual adjustment screw equipped with either
a hex head or handwheel.
Once the hydronic system has been filled, the flow through the makeup water assembly
is equal to the loss of system water due to leaks, which should be practically zero.
Whenever the backflow preventer operates to prevent back siphonage, some water will
be discharged through the relief valve drain connection. Therefore, it is necessary to
provide a drain pipe (the same size as the drain connection) that should be routed to a
suitable location, such as a floor drain. Sufficient access should be provided for the
annual testing of the backflow preventer and maintenance or replacement of the
makeup water assembly components, as required. The makeup water assembly should
not be mounted so high as to prevent the connection of the test gauge or to make adjust-
ment of the system pressure difficult for the maintenance personnel.
Although it is not necessary, a globe valve bypass may be designed around the
pressure-reducing valve, allowing the makeup water assembly to remain in opera-
tion while the pressure-reducing valve is repaired or replaced. However, this is not
necessary because the hydronic system will operate satisfactorily for a limited
amount of time while the makeup water assembly is shut off. A bypass should never
be designed around the backflow preventer because this would defeat the purpose
of the backflow preventer and would make back siphonage possible if the bypass
valve were opened.
Pumps
Purpose
The purpose of a pump in a hydronic system is to circulate the system fluid.
There are many types of pumps including end-suction (Figs. 4-30 through 4-32),
close-coupled, in-line (Figs. 4-33 and 4-34), horizontal split-case, vertical split-case, and
positive displacement pumps. The most common types of pumps used for hydronic
systems are end-suction and in-line pumps, which are both centrifugal pumps.
Central Plant 133
Figure 4-30 Floor plan representation of end-suction pumps.
Figure 4-31 Photograph of an end-suction pump.
134 Chapter Four
Figure 4-32 End-suction pump piping connections.
Figure 4-33 Photograph of an in-line pump.
Central Plant 135
Figure 4-34 In-line pump piping connections.
End-suction pumps range in size from 3 to 6 ft long and from 1 to 3 ft wide. The
motor shaft is connected to the impeller shaft through a coupling.
In-line pumps are either vertical or horizontal, which describes the orientation
of the motor/impeller shaft. The motor shaft is connected directly to the impeller
shaft. In-line pumps range in size from 1 to more than 3 ft high (dimension from the
impeller to the end of the motor) and 1 to 3 ft between the suction and discharge
connections.
Connections
End-suction pumps are attached to an integral steel base frame that is field-mounted to
a concrete base. The concrete base can be a 4-in.-high housekeeping pad to which the
pump base frame is mounted with spring isolators. However, the preferred mounting
is a concrete inertia base to which the pump base frame is bolted. A concrete inertia base
is a steel-framed concrete block that is approximately 6 in. high and 6 in. larger than the
pump base on all sides which is supported off of the floor by spring isolators. The con-
crete inertia base provides a rigid base to maintain alignment of the pump shaft and
reduce the vibratory motion caused by the rotating pump motor.
The pump suction pipe connection is parallel to the impeller shaft and the discharge
pipe connection is perpendicular to the impeller shaft. Flexible pipe connectors are used
on the suction and discharge pipe connections for end-suction pumps to isolate the
vibration that is generated by the pump from the piping system.
The suction and discharge connections for in-line pumps are in line with each other
and are perpendicular to the pump/impeller shaft. Small in-line pumps are supported
by the piping system. Large in-line pumps require pipe hangers to be installed near the
suction and discharge connections. Very large in-line pumps will be supported from the
building floor, usually on a 4-in.-high concrete housekeeping pad.
The piping connections required for pumps include shutoff valves on the pump
suction and discharge, balancing valve on the pump discharge, check valve and flow
meter on the pump discharge, and pressure gauges. As an option, a multipurpose valve,
which performs the duties of a shutoff valve, balancing valve, and check valve, may be
installed on the pump discharge. It is common for a suction diffuser, which is similar in
size to that of a long radius 90° pipe elbow, to be used on the suction pipe connection
for end-suction pumps. This allows the suction pipe to drop vertically into the suction
diffuser. Otherwise, it is necessary to provide five pipe diameters of straight pipe
upstream of the pump suction connection. If a suction diffuser or the necessary length
of straight pipe upstream of the pump suction connection is not provided, undesirable
turbulence in the fluid flow will occur at the pump suction connection, which will com-
promise the performance of the pump and may also damage the pump.
136 Chapter Four
In addition to the piping connections, the motors for pumps require an electrical
connection. Typically, motors smaller than ½ hp require single-phase electrical power;
motors ½ hp and larger require three-phase electrical power if it is available within the
building. All motors require a starter, which can be a motor-rated manual switch for
small motors or an across-the-line magnetic motor starter for larger motors. Some appli-
cations may also require that the pump motor be controlled by a VFD, which modulates
the speed of the motor and functions as the motor starter.
If automatic control of the pump is required through the ATC system, the magnetic
motor starter or VFD must be equipped with the capability to receive a signal, such as
a start/stop or motor speed signal, from the ATC system. This is discussed in more
detail in Chap. 9.
The pump must be designed to overcome the pressure losses within the system, which
include losses associated with the supply and return piping, fittings, valves (shutoff,
balancing, and control), strainers, heat transfer equipment (coils, heat exchangers), flow
meters, and any other component within the system. The actual pressure drop from the
manufacturer’s product data should be used for each component. However, 50% of the
pressure drop through the piping system is normally used as an allowance for the pres-
sure drop through the pipe fittings, and the shutoff and balancing valves. The elevation
head must only be taken into account for an open system (refer to the Cooling Towers
section earlier); the elevation of the piping system is not a consideration for a closed
system. The following is a sample pump head calculation for a primary-only, closed,
chilled water system:
Component Pressure Drop (ft w.c.)

1. Air separator (2 psi) 4.6
2. Strainer (4 psi) 9.2
3. Suction diffuser (0.5 psi) 1.2
4. Flow meter (5 psi) 11.6
5. Chiller cooler 10.0
6. Piping (400 ft × 4 ft w.c./100 ft) 16.0
7. Valves and fittings (50% of piping) 8.0
8. Control valve (5 psi) 11.6
9. Chilled water coil 10.0
Subtotal 82.2
Safety factor (5%) 4.1
Total head 86.3 (round to 86 ft w.c.)
The preferred selection range for a centrifugal pump is between 85 and 105% of the
flow at the best efficiency point (BEP) on the pump curve. Refer to Chap. 43 of the 2008
ASHRAE Handbook—HVAC Systems and Equipment for more information on the physical
characteristics and selection procedures of centrifugal pumps.
Central Plant 137
Sufficient access must be provided around the pump for proper maintenance and
testing. Typically, 12 to 18 in. of clearance on all sides of an end-suction pump provides
sufficient access for maintenance.
4-Pipe and 2-Pipe Heating and Cooling Plants

A 4-pipe heating and cooling plant contains both central heating and cooling equip-
ment and is capable of delivering heating water and chilled water to the building simul-
taneously through four pipes (one heating water supply, one heating water return, one
chilled water supply, and one chilled water return). Heating and cooling equipment
within the building that is connected to a 4-pipe system will have four pipe connec-
tions, unless the equipment provides either heating only or cooling only. In this case,
the equipment would have only two pipe connections.
Figure 4-35 is a schematic diagram of the piping for a 4-pipe heating and cooling
plant that utilizes two condensing hot water boilers and two water-cooled chillers. The
pumping arrangement is primary-secondary for both the heating water and chilled
water systems. Both the heating and chilled water systems are variable flow systems
with variable frequency drives controlling the speed of the (secondary) heating and
chilled water system pumps. One of the two pumps shown for the heating and chilled
water system pumps and one of the condenser water pumps is a standby pump. A
separate condenser water pump and cooling tower is dedicated to each chiller. Auto-
matic shutoff valves are designed for the condenser water supply, return, and equalizer
piping connections to isolate the idle cooling tower when only one chiller is operating.
A 2-pipe heating and cooling plant contains both central heating and cooling equip-
ment but is not capable of delivering heating water and chilled water to the building
simultaneously. It operates either in the heating mode or cooling mode and delivers either
heating water or chilled water through two pipes (one dual-temperature water supply
and one dual-temperature water return) to the building. Heating and cooling equipment
within the building that is connected to a 2-pipe system will have two pipe connections.
Figure 4-36 is a schematic diagram of the piping for a 2-pipe heating and cooling
plant that utilizes two condensing hot water boilers and one water-cooled chiller. The
pumping arrangement when the plant is operating in the heating mode is a primary-
secondary pumping system with a primary pump dedicated to each boiler to ensure a
constant flow of water through each condensing boiler. The dual-temperature water
system pumps are constant speed and function as the secondary pumps. One of the two
pumps shown for the dual-temperature water system pumps and the condenser water
pumps is a standby pump.
In the cooling mode, the plant operates in a primary-only pumping arrangement. In
this arrangement, the dual-temperature water system has to be a constant-flow system
in order to maintain a constant flow of water through the chiller during cooling opera-
tion. If a primary pump were designed for the chiller, the dual-temperature water sys-
tem could be a variable flow system with variable frequency drives controlling the
speed of the (secondary) dual-temperature water pumps.
Design considerations for 4-pipe and 2-pipe heating and cooling plants are as follows:
1. It is common to design redundancy for the equipment in heating systems (such

as boilers and pumps) because freezing of the building could occur if the
138
Figure 4-35 4-pipe heating and cooling plant schematic piping diagram.
Figure 4-36 2-pipe heating and cooling plant schematic piping diagram.
139
140 Chapter Four
heating system is lost. On the other hand, it is not common to design redundancy
for the equipment in cooling systems (such as chillers and pumps) because
comfort cooling is generally not considered critical. However, cooling systems
serving critical functions, such as computer or health care facilities, may require
redundant cooling equipment.
2. Since some redundancy in the boilers is normally required, it is common for
each of the two boilers in a 4-pipe or 2-pipe system to be sized for two-thirds of
the peak heating load of the building. This provides 67% redundancy to keep
the building temperature above freezing if one boiler fails.
3. For small systems, it is common to utilize a constant-speed, primary-only
pumping system. However, for larger systems (where pumping energy is
significant), a primary-secondary pumping system is recommended because
the system (or secondary) flow can be varied to reduce the energy use of the
secondary pump. In a primary-secondary pumping system, each piece of
primary equipment, such as a boiler or chiller, has a dedicated primary pump.
Energy savings are also achieved with primary-secondary pumping systems
by staging on the primary equipment (and associated pumps) in response to
the system load. Figures 4-37 and 4-38 illustrate a constant-speed, primary-only
pumping system and a primary-secondary pumping system. Note that a
primary-secondary pumping system requires a common pipe that joins the
primary and secondary pumping loops. The common pipe should be sized for
the full secondary flow and should be approximately 10 pipe diameters long in
order to reduce any unwanted mixing and to keep the pressure loss through
this pipe to an absolute minimum.
4. It is common to provide full redundancy for the system pump (or secondary
pump in a primary-secondary pumping system) by designing two pumps, each
sized to circulate the full flow. One pump will always be running while the
other pump is available on a standby basis should the lead pump fail.
5. A primary-secondary pumping system is almost always used for high-efficiency
(condensing) boilers because of their need for constant water flow. Some
Figure 4-37 Constant-speed, primary-only pumping system piping diagram.
Central Plant 141
Figure 4-38 Primary-secondary pumping system piping diagram.
high-efficiency boilers are equipped with primary pumps installed within the
boilers themselves to ensure that the heat exchangers receive the minimum
required water flow.
6. A common control strategy for heating water systems is to reset the temperature
of the heating water supplied to the heating equipment in the building based
on outdoor temperature. This strategy allows for better control of space
temperature and also reduces the heat loss from the heating water piping
system during part-load operation.
a. A common heating water reset schedule is as follows:
(1) 180°F heating water supply temperature when the outdoor temperature
is 0°F.
(2) 110°F heating water supply temperature when the outdoor temperature
is 50°F.
The heating water supply temperature would vary proportionally between
180 and 110°F as the outdoor temperature varies between 0 and 50°F.
7. Heating water temperature reset is accomplished with condensing boilers
simply by resetting the heating water supply temperature from the boilers
based on the outdoor temperature. As mentioned previously, the efficiency of
condensing boilers increases as the returning water temperature decreases.
8. However, as mentioned earlier, noncondensing boilers must maintain a
minimum of 140°F returning water temperature; thus it would not be possible
to achieve the reset schedule listed above by resetting the heating water supply
temperature from the boilers. Therefore, the addition of a 3-way mixing valve
to blend heating water return with heating water supply is required to reset the
heating water supply temperature based on outdoor temperature (Fig. 4-37).
9. It is best to utilize the same pipe sizing criteria for the central plant that is
used for the distribution system. Refer to Chap. 6 for a discussion of piping
distribution systems and associated pipe sizing criteria.
10. The makeup water assembly for all closed systems consists of a backflow
preventer, pressure-reducing valve, and shutoff valves.
11. The boiler should be installed at the point of lowest pressure developed by the
heating water system pump (suction side of the pump) for the reasons discussed
earlier.
142 Chapter Four
12. For cooling plants consisting of multiple water-cooled chillers, it is common for
each chiller to have a dedicated cooling tower (or cooling tower cell within a
multiple-cell cooling tower) and a dedicated condenser water pump. An
additional condenser water pump can serve as a standby pump for every two
condenser water systems, provided the systems require the same water flow
rate and appropriate valves are installed to isolate the pumps.
13. For central cooling plants having only one chiller and one cooling tower, it is
possible for a third pump to function as a standby pump for both the chilled
water and condenser water systems, provided the pump has a suitable operating
point for both systems.
14. One major disadvantage of 2-pipe heating and cooling systems is the time
that it takes to accomplish the changeover from heating operation to cooling
operation in the spring of each year because chillers generally cannot tolerate
an entering water temperature to the cooler that is greater than 70°F.
Therefore, the dual-temperature water loop must cool down from a heating
water temperature that is at least 110°F to 70°F before dual-temperature
water can be circulated through the chiller cooler and chilled water can be
produced. The problem with this is that when the building is calling for
cooling, there is no demand for heat. Thus, there is no way for the warm
water in the dual-temperature water system to reject its heat. The dual
temperature water loop must cool down as the result of heat losses from the
insulated dual-temperature water piping, which can take up to 2 or 3 days,
depending upon the size of the system. A solution to this problem is available
if the chillers are water-cooled. The changeover time can be greatly reduced
through the incorporation of a dual-temperature water cool-down system.
This system would utilize the cooling tower as a source of heat rejection
for the dual-temperature water system. The addition of a plate and frame
heat exchanger, 3-way diverting valves, and controls are necessary to
accomplish this mode of operation, the details of which are beyond the scope of
this book.
Water-Source Heat Pump Plant

A water-source heat pump plant adds heat to, or rejects heat from, the closed-loop heat
pump water that is circulated through water-source heat pumps located within the
building. Water-source heat pumps, also known as water-to-air heat pumps, are water-
cooled, self-contained units with a refrigeration system capable of reversing its cycle to
provide either cooling or heating to the spaces in the building that they serve. A water-
source heat pump differs from a heating, chilled, or dual-temperature water unit in that
a water-source heat pump contains a refrigeration system that heats and cools the con-
ditioned air through a direct expansion refrigerant coil instead of a heating water,
chilled water, or dual-temperature water coil. During cooling operation, a water-source
heat pump rejects heat to the heat pump water; during heating operation, a water-
source heat pump absorbs heat from the heat pump water.
The temperature of the heat pump water must be maintained within certain limits,
usually between 60 and 90°F, in order to enable the heat pump units to either reject or
absorb heat from the heat pump water, depending upon their mode of operation. The
Central Plant 143
water flow rate for a water-source heat pump system is typically 3 gpm per ton of
installed cooling capacity. The range (the design temperature difference between the
water leaving the individual water-source heat pump heat exchangers and the water
entering the heat exchangers) is typically 10°F. Typical temperatures for the heat pump
water are as follows:
• Summer: 90°F heat pump water supply and 100°F heat pump water return
• Winter: 60°F heat pump water supply and 50°F heat pump water return
The advantage of utilizing a water-source heat pump system to condition a build-

ing is that some units can be operating in the cooling mode while other units are operat-
ing in the heating mode. In fact, a water-source heat pump system is quite energy
efficient when simultaneous heating and cooling within the building are required. For
example, during the winter, the heat that is rejected to the heat pump water by the units
operating in the cooling mode contributes to the warming of the heat pump water,
thereby reducing the heat that must be added to the heat pump water by the heat source
(which is typically a hot water boiler). The converse is true for units that operate in the
heating mode during the summer. This exchange of heat from some areas of the build-
ing to others through the heat pump water system reduces the use of purchased energy
for the building.
However, when more heat is rejected by the units in the cooling mode than is
absorbed by the units in the heating mode, it is necessary for the heat pump water sys-
tem to have a means to reject the excess heat to the outdoors (referred to as a heat sink).
Similarly, when more heat is absorbed by the units in the heating mode than is rejected
by the units in the cooling mode, it is necessary for the heat pump water system to have
a means to add heat to the system (referred to as a heat source).
Excess heat is normally rejected from the heat pump water either through a plate
and frame heat exchanger to an open cooling tower, or through a closed-circuit cool-
ing tower. Heat is added to the heat pump water typically through a hot water boiler.
The ground can also be used as a heat sink and heat source for a water-source heat
pump system. This type of system is called a ground-source (or geothermal) heat
pump system.
Figure 4-39 is a schematic diagram for a typical water-source heat pump plant uti-
lizing a plate and frame heat exchanger, an open cooling tower as the heat sink, and two
high-efficiency hot water boilers as the heat source. In the heat addition mode, the
3-way diverting valve diverts the heat pump water to the boilers when the return water
temperature drops below 65°F. The lead boiler and its associated primary pump start
when the return water temperature drops below 60°F. The lag boiler and its associated
primary pump start when the return water temperature drops below 50°F. The firing
rate of each boiler burner is modulated to maintain a constant (boiler) outlet water tem-
perature of 90°F. The 3-way mixing valve maintains the heat pump water supply tem-
perature at 60°F. Upon a rise in return water temperature above 65°F, the reverse occurs.
In the heat rejection mode, the 3-way diverting valve diverts the heat pump water to the
plate and frame heat exchanger when the return water temperature rises above 65°F.
When the heat pump return water temperature rises above 90°F, the tower water pump
is started and the speed of the cooling tower fan is controlled to maintain the heat pump
water supply temperature at 90°F. Upon a drop in return water temperature below 90°F,
the reverse occurs.
144
Figure 4-39 Water-source heat pump plant schematic piping diagram.

Central Plant 145
Design considerations for water-source heat pump plants are as follows:
1. Full redundancy should be designed for the hot water boilers and closed-loop
heat pump water system pumps because these boilers and pumps serve the
heating needs of the building.
2. Each of the two boilers in a water-source heat pump system should be sized for
the sum of the heat absorbed by all the heat pump units operating at full heating
capacity. This is done because all of the heat pump units could be operating at
full heating capacity during morning warm-up. If a single boiler is not able to
maintain the minimum loop temperature, the heat pump units could shut off
due to a low refrigerant pressure safety. However, the heat absorbed by the heat
pump units from the heat pump water system represents only about 75% of the
total heat output of the heat pump units, assuming an average coefficient of
performance (COP)52 for the heat pump units of 4.0. Therefore, the output of
each boiler serving a water-source heat pump system does not need to be sized
for 100% of the peak heating load of the building, but only for approximately
75% of the peak heating load of the building.
3. The same design considerations regarding constant-speed, primary-only pumping,
primary-secondary pumping, pipe sizing criteria, makeup water assembly, and
the location of the boiler in the system are the same for heat pump water plants
as they are for 4-pipe and 2-pipe heating and cooling plants.
4. Redundancy is not required in the heat rejection equipment if the system
provides comfort cooling only (see the discussion of redundancy in the cooling
equipment for 4-pipe and 2-pipe heating and cooling plants above).
5. A supply water temperature reset schedule based on outdoor air is not used for
heat pump water plants. Rather, the heat pump water supply temperature is
allowed to float between 60 and 90°F. For this reason, it is not necessary to add
heat to, or reject heat from, the heat pump water system during certain periods
of operation when both heating and cooling are required in the building and
the loop temperature remains between 60 and 90°F.
Equipment Room Design

The major considerations for the design of equipment rooms are as follows:
1. The overriding principle in equipment room design is to ensure that proper

clearance is allowed within and around the room for installation, maintenance,
and removal of equipment. This includes allowing access space around each piece
of equipment for routine maintenance, allowing space within the equipment room
or through doorways for significant maintenance work such as pulling tubes from
boilers or chillers, and designing aisles within the equipment room to provide
unobstructed clearance for equipment to be removed and reinstalled.
2. Equipment should be located within equipment rooms so that piping and
ductwork are routed within the room and between interconnecting pieces of
equipment in the most straightforward manner possible. Headroom within the
equipment room is reduced wherever piping and ductwork need to cross each
other or where they need to cross over equipment.
146 Chapter Four
3. All HVAC, plumbing, and electrical equipment required in each equipment
room needs to be identified early in the design phase in order to avoid
“surprises” at the end of the project. It is necessary for the HVAC system
designer to coordinate with all other design disciplines to ensure that the
equipment and associated clearance requirements of all disciplines are
coordinated. For example, the HVAC equipment may be fed electrically from
multiple panelboards located within the equipment room, or the HVAC
equipment may be fed from a single motor control center located within the
equipment room or in a different room of the building.
4. Working spaces around electrical equipment, such as the area required in front
of electrical equipment connections, and dedicated equipment spaces, such as
the clear space above electrical panelboards, must be respected in the HVAC
system design. The HVAC system designer should never design piping or
ductwork to be routed above electrical panelboards, and HVAC equipment
should be located within the equipment room to ensure that the electrical
working spaces are maintained.
5. The minimum height from the equipment room floor to the building structure
above needs to be coordinated with the project architect and structural engineer.
Normally a minimum height of approximately 10 ft is required if there will be
piping only within the equipment room. A minimum height of approximately
13 ft is required if there will be ductwork in the equipment room as well as
piping. These are only guidelines; it is necessary to coordinate the actual room
height requirements with the equipment to be installed within the equipment
room. Drawing a section at the most congested location in the equipment room
is the best way to determine the minimum clear height required from the
equipment room floor to the structure above.
6. Clear space should be allowed to remove plates from plate and frame heat
exchangers for maintenance and to add additional plates if additional capacity
is required in the future.
7. Chillers cannot be located in the same room as any combustion equipment unless
the combustion equipment has a direct combustion air connection to the outdoors
or the room is equipped with a refrigerant detection system that will automatically
shut down the combustion process if a refrigerant leak is detected.
8. It is best to have at least one exterior building wall in the equipment room to
facilitate the installation and removal of equipment. If the mechanical room is
in the interior of a building, the corridors and doorways leading from the
exterior doorway to the equipment room must be wide enough and high
enough to install and remove equipment within the equipment room.
9. It is common to design double doors in equipment rooms for equipment
installation and removal. The doors may need to be 8 ft high or higher to
provide sufficient space for removal and installation of large equipment.
10. Floor drains connected to the building sanitary system are required near all
floor-mounted pumps, backflow preventers, system drains, cooling tower
bleed pipe, and cooling tower overflow/drain pipe. It is common to design a
floor drain between two adjacent floor-mounted pumps. Floor drains connected
Central Plant 147
to the building storm water system are required to receive the condensate
drainage from cooling coils in air handling units.
11. A makeup water line is required for all closed- and open-loop water systems.
Typically a ¾- or 1-in. makeup water line is adequate.
12. ATC panels need to be located within equipment rooms in accessible locations.
The size and number of ATC panels need to be coordinated with the ATC
representative during the design phase.
13. The locations of the lighting fixtures within equipment rooms need to be
coordinated with the equipment locations. The HVAC system designer should
communicate the equipment room layout to the project electrical engineer as
early in the design phase as possible so the lighting design can be coordinated.
14. The routing of boiler venting and pressure relief piping needs to be coordinated
within the equipment room and also outside the building.
15. Unit heaters are generally used to heat equipment rooms. Refer to Chap. 7 for
more detailed information.
16. Air-conditioning systems are rarely used to maintain the space temperature within
equipment rooms. Instead, ventilation systems are used to draw air from the
outdoors in order to keep the room at a maximum of 10°F higher than the outdoor
summer design temperature. The heat gains associated with the equipment
motors, lighting, and exterior building envelope need to be included in the HVAC
load calculation when determining the ventilation airflow requirement. Equipment
rooms containing gas-fired or fuel-burning equipment are typically ventilated
through a supply fan and relief air system in order to keep the room under positive
air pressurization when ventilation is required. The supply fan can be wall-
mounted, roof-mounted, or suspended within the room with a connection to the
outdoors through a wall louver or rooftop intake air hood. Relief air is typically
accommodated through a wall louver or rooftop relief air hood that is protected
from backdrafts by either a backdraft damper or a motor-operated damper. If
there is no gas-fired or fuel-burning equipment located within the room (or if this
equipment has direct connections of outdoor combustion air), an exhaust fan and
intake air system with motor-operated damper is preferred for ventilation in order
to keep the room under negative pressurization, which reduces the transfer of
odors from the equipment room to adjacent occupied spaces. Mechanical room
ventilation systems are typically controlled by a space thermostat that is designed
to operate the ventilation system whenever the space temperature exceeds 85°F.
17. Combustion air must be provided for all gas-fired and oil-burning appliances
located within the equipment room. Refer to NFPA Standard 54 —National Fuel
Gas Code or NFPA Standard 31—Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning
Equipment for combustion air requirements.
18. Certain pieces of refrigeration equipment will require refrigerant pressure relief
piping designed in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 15-2010.
19. Equipment rooms housing refrigeration equipment may require refrigerant
detection, exhaust, and alarm systems designed in accordance with ANSI/
ASHRAE Standard 15-2010.
148 Chapter Four
Endnotes
1. Natural gas and propane are gaseous fuels.
2. Fuel oil, which can refer to distillate fuel oils (lighter oils) or residual fuel oils (heavier
oils), is a liquid fuel. The most commonly used fuel oil for fuel-burning appliances is
Grade No. 2 distillate fuel oil (referred to as No. 2 fuel oil).
3. The term heating water is used in this chapter to refer to either heated water or heated
brine.
4. Draft is the pressure difference that causes the products of combustion to flow
through a gas-fired or fuel-burning appliance and vent system.
5. Condensing refers to the water vapor in the flue gas, whether it condenses within
the combustion chamber of the boiler or not.
6. Low-pressure hot water boilers are limited to a maximum of 250°F water tempera-
ture.
7. The gross output rating is equal to the input rating minus the heat that remains
within the flue gas and is discharged through the vent system to the outdoors
(referred to as the stack loss) minus the heat lost by the boiler surface to its sur-
roundings.
8. I-B-R refers to the former Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers.
9. Pickup is an estimate of the load required to initially heat the working fluid and
piping of an average system.
10. An appliance refers to any gas-fired or fuel-burning piece of equipment, including
the burner.
11. The vertical portion of a vent system is referred to as the chimney.
12. The power venting fan must have a high temperature rating and be approved for
installation in a vent system for gas-fired or fuel-burning equipment, whichever is
applicable.
13. The dew point of water vapor in flue gas for typical natural gas combustion is
approximately 130°F.
14. Combustion efficiency is equal to the input rating minus the stack loss divided by
the input rating.
15. Thermal efficiency is the gross output rating divided by the input rating.
16. The heat transfer efficiency of a coil increases as the difference between the average
temperature of the coil and the entering air temperature increases.
17. This assumes the heating water system is a closed system; that is, an open expansion
tank is not used.
18. Although the water pressure at the point where the (closed) expansion tank con-
nects to the system varies in proportion to the expansion of the water in the system,
the water pressure at this point is not affected by the operation of the system pump.
For this reason, the point where the (closed) expansion tank connects to the system
is sometimes referred to as “the point of no pressure change” in the system.
19. Thermal shock occurs when the cast iron or steel components comprising the com-
bustion chamber and fluid pressure vessel of a boiler are subjected to a large tem-
perature difference between the flue gas and return water. Thermal shock causes
accelerated deterioration of these components and ultimately results in cracks and
leaks in the combustion chamber and/or fluid pressure vessel.
20. The heating water supply temperature is normally reset based on outdoor tem-
perature. As the outdoor temperature rises, the heating water supply temperature
is lowered.
Central Plant 149
21. When the pressure of steam condensate at pressures greater than atmospheric pres-
sure is reduced to atmospheric pressure (or any pressure lower than the saturation
pressure of the condensate), a portion of the condensate re-evaporates into what is
called flash steam. For steam systems operating at 2 psig, the percentage of flash
steam is minimal (0.7%) and need not be utilized. However, for steam systems
operating at pressures exceeding 2 psig, it is recommended that the flash steam be
utilized by steam equipment operating at a reduced steam pressure. Otherwise, this
flash steam must be vented to the outdoors, which wastes its heating potential.
22. Although the steam condensate is returned by steam pressure motivation, con-
densate return piping should be pitched ½ in./10 ft in the direction of condensate
flow.
23. Excessive dissolved oxygen in the boiler feedwater accelerates the corrosion of the
fluid pressure vessel in the boiler.
24. Approach temperature = 200°F − 180°F = 20°F.
25. Approach temperature = 45°F − 38°F = 7°F.
26. Fouling factors have units of thermal resistance (ft2·h·°F/Btu).
27. This type of coil is called a direct expansion coil because the refrigerant within the
coil expands, or evaporates, directly within the coil and, in the process, the refriger-
ant absorbs heat from the air that is blown across the coil.
28. The cooler is called a direct expansion cooler when the refrigerant circulates
through the tubes. It is called a flooded cooler when the refrigerant circulates
through the shell.
29. One ton of refrigeration equals 12,000 British thermal units per hour (Btuh).
30. EER = [(100 tons) × (12,000 Btuh/ton)] / [(110 kW) × (1,000 W/kW)] = 10.9 EER.
31. Soft water has a low concentration of calcium and magnesium ions.
32. A water softener exchanges sodium ions for the calcium and magnesium ions in
the water.
33. Increased space dehumidification can be accomplished and a decreased chilled water
flow rate can be utilized with a lower chilled water supply temperature. However,
these benefits come at the expense of decreased chiller energy efficiency.
34. A greater chilled water temperature rise requires that the cooling coils in the air
systems and terminal equipment transfer heat from the air more efficiently. This
increase in heat transfer efficiency is only achieved through a greater cooling coil fin
surface, which translates to an increased first cost of the cooling coils and increased
fan energy use.
35. Allowing the condenser water supply temperature to drop below 85°F when the out-
door conditions are appropriate is a strategy that can reduce a chiller’s energy use.
36. Monitoring refers to receiving an input signal (either analog or digital) from a piece
of equipment. Control refers to sending an output signal (either analog or digital) to
a piece of equipment. Refer to Chap. 9 for a more detailed discussion of automatic
temperature controls and building automation systems.
37. Chiller operation can be controlled remotely through the BAS but is normally per-
formed by the chiller control panel. Common points for monitoring through the
BAS include chiller status, water temperatures, and alarms.
38. The flow or differential pressure switches are normally shipped with the chiller for
field-installation in the piping.
39. Water flow through a cooling tower should be full flow to the distribution nozzles
or full bypass to the sump. Full bypass to the sump is normally performed only
during start-up to prevent unacceptably cold condenser water from being circulated
150 Chapter Four
through the chiller condenser. Varying the flow of water through the distribution
nozzles while the cooling tower fan(s) are running is not recommended because
the percentage of the total water flow through the cooling tower that is evaporated
increases, thereby increasing the rate of scale formation on the cooling tower fill.
40. An open system is one that is open to the atmosphere and operates under atmos-
pheric pressure.
41. A closed system is one that is not open to the atmosphere and is not subject to the
limitations of atmospheric pressure.
42. Nonmechanical-draft cooling towers that do not contain fill or utilize a fan are
available but are not frequently used for HVAC applications.
43. A contactor is a heavy-duty relay. A relay is an electromagnetic switch whose con-
tacts are opened and closed by the presence or absence of current flow through a
solenoid coil. Refer to Chap. 9 for a more detailed discussion of relays and their use
in automatic temperature control systems.
44. Approach temperature, or simply approach, is equal to the leaving water tempera-
ture minus the wet bulb temperature of the ambient air.
45. Wet bulb temperature is a measure of the moisture content of the ambient air and
also gives an indication of the rate at which water evaporates in the ambient air.
The evaporation rate increases as the wet bulb temperature of the ambient air
decreases.
46. Approach = 85°F − 78°F = 7°F approach.
47. Range = 95°F − 85°F = 10°F range.
48. NPSHR is given in the manufacturer’s product data for the pump.
49. Nonmechanical-draft cooling towers, which induce air through the aspirating effect
of water spray, are typically quieter than mechanical-draft cooling towers. However,
this type of cooling tower is not a subject of this book because their application for
HVAC systems is relatively limited.
50. Chemically treated cooling tower water is normally not discharged to the building
storm water system unless the chemicals are biodegradable and it is acceptable to
the authority having jurisdiction.
51. High water alkalinity (high pH) and low water hardness (soft water) are two factors
that aggravate the formation of white rust.
52. The coefficient of performance (COP) for a compressor is the ratio of the refrig-
eration output to the heat equivalent of the electrical input power. For example, a
compressor that requires 0.88 kW (3,033 Btuh) of electrical input to produce 1.0 ton
(12,000 Btuh) of refrigeration output would have a COP of 4.0 (12,000 Btuh output/
3,033 Btuh input). A COP of 4.0 is typical for water-source heat pumps.
Chapter 5
Air Systems
T
he term air system refers to the equipment that circulates air within a building.
Air systems can introduce ventilation air to the building from the outdoors, recir-
culate air within the building, exhaust air from the building, or perform a combi-
nation of any or all of these functions.
The air circulated by air systems can be conditioned (heated, cooled, humidified, or
dehumidified) or it can be unconditioned. If heating and/or cooling is required, air
systems utilize the heating and/or cooling energy that is supplied by the central plant
and impart this energy to the circulated air by means of heating and/or cooling coils.
Humidification, if required, is added at the air system either through steam generated
at a remote central plant or by a self-contained (or packaged) humidifier located at the
air system. Dehumidification, if required, is performed by components such as a reheat
coil and automatic temperature controls, which are also associated with the air system.
Common components of air systems that provide conditioned air to the spaces they
serve include the following:
• Mixing box: The mixing box is a section of an air system that contains openings
for the return air duct and outdoor air duct. The purpose of the mixing box is to
provide a point in the system where these two airstreams can be combined. The
mixing box may also contain manual or motor-operated dampers, which are
used to balance the return and outdoor airflows. If these dampers are not
integral to the mixing box, they may be located in the ductwork outside of the
mixing box.
• Air filters: Air filters remove the particulates entrained within the air that is
circulated through the air system. The efficiency of the filters is determined by
the filtration requirements of the spaces served by the air system. A common
measure of filtration efficiency is the minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV), as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007—Method of Testing
General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
Air filtration efficiency for commercial HVAC applications commonly has a
MERV of 8, which can be achieved through the use of 2-in. pleated, disposable
air filters. For superior air filtration, such as is required to achieve the Leader
ship in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Indoor Environmental
Quality (EQ) Credit 5, an air filtration efficiency of MERV 13 is required.
MERV 13 filters are normally 6- or 12-in. rigid-style cartridge filters. In order
to increase the service life of these high-efficiency filters, MERV 8 prefilters
are normally installed in a separate filter track upstream of the MERV 13
(final) filters.
151
152 Chapter Five A
• Heating coil: The heating coil imparts the heating energy supplied by the central
plant to the air that is circulated through the air system.
• Cooling coil: The cooling coil imparts the cooling energy supplied by the central
plant to the air that is circulated through the air system.
• Reheat coil: A reheat coil may be a part of an air system when dehumidification
is required.
• Supply fan: Air systems that supply air to the spaces served will contain a
supply fan.
• Return fan: Air systems that recirculate air from the spaces served may contain
a return fan, particularly if the return air ductwork system is extensive.
• Humidifier: A humidifier typically utilizes steam to increase the moisture
content of the air that is circulated through the air system to meet the
humidification requirements of the spaces served by the air system. Other types
of humidifiers that utilize ultrasonic sound waves to atomize water droplets for
entrainment into the airstream are also available.
Air systems that do not condition the air before it is introduced to the spaces served
have limited use in commercial buildings since most spaces within a building are con-
ditioned to some degree.
Air systems that exhaust air from the building normally consist of exhaust fans
only. However, if the exhaust airstream contains hazardous contaminants that cannot
be released to the atmosphere, the exhaust air system may also contain air filters. Also,
if heat recovery is utilized, air filters and a heat recovery coil will be incorporated into
the exhaust air system (as well as the outdoor air system).
Air System Types

For the purpose of distinguishing between air systems that primarily heat and cool
from those that primarily ventilate, we will categorize air systems as follows:
1. Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) air systems

a. HVAC air systems circulate air primarily to meet the heating and/or cooling
needs of the spaces they serve.1
b. HVAC air systems may also meet the ventilation needs of the spaces they
serve, but this capability is normally supplemental to their primary function
of providing heating and/or cooling. For HVAC air systems, outdoor air is
normally a relatively low percentage (less than 30%) of the total airflow
supplied by the HVAC air system.2
c. Outdoor air ventilation provided by HVAC air systems meets the outdoor
air ventilation requirements of the building occupants and/or provides
outdoor air makeup for exhaust air systems.
2. Ventilation air systems
a. Ventilation air systems circulate air primarily to meet the outdoor air or
exhaust air needs of the spaces or equipment they serve.
b. Ventilation air systems may have heating, cooling, humidification, or
dehumidification capabilities. However, these capabilities are for the sole
purpose of conditioning outdoor air to a neutral temperature and relative
A i r S y s t e m s 153
humidity so that the ventilation air does not become a load on the HVAC air
systems.
c. Exhaust air systems also fall into the category of ventilation air systems.
Exhaust air systems may serve the exhaust requirements of spaces served
and/or may serve the exhaust requirements of certain types of equipment,
such as kitchen exhaust hoods.
HVAC Air Systems

As mentioned in Chap. 2, HVAC air systems can be either centralized or decentralized.
Centralized air systems receive their cooling and heating energy from a remote central
plant. Decentralized HVAC air systems contain the central heating and cooling plant
equipment within the air system itself.
HVAC air systems can also be constant air volume (CAV) or variable air volume
(VAV). CAV systems deliver constant supply airflow at a variable temperature. VAV
systems deliver variable supply airflow at a constant temperature. CAV and VAV air
systems can be further subdivided into systems that condition a single temperature
zone and systems that condition multiple temperature zones.
Whether the HVAC air systems are centralized or decentralized, CAV or VAV, serve a
single zone or multiple zones, the choices for heating and cooling coils within the units are
the same. Generally, the heating coil in centralized HVAC air systems will be hot water,
steam, or electric, and the cooling coil will be chilled water. The heating coil in decentral-
ized HVAC systems will be electric, direct or indirect gas-fired,3 or (reverse cycle) direct
expansion (DX) refrigerant (for heat pumps only). The cooling coil will be DX refrigerant.
Constant Air Volume Systems

Single-Zone A single-zone CAV system consists of an air handling unit that delivers
constant supply airflow (Fig. 5-1). The heating and/or cooling capacity of the unit is
modulated to meet the needs of a single thermostat mounted in one of the spaces served
by the unit. Single-zone CAV systems may serve multiple spaces. Therefore, it is impor-
tant to ensure that all of the spaces served by a single-zone CAV system have similar
HVAC load characteristics.
Heating and Ventilating Heating and ventilating (H&V) systems are used to serve spaces
that require heating only and also require outdoor air ventilation for occupant ventila-
tion or exhaust air makeup. H&V units are often configured to deliver 100% outdoor
air. However, they may have return air capabilities if the outdoor airflow is less than the
supply airflow that is required to provide effective heating of the spaces served during
the winter. If the units heat the spaces they serve during unoccupied periods when the
exhaust systems are off and the outdoor air dampers are shut, H&V units may also be
equipped with return air capabilities. H&V units normally recirculate 100% of the air
during the unoccupied mode of operation.
During the summer it is common for H&V units to position their outdoor and return
air dampers to deliver 100% outdoor air to the spaces served in order to maintain the
space temperature at 5 to 10°F higher than the outdoor temperature. If the H&V units
have return air capabilities, provisions must be made within the spaces served to either
relieve or exhaust the excess outdoor air that is introduced during the summertime
mode of operation.
154 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-1 Schematic diagram of a single-zone, constant air volume system.
Temperature control for H&V systems is the same as for the single-zone CAV
system described earlier, except the space thermostat will control the heating capacity
of the H&V unit only. Some common examples of spaces requiring H&V systems are
gymnasiums, locker rooms, and kitchens.4
Multiple-Zone CAV systems are not well suited to provide multiple zones of tempera-
ture control because serving multiple zones with CAV systems incurs a higher energy
cost and, in some cases, a higher first cost than the VAV options that are normally avail-
able. However, through the use of reheat, dual-duct, and multizone configurations,
CAV systems can serve multiple temperature zones for certain applications, particu-
larly renovations of existing systems.
Reheat A CAV reheat system consists of a CAV unit whose supply air ductwork
branches out to serve multiple zones within the area served by the unit (Fig. 5-2). A
reheat coil is mounted within the branch duct to each zone. Typically, the discharge air
temperature from the CAV unit is maintained at approximately 55°F so that it can meet
the cooling needs of the temperature zones, if required. A heating-only thermostat
located in each zone controls the heating output of its associated zone reheat coil. This
Figure 5-2 Schematic diagram of a constant air volume reheat system.
coil reheats the supply air from the CAV unit as required to maintain the setpoint of the
zone thermostat. If no heating is required in the zone, the heating coil will be shut off.
The zone reheat coil needs to be sized not only to meet the building envelope heat losses
for the zone but also to raise the supply airflow from the discharge air temperature
(typically 55°F) to the zone cooling setpoint (typically 75°F).
CAV reheat systems are not energy efficient because simultaneous cooling (at the
CAV unit) and heating (at the reheat coil) of the supply airflow occurs. Care must be
taken when designing CAV reheat systems because the 2009 International Energy Conser-
vation Code, Section 503.4.5, requires the supply airflow to be reduced to at least 30% of
the maximum supply airflow to each zone before reheating can occur. One exception to
this rule is for zones that have special humidity control requirements.
Dual-Duct A dual-duct CAV system includes two separate supply air ducts, one
hot duct and one cold duct, connected to a specially configured CAV air handling unit
(Fig. 5-3). The supply airflow is divided within the unit downstream of the supply fan
156 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-3 Schematic diagram of a dual-duct constant air volume system.
into what are called the hot deck and cold deck. A heating coil is installed within the
unit in the hot deck and a cooling coil is installed within the unit in the cold deck. A
portion of the supply airflow is blown through the hot deck and discharged through
the main hot duct connected to the unit. The remaining supply airflow is blown
through the cold deck and discharged through the main cold duct connected to the
unit. Both the hot and cold supply ducts are routed parallel to each other through the
building and branch out to serve multiple zones within the area served by the unit.
Each zone is equipped with a dual-duct mixing box, which has both hot and cold duct
inlet connections, each of which is equipped with a motor-operated damper and an
inlet airflow sensor. The dual-duct mixing box has a single duct outlet through which
air is supplied to the zone. The temperature of the air supplied to the zone is controlled
by modulating the hot and cold airflows at the dual-duct mixing box as required to
maintain the setpoint of the zone thermostat. For CAV dual-duct mixing boxes, the
total supply airflow to the zone remains constant.
Typically, the cold deck air temperature from the CAV air handling unit is main-
tained at approximately 55°F so that cooling is available if required by the temperature
zones. The hot deck temperature from the CAV unit is maintained at approximately
85°F so that heating is available if required by the temperature zones. The heating coil
in a dual-duct air handling unit can be hot water, steam, or electric. The cooling coil will
normally be chilled water. Dual-duct air handling units rarely, if ever, utilize a DX
refrigerant cooling coil.
Dual-duct CAV systems generally do not have an application for commercial build-
ings because of the high first cost. Thus, we will not discuss dual-duct systems in any
more detail. Dual-duct CAV systems were designed years ago mainly to serve labora-
tory areas within buildings. Therefore, it is necessary for the HVAC system designer to
understand this type of system should a project involve the renovation of a building
with a dual-duct CAV system. However, today there are more modern HVAC systems
available to serve laboratory areas that have a lower first cost and lower operating cost
than dual-duct CAV systems. Therefore, it is unlikely for a new building to require a
dual-duct CAV system.
Multizone Multizone CAV systems are similar to dual-duct CAV systems in that
there is a hot deck and a cold deck within the air handling unit (Fig. 5-4). The difference
is that the hot and cold airstreams for each zone are mixed at the air handling unit.
There is a hot and cold air motor-operated damper mounted on the discharge of the air
handling unit for each zone; that is, if the unit is a five-zone unit, there will be five hot
deck motor-operated dampers and five cold deck motor-operated dampers mounted
on the discharge of the unit. There is a single duct connection on the combined outlet of
each hot and cold damper serving each zone through which air is supplied to the zone.
The temperature of the air supplied to each zone is controlled by modulating the hot
and cold airflows at the air handling unit as required to maintain the setpoint of the
zone thermostat. For CAV multizone systems, the total supply airflow to each zone
remains constant. The hot and cold deck temperatures for multizone CAV systems are
similar to the deck temperatures for dual-duct CAV systems.
Multizone CAV systems are not commonly used in commercial buildings because
the VAV options that are available typically have a lower first cost and lower operating
cost. Thus, we will not discuss multizone systems in any more detail. Also, the number
of zones that can be accommodated by a multizone unit is limited by the physical space
available to install the hot and cold motor-operated dampers for each zone on the dis-
charge of the air handling unit. Therefore, multizone units can serve no more than about
eight zones. The number of zones that can be served by a VAV system is not limited by
the equipment but is determined by the needs of the areas served.
Variable Air Volume Systems

VAV systems are the most widely used types of HVAC air systems for medium- and
large-sized commercial building projects (projects larger than 10,000 ft2) because VAV
systems are flexible, energy efficient, and provide a comfortable indoor environment.
As mentioned previously, VAV systems deliver variable supply airflow at a
constant temperature (typically 55°F) through the primary air duct5 to multiple VAV
terminal units, each of which serves a separate temperature zone. Each VAV terminal
unit contains a motor-operated damper that modulates the primary airflow to the
zone, an inlet airflow sensor, and, in some instances, a heating coil and a small recir-
culating air fan.6
158 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-4 Schematic diagram of a multizone CAV system.
The supply airflow from the VAV air handling unit is normally modulated to main-
tain a constant static pressure within the primary air duct system. This is measured by
a duct static pressure sensor, which is typically located two-thirds the way down the
primary air duct system. The modulation of the supply airflow tracks with the needs of
the VAV terminal units; that is, as more primary air dampers in the VAV terminal units
open to supply more air to the zones, the static pressure in the primary air duct system
decreases and more supply airflow is delivered by the VAV air handling unit to restore
the static pressure in the duct system. Conversely, as the primary air dampers close, the
primary air duct static pressure increases and less supply airflow is delivered by the
VAV air handling unit to compensate.
The air handling unit for a VAV system is the same as would be required for a CAV
system with the exception that there is a means of modulating the supply airflow deliv-
ered by the unit. The most common way of modulating the supply airflow of the unit
is by controlling the frequency of the signal sent to the supply fan motor through a
variable frequency drive (VFD).7 The speed of an alternating current (ac) motor is
directly proportional to the frequency of the input signal to the motor. Therefore, as the
frequency of the VFD output signal to the motor is reduced, motor speed is reduced,
and supply airflow is also reduced. The converse is true as the frequency of the VFD
output signal to the motor is increased. The maximum frequency of the VFD output
signal is that of the VFD line input frequency, or 60 Hz. The supply fan motor will oper-
ate at full speed when it receives a VFD output signal of 60 Hz.
Care should be taken when designing VAV systems that utilize DX refrigerant coils
for cooling. Unless the refrigeration system is equipped with adequate capability to
unload the refrigeration system capacity, freeze-up of the DX refrigerant cooling coil
could occur under low airflow conditions.8 Also, refrigeration systems having a capac-
ity that is less than about 25 tons generally do not have the capability to adequately
accommodate VAV operation. Unloading of the refrigeration system, adequate control
of the discharge air temperature, and incorporation of a VFD into the unit cabinet are
all issues that pose problems for these smaller-sized pieces of DX equipment. Therefore,
equipment manufacturers do not currently offer VAV operation for air systems that
utilize DX refrigerant cooling coils in sizes less than about 25 tons. However, recent
energy-efficiency requirements in the industry are causing equipment manufacturers to
develop technologies that will enable VAV capability for smaller-sized pieces of DX
equipment. In the future, this lower limit of 25 tons for VAV operation in DX equipment
may drop to as low as 10 tons or less.
The most common use of a VAV system is in serving multiple temperature zones.
Therefore, we will discuss multiple-zone VAV systems first and then discuss the use of
a VAV system for a single-zone application.
Multiple-Zone
VAV Terminal Units Variable primary airflow is delivered to the zones through the
modulation of the primary air damper in the VAV terminal units. As the zone tempera-
ture decreases, the primary air damper is modulated closed to supply less (55°F) pri-
mary air to the zone. Once the primary air damper reaches its predetermined minimum
position (usually about 25% of maximum airflow9), upon a further drop in the zone
temperature,VAV terminal units that have heating capabilities will position the primary
air damper to the heating airflow and modulate the output of the heating coil to main-
tain the heating setpoint of the zone temperature sensor.10 Fan-powered VAV terminal
units are also equipped with a small fan that recirculates air (normally from the ceiling
return air plenum) through the heating coil of the VAV terminal units. The various
types of VAV terminal units are discussed in more detail in Chap. 7. Figure 5-5 is a sche-
matic diagram of a VAV system serving multiple VAV terminal units.
Dual-Duct Dual-duct VAV air systems are about as uncommon as dual-duct CAV air
systems. The most likely time an HVAC system designer would encounter a dual-duct
VAV air system would be in the case of a system that was originally designed as a dual-
duct CAV system but was later renovated to function as a VAV system. The HVAC
system designer may also have the task of designing the modifications to a dual-duct
CAV system to convert it to a dual-duct VAV system.
Dual-duct VAV systems function much the same way as dual-duct CAV systems
except the supply airflow to the zones is variable, not constant. The supply fan in the
160 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-5 Schematic diagram of a variable air volume system.
dual-duct air handling unit has to be equipped with a means to modulate its airflow in
response to static pressure in both the main hot and cold ducts. The energy efficiency of
a dual-duct VAV system would be about the same as that of a conventional VAV system
utilizing VAV terminal units. Care should be taken in converting a dual-duct CAV sys-
tem to a VAV system to ensure that the zones do not require constant supply airflow to
serve as makeup for constant exhaust airflow.
Single-Zone Operation of a single-zone VAV system is similar to the operation of a VAV

system serving multiple zones, except the supply airflow is modulated to maintain the
cooling setpoint of the (single) zone temperature sensor rather than to maintain a con-
stant primary air duct static pressure. The supply air temperature is maintained at 55°F
as long as the zone temperature sensor is calling for cooling.
Once the zone temperature drops below the cooling setpoint (typically 75°F), the air
handling unit will operate in the heating mode: cooling will be disabled, the supply fan
will operate at the predetermined heating airflow, and the output of the heating coil
within the unit will be modulated as required to maintain the heating setpoint of the
zone temperature sensor (typically 70°F).11
Once the zone temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the air handling unit will
operate in the cooling mode: heating will be disabled, the output of the cooling coil will be
modulated as required to maintain the supply air temperature at 55°F, and the supply air-
flow will be modulated to maintain the cooling setpoint of the zone temperature sensor.
The advantage of a single-zone VAV over a single-zone CAV system is that during
cooling operation, the supply air temperature will remain constant at approximately
55°F. This consistently cool supply air temperature will result in a lower space relative
humidity than the same area served by a CAV system where the supply air temperature
can vary anywhere between 55°F (full cooling load) and 75°F (no cooling load). The
higher space relative humidity resulting from the use of a CAV system is exacerbated
by outdoor air ventilation in moist climate zones and by a high density of occupants in
the areas served by the unit.
Single-zone VAV systems that utilize DX refrigerant cooling coils have the same
limitations on the minimum unit size as VAV systems serving multiple zones, that is, a
minimum unit size of about 25 tons. In most cases, this results in an area that is too large
to be practically served by one zone of temperature control. However, there are excep-
tions, such as an auditorium, gymnasium, or warehouse, where a single zone could
require as much as 25 tons of cooling.
Ventilation Air Systems

Air systems that provide ventilation only and do not provide any heating or cooling to
the spaces they serve include outdoor air and exhaust air systems, which are summa-
rized as follows:
• Outdoor air systems operate under a positive air pressure to provide ventilation
for the building occupants, keep certain types of equipment rooms at a maximum
temperature during the summer, or provide outdoor air makeup for exhaust air
systems or equipment.
• Exhaust air systems operate under a negative air pressure to remove air from
the spaces or equipment they serve and discharge this air to the outdoors.
Outdoor Air Systems

The two types of outdoor air systems we will discuss are ventilation air systems and
makeup air systems.
Ventilation Air Systems Ventilation air systems are used to either meet the outdoor air
ventilation requirements of the building occupants, or to use outdoor air to keep certain
types of equipment rooms under a positive air pressurization and keep them at a maxi-
mum temperature during the summer.
Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems Dedicated outdoor air systems (DOASs) are one part
of what is known as a dual-path HVAC system. In a dual-path HVAC system, outdoor
air for occupant ventilation and/or exhaust air makeup is handled by one air system
while heating and cooling is handled by a separate air system (Fig. 5-6). In some situa-
tions, the outdoor air is delivered by the DOAS directly to the spaces served at a tem-
perature and relative humidity that are approximately equal to the space temperature
162 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-6 Schematic diagram of a dual-path HVAC system where the DOAS unit utilizes a reheat coil.
and relative humidity. In other situations, the outdoor air is delivered by the DOAS to
the return air duct for the heating and cooling equipment in a filtered but uncondi-
tioned or partially conditioned state. Partial conditioning could include heating only or
heating and cooling with no humidity control.
A DOAS unit normally has a heating coil, cooling coil, and reheat coil so that the
100% outdoor air that it delivers can be heated and cooled, or cooled and reheated
(which is required to dehumidify the air). A humidifier may also be part of a DOAS
unit, but humidification is not as often required as heating, cooling, and dehumidifica-
tion. The heating and reheat coils can be hot water, steam, gas, or electric, and the cool-
ing coil can be chilled water or DX refrigerant.
However, utilizing hot water, steam, gas, or electricity for reheat requires more
energy than utilizing a form of energy recovery for reheat. An example of an energy
recovery reheat coil is a hot gas reheat coil that is part of a self-contained (or packaged)
refrigeration system. When dehumidification is required for this type of system, heat,
which is normally rejected to the outdoors through an air- or water-cooled condenser,
is rejected to the airstream by a hot gas reheat coil located downstream of the cooling
coil. Hot gas reheat can be incorporated into air-cooled or water-cooled refrigeration
equipment, such as a packaged air-conditioning unit or a water-source heat pump unit.

Packaged DOAS units with hot gas reheat still require an air- or water-cooled con-
denser for heat rejection when cooling (but not reheat) is required. However, these units
have the added piping, controls, and hot gas reheat coil that enable them to utilize the
hot gas reheat coil in the dehumidifying mode of operation. The capabilities and con-
figurations of each type of DOAS unit with hot gas reheat vary depending upon the
equipment manufacturer. Normally, manufacturers that specialize in constructing
dehumidification equipment for indoor swimming pools (natatoriums) have the best
selection of DOAS equipment.
Another example of a DOAS unit is a 100% outdoor air, modular central station air
handling unit with a heating coil and a heat pipe refrigerant coil wrapped around a
chilled water cooling coil. In this type of system, precooling of the outdoor air upstream
of the cooling coil and reheating of the outdoor air downstream of the cooling coil is
accomplished by the wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil.
The wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil consists of two coils filled with refrigerant
that are connected by refrigerant pipes. One refrigerant coil is mounted upstream of
the chilled water cooling coil and the other refrigerant coil is mounted downstream
of the refrigerant coil, and the interconnecting refrigerant pipes wrap around the end of
the chilled water cooling coil. When the air entering the upstream refrigerant coil is above
the boiling point of the refrigerant (approximately 45°F), the refrigerant is evaporated and,
as a result, precools the air by up to 14°F (depending upon the entering air temperature)
before it enters the chilled water cooling coil. This precooling of the air is a completely
sensible cooling process (i.e., no moisture is condensed). The precooled air enters the
chilled water coil, and the capacity of the chilled water coil is modulated to further cool
and dehumidify the air to achieve a 55°F dew point,12 which corresponds to an approxi-
mately 55°F dry bulb temperature leaving the chilled water cooling coil. In the down-
stream refrigerant coil, the refrigerant that was evaporated in the upstream coil is condensed
and flows by gravity back to the upstream refrigerant coil. The heat rejected by the conden-
sation of the refrigerant reheats the air the same amount that it was precooled by the
upstream refrigerant coil (up to 14°F of reheat, depending upon the amount of refrigerant
that was evaporated in the upstream coil). The result is that the outdoor air delivered to the
building by the DOAS unit has a dry bulb temperature of 69°F and a dew point of 55°F.
Using a wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil for precooling and reheat in a DOAS
unit requires very little energy input. The only energy required to accomplish this heat
transfer is the added fan energy that is required to overcome the additional (air) static
pressure losses through the upstream and downstream refrigerant coils. There is no
compressor in the refrigerant circuit because it is not required to circulate the refrigerant
through the coils. The refrigerant flows between coils in the liquid and gaseous phases
strictly as a result of gravity and the heat that is absorbed by the refrigerant in the
upstream refrigerant coil. Using a wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil has the added
benefit of decreasing the required cooling capacity of the chilled water cooling coil.
When the entering air temperature is below the boiling point of the refrigerant
(approximately 45°F), there is no refrigerant flow and no heat transfer associated with the
wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil. The heat output of the heating coil must be mod-
ulated to ensure that the air supplied by the DOAS unit does not drop below 69°F.
Figure 5-7 is schematic diagram of a DOAS unit that utilizes a wrap-around heat
pipe refrigerant coil. Typical dry bulb and wet bulb air temperatures and air humidity
ratios are given for the entering and leaving air conditions of the heat pipe and chilled
164 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-7 Schematic diagram of a DOAS unit with a wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil.
water cooling coils to give an indication of the sensible and latent cooling and heating
that occurs at each point within the process.
Positive-Pressure Equipment Room Ventilation Equipment rooms, including rooms that

contain mechanical and/or electrical equipment, are commonly heated and ventilated
only. Heat is provided during the winter typically through fan-forced unit heaters
which recirculate room air to keep the rooms at a minimum of about 60°F (refer to
Chap. 7 for a discussion of unit heaters). Ventilation is normally not provided in the
winter. When the room temperature rises, normally above 85°F, unconditioned outdoor
air is used to prevent the rooms from becoming excessively hot. This typically occurs
during the summer but could occur at other times of the year depending upon the inter-
nal heat gains to the room from the equipment. The maximum acceptable temperature
within an equipment room is normally about 100°F. However, equipment rooms that
contain electronic components, such as elevator controls or computer systems, cannot
be warmer than 85°F. In this case, the room would require mechanical cooling either
from the building HVAC system or from a separate HVAC system. For equipment
rooms that can tolerate a space temperature as high as 100°F, an outdoor air ventilation
system that utilizes unconditioned outdoor air to keep the space temperature below
this maximum acceptable temperature should be designed. HVAC calculations need to
be performed to determine both the heat gains to the room at the design summer out-
door temperature and the outdoor airflow required to keep the room at 100°F, which is
normally 5 to 10°F higher than the design summer outdoor temperature. However, the
temperature within equipment room is not always this maximum temperature. The
space temperature will vary between 85 and 100°F when ventilation is operating. When
the space temperature within the equipment rooms is below 85°F and above 60°F, nei-
ther ventilation nor heating will be provided by the heating and ventilating system.
Most equipment rooms are ventilated by an exhaust air system in order to place
them under a negative air pressurization, which is necessary to prevent odors within
the equipment rooms from migrating to adjacent spaces (refer to the Negative-Pressure
Equipment Room Ventilation section later). However, equipment rooms containing
gas-fired or fuel-burning appliances that do not have a direct connection to the out-
doors for combustion air (i.e., the appliances utilize room air for combustion) should
Figure 5-8 Schematic diagram of a positive-pressure equipment room ventilation system.
not be placed under a negative air pressurization by the ventilation system. In these
situations, it is necessary for the ventilation system to positively pressurize the equip-
ment room by blowing outdoor air into the room and allowing the excess air that is not
used for combustion, if any, to be relieved from the room. Figure 5-8 is schematic dia-
gram of a positive-pressure equipment room ventilation system.
Makeup Air Systems Makeup air systems are utilized to provide the outdoor airflow
required by certain types of equipment where it is not feasible or economical to condi-
tion this outdoor airflow through the HVAC system. Makeup air systems for kitchen
exhaust hoods and combustion air systems for gas-fired or fuel-burning appliances are
two examples of makeup air systems.
Kitchen Exhaust Hoods NFPA Standard 96—Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire
Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations, the International Mechanical Code, and the
authority having jurisdiction require certain kitchen appliances that produce grease-
laden vapor, smoke, or steam to be installed under one or more commercial kitchen
exhaust hoods to remove these contaminants from the kitchen environment (Fig. 5-9).
The exhaust airflow required to effectively remove these contaminants is typically in
the range of 50 to 60 cfm per square foot of exhaust hood face area, although airflows as
high as 125 cfm per square foot of exhaust hood face area are possible (depending upon
the type and heat output of the appliances installed under the hood). This exhaust air-
flow must be replaced with outdoor airflow to prevent the negative air pressurization
within the kitchen from exceeding 0.02 in. w.c. Because exhaust airflow from a commer-
cial kitchen may be as much as double the supply airflow that is required to maintain
the space temperature, special consideration must be given to conditioning the makeup
outdoor airflow through a system that is separate from the HVAC system, particularly
if cooling is provided for the kitchen in addition to heating.
If the kitchen is heated and ventilated only through an H&V air system, the outdoor
airflow required by the exhaust hoods is commonly provided through the H&V air sys-
tem. The H&V system will normally position the outdoor air and return air dampers to
deliver the required outdoor airflow when the exhaust hoods are operating and reduce
166 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-9 Schematic diagram of a kitchen exhaust hood makeup air system.
the outdoor airflow when the exhaust hoods are not operating. However, if cooling is
provided for the kitchen, it is usually infeasible to deliver the required outdoor airflow
through the HVAC system. Delivering a high percentage of outdoor air through the
HVAC system would require the use of a reheat system to adequately dehumidify the
air during cooling operation to prevent unacceptably high relative humidity within the
kitchen. The use of reheat is costly from an energy standpoint because of the simultane-
ous cooling and heating that is required. In the case of a commercial kitchen, approxi-
mately 70% of the outdoor airflow required by the kitchen exhaust hoods can be
delivered by a makeup air system that is dedicated to this purpose.
Typically, the makeup air system will heat the outdoor airflow required by the exhaust
hoods and deliver this air through a laminar flow diffuser located within the kitchen near
the exhaust hoods or, if makeup-air-type hoods are utilized, deliver this air to the makeup
air connection on each of the exhaust hoods.13 The goal is for the makeup air to be intro-
duced at a low velocity into the hood capture zone so that it does not affect the capture
and containment capabilities of the hood. The heating coil in the makeup air unit is com-
monly direct or indirect gas-fired or electric because the unit is often mounted on the roof
of the building. If the heating coil is hot water or steam, and the makeup air unit is
mounted on the roof, measures must be taken to protect the heating coil from freezing.
Combustion Air As mentioned in Chap. 4, a source of combustion air must be pro-

vided for gas-fired or fuel-burning appliances. NFPA Standard 54 —National Fuel Gas
Code describes the combustion air requirements for gas-fired appliances and NFPA
Standard 31—Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment describes the combus-
tion air requirements for fuel-burning appliances.
If it is not feasible to obtain the required combustion air from the room in which the
appliances are installed, transfer the combustion air from adjacent spaces, provide ade-
quate openings to the outdoors, or provide a direct connection of outdoor combustion air
to each appliance, it will be necessary to provide combustion air for the appliances through
a mechanical forced-air system. We will refer to this as a combustion air makeup system.
A combustion air makeup system consists mainly of a fan that blows outdoor air
into the equipment room in which the appliances are installed. The combustion air
makeup system must be sized to deliver the amount of outdoor combustion air required
by all of the appliances installed within the room. It is recommended that the combus-
tion air be filtered and heated to at least 50°F to prevent freezing conditions within the
equipment room. Furthermore, operation of the combustion air unit should be inter-
locked with the operation of the appliances within the room so that combustion air is
only provided when one or more of the appliances is firing.
The combustion air makeup system can also be used to ventilate the equipment
room during the summertime in a manner similar to that which is discussed in the
Positive-Pressure Equipment Room Ventilation section earlier. In this case, the combus-
tion air makeup system would be controlled by a space thermostat in addition to being
interlocked with the appliances. If there are multiple appliances within the equipment
room and/or if the combustion air makeup system is used for summertime ventilation,
provisions must be made in the room to relieve excess air to the outdoors that is not
used for combustion.
Figure 5-10 includes a schematic diagram and sequence of operation for a combustion
air makeup system that serves multiple gas-fired boilers and also provides positive-
pressure ventilation of the equipment room in the summertime. The combustion air
makeup system is designed to provide combustion air for six 1,800 thousand British
thermal units per hour (MBH) input boilers.14
Exhaust Air Systems

Exhaust air systems remove air from within a building and discharge it to the outdoors.
For commercial buildings, exhaust air systems are generally used to:
• Provide general exhaust for odor-producing areas to prevent odors from

migrating to other areas of the building.
• Provide ventilation for spaces that do not require cooling but for which it is
desired to keep the space temperatures below a maximum limit and also to
keep the spaces under a negative air pressurization to prevent odor migration.
Because this type of exhaust air system is normally utilized for equipment
rooms, we will refer to this as negative-pressure equipment room ventilation.
• Provide the exhaust airflow required for certain types of equipment.
General Exhaust Applicable codes and the authority having jurisdiction may require
exhaust from certain areas within commercial buildings in order to prevent odor migra-
tion. For example, Table 403.3 in the 2009 International Mechanical Code requires public
toilet rooms to be exhausted at a rate of 50 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per water closet15
or urinal for normal use and 70 cfm per water closet or urinal for heavy use (theaters,
schools, sports facilities, etc.). The code also requires sports locker rooms to be exhausted
at a rate of 0.5 cfm/ft2 of net occupiable floor area. In addition to exhausting these
spaces with the code-required airflow, sufficient negative air pressurization must be
established within these spaces with respect to adjacent spaces to ensure proper con-
tainment of odors, which is achieved by maintaining the space under a 0.02-in. w.c.
negative air pressurization with respect to adjacent spaces. In situations where the
space under concern is separated from adjacent spaces by one or more (closed) doors,
the required 0.02-in. w.c. negative air pressurization can be achieved by exhausting
168
Figure 5-10 Schematic diagram of a combustion air makeup system.
A
approximately 100 cfm per 3-ft-wide (closed) door16 more from the space than what is
supplied to the space.
There may also be other spaces within the building for which exhaust is desired for
odor containment but for which it is not required by the applicable codes or the author-
ity having jurisdiction. For example, the 2009 International Mechanical Code does not
require exhaust from janitor’s closets. However, it is desirable to keep janitor’s closets
under a negative air pressurization to contain the odors produced by the cleaning
agents that are often stored in these rooms. Therefore, each janitor’s closet should be
designed with an exhaust airflow of 100 cfm in order to properly contain these odors
(supply airflow is not required for janitor’s closets).
Often, the air systems providing general exhaust for commercial buildings serve
multiple spaces and multiple occupancy classifications. For example, a four-story office
building that has toilet rooms and janitor’s closets in the same location on each floor
would normally have one exhaust system to serve all of these toilet rooms and janitor’s
closets. However, physical separation of the spaces requiring general exhaust, differing
hours of operation, and multiple tenants are all reasons why separate exhaust systems
may be required to meet a building’s general exhaust requirements.
Makeup air for public toilet rooms and janitor’s closets is normally transferred from
adjacent spaces that are served by the building HVAC systems. Typically, the outdoor air
supplied by these HVAC systems to meet the occupant ventilation requirements is suffi-
cient to provide makeup air for the toilet room and janitor’s closet exhaust air systems.
There may be some spaces within a building for which the general exhaust airflow
is a significant percentage of the supply airflow that is required to maintain the space
temperature. One example is a large sports locker room. The 0.5-cfm/ft2 exhaust air-
flow required for this occupancy may be as high as 50% of the supply airflow required
for cooling. For this reason, sports locker rooms are normally heated and ventilated
only. However, if cooling is required in addition to heating, the HVAC unit must have
dehumidification capabilities in order to properly dehumidify the high percentage of
outdoor airflow that will be required. Another alternative would be to design the HVAC
system serving the locker rooms to utilize a maximum of 15% outdoor airflow and
transfer the remaining airflow required for exhaust to the locker rooms from adjacent
conditioned spaces.
General exhaust air systems normally operate when the building is occupied and
are shut off when the building is unoccupied. It is common for exhaust fans serving
general exhaust to be electrically interlocked with the operation of the HVAC systems
serving the adjacent areas so that the exhaust fans can only operate when the HVAC
systems are operating. If the building is designed with a computerized building auto-
mation system (BAS), the exhaust fans would be controlled by the BAS and can be
assigned a different operating schedule than the associated HVAC systems, if desired.
Negative-Pressure Equipment Room Ventilation Negative-pressure equipment room ventila-

tion is provided for spaces that do not require cooling but for which it is desired to keep
the space temperature at a maximum of about 100°F, which is 5 to 10°F higher than the
summer design outdoor temperature (Figs. 5-11 and 5-12). Equipment room ventilation
systems can positively pressurize the space they serve, which is the requirement for equip-
ment rooms containing gas-fired or fuel-burning appliances that use the room air for com-
bustion (refer to the Positive-Pressure Equipment Room Ventilation section earlier).
However, it is more common for equipment room ventilation systems to place the spaces
they serve under a negative air pressurization to prevent odors from migrating to adjacent
170 Chapter Five A
Figure 5-11 Schematic diagram of a negative-pressure equipment room ventilation system.
Figure 5-12 Floor plan representation of a negative-pressure equipment room ventilation system.
spaces. In these situations, an exhaust air system that draws makeup air from an opening
in the building envelope, such as a wall louver or roof-mounted intake air hood, would be
designed. The exhaust air system would be controlled by a space thermostat and be ener-
gized whenever the space temperature rises above the setpoint of the space thermostat,
which is normally about 85°F. It is necessary for equipment room ventilation systems to
incorporate a normally closed motor-operated damper on the outdoor air opening so that
the damper closes whenever the ventilation system is off. This prevents outdoor air infil-
tration to the space when ventilation is not required.
One example of this type of exhaust air system is one that serves equipment rooms
without gas-fired or fuel-burning appliances (or the appliances have direct connections
to the outdoors for combustion air). Another example is the exhaust air system serving
an electrical equipment room, particularly one that contains heat-generating equipment,
such as transformers or uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs).
Equipment rooms can also be ventilated by transferring makeup air for the exhaust
air systems from adjacent spaces that are conditioned by the building HVAC systems.
In this situation, the maximum allowable space temperature within the rooms would
still be 100°F,17 but the makeup air would be the temperature of the air within the
adjacent conditioned spaces, which is typically 75°F during occupied operation of the
building HVAC systems. Because the temperature rise of the transfer air is 25°F, the exhaust
airflow required to maintain the equipment rooms at 100°F is 2.5 to 5 times less than the
exhaust airflow required to maintain the equipment rooms at 100°F when outdoor air at
the design summer outdoor temperature is used to make up for the exhaust airflow.
Refer to Fig. 7-5 in Chap. 7 for a graphical representation of the exhaust fan, exhaust
air louver, outdoor air louver, and motor-operated dampers for a negative-pressure
equipment room ventilation system as they would be shown on a floor plan drawing.
Equipment Exhaust Finally, exhaust systems are used to remove undesirable or potentially
harmful contaminants from the building at the point where these contaminants are gener-
ated. An example of this type of exhaust air system is a kitchen hood exhaust system. The
size, quantity, and location(s) of kitchen exhaust hood(s) are usually determined by the
kitchen equipment consultant. The exhaust airflow through each exhaust hood depends
upon the type and input rating of the appliances located under the hood. The kitchen
hood exhaust system must be designed in accordance with NFPA Standard 96—Standard for
Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
Air Pressurization Calculations

Once all of the air systems have been defined for a building, it is necessary to perform
air pressurization calculations for the overall building as well as for individual spaces
within the building in order to:
• Ensure that sufficient outdoor makeup air is available to meet all exhaust
airflow requirements within the building without placing the building under
an overall negative air pressurization.
• Ensure that appropriate air pressure relationships exist between adjacent spaces
within the building.
Generally, commercial buildings should have about 5% positive air pressuriza-

tion; that is, the sum of the outdoor airflows supplied by the various HVAC and
ventilation air systems to the building should be 5% greater than the sum of the
exhaust airflows removed from the building. However, some judgment needs to be
applied in the building air pressurization calculation, such as in the case where an
equipment room is exhausted by an air system and makeup air is supplied to this
room through an opening in the building envelope. In this case, the equipment room
exhaust airflow would not be included in the air pressurization calculation for the
overall building since the airflow through this room is actually separate from the rest
of the building.
Also, appropriate air pressure relationships need to exist between adjacent spaces
within the building. The air pressurization of a particular space within the building is
equal to the sum of the airflows supplied to that space by the HVAC and ventilation air
systems minus the sum of the airflows removed from that space. The air supplied to each
space in the building includes both the supply air from the HVAC system(s) serving
the space plus outdoor air delivered directly to the space by the outdoor air ventilation
system(s). The air removed from the space includes both the return air to the HVAC
system(s) serving the space plus exhaust air removed from the space by the exhaust
air system(s).
172 Chapter Five A
Because some spaces of the building will have a more positive (relative) air pres-
surization than other spaces, there will be a transfer of air from spaces of greater air
pressurization to spaces of lesser air pressurization. The transfer of air from one space
to another needs to be evaluated to ensure that air is flowing in the proper direction.
Typically, it is desirable for air to flow from spaces that are clean to spaces that are less
clean or from spaces that are odor-free to spaces that are odor-producing. Section 403 of
the 2009 International Mechanical Code defines the requirements for pressure relation-
ships between various occupancy classifications within buildings.
It is very helpful in this regard to prepare an air pressurization schematic diagram
of each floor of a building showing (with airflow arrows) the directions that air flows
between the spaces of the building. The diagram should also show the resultant air
pressurization of each space and the overall air pressurization of the floor, both in terms
of cubic feet per minute.
Air System Equipment

In the first section of this chapter, we discussed the various types of air systems com-
monly used in commercial buildings, focusing on the overall systems and the ways in
which the various systems meet the needs of the areas served. In this section, we will
discuss the physical characteristics, connections, and design considerations common to
air system equipment.
HVAC Air Systems
As discussed earlier in this chapter, HVAC air systems circulate air primarily to meet
the heating and/or cooling needs of the spaces they serve.
Centralized Equipment An example of a centralized air system is a modular central station

air handling unit18 that contains a hot water heating coil and a chilled water cooling coil
that receive their heating and cooling energy from a remote central plant. Figure 5-13 is a
graphical representation of an air handling unit on a floor plan drawing.
Decentralized Equipment An example of a decentralized air system is a packaged19 roof-

top unit (RTU) that contains an indirect gas-fired heater and a complete refrigeration
system for cooling (Figs. 5-14 and 5-15).
Another example of a decentralized air system is an air handling unit with a split
refrigeration system that provides DX cooling or heat pump operation. This type of
system is called a split system. In a split system, the compressor and condenser are
contained within an outdoor air-cooled unit called a condensing unit. The outdoor air-
cooled condensing unit is connected to the evaporator (DX cooling coil) in the air han-
dling unit by refrigerant liquid and refrigerant suction piping. The refrigerant liquid
piping carries the high-pressure refrigerant liquid from the outlet of the condenser to
the thermostatic expansion valve on the inlet of the DX cooling coil. The refrigerant
suction piping carries the low-pressure refrigerant gas from the outlet of the DX cooling
coil to the suction of the compressor.
In order to increase the unloading capabilities of the refrigeration system, a hot gas
bypass line can be connected to the high-pressure (hot gas) side of the compressor,
which carries a portion of the hot gas to the DX cooling coil, bypassing the condenser.
Figure 5-13 Floor plan representation of a modular central station air handling unit with hot
water heating coil and chilled water cooling coil.
The hot gas adds load to the DX cooling coil during low-load conditions and keeps the
compressor running.
One limitation of a split system is the distance between the air handling unit and the
air-cooled condensing unit. Special sizing of the refrigerant lines must be performed by
the equipment manufacturer if the distance between the two units exceeds the allow-
able separation distance, which is usually 75 to 100 ft. Furthermore, the allowable sepa-
ration distance between the air handling unit and the condensing unit may be decreased
if the condensing unit is installed at a higher elevation than the air handling unit.
Figure 5-16 illustrates a rooftop, cooling-only air handling unit with a split-system
DX cooling coil. The refrigeration system has two separate refrigeration circuits and a
hot gas bypass line for each circuit. This explains why there are six refrigerant lines con-
necting the two units.
Another example of a decentralized air system is a computer room air-conditioning
(CRAC) unit with an electric heating coil, self-contained steam humidifier, and outdoor
air-cooled condenser (Figs. 5-17 through 5-19).
174 Chapter Five
Figure 5-14 Roof plan representation of a packaged RTU with indirect gas-fired heater and DX
cooling coil.
Figure 5-15 Photograph of a packaged RTU with indirect gas-fired heater and DX cooling coil.
Figure 5-16 Roof plan representation of a rooftop, cooling-only air handling unit with a split-system DX cooling coil.
175
176 Chapter Five
Figure 5-17 Floor plan representation of two CRAC units with electric heating coils and self-
contained steam humidifiers.
Figure 5-18 Roof plan representation of two outdoor air-cooled condensers.
Figure 5-19 CRAC unit connection detail.
177
178 Chapter Five
Ventilation Air Systems

Ventilation air systems provide ventilation only and do not provide any heating or cool-
ing to the spaces they serve.
Outdoor Air Equipment (Positive Pressure) Figures 5-20 and 5-21 show the section view
and photograph of a modular central station DOAS unit with a hot water heating coil,
wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil, and a chilled water cooling coil.
Figure 5-22 is a photograph of a kitchen exhaust hood makeup air unit with an
indirect gas-fired heater.
Exhaust Air Equipment (Negative Pressure) Figures 5-23 through 5-31 are examples of dif-
ferent types of exhaust fans that are commonly used in exhaust air systems.
Figure 5-23 is a photograph of an upblast grease exhaust fan.
Figure 5-24 is a photograph of a downflow fan.
Figures 5-25 and 5-26 illustrate a roof plan representation and photograph of two
kitchen exhaust hood makeup air units with indirect gas-fired heaters, two upblast
grease exhaust fans, and a downflow exhaust fan.
Figures 5-27 and 5-28 illustrate a floor plan representation and detail of an in-line
centrifugal fan used in a garage ventilation system.
Figures 5-29 through 5-31 illustrate a floor plan representation, detail, and photo-
graph of a propeller fan.
Connections
Air system equipment will have some of the following connections, depending upon
the type of air system and components within the system:
• Heating water supply and return piping connections to the hot water heating
coil
• Chilled water supply and return piping connections to the chilled water cooling
coil
• Refrigerant suction, refrigerant liquid, and possibly hot gas piping connections
to the DX refrigerant cooling coil
• Condensate drain piping connection to the condensate drain pan under the
cooling coil
• Steam supply and steam condensate return piping connections to the steam
heating coil
• Steam supply and steam condensate drain piping connections to the centralized
steam humidifier
• Domestic cold water supply and steam condensate drain piping connections to
the self-contained gas-fired or electric steam humidifier
• Gas piping connection to the gas-fired heater and/or self-contained gas-fired
steam humidifier
• Vent and possibly combustion air connection to the gas-fired heater and/or
self-contained gas-fired steam humidifier
• Heat pump water supply and heat pump water return piping connections to
water-source heat pump units
Figure 5-20 Section view of a modular central station DOAS with a hot water heating coil, wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil, and a chilled
water coil.
179
180 Chapter Five
Figure 5-21 Photograph of a modular central station DOAS with a hot water heating coil, wrap-
around heat pipe refrigerant coil, and a chilled water coil.
Figure 5-22 Photograph of a kitchen exhaust hood makeup air unit with an indirect gas-fired
heater.
Figure 5-23 Photograph of an upblast grease exhaust fan.
Figure 5-24 Photograph of a downflow exhaust fan.
181
Figure 5-25 Roof plan representation of two kitchen exhaust hood makeup air units with indirect
gas-fired heaters, two upblast grease exhaust fans, and a downflow exhaust fan.
Figure 5-26 Photograph of two kitchen exhaust hood makeup air units with indirect gas-fired
heaters, two upblast grease exhaust fans, and a downflow exhaust fan.
182
Figure 5-27 Floor plan representation of an in-line centrifugal fan.
183
184 Chapter Five
Figure 5-28 Detail of an in-line centrifugal fan.
Figure 5-29 Floor plan representation of a propeller fan.
Figure 5-30 Detail of a propeller fan.
Figure 5-31 Photograph of a propeller fan.
185
186 Chapter Five A
• Duct connections
• HVAC equipment will have return air and supply air duct connections.
Units may have an outdoor air connection to the mixing box section and
may also have a relief air connection if a return fan is used.
• Ventilation equipment will have outdoor air duct inlet and supply air duct
discharge connections for outdoor air systems, and exhaust air duct inlet and
(possibly) exhaust air duct discharge connections for exhaust air systems.
• Electrical connections to each motor and electric coil (if equipped) or single-
point electrical connection for all electrical components that are part of the air
system
• Electrical connection to the self-contained gas-fired or electric steam humidifier
The following are some important items to consider when designing air systems:
• The width and height of an air handling unit is proportional to the airflow
through the unit. The velocity of air through the cooling coil (or face velocity) is
typically what determines the width and height dimensions of an air handling
unit. Cooling coils are normally selected for a maximum of 500 feet per minute
(fpm) face velocity.20 If 10% future capacity is required, the cooling coil should
be selected with the additional capacity but with a face velocity of 450 fpm for
the present-day airflow so that when the future capacity is required and the fan
speed is adjusted for the increased airflow, the face velocity will be 495 fpm,
which is below the maximum 500 fpm face velocity. Equipment manufacturers
offer some flexibility in the width and height dimensions for air handling
units.
• The outdoor air/return air mixing box section is normally furnished with dampers
integral to the box. Field installation of the damper actuators is required.
• An angled filter section is recommended in lieu of a flat filter section if sufficient
airway length is available for the unit. The angled arrangement of the filters
provides a greater filter surface area, a lower face velocity and static pressure
loss, and a greater dust-holding capacity.
• A pressure gauge mounted on the exterior of the unit piped across the filter
section is recommended because the differential pressure across the filter section
provides maintenance personnel with information regarding the loading of the
filters. In addition to (or as an alternative to) a pressure gauge, a differential
pressure switch piped across the filter section that provides a “dirty filter”
alarm at the BAS whenever the (adjustable) setpoint of the differential pressure
switch is exceeded can be specified.
• Access sections are recommended both upstream and downstream of the
heating and cooling coils to facilitate routine inspection and cleaning of the
coils. Access sections are typically 12 or 24 in. in airway length.
• The required capacity for the heating and cooling coils is what determines the
number of rows21 and fin spacing for the coils.
• Heating coils are typically one or two rows deep.

• Cooling coils are typically four to eight rows deep. A higher number of rows for
a cooling coil increases the dehumidification capabilities of the cooling coil
because the air is in contact with the cold surface of the coil for a longer period
of time.
• The fin spacing on air coils is given in terms of fins per inch (fpi). Air coils
typically have a fin spacing of 8 to 12 fpi. Closer fin spacing increases the heat
transfer efficiency and air pressure drop of the air coil; however, coils with a fin
spacing greater than 12 fpi are difficult to clean.
• The condensate drain pan below the cooling coil should be double-sloped; that
is, it should be sloped in two planes to drain condensate within the pan to the
drain pipe. If available as an option, double-wall construction with foam
insulation between the walls should be specified for the drain pan because it
prevents condensation of moisture on the outer surfaces of the drain pan. If
available as an option, stainless steel construction for the drain pan is also
recommended (in lieu of galvanized steel) because it provides better corrosion
resistance.
• Double width, double-inlet (DWDI)22 centrifugal fans are typically used for
air handling units. The fan blades can be forward-curved (FC), backward-
inclined (BI), or airfoil. FC fans are typically used for low total static pressure
applications. BI and airfoil fans are typically used for high total static pressure
applications.
• Plenum fans can also be used in air handling units. Plenum fans provide some
flexibility in the location of the supply fan outlet connection(s) [or return fan
inlet connection(s)] to the air handling unit and are also shorter in airway length
than centrifugal fans.
• Air handling units are normally internally vibration isolated; that is, the fan(s)
is mounted on spring vibration isolators inside of the unit. External spring
vibration isolators are not necessary for floor-mounted air handling units.
Neoprene vibration isolation hangers should be used if the air handling unit is
suspended from the building structure.
• Lights are typically installed in selected sections (such as filter, access, and fan
sections) of larger air handling units. The units can be specified with lights that
are factory-mounted and wired to a switch on the outside of the unit.
• The stiffness of the panels used to construct air handling units is usually given
in terms of the deflection of the panel at mid-span when the unit is subjected to
a test static pressure that is 125% of the design static pressure, or a maximum of
5-in. w.c. positive or 6-in. w.c. negative static pressure. The deflection at mid-
span is described as a ratio of the length of the span divided by a constant. A
good panel stiffness of L/240 defines a panel deflection at mid-span that is
1/240 of the length of the panel.
• The air leakage of an air handling unit is normally given in terms of cubic feet
per minute per square foot of cabinet area at a test pressure of 5-in. w.c. positive
or 6-in. w.c. negative static pressure. Tight air handling unit construction is
0.5-cfm/ft2 air leakage.
188 Chapter Five A
• Factory mounting and wiring of electrical components, such as motor starters

or VFDs, are recommended whenever available as an option because it reduces
field labor required for installation and improves coordination between
trades.
• If possible, a single-point electrical connection23 should be specified for air
handling units that have multiple electrical components. This simplifies the
installation procedure and also provides factory quality control of the installation
and wiring of the electrical components within the unit.
• Premium-efficiency motors complying with the 1992 Energy Policy Act (EPAct)
should always be specified.
• In addition, motors controlled by VFDs must be specified as inverter-duty
motors.24
• A concrete housekeeping pad is normally designed for floor-mounted air
handling units. Housekeeping pads are normally 4 in. high and 4 to 6 in. larger
than the equipment base frame on all sides. A housekeeping pad higher than
4 in. may be required for air handling units with a high negative static pressure
in the cooling coil drain pan in order to allow sufficient height to maintain the
water seal in the condensate drain trap.
• The entering and leaving water temperatures, type of brine (if used), flow rates,
maximum water pressure drop, maximum air pressure drop, minimum number
of rows, and minimum fin spacing (maximum number of fins per inch) for
heating and chilled water coils should be specified.
• Whether 2-way or 3-way control valves will be used for the heating and chilled
water coils should be specified.
• A primary-secondary pumping arrangement may be required for the heating
and/or chilled water coils.
• A circulating pump for freeze protection on the heating water coil should be
specified if the mixed air temperature is less than 40°F.
• The heating coil should be located upstream of the chilled water coil to protect
the chilled water coil from freezing.
• A low-limit temperature sensor mounted on the downstream side of hot water
or steam heating coils is recommended. The low-limit temperature sensor
de-energizes the unit and closes the outdoor air damper if the coldest point
along the sensor drops below the (adjustable) setpoint of the sensor, which is
usually set at 38°F.
• If steam coils are used, the steam pressure and flow rate should be specified.
• Hot gas bypass for DX refrigerant cooling coils used in VAV air handling units
should be specified.
• The minimum outdoor airflow that is required to be delivered by the unit
• If the static pressure loss through the return air duct system at the design airflow
exceeds 0.25 in. w.c., a return fan should be specified. The return fan should be
selected to deliver the return airflow (supply airflow minus outdoor airflow) at
a static pressure that is sufficient to overcome the (external) static pressure loss
of the longest run of the return air duct system, including the pressure loss
through the return air inlet at the end of this run.
• The airflow and external static pressure for supply and return fans should be
specified. The supply air fan should be selected to deliver the maximum design
supply airflow at a static pressure that is equal to the (external) static pressure loss
of the longest run of the supply air duct system, including the pressure loss through
the air outlet at the end of this run, plus the (internal) static pressure loss of all the
components within the air handling unit (mixing box, filters, coils, etc.).
• The design criteria for the air handling unit should be provided to the
manufacturer’s representative for the selection of the equipment that forms the
basis of design. The actual equipment selection data will include the internal
pressure drop of all components within the air handling unit. This information
is used to specify the maximum air pressure drop through the coils and air
filters and also to specify a minimum number of coil rows and minimum fin
spacing (maximum number of fins per inch).
• The minimum face area of all air coils should be specified to ensure that the face
velocity does not exceed the desired limit (450 to 500 fpm) for the cooling coil.
• A duct-mounted smoke detector is required in return air systems that have a
design airflow greater than 2,000 cfm (refer to the 2009 International Mechanical
Code, Section 606).
• Duct-mounted smoke detectors are required at each floor in return air systems
serving two or more stories that have a design airflow greater than 15,000 cfm
(refer to the 2009 International Mechanical Code, Section 606).
• An airside economizer25 should be employed if the spaces served by the air
system require cooling when the outdoor temperature is below 55°F. Provisions
to relieve the outdoor airflow that is in excess of the minimum outdoor airflow
required for ventilation and/or exhaust air makeup need to be accommodated
in the air system design.
• The dimensions of the condensate drain trap should be specified based on the
static pressure that exists in the cooling coil section.
• A 1-in. air gap at the condensate pipe discharge to drain should be specified.
• Single- or double-wall construction for the unit cabinet should be specified.
Double-wall construction is preferred but is also more costly.
• A roof curb is normally used for rooftop equipment.
• The maximum sound power levels for the unit, both radiated and discharge,
• The connecting ductwork to the unit must be properly designed in order to
minimize the fan system effect.
• All ductwork connections to the unit must be made with flexible duct connectors
to reduce vibration transmission through the duct systems.
• It is necessary to allow adequate coil pull clearance equal to the width of the
unit on the coil connection side of the unit.
• It is necessary to allow adequate filter replacement clearance on the proper side
of the unit.
190 Chapter Five A
• It is necessary to allow sufficient clearance within the equipment room to install

and remove the unit. Clearance may only need to be provided for the largest section
of modular central station air handling units if the sections can be field-assembled.
• Doorways into equipment rooms need to be large enough to install and remove
the unit. Individual sections of modular central station air handling units can be
shipped separately for field assembly, if required.
• Hose kits are recommended for water-source heat pump units to simplify the
final heat pump water supply and return connections to the units. Hose kits
typically include 2- or 3-ft flexible, fire-rated hoses; shutoff valves; strainer; and
a flow control valve (for water flow balancing).
• If installed above critical equipment, a drain pan should be included under
units suspended from the building structure. A leak detector in the pan or a
drain line from the pan should also be designed.
• The required openings in the building envelope need to be coordinated with
the project architect and structural engineer.
• The size, location, and weight of all air system equipment need to be coordinated
with the project architect and structural engineer.
• It is necessary to coordinate the electrical requirements of the air system
equipment with the project electrical engineer.
• Coordination with the project electrical engineer is necessary in order to ensure
that the ground fault circuit interrupter receptacle required by Section 210.63 of
the National Electric Code for use by the maintenance personnel is designed
within 25 ft of all HVAC units.
• It is important to ensure that all appropriate automatic temperature controls are
designed for the air systems, including heating, cooling, occupied, unoccupied,
and morning warm-up modes of operation, as well as safeties and interlocks
with other air systems and connection to the BAS, if required.
• The location of outdoor air intake openings must comply with the 2009
International Mechanical Code, Section 401.4. One requirement of this section is
for intake openings to be at least 10 ft away from noxious contaminant sources,
such as sanitary plumbing system vents and loading docks. It is also good
practice to locate outdoor air intake openings at least 10 ft away from building
exhaust outlets.
• Care should be taken when locating exhaust air outlets to ensure that the
discharged air does not create a nuisance, such as discharging onto a walkway
or below operable windows.
Endnotes
1. HVAC air systems may also provide humidification and dehumidification for the
spaces they serve.
2. HVAC air systems that serve laboratories or other spaces with high exhaust airflows
may have a significantly higher percentage of outdoor air.
3. In an indirect gas-fired heater, fuel is burned within a combustion chamber that is
separate from the conditioned airstream, and the products of combustion are vented
to the outdoors. In a direct gas-fired heater, the fuel is burned directly within the
conditioned airstream; thus the products of combustion are entrained within the
conditioned air and are delivered to the spaces served.
4. Depending upon the project, these spaces may require cooling as well as heating
and ventilation.
5. The primary air duct is the portion of the supply air duct system between the VAV
air handling unit and the VAV terminal units.
6. VAV terminal units without a fan are called single-duct VAV terminal units. Those
that contain a fan are called fan-powered VAV terminal units.
7. Other methods of modulating fan airflow are available, such as the use of inlet
guide vanes or discharge dampers. However, these methods are less energy efficient
than the use of VFDs. Furthermore, recent improvements in VFD technology and
reduced cost have made VFDs the first choice for modulating fan airflow for VAV
systems.
8. DX refrigerant cooling coils are not as “forgiving” as chilled water coils. Without
adequate unloading capabilities in the refrigeration system, the saturated suction
pressure of the refrigerant will drop at low-load conditions, which could cause a
decrease in the cooling coil temperature below the freezing point of water. If this
occurs, any moisture on the cooling coil will freeze, leading to further freezing of the
moisture contained within the air flowing through the coil. This could eventually
lead to a complete freeze-up of the coil and blockage of airflow through the coil.
9. The purpose of the minimum position for the primary air damper in a VAV terminal
unit is to provide minimum ventilation airflow to the zone. A minimum primary
air damper position is necessary only for zones that have a heating load. For zones
with a heating load, there could be times when the (external) heat losses from the
zone equal the (internal) heat gains to the zone, producing a net zone cooling load
of zero. With no zone cooling load, the primary air damper in the VAV terminal
unit would close completely (even though the zone could be occupied and require
ventilation) were it not for the minimum primary air damper position. A heating
coil in the VAV terminal unit is required in this case to prevent the possibility of
overcooling the zone when the primary air damper is at its minimum position.
10. The primary air damper in VAV terminal units serving zones that do not have any
heating load (purely interior spaces) can have a minimum position that is fully
closed because if there is no zone cooling load, the zone would have to be unoc-
cupied. That is, there would be no internal heat gains from lights, equipment, or
people. If any of these heat gains were present, there would be a cooling load, and
the primary air damper in the VAV terminal unit would not close completely. A
heating coil in the VAV terminal unit is not required in this case.
11. The temperature range between the 70°F heating setpoint and the 75°F cooling set-
point is called the deadband. Within this range of temperatures, neither heating nor
cooling is provided to the zone; rather, the zone temperature is allowed to “float”
between these two limits. If closer control of the zone temperature is required, the
deadband can be reduced. However, a 5°F deadband is usually appropriate for com-
mercial HVAC systems because it is acceptable for human comfort and it reduces
the cycling from one mode of operation to the other.
12. Indoor air at 75°F/50% has a dew point of approximately 55°F. Thus, if the dew
point of the outdoor air delivered by the DOAS is lowered to 55°F, it will not increase
the total moisture content (humidity ratio) of the indoor air.
192 Chapter Five
13. If a makeup-air-type exhaust hood is not used, the makeup air distribution system
(particularly the location, size, type, and airflow delivered by the makeup air out-
lets) must be coordinated with the exhaust hood design to ensure a proper capture
of the contaminated air by the exhaust hood.
14. For a mechanical forced-air system, the 2009 National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA
Standard 54), Section 9.3.6, requires 0.35 cfm of combustion air per 1,000 Btuh input
rating for all of the appliances located within the room.
15. A water closet is more commonly known as a toilet.
16. A 0.02-in. w.c. negative air pressurization is achieved with 105 cfm of airflow through
a ¾-in. undercut on the bottom of each 3-ft-wide (closed) door. It is not feasible to
establish space air pressurization through doors that remain open.
17. An equipment room ventilation system that utilizes transfer air from adjacent con-
ditioned spaces is not recommended for equipment rooms containing electronic
equipment for which the maximum space temperature is 85°F because the tempera-
ture in the conditioned spaces can rise above this temperature when the building
HVAC systems are operating in the unoccupied mode.
18. A modular central station air handling unit is a built-up unit consisting of various
individually specified components, such as the (outdoor/return air) mixing section,
filter section, heating section, cooling section, access sections, and fan section.
19. Packaged equipment is only available with the standard components and capacities
offered by the manufacturer. Packaged units offer limited flexibility in the selection
of each individual component.
20. If the face velocity of a cooling coil is too high, moisture carryover from the coil will
occur.
21. The number of rows in an air coil is given in terms of the airway length of the coil.
For example, air passes through four rows of coils in a 4-row air coil.
22. A DWDI fan consists of two single-width single-inlet fans mounted on a common
shaft, driven by a single motor.
23. A single-point electrical connection means the equipment requires only a single elec-
trical connection to the building electrical power distribution system. All required
wiring, conduit, starters, VFDs, overload, and overcurrent protection for the multi-
ple electrical components within the equipment is factory-mounted and wired.
24. Inverter-duty motors are designed in accordance with the National Electric
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard MG 1, Part 31, Section IV.
25. An airside economizer utilizes an increased outdoor airflow for cooling whenever
the outdoor conditions are appropriate and cooling is required by the air system.
An airside economizer is sometimes referred to as “free cooling” because the cool-
ing energy obtained from the outdoor air does not require energy associated with
mechanical cooling.
Chapter 6
Piping and Ductwork
Distribution Systems
I
n this chapter we will discuss the basic principles of designing HVAC piping and
ductwork distribution systems for commercial buildings. In order to do this, the
HVAC load calculations for the entire building must be complete so that the water,
steam, and/or airflow rates required by the air systems and terminal equipment can be
determined and the HVAC piping and ductwork distribution systems can be laid out
and sized accordingly.
Equations and Conversion Factors

Before proceeding to the method of designing HVAC piping and ductwork distribu-
tion systems, it is necessary to present some basic equations that are used to calcu-
late the rates of fluid flow for water, steam, and air, which are expressed in terms of
gallons per minute (gpm) for water, pounds per hour (lb/h) for steam, and cubic feet
per minute (cfm) for air, from the heating and cooling loads for the building, which
are expressed in terms of heat flow [British thermal units per hour (Btu/h or Btuh1)].
These fluid flow rates are necessary to properly size the HVAC piping and ductwork
distribution systems within the building. We will also discuss some helpful conver-
sion factors.
It is highly recommended that the HVAC system designer commit at least the fol-
lowing equations and conversion factors to memory:
Equations:
Water:
q = 500(Q)(Δt)
where
q = heat flow (Btuh)
Q = water flow (gpm)
Δt = temperature difference (°F)
Steam:
q = (Q)(hfg)
193
194 Chapter Six P
where
q = heat flow (Btuh)
Q = steam flow (lb/h)
hfg = latent heat of vaporization (Btu/lb)
Air:
qs = (1.08)(Qs)(Δt)
where
qs = sensible heat flow (Btuh)
Qs = airflow (cfm) of standard air2
Δt = temperature difference (°F)
Conversion factors:
Water pressure:
1 psi = 2.31 ft w.c. = 28 in. w.c.
Steam heat flow:
1. For low-pressure steam systems (0 to 15 psig), the heat flow of 1 lb/h of steam
is approximately equal to 1,000 Btuh (or 1 MBH3). This figure can be used to
quickly estimate the steam flow required to meet the heating needs of a
particular space or piece of equipment. The heat flow for low pressure steam is
more precisely given as follows:
a. 966 Btuh for 2 psig steam
b. 946 Btuh for 15 psig steam
2. 1 ft2 EDR4 = 240 Btuh
Electrical power:
1 watt (W) = 3,413 Btuh
Other equations and conversion factors that are not defined here are also used;
these can be found in various reference books when needed.
Piping Systems
In this section, we will discuss general and specific guidelines for designing hydronic
and low pressure steam systems.
General Design Guidelines

Piping Drawing Conventions
Piping systems are normally represented by single lines for pipe sizes up to about 12 in.
Piping systems larger than 12 in. are normally represented by double lines.
Changes in elevation of piping systems are denoted on floor plans by “pipe up” and
“pipe down” symbols. These symbols can be understood by defining the viewing plane
for a plan drawing as a horizontal plane located just below the underside of the deck
that is above the ceiling of the floor being presented on the drawing. If the pipe rises up
through this plane, it is represented by a “pipe up” symbol. If the pipe drops down and
P i p i n g a n d D u c t w o r k D i s t r i b u t i o n S y s t e m s 195
does not rise up through this plane, it is represented by a “pipe down” symbol. Symbols
for other piping components, such as valves, are also shown on floor plans. The con-
ventions for pipe symbols should be given in the legend for each project. Although
there are basic similarities, pipe symbol conventions vary somewhat from one company
to another. Refer to the sample legend and abbreviations in Chap. 10 for commonly
used pipe, valve, and specialty symbols.
Piping Layout
Generally, piping systems should be laid out parallel and perpendicular to the building
structure. This should be done utilizing the fewest number of bends and offsets in the
vertical and horizontal planes necessary to connect the heating and cooling sources to
the loads.
Piping systems are suspended from the building structure with clevis hangers for
single pipes or trapeze hangers for multiple pipes. Figures 6-1 through 6-4 illustrate
these hangers.
The (horizontal) floor plan location and (vertical) elevation of HVAC piping sys-
tems above the floor must be coordinated with the systems of other disciplines, such
as the building structure, ductwork, plumbing piping, sprinkler piping, and lighting,
in the same area. If close coordination with the systems of other disciplines is required,
a section view of the area should be drawn showing the work of all disciplines and
the proposed locations and mounting heights of the systems within the available space.
Figure 6-1 Clevis pipe hanger detail.
196 Chapter Six P
Figure 6-2 Photograph of a clevis pipe hanger.
Penetrations of Building Components

It is common practice in commercial construction to require sleeves for all pipe pene-
trations of the floors and both the interior and exterior walls of the building. A pipe
sleeve is a short section of pipe or galvanized sheet metal that is embedded in the floor
or wall. It is large enough to allow the pipe to pass through without interruption to the
pipe insulation (if required). Sleeves isolate the piping from the building components,
provide a finished appearance, and allow movement of the piping systems, which may
Figure 6-3 Trapeze pipe hanger detail.
Figure 6-4 Photograph of a trapeze pipe hanger.
be required for pipe expansion. Sleeves for pipes are typically Schedule 40 steel pipe;
however, sleeves for large pipes may be constructed of galvanized sheet metal. Pene-
trations through fire-rated components must be firestopped. That is, the voids between
the pipe (or pipe insulation) and the sleeve must be sealed with Underwriters Labora-
tories- (UL) listed materials or a UL-listed fire-stopping assembly. Sleeves through
floors should extend 1 in. above the floor in dry locations and 2 in. above the floor in
wet locations. A pipe clamp is required at the top of each pipe riser (and may be required
at other locations along the riser, depending upon the length) to support the riser.
Sleeves should be cast into concrete floor slabs and poured concrete foundation walls
during the initial construction to eliminate core drilling after the concrete has been
poured. Pipe penetrations through exterior walls and roofs must be waterproofed.
Although the specifics of the sleeves and waterproofing methods may vary from
one project to another, the details shown in Figs. 6-5 through 6-7 provide some general
guidelines for pipe penetrations through interior and exterior building components.
Pipe Expansion Compensation

Piping systems expand longitudinally (increase in length) when they are heated. For
example, carbon steel pipe expands 1.53 in. per 100 ft of pipe length and copper tube
expands 2.30 in. per 100 ft when they are heated from 0 to 200°F. If a straight section of
pipe is restrained at both ends and the working fluid, such as heating water or steam, is
heated to the operating temperature, the thermal expansion of the pipe will cause
increased stress within the pipe wall and increased forces at the end supports of the
P
Figure 6-5 Pipe penetration through interior walls.
Figure 6-6 Pipe penetration through exterior walls.
198
Figure 6-7 Pipe penetration through floors.
pipe section. If the pipe expansion is significant enough, the stress within the pipe wall
can exceed acceptable limits and cause leakage in the joints, failure of the pipe, failure
of the supports, and/or detrimental forces at the connections to equipment.
Therefore, it is necessary to design heating water, steam, steam condensate return,
and even long sections of chilled and condenser water5 piping to compensate for the
thermal expansion of the piping within the various sections of the system. The first
rule is not to anchor both ends of a straight section of pipe. Pipe anchors are different
than standard pipe hangers, such as clevis hangers and trapeze hangers. Pipe anchors
are designed to anchor a pipe at a certain point to the building structure, whereas pipe
hangers allow for some movement of the pipe relative to the building structure. Pipe
anchors are used to protect equipment connections and are also used in conjunction
with pipe expansion compensation devices such as Z bends, U bends (expansion
loops), or expansion joints (refer to the discussion of expansion compensation devices
below).
Straight sections of pipe that serve heating water and low-pressure steam and con-
densate return systems that are less than 40 ft in length do not require any expansion
compensation. Even so, it is good practice to design a 90° bend in the piping system
every 25 ft or so to provide some expansion compensation for the piping through the
flexure of the pipe bend. For straight sections of heating water and low-pressure steam
200 Chapter Six P
and condensate return piping that exceed 40 ft in length and for chilled and condenser
water piping that exceeds 100 ft in length, either a Z bend or an expansion loop should
be designed to compensate for the thermal expansion of the piping section. As shown
in Figs. 6-8 and 6-9, Z bends and expansion loops require pipe anchors to isolate the
pipe section for expansion. Furthermore, expansion loops require pipe alignment
guides in order to focus the flexure of the pipe section on the expansion loop (Z bends
do not require pipe alignment guides). Refer to Figs. 6-8 and 6-9 and Tables 6-1 through
6-4 for the offset dimension “L” of Z bends and the height “H” and width “W” dimen-
sions of expansion loops for heating, steam, and chilled or condenser water systems.
The dimensions of Z bends and expansion loops depend upon the pipe material, the
temperature of the working fluid, the distance between the pipe anchors, and the size
of the pipe.
For example, a straight section of 4-in. steel heating water pipe that is 100 ft between
anchors requires a Z bend that has an offset dimension of L = 16.5 ft or an expansion
loop that has height and width dimensions of H = 7 ft and W = 3.5 ft. The pipe align-
ment guides are no closer than 14 ft away from the midpoint of the expansion loop. The
locations of Z bends and expansion loops, and their associated dimensions, should be
shown on the HVAC piping plans.
Expansion joints are normally not used in heating water, low-pressure steam,
chilled, or condenser water piping systems for commercial buildings because pipe
Figure 6-8 Diagram of a Z bend.
Figure 6-9 Diagram of an expansion loop.
Distance Between Anchors, ft

Pipe
Size, 40 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
in. L, ft W, ft H, ft L, ft W, ft H, ft L, ft W, ft H, ft
¾ 4.0 — — 8.0 2.0 4.0 12.0 2.5 5.0
1 4.5 — — 9.0 2.0 4.0 13.5 2.5 5.0
1¼ 5.0 — — 10.0 2.0 4.0 15.0 3.0 6.0
1½ 5.5 — — 10.5 2.0 4.0 16.0 3.5 7.0
2 6.0 — — 12.0 2.5 5.0 18.0 3.5 7.0
2½ 6.5 — — 13.0 2.5 5.0 19.5 4.0 8.0
3 7.5 — — 14.5 3.0 6.0 21.5 4.5 9.0
4 8.0 2.0 4.0 16.5 3.5 7.0 24.5 5.0 10.0
6 10.0 2.0 4.0 20.0 4.0 8.0 30.0 6.0 12.0
8 11.5 2.5 5.0 22.5 4.5 9.0 34.0 7.0 14.0
10 12.5 2.5 5.0 25.5 5.0 10.0 38.0 7.5 15.0
12 14.0 3.0 6.0 27.5 5.5 11.0 41.0 8.5 17.0
Table 6-1 Z-Bend and Expansion Loop Dimensions for Steel Heating Water Piping (200°F)
expansion can usually be accommodated through the use of Z bends and expansion
loops. Furthermore, expansion joints are more costly than Z bends and expansion loops
and also require routine maintenance. Therefore, expansion joints should only be
designed when there is insufficient space to install a Z bend or an expansion loop. Refer
to Chap. 45 of the 2008 ASHRAE Handbook—HVAC Systems and Equipment for more
information regarding pipe expansion compensation.

Pipe
Size, 40 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
¾ 4.5 — — 9.0 2.0 4.0 13.5 2.5 5.0
1 5.0 — — 10.0 2.0 4.0 15.0 3.0 6.0
1¼ 5.5 — — 11.0 2.5 5.0 16.5 3.5 7.0
1½ 6.0 — — 12.0 2.5 5.0 18.0 3.5 7.0
2 7.0 — — 14.0 3.0 6.0 20.5 4.0 8.0
2½ 7.5 — — 15.5 3.0 6.0 23.0 4.5 9.0
3 8.5 2.0 4.0 17.0 3.5 7.0 25.0 5.0 10.0
4 9.5 2.0 4.0 19.5 4.0 8.0 29.0 6.0 12.0
Table 6-2 Z-Bend and Expansion Loop Dimensions for Copper Heating Water Piping (200°F)
202 Chapter Six P

Pipe
Size, 40 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
¾ 4.0 — — 8.5 2.0 4.0 12.5 2.5 5.0
1 4.5 — — 9.5 2.0 4.0 14.0 3.0 6.0
1¼ 5.5 — — 10.5 2.0 4.0 15.5 3.0 6.0
1½ 5.5 — — 11.0 2.5 5.0 17.0 3.5 7.0
2 6.5 — — 12.5 2.5 5.0 19.0 4.0 8.0
2½ 7.0 — — 14.0 3.0 6.0 20.5 4.0 8.0
3 7.5 — — 15.0 3.0 6.0 22.5 4.5 9.0
4 8.5 2.0 4.0 17.0 3.5 7.0 26.0 5.0 10.0
6 10.5 2.0 4.0 21.0 4.5 9.0 31.5 6.5 13.0
8 12.0 2.5 5.0 24.0 5.0 10.0 35.5 7.0 14.0
10 13.5 2.5 5.0 26.5 5.5 11.0 40.0 8.0 16.0
12 14.5 3.0 6.0 29.0 6.0 12.0 43.5 8.5 17.0
Table 6-3 Z-Bend and Expansion Loop Dimensions for Steel 2-psig Steam and 0-psig Condensate
Return Piping (219°F)

Pipe
Size, 100 101 to 200 201 to 300
¾ 5.5 — — 11.1 2.5 5.0 16.7 3.5 7.0
1 6.5 — — 12.4 2.5 5.0 18.7 4.0 8.0
1¼ 7.0 — — 14.0 3.0 6.0 21.0 4.5 9.0
1½ 7.5 — — 15.0 3.0 6.0 22.4 4.5 9.0
2 8.5 — — 16.7 3.5 7.0 25.1 5.0 10.0
2½ 9.5 2.0 4.0 18.4 4.0 8.0 27.6 5.5 11.0
3 10.5 2.0 4.0 20.3 4.0 8.0 30.5 6.0 12.0
4 11.5 2.5 5.0 23.0 4.5 9.0 34.5 7.0 14.0
6 14.0 3.0 6.0 27.9 5.5 11.0 41.9 8.5 17.0
8 16.0 3.5 7.0 31.9 6.5 13.0 47.8 9.5 19.0
10 18.0 3.5 7.0 35.6 7.0 14.0 53.4 11.0 22.0
12 19.5 4.0 8.0 38.8 8.0 16.0 58.1 11.5 23.0
Table 6-4 Z-Bend and Expansion Loop Dimensions for Steel Chilled and Condenser Water Piping
(100°F)
Equipment Connections
It is not necessary to show the valves or specialties associated with the piping connec-
tions for hydronic or steam equipment on the floor plan drawings. These items will be
shown in the connection details for each piece of equipment.
The following are guidelines for the valves and specialties that should be designed
for each piece of hydronic or steam equipment:
1. Unions should be designed for:

a. Equipment piping connections for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller.
b. Piping connections for valves or specialties that may require service,
such as:
(1) Control valves.
(2) Steam traps.
(3) Pressure reducing valves.
2. Flanges should be designed for equipment piping connections for pipe sizes
2½ in. and larger.
3. Flexible pipe connectors should be designed for:
a. Piping connections to pumps.
b. Piping connections to cooling towers.
c. Piping connections to water-source heat pumps.
d. Other pieces of motor-driven equipment where the noise and vibration
generated by the equipment may be transmitted to the piping system.
4. Types of shutoff valves that should be designed include:
a. Gate valves for steam and condensate return piping.
b. Ball valves for hydronic pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller.
c. Butterfly valves for hydronic pipe sizes 2½ in. and larger:.
(1) Hand-lever actuators for valves 6 in. and smaller.
(2) Gear actuators for valves 8 in. and larger.
5. Types of check valves that should be designed include:
a. Silent check valve in pump discharge piping for pipe sizes 2½ in. and
larger.
b. Swing check valve:
(1) Pump discharge piping for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller.
(2) Steam trap outlet piping.
6. A balancing valve should be designed in conjunction with a venturi flow meter
in the pump discharge piping for pipe sizes 2½ in. and larger to balance the
pump flow. The balancing valve can be either a globe valve or a butterfly valve
with a memory stop.
a. A globe valve provides more accurate balancing of flow, but at a higher cost
than a butterfly valve with memory stop. The globe balancing valve should
not be used for shutoff duty because it is a multiturn valve and its balancing
position cannot be easily restored. Thus, a discharge shutoff valve is required
in addition to the globe balancing valve.
b. A butterfly valve with a memory stop is the lower-cost alternative to the
globe valve. It can perform both shutoff and balancing duty, eliminating the
requirement for a discharge shutoff valve in addition to the balancing
valve.
204 Chapter Six P
7. A venturi flow meter should be designed in the pump discharge piping for
pipe sizes 2½ in. and larger. Appropriate lengths of straight pipe upstream and
downstream of the flow meter must be provided (refer to the flow meter
manufacturer’s product data).
8. A calibrated balancing valve should be designed for:
a. Pump discharge piping for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller.
b. All pieces of hydronic equipment, such as coils, where multiple pieces of
equipment are served by a single pump.
c. Bypass pipe for equipment controlled by a 3-way valve.
9. A multipurpose valve may be designed for the pump discharge piping for pipe
sizes 2½ in. and larger in place of the discharge shutoff valve, balancing valve,
flow meter, and check valve.
10. A suction diffuser should be designed for the pump suction connection to end-
suction pumps where there is insufficient space for the recommended five pipe
diameters of straight pipe upstream of the pump suction connection.
11. Globe valve bypass:
a. A globe valve bypass is a pipe in which a globe valve is installed that is
connected to the inlet and outlet of a valve or specialty that serves a piece of
equipment or a system that must remain in continuous operation, even when
the valve or specialty requires maintenance (or replacement). Shutoff valves
on the inlet and outlet pipes of the valve or specialty being bypassed are
required to isolate the valve or specialty when maintenance is required. When
the shutoff valves are closed, the globe valve in the bypass pipe is opened as
required to provide the appropriate throttling of the flow while the maintenance
is being performed. Once the maintenance is complete, the shutoff valves are
reopened and the bypass valve is closed. Refer to the detail of the air separator/
makeup water assembly (Fig. 4-21) in Chap. 4 for an example of a globe valve
bypass around the makeup water pressure reducing valve.
b. A globe valve bypass is commonly designed for:
(1) Control valves for major pieces of equipment.
(2) Steam traps for major pieces of equipment.
12. Strainers:
a. A strainer should be designed upstream of:
(1) Control valves.
(2) Steam traps.
(4) Pumps.
b. A blow-down valve is usually designed for strainers that are 1¼ in. and
larger.
13. A control valve should be designed where automatic control of the fluid flow is
required. Control valves can be either two-position or modulating, depending
upon the control requirements.
a. A 2-way control valve is typically used for variable flow systems.
b. A 3-way control valve is used for constant flow systems.
14. A steam trap should be designed for all steam equipment.
15. A pressure relief valve should be designed for:

a. Boilers.
b. Shell side of steam to hot water shell and tube heat exchanger.
c. Other locations where pressurization of the equipment may exceed the
maximum pressure rating of the equipment.
16. Pressure gauges should be designed for major pieces of equipment where
frequent pressure readings are required.
17. Thermometers should be designed for major pieces of equipment where
frequent temperature readings are required. Thermometers are not required in
steam or condensate return systems.
18. Test plugs should be designed for minor pieces of equipment where infrequent
temperature and/or pressure readings are required.
19. The types and locations of equipment air vents that should be designed are as
follows:
a. Manual air vent at high point of hydronic equipment connection.
b. Automatic air vent at hydronic system air separator.
c. Automatic air vent at hydronic system expansion tank.
20. A drain should be designed in the low point of hydronic or steam equipment
piping connections.
21. A vacuum breaker should be designed for all steam equipment where the steam
flow is modulated by a control valve.
22. A condensate drain should be designed for:
a. Cooling coil drain pan.
b. Humidifier drain pan.
Hydronic System Design Fundamentals

In a hydronic system, the system pump must be capable of circulating the design flow
rate of water (or brine) at the pressure (or head) necessary to overcome the pressure
losses in the system from the pump discharge connection to the farthest point in the
system and back to the pump suction connection. This includes the pressure losses
associated with the supply piping, farthest piece of equipment, return piping, and all of
the fittings, valves, and specialties that lie along that path. Because hydronic systems
are normally closed systems, there is no elevation head that must be overcome by the
system pump.
Pipe Sizing Criteria

In order to perform an accurate estimate of the hydronic system pressure losses and size
the hydronic system piping, it is necessary to establish the pressure drop per unit length
criterion that will be used [expressed in terms of feet of water column (ft w.c.) per 100 ft
of piping] and the maximum fluid velocity [expressed in terms of feet per second (fps)]
within the piping that will be allowed. A common sizing criterion for hydronic piping
systems is 4 ft w.c. pressure drop per 100 ft of piping, with a maximum velocity of 4 fps
for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller and 6 fps for pipe sizes 2½ in. and larger. Table 6-5 lists
the allowable water flow rates for hydronic piping between ¾ and 12 in. based on this
criterion. Pipe sizing charts and software programs are available to assist in sizing
piping if a different criterion or a brine is utilized.
206 Chapter Six P
Pipe Size, Water Flow,1 P.D., ft w.c./

in. gpm 100 ft of Pipe Velocity, fps
¾ 3 2.5 1.8
1 7 3.6 2.6
1¼ 15 3.7 3.2
1½ 23 3.8 3.6
2 42 3.4 4.0
2½ 74 4.0 5.0
3 132 4.0 5.7
4 240 3.2 6.0
6 540 1.9 6.0
8 940 1.4 6.0
10 1,480 1.0 6.0
12 2,100 0.8 6.0
Based on a maximum P.D. of 4 ft w.c./100 ft of pipe and a maximum velocity

1
of 4 fps for piping 2 in. and smaller, and 6 fps for piping 2½ in. and larger.
Note: P.D. = pressure drop
Table 6-5 Allowable Water Flow Rates for Hydronic Piping Between
¾ and 12 in.
Refer to the sample 4-pipe system flow diagram and heating water riser diagram
(Figs. 10-19 and 10-20) in Chap. 10 for applications of this pipe sizing criterion. Piping
for open systems, such as a condenser water system that utilizes an open cooling tower
for heat rejection, can also be sized based on this pipe sizing criterion.
Piping Design
The following are some basic guidelines for designing hydronic piping systems:
• Manual air vents6 are required at all high points in the piping distribution
system. These vents are used to release the air from the system during start-up
to prevent the system from becoming air bound. This occurs when a pocket of
air within the piping system prevents the flow of water through that section of
pipe.
• Drains are required at all low points in the system in order to drain the system,
or parts of the system, for maintenance, repair, or replacement.
• Air vents and drains do not need to be shown on the floor plan drawings. The
requirement for these specialties should be included in the project
specifications.
• Supply and return mains should be pitched at ¼ in./10 ft toward the drains in
the low points of the system.
• Pipe expansion compensation should be designed as described in the Pipe

Expansion Compensation section earlier.
• Shutoff valves, a balancing valve,7 and a calibrated balancing valve (for pipe
sizes 2 in. and smaller) or an orifice flow meter (for pipe sizes 2½ in. and larger)
should be designed for the hydronic piping mains serving each floor of a
building.
• Shutoff valves should be designed at all major branches in the piping system.
• The minimum size for hydronic supply and return pipes is ¾ in.
• Takeoffs8 to upfeed risers and equipment should be made at a 45° angle above
the horizontal centerline of the main pipe (Fig. 6-10).
• Takeoffs to downfeed risers should be made at a 45° angle below the horizontal
centerline of the main pipe (Fig. 6-11).
Figure 6-10 Top takeoff from main piping.
Figure 6-11 Bottom takeoff from main piping.
208 Chapter Six P
Direct Return Piping System

Typically, the supply and return pipe mains serving a particular floor of a building are
routed parallel to each other from the piping risers to the farthest piece of equipment
on the floor. The supply and return pipe takeoffs are routed from these mains to each
piece of equipment served. Thus, the closest piece of equipment has the shortest run of
supply piping and the shortest run of return piping between the equipment and the
piping risers. Similarly, the farthest piece of equipment served by the mains has the
longest run of supply piping and the longest run of return piping between the equip-
ment and the piping risers. This piping arrangement is called a direct return piping
system.
The difficulty with this type of system is that the pressure drop through the supply
and return piping to the closest piece of equipment is less than the pressure drop
through the supply and return piping to the farthest piece of equipment. As a result, the
balancing valves on the closer pieces of equipment need to be throttled more than the
balancing valves on the farther pieces of equipment in order to equalize the pressure
drop to each piece of equipment. This is possible and it is done frequently. However, it
is not the optimal piping arrangement from a flow balancing standpoint. Figure 6-12
illustrates a direct return piping system.
Reverse Return Piping System

There is a piping arrangement referred to as a reverse return piping system in which the
length of supply and return piping (and the associated pressure drop) for each piece of
equipment is the same. A reverse return piping system is the preferred piping arrange-
ment for hydronic systems from a flow balancing standpoint. The piping pressure drop
for each piece of equipment is the same and requires very little throttling of the equip-
ment balancing valves to equalize the pressure drop to each piece of equipment. How-
ever, if the only way to serve the equipment on the floor is in a straight line from the
Figure 6-12 Direct return piping system.
piping risers to the farthest piece of equipment, a reverse return piping system is not
economical. A second return pipe main that is the full length of the run to the farthest
piece of equipment must be added to equalize the supply and return pipe lengths for
each piece of equipment on the floor. If, however, it is possible to serve the equipment
in a looped arrangement, there will be virtually no additional piping required to accom-
modate a reverse return system. These two configurations of a reverse return piping
system are illustrated in Figs. 6-13 and Figs. 6-14.
Figure 6-13 Straight-line reverse return system.
Figure 6-14 Looped reverse return system.
210 Chapter Six P
Low-Pressure Steam System Design Fundamentals

Steam has many qualities that make it the preferred fluid for transferring heating energy
from the source to the load in industrial processes and commercial heating and plumb-
ing systems. However, steam also has qualities that must be respected in the system
design in order to avoid undesirable, and potentially harmful, consequences.
Steam can be generated at whatever pressure the system is designed for, even
pressures exceeding 1,000 psig. However, steam pressures in excess of 100 psig are
typically used for industrial processes or for district steam systems where the piping
network is large. Within commercial buildings, where the length of steam piping is
less than 1,000 ft, low-pressure steam systems, which are defined by ASME as those
operating at 15 psig or less, are utilized. Because steam systems utilizing an operating
pressure of 2 psig are used extensively in commercial buildings, we will limit our
discussion to the design principles associated with this operating pressure. However,
many of the same principles that apply to 2-psig steam systems can also be applied to
steam systems operating at higher steam pressures.
Before discussing the design of steam distribution systems, it is necessary to discuss
the basics of using steam as a heating fluid. Steam, as mentioned in Chap. 4, is generated
within a steam boiler. This steam is distributed through the steam piping system to the
heating equipment within the building. The condensate that is formed as the steam
changes phase from a gas to a liquid is returned to the boiler, thus completing the cycle.
There are two types of steam heating systems: a 1-pipe system and a 2-pipe system.
In a 1-pipe system, each piece of heating equipment has only one pipe connection.
Steam flows to the heating equipment and the condensate returns (against the steam
flow) from the heating equipment back to the boiler, all within the same pipe. One-pipe
steam systems are not commonly used in the heating systems for commercial buildings;
therefore, we will not discuss them in this book. In a 2-pipe steam heating system (not
to be confused with a 2-pipe hydronic system), each piece of heating equipment has
two connections, one for the steam supply and one for the condensate return. Steam
flows from the boiler through the supply piping system to the heating equipment and
is returned to the boiler through the condensate return piping system and the conden-
sate recovery equipment.
Steam flows through the piping system and heating equipment solely as a result of
the condensation of steam that forms when the steam loses heat and changes phase
from a gas to a liquid. This phase change causes a drop in pressure, which induces
steam flow through the system. Hence, in a perfectly insulated system where there was
no heat loss, there would be no steam flow. However, even in a well-insulated piping
system, there will always be some steam flow resulting from the heat losses of the pip-
ing system, even if there is no load on the steam heating equipment. Steam condensate,
therefore, begins to form at the connection of the steam piping system to the boiler and
continues to form throughout the system.
In order to prevent the steam supply piping from being filled with condensate, it is
necessary to pitch the supply piping slightly (½ in./10 ft) and drain the condensate
from the supply piping at various points within the system. It is also necessary to drain
the condensate from the steam coils installed within the heating equipment. The con-
densate drain points within the steam supply piping system are called drips. Steam
traps are installed at the drips and also at the heating equipment to allow the passage
of condensate into the condensate return piping. The steam traps also prevent the flow
of steam into the condensate return piping.
The condensate that is collected from the drips and the steam heating equipment is
carried through the condensate return piping system to one or more receivers in the
condensate recovery equipment. The condensate return piping can be either open (gravity
motivated) or closed (steam pressure motivated). Open condensate return systems are
vented at various locations in the piping system, ensuring that the pressure at all points
within the return piping system is atmospheric pressure. The condensate flows through an
open return piping system strictly due to gravity. Open condensate return piping systems
must be pitched in the direction of the condensate flow at a minimum of 1/16 in./ft.
However, we will not discuss open return piping systems in this book because they are
not commonly used in commercial buildings. Refer to Chap. 22 of the 2009 ASHRAE
Handbook—Fundamentals for information on designing open condensate return systems.
We will discuss closed condensate return systems in this book because this type of
return system is often used in commercial buildings. In particular, we will discuss
closed return systems that are vented to the atmosphere only at the receiver in the con-
densate recovery equipment (the point where the condensate leaves the return piping
system). Furthermore, we will only discuss the principles of designing dry, closed
return piping systems (those in which the return piping is installed above the waterline
of the downstream receiver) because this is the type of closed return system most
commonly used commercial heating systems.
In a closed return piping system, there is a continual difference in pressure within
the condensate return piping between the point where the condensate enters the line
(at the steam traps) and where it leaves the line (at the vented receiver). As a result, the
condensate flow in a dry, closed return system is steam pressure motivated. The pres-
sure within the return system is equal to the sum of:
• The pressure at the end of the return line (at the receiver in the condensate
recovery equipment), which for our purposes is atmospheric pressure, or 0 psig
(because the receiver is vented to the atmosphere).
• The hydrostatic head required to lift the condensate to a higher elevation.
However, because lifting of condensate is not recommended for 2-psig steam
systems, the hydrostatic head is also equal to zero.9
• The pressure drop due to friction losses in the return piping system.
Therefore, the pressure at any point in the dry, closed condensate return system for
a 2-psig steam system is equal to the pressure drop due to friction of the steam conden-
sate flow from that point in the return line to the end of the return line at the receiver in
the condensate recovery equipment.
Although there is a slight positive pressure throughout the return piping system, for
the purposes of determining the condensate carrying capacity of the return piping, the
return pressure is assumed to be atmospheric pressure (0 psig). The difference between
the supply pressure of the saturated steam condensate at the inlet of the steam traps and
the nearly atmospheric pressure of the return piping causes a small percentage (by mass)
of the condensate to flash to steam.10 Although the flash steam percentage is low on a
mass basis, it is very high on a volume basis (91.9% by volume for 2 psig supply pres-
sure). Thus, the overwhelming volume of the two-phase fluid within the condensate
return piping consists of steam at 0 psig. For this reason, the condensate return piping
can be sized as if it were flowing low-pressure steam at 0 psig. We will discuss the prin-
ciples of sizing the steam supply and condensate return piping later in this chapter.
212 Chapter Six P
The condensate return piping is also pitched at ½ in./10 ft in the direction of the
return flow. Sometimes there is sufficient elevation to route the condensate return pip-
ing all the way back to the boiler feedwater receiver located in the central plant. How-
ever, in most cases, it is necessary to collect the condensate within multiple receivers
located throughout the building. The condensate is pumped from these receivers back
to the boiler feedwater receiver through pumped condensate return piping.
Once the condensate is returned to the boiler feedwater receiver, makeup water is
added to account for any fluid losses in the system in order to maintain the appropriate
water level in the receiver. Feedwater is pumped from the feedwater receiver to the
steam boiler by the feedwater pumps at a rate necessary to maintain the operating
water level within the boiler.
Although we are dealing strictly with 2-pipe steam systems where the condensate
return is separated from the steam supply, there are certain parts of a 2-pipe steam
system where the condensate flows within the same pipe as the steam supply and in the
reverse direction as the steam flow. The steam supply piping in these portions of the
system must be sized differently than the rest of the steam piping. Two examples of this
situation are the vertical sections of steam piping, called risers, where the steam is flow-
ing in the upward direction and the horizontal runouts to steam risers or steam heating
equipment, which are pitched back toward the main and are not dripped.
In short, 2-pipe steam heating systems consist of the following components:
1. Steam boiler
2. Steam supply piping
3. Traps
a. Steam main drips
b. Steam heating equipment
4. Condensate return piping
5. Condensate transfer equipment
a. Condensate receiver
b. Condensate transfer pump
6. Boiler feedwater equipment
a. Feedwater receiver
b. Makeup water
c. Feedwater pump(s)
In Chap. 4 we discussed the fundamentals of steam boilers and the boiler feedwater
equipment. In the following sections, we will discuss the basics of designing a 2-pipe
steam and condensate return system that utilizes 2 psig steam.11 Our discussion will be
limited to systems that have a maximum steam supply (or condensate return) piping
length of:
• 400 ft to the farthest point: Allowing 100% of this length for pipe fittings and
valves yields a piping system with an equivalent length12 of 800 ft. This criterion
of 800 equivalent ft describes systems that are common for commercial buildings
up to about 50,000 ft2.
• 50 ft to the farthest point: This would include the steam and condensate return
piping that is limited to the equipment room in which the boiler is installed.
Allowing 100% of this length for pipe fittings and valves yields a piping system
with an equivalent length of 100 ft.
For larger buildings, a higher steam supply pressure and different steam and con-
densate return pipe sizing criteria would be utilized.
Pipe and Trap Sizing Criteria

In a 2-psig steam system, there is only 2 psi of steam pressure available to overcome all
of the pressure losses in the system, that is, the losses associated with the steam supply
piping, condensate return piping, and steam traps. Therefore, the following criteria
should be followed for sizing the steam supply and condensate return piping and the
steam traps in a 2-psig steam heating system:
1. Steam supply piping
a. The steam supply piping should be sized for a total pressure drop (P.D.) of
0.5 psi from the steam boiler to the farthest point in the steam supply piping
system. Furthermore, a maximum steam velocity of 6,000 fpm within the
steam piping is recommended for quiet operation of the steam system.
2. Condensate return piping
a. The condensate return piping should be sized for a total P.D. of 0.5 psi from
the farthest point in the system to the condensate receiver.
3. Steam traps
a. The steam traps should be sized for a total P.D. of 0.5 psi. Float and
thermostatic (F&T) traps should be used for the steam main drips and most
pieces of heating equipment in 2-psig steam systems.
Following the above sizing criteria leaves a safety factor of 0.5 psi steam pressure.
Thus, the steam supply and condensate return piping for a system with 800 equivalent
ft of steam or condensate return piping should be sized for a friction loss of 1/16 psi/100 ft
of pipe to yield a pressure drop of 0.5 psi in the steam supply piping and condensate
return piping to the farthest points in these systems. The steam supply piping for a
system with 100 equivalent ft of steam piping (such as piping limited to the equipment
room) can be sized for a friction loss of 0.5 psi/100 ft of pipe and still have a pressure
drop of 0.5 psi in the steam supply piping. The condensate return piping, even for sys-
tems with only 100 equivalent ft of condensate return piping, should be sized for a fric-
tion loss of 1/16 psi/100 ft of pipe to keep the pressure drop in the condensate return
piping to a minimum.
The final sizing criterion applies to the sizing of the F&T steam traps in the system.
Each F&T steam trap should be selected to handle the full condensing load at a differ-
ential pressure (steam supply inlet pressure minus the condensate return back pres-
sure) of 0.5 psi.
Tables found in the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals can be used for sizing
the steam supply and condensate return piping for 2-psig steam systems as follows:
• 2-psig steam supply piping (400 ft longest run): Chap. 22, Table 18, 1/16 psi
pressure drop/100 ft of length, saturation pressure of 3.5 psig.
• Upfeed steam risers and undripped horizontal steam runouts: Chap. 22, Table 19,
columns B and C.
214 Chapter Six P
• Dry, closed condensate return piping: Chap. 22, Table 20, column O.
• 2-psig steam supply piping (50 ft longest run): Chap. 22, Table 18, ½ psi pressure
drop/100 ft of length; saturation pressure of 3.5 psig can be used for pipe sizes
2 in. and smaller. For pipe sizes 2½ in. and larger, use Table 6-6, which limits the
steam velocity in these pipe sizes to 6,000 fpm.
Table 6-7 can be used to size the F&T steam traps for the steam main drips in 2-psig
steam systems. Table 6-8 can be used to size the F&T steam traps for the steam heating
equipment in 2-psig steam systems.
Pipe Size, in. 2 psig Steam Flow,3 lb/h

2½ 480
3 750
4 1,500
6 2,900
8 5,000
10 8,000
12 11,500
1
Dripped horizontal mains.
2
Flow of condensate does not inhibit flow of steam.
3
Based on a velocity of 6,000 fpm.
Table 6-6 2-psig Steam Supply Piping1,2 (50 ft Longest Run)
Steam Main Condensate Drain Pipe to F&T Trap Trap Discharge

Size, in. Load,2 lb/h Trap,3 in. Size,4,5 in. Pipe Size,6 in.
2 84 ¾ ¾ 1¼
2½ 129 1 1 1¼
3 170 1 1 1½
4 240 1 1 1½
6 418 1¼ 1¼ 2
8 596 1¼ 1¼ 2½
10 888 1½ 1½ 2½
12 1,157 1½ 1½ 3
1
Based on 100 ft of pipe.
2
Includes warm-up load (5 min warm-up) and running load of pipe.
3
Same size as trap size. Pitch pipe at 1 in./10 ft.
4
Based on Steam Heating Equipment Manufactures Association rating (built-in safety factor).
5
Based on a differential pressure of 0.5 psi.
6
Same size as dry, closed condensate return main size.
Note: F&T = float and thermostatic
Table 6-7 Low-Pressure (up to 15 psig) F&T Steam Trap Sizing (Steam Main Drips1)
The condensate loads for the steam main drips given in Table 6-7 are based on 100 ft
of pipe. If the actual length of steam main to be dripped is different than 100 ft, the actual
condensate load can be calculated by multiplying the condensate load given in Table 6-7
by a factor equal to the actual pipe length divided by 100 ft. For example, if the actual
length of a 4-in. steam main to be dripped is 50 ft, the condensate load would be:
Condensate load = (50 ft/100 ft) × (240 lb/h) = 120 lb/h
The float and thermostatic trap size can be selected for the actual condensate load
based on the capacities given for the steam heating equipment listed in Table 6-8. For
the example above, a 1-in. float and thermostatic trap would be required for the steam
main drip. In Table 6-8, the F&T trap size incorporates the industry-recommended
safety factor of 3 on the condensate load.
Piping Design
2-psig Steam Supply Piping The following are some basic guidelines for designing 2-psig
steam supply piping systems:
1. Connection(s) of the main steam supply pipe(s) to the building from the steam
header at the steam boiler(s) should be made on the top of the header.
2. Steam supply mains should be pitched at ½ in./10 ft toward the main drips.
3. Pipe expansion compensation should be designed as described in the Pipe
4. Shutoff valves should be designed for the mains serving each floor of a
building.
5. Shutoff valves should be designed at all major branches in the piping system.
Condensate Drain Pipe to F&T Trap Size,3,4 Trap Discharge

Load, lb/h Trap,2 in. in. Pipe Size,5 in.
100 ¾ ¾ 1¼
250 1 1 1½
600 1¼ 1¼ 2½
1,200 1½ 1½ 3
2,500 2 2 4
1
With modulating steam control valve.
2
Same size as trap size. Pitch pipe at 1 in./10 ft.
3
Incorporates a safety factor of 3 on condensate load.
4
Based on Steam Heating Equipment Manufactures Association rating (built-in
safety factor).
5
Same size as dry, closed condensate return main size.
Note: F&T = float and thermostatic
Table 6-8 Low-Pressure (up to 15 psig) F&T Steam Trap Sizing (Steam
Heating Equipment1)
216 Chapter Six P
6. Steam main drips should be designed:

a. At every 100 to 200 ft along horizontal mains.
b. At every change in elevation.
Exception: A drip is not required for undripped horizontal runouts to
upfeed risers or equipment that is pitched toward the main (see Fig. 6-15).
c. At the base of every downfeed riser.
d. At the base of every dripped upfeed riser. In this case, the horizontal runout
to the riser should be pitched toward the riser.
e. At the end of every main.
7. Undripped horizontal runouts should be pitched at ½ in./ft toward the main
and should be sized for condensate flowing against the steam flow.
8. Undripped horizontal runouts longer than 8 ft should be one pipe size larger
than required if a minimum pitch of ½ in./ft toward the main cannot be obtained.
9. Takeoffs to upfeed risers and equipment should be made at a 45° angle above
the horizontal centerline of the main pipe.
10. Takeoffs to downfeed risers should be made at a 45° angle below the horizontal
centerline of the main pipe.
11. Upfeed risers should be sized for condensate flowing against the steam flow.
12. Downfeed risers should be sized the same as horizontal steam mains where the
condensate flow does not inhibit the steam flow.
13. All reductions in pipe size should be made with eccentric reducers installed so
they are flat on the bottom. The use of a normal concentric reducer creates a
pocket on the bottom of the pipe where condensate can collect and disrupt the
flow of steam and condensate.
14. The minimum size for steam supply pipes is ¾ in.
Dry, Closed Condensate Return Piping The following are some basic guidelines for
designing dry, closed condensate return piping systems:
• Condensate return piping between the equipment outlet and the trap should be
pitched at 1 in./10 ft.
• Condensate return piping between the traps and the condensate receiver should
be pitched at ½ in./10 ft toward the condensate receiver.
• Pipe expansion compensation should be designed as described in the Pipe
• Shutoff valves should be designed for the mains serving each floor of a
building
• Shutoff valves should be designed at all major branches in the piping system.
• The minimum size for condensate return pipes is 1 in.
• All reductions in pipe size should be made with eccentric reducers installed so
they are flat on the bottom. This is done for the same reason stated in the 2-psig
Steam Supply Piping section earlier.
• Condensate should not be lifted for 2-psig steam systems.
Traps The following are some basic guidelines for trapping condensate in 2-psig steam
systems:
• A 6-in.-long, full pipe size dirt leg should be designed upstream of all traps to
collect scale and dirt.
• Steam main drips should be sized for the warm-up load and the running load
of the pipe.
• Steam main drips downstream of undripped horizontal runouts to upfeed
risers and equipment should include the load of the undripped horizontal
runout and upfeed riser in addition to the load of the steam main pipe from the
last main drip upstream.
• The inlet of F&T traps should be mounted a minimum of 15 in. below the outlet
connection of all pieces of steam utilization equipment (e.g., air system heating
coils, terminal heating equipment, heat exchangers, humidifiers) for which the
steam flow is modulated by a control valve. When the control valve closes, the
steam within the equipment will cool and condense and the pressure can drop
to as low as 0 psig, provided the equipment is equipped with a vacuum breaker.13
If any back pressure exists in the condensate return main, the F&T trap will not
open with 0 psig pressure on the inlet of the trap and the equipment can become
flooded with condensate. This can result in freezing of the condensate and
damage to the equipment if it is exposed to freezing temperatures, such as for
a steam heating coil where the entering air temperature is below freezing. The
15 in. of elevation difference between the outlet connection on the equipment
and the inlet of the F&T trap will provide 15 in. of water column (approximately
0.5 psi) of positive pressure (minus the approximately 0.25 psi pressure drop
through the vacuum breaker) on the trap to facilitate its operation should the
pressure within the equipment drop to 0 psig.
• The inlet of an F&T trap installed in a steam main drip does not need to be 15 in.
below the steam main pipe because the pressure within the steam main pipe
is a constant 2 psig minus the friction losses in the piping system (maximum
0.5 psi). Thus, the pressure on the inlet of the F&T trap (minimum 1.5 psig) will
always be greater than the pressure in the condensate return pipe (maximum
0.5 psig). This minimum 1 psi differential pressure across the trap will result in
positive drainage of condensate through the trap.
• Sizing low-pressure traps based on the Steam Heating Equipment Manu
facturers Association (SHEMA) ratings does not require any additional safety
factor.
Steam Main Drips Figure 6-15 indicates the locations of steam main drips in a typical
steam system. Figure 6-16 shows the piping, valves, and specialties associated with an
end of main drip (other main drips are similar).
Condensate Recovery
Condensate recovery equipment consists of two main parts: the receiver and the transfer
pumps. Proper sizing of the receiver is required to prevent loss of condensate due to
overflow and also to provide proper run time for the transfer pump. The HVAC system
218
Figure 6-15 Locations of steam main drips in a typical steam system.
P
Figure 6-16 Piping, valves, and specialties associated with an end of main drip.
designer should contact a steam equipment manufacturer’s representative for assistance

in making a proper selection of the condensate recovery equipment. The following are
some general sizing guidelines.
Condensate Transfer System The condensate receiver should be sized for 1 minute of con-
densate storage at the design steam load. Steam condensate is generated at a rate of 1 gpm
per 500 lb/h of steam flow. Thus, the condensate receiver should have 10 gal of storage
for every 5,000 lb/h of design steam load.
The condensate transfer pump should be sized for two times the condensing rate.
Thus, the condensate transfer pump should be sized for 20 gpm of condensate pump-
ing capacity for every 5,000 lb/h of design steam load.
Boiler Feedwater System The boiler feedwater receiver should be sized for 10 minutes
of condensate storage at the design steam load. Thus, the boiler feedwater receiver
should have 100 gal of storage for every 5,000 lb/h of design steam load.
The boiler feedwater pump should be sized for two times the condensing rate. Thus,
the boiler feedwater pump should be sized for 20 gpm of condensate pumping capacity
for every 5,000 lb/h of design steam load.
Refer to Chap. 4 for a further discussion of the boiler feedwater system.
Insulation
Insulation for hydronic and steam piping systems is typically rigid, molded fiberglass
(also known as mineral-fiber) pipe insulation with a vapor barrier jacket. The insulation
on pipe fittings is covered with a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fitting covers. Typical insu-
lation thicknesses are as follows:
• Chilled water supply and return piping—1½ in.

• Heating water supply and return piping—2 in.
• Low-pressure steam and condensate return piping—2 in.
Heat pump water piping systems are typically not insulated. Condenser water
piping systems are also not insulated, unless the cooling tower is used for waterside
economizer (refer to Chap. 4 for a brief discussion of waterside economizer operation).
In this case, the condenser water piping would be insulated the same as chilled water
piping.
220 Chapter Six P
Duct Systems
Ductwork is used to convey air between the air systems and the terminal equipment
and spaces which these air systems serve.
Construction
Shapes
Common cross-sectional shapes for ductwork are rectangular, round, and flat oval.
Rectangular ductwork is normally used for main ducts and runouts to air devices (air
inlets and outlets) that have a rectangular neck. Round ductwork is normally used for
runouts to variable air volume (VAV) terminal units or supply air devices, which com-
monly require round duct connections. Flat oval ductwork is not commonly used.
However, when it is used, it is usually for portions of the duct systems that require a
pressure classification exceeding 2 in. w.c.
Materials
Galvanized steel is the most common construction material for duct systems. The gal-
vanized sheet steel should have a minimum galvanized coating of G60; however, G90
galvanized steel should be specified due to its greater corrosion resistance.14 More costly
materials such as stainless steel, aluminum, and carbon-steel have specific applications
for duct systems. Stainless steel ductwork is often used for laboratory fume hood
exhaust systems because of its corrosion resistance and the potential for corrosive
chemical vapors to be conveyed through the duct system. Aluminum ductwork is not
as resistant to corrosion from chemical vapors as stainless steel; however, it is suitable
for use in damp environments and to convey moist air. For this reason, and because it
is less costly than stainless steel, it is commonly used for HVAC systems serving indoor
swimming pool areas (natatoriums) and exhaust systems serving commercial dish-
washers and shower rooms. NFPA Standard 96—Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire
Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations requires carbon-steel ductwork for exhaust
systems serving kitchen exhaust hoods.
Duct systems are usually externally insulated. However, double-wall duct systems
that consist of both outer and inner ducts separated by an insulating material are avail-
able. Sometimes the inner duct will be perforated for improved sound attenuation
qualities. It is also common for portions of duct systems, especially those serving
noise-sensitive areas, to be lined on the interior with 1 in. of sound attenuating/
insulating material called duct liner.15 Normally the length of ductwork that is lined on
the interior is limited to the first 10 ft of supply and return air ductwork connected to
air handling units and the first 5 ft of supply air ductwork downstream of VAV
terminal units.
The final connections to supply air diffusers are often made with flexible round
ductwork. Flexible ductwork consists of a wire-reinforced plastic inner duct sur-
rounded by a plastic-faced layer of flexible fiberglass insulation. The use of flexible
ductwork for the final connection to supply air devices simplifies the installation
process and also provides a measure of sound attenuation for the supply air duct
system. However, the length of flexible ductwork should be limited 8 ft because of
the potential for excessive bending in the ductwork that could restrict the airflow
through the duct.
Insulation
Duct systems that convey air that is cooler or warmer than room temperature are typi-
cally insulated with 1½ in. of foil-faced, flexible fiberglass blanket insulation. For duct
systems conveying air that is cooler than room temperature, the foil facing should also
be a vapor barrier to minimize the transfer of vapor from the environment through the
insulation to the cold duct surface where it may condense. Insulation on ductwork
installed in equipment rooms or other areas where it may be subject to damage is typi-
cally constructed of 1½-in. rigid fiberglass board insulation covered with a field-applied
canvas jacket for increased durability. Insulation on supply and return air ductwork
installed outdoors is typically constructed of 2-in. rigid fiberglass board insulation cov-
ered with a field-applied waterproof membrane.16
The supply and return air ductwork located within concealed spaces (e.g., above
ceilings, within shafts) within commercial buildings is insulated to minimize the loss
of heating and cooling energy from the conditioned air to the unconditioned spaces
surrounding the ducts. One exception is that the return air ductwork installed within
a ceiling space that is used as a return air plenum17 is not required to be insulated
because there is no temperature difference between the air within the ductwork and
the surrounding environment. Outdoor air ductwork located anywhere within the
building is also insulated to minimize the heat gains and losses from this ductwork to
the indoor spaces and to prevent condensation that may occur on the duct surface at
certain indoor and outdoor conditions. It is not necessary to insulate supply and return
air ductwork that is installed within conditioned spaces of the building because, under
normal conditions, the surface temperature of the supply air duct will be higher than
the dew point temperature of the conditioned space and condensation will not form on
the duct surface. Also, there is no temperature difference between the return air within
the ductwork and the space temperature. Supply and return air ductwork installed
outdoors, though it should be avoided wherever possible, will always be insulated to
minimize the loss of heating and cooling energy from the conditioned air to the out-
door environment.
Pressure Classifications
Each portion of a duct system must be able to withstand the static pressure18 of the air
at that location exerted by the fan connected to the system. Thus, the strength of the
ductwork is determined by the positive or negative static pressure that it must contain.
The Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)
publishes the Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible, which defines the duct
construction standards for various pressure classifications. The thickness (or gauge) of
the sheet metal ductwork increases in proportion to its pressure classification and also
increases in proportion to the ductwork cross-sectional dimensions. It may also be nec-
essary for ductwork to be constructed with added reinforcement, such as steel angles
mounted around the duct perimeter at specific intervals along the duct length, in order
to obtain the required pressure classification.
The HVAC duct systems most commonly used in commercial buildings are low-
pressure and medium-pressure duct systems. Low-pressure ductwork is commonly
pressure classes that are 2 in. w.c. or less. Medium-pressure ductwork is commonly
pressure classes that are 3 to 6 in. w.c.
The HVAC system designer must specify the duct pressure class required for all
portions of the duct systems within the building based upon the estimated operating
222 Chapter Six P
static pressure for each portion. This is typically written in the project specifications in
a manner such as the following:
• Supply air ductwork between air handling units and VAV terminal units: 4 in.
w.c. positive pressure class.
• Supply air ductwork downstream of VAV terminal units: 2 in. w.c. positive
pressure class.
• Return and exhaust air ductwork: 2 in. w.c. negative pressure class.
Seams and Joints

Straight sections of rectangular ductwork are typically fabricated in a sheet metal shop
in 4- or 5-ft-long sections. Each section is formed with the required cross-sectional
dimensions from a flat sheet of duct material. This forming process results in a longitu-
dinal seam in each section of ductwork, the construction of which depends upon the
pressure class. The ends of each section are also prepared in the shop with the type of
joint that is required by the pressure class. Refer to SMACNA’s Duct Construction Stan-
dards—Metal and Flexible for details on the gauge of sheet metal, reinforcement, and
types of seams and joints required to achieve a particular pressure classifications given
a duct’s cross-sectional dimensions.
Round ductwork can be formed in a manner similar to rectangular ductwork hav-
ing a single longitudinal seam or, for increased strength with the same gauge of sheet
metal, can be formed with a seam that spirals around the duct for the full length of the
section. Flat oval ductwork19 is formed in a similar manner as spiral-round ductwork.
All of the longitudinal seams, transverse joints, and duct wall penetrations (for
takeoffs) in duct systems for commercial buildings should be sealed air tight. Sealing
ductwork to this degree achieves a SMACNA Seal Class A. SMACNA Seal Class B omits
sealing of duct wall penetrations, and Seal Class C further omits sealing of the longitu-
dinal joints. In addition, duct systems for pressure classification greater than 2 in. w.c.
should be leak-tested and proved air tight to standards established by SMACNA before
the insulating systems are applied.
Duct Fittings
Duct fittings, such as transitions, elbows, tees, and branch fittings, are also shop-
fabricated in accordance with the pressure class requirements of the ductwork. The
most common fittings used for main rectangular ducts in commercial HVAC systems
are concentric and eccentric transitions, radius elbows, square elbows with turning
vanes, and tees constructed of back-to-back elbows. Fittings used for branch takeoffs
include 45° entry rectangular fittings, bellmouth round or flat oval fittings, and flanged
round or flat oval fittings. Figures 6-18 and 6-19 show the graphical representation of
these commonly used duct fittings on a floor plan drawing. Other duct fittings that can
be used are given in SMACNA’s Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible.
Duct Accessories
Flexible Duct Connectors A flexible duct connector consists of a rubber-coated glass fabric
that is about 4 in. in airway length with the same width and height dimensions as the duct-
work to which it is connected. Flexible duct connectors should be used to connect ductwork
to motor-driven equipment such as air handling units, fans, and fan-powered VAV terminal
units. The purpose of flexible duct connectors is to prevent the vibrations that are generated
within the motor-driven equipment from being transmitted through the duct system.
Dampers Dampers perform various functions in HVAC duct systems. First, manual vol-
ume dampers are used to provide a means to balance the airflow to each branch within
the duct system. Second, automatic dampers are used to modulate the airflow through
certain sections of ductwork automatically. Finally, fire dampers, smoke dampers, and
combination fire/smoke dampers are used to protect duct penetrations through fire-rated
and/or smoke-tight building components, such as walls, floors, and shaft enclosures.
Manual Volume Dampers The three types of manual volume dampers used most
often in HVAC systems are butterfly dampers, opposed blade dampers, and parallel
blade dampers. Butterfly dampers are commonly used in the flanged round branch
takeoffs to supply air devices. Often, the flanged round takeoff fittings are equipped
with an integral butterfly damper.
Opposed blade dampers are commonly used where mixing of two airstreams is
required, such as in the mixing box for an air handling unit. Opposed blade dampers
are also used where modulating control of the airflow through the damper is required.
This is due to their linear performance. That is, there is a closer relationship between a
change in the damper’s position and a change in airflow for an opposed blade damper
than for a parallel blade damper. Opposed blade dampers can be manually actuated, as
is the case with balancing dampers installed within the duct system, and can also be
automatically actuated, as is the case with the dampers in the mixing box for an air
handling unit.
Parallel blade dampers can also be manually or automatically actuated. However,
parallel blade dampers should not be used where mixing of two airstreams is required.
The parallel blades can cause a stratification of the air within the downstream duct if
the two airstreams are at significantly different temperatures. Parallel blade dampers
also should not be used for modulating control of the airflow through the damper
because they require a much higher pressure drop through the damper to exhibit the
same linear response as opposed blade dampers. This higher pressure drop is less
energy efficient and also generates noise. Thus, the only practical application for paral-
lel blade dampers is in a two-position application where no mixing of two airstreams is
required. An example of a parallel blade damper installation is in the open-end outdoor
air or relief air duct within an equipment room.
The actuation of automatic dampers is most commonly performed with electric
damper actuators. However, pneumatic damper actuators may also be used if the auto-
matic temperature controls system within the building is pneumatic.
Backdraft Dampers Backdraft dampers are similar to parallel blade manual volume
dampers in that there are multiple blades within the damper that open and close. The
difference is that the blades are weighted so that they allow airflow in one direction but
not in the opposite direction. Thus, backdraft dampers are synonymous with check
valves in a hydronic system. The weight of the blades can be adjusted to require more
or less differential pressure across the damper to cause it to open.
Backdraft dampers are used in exhaust systems as a less costly option to motor-
operated dampers to prevent outdoor air from infiltrating through the exhaust fan
when it is off. They are also used in relief air systems to allow air to be relieved to the
outdoors when there is a positive air pressure in the relief air system. It is common for
224 Chapter Six P
the weighting of backdraft dampers used in relief air systems to be adjusted to require
a differential pressure of 0.05 in. w.c. across the backdraft damper to open. The benefit
of utilizing backdraft dampers in relief air systems is that they have a fairly constant
pressure drop even with a variable airflow. This equates to a fairly constant building
pressurization if the outdoor airflow to the building varies, such as is the case with the
use of airside economizer for the air systems.
Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers Some of the inter-
nal components of commercial buildings, such as walls, floors, and shaft enclosures, are
required by the applicable building code to have a fire rating. That is, these components
must be constructed as an assembly that is designed to resist the passage of fire for a
certain period of time. These components are referred to as fire-resistance-rated assem-
blies, and their fire rating is given in terms of hours. In addition, some of the internal
building components may be required to resist the passage of smoke. Smoke barriers,
certain types of corridor enclosures, smoke partitions, and shaft enclosures are exam-
ples of smoke-tight building components. Both the fire-rated and smoke-tight compo-
nents of a building are designed by the architect.
These components are important to the HVAC system designer because Sections
706 and 713 of the 2009 International Building Code and Section 607 of the 2009 Interna-
tional Mechanical Code define certain requirements for air transfer openings20 and duct
penetrations21 in these components. Because these requirements are too numerous to
list, we will discuss them only in general in this chapter. However, it is important that
the HVAC system designer become thoroughly familiar with these code sections in
order to properly apply the requirements to the HVAC system design. One notable
exception to the requirements for fire, smoke, and combination fire/smoke dampers is
that they are not to be installed in ducts where the closure of the damper(s) would inter-
fere with the smoke control mode of operation of the HVAC system (if it is required to
operate as a smoke control system).
Fire Dampers A fire damper is a device that is mounted in an air transfer opening or
duct penetration in a fire-resistance-rated assembly within a building. The purpose of a
fire damper is to maintain the integrity of the fire-resistance-rated assembly by closing
off the opening during a fire. Fire dampers consist of a spring-loaded shutter, the blades
of which are folded like an accordion and are held by a retainer22 and a fusible link.
When the temperature exceeds the rating of the fusible link (usually 160°F), it melts,
thereby releasing the retainer and causing the shutter to spring closed. The entire fire
damper assembly, including its attachment to the building component and associated
ductwork, if any, must comply with the requirements of UL 555. Fire dampers installed
in air transfer openings or duct penetrations of fire-resistance-rated assemblies that
have a fire rating that is less than 3 hours are required to have a 1½-hour fire rating. Fire
dampers installed in air transfer openings or duct penetrations of fire-resistance-rated
assemblies that have a fire rating that is 3 hours or more are required to have a 3-hour
fire rating.
In general, fire dampers are required in air transfer openings in fire-resistance-rated
assemblies that have a fire rating of 1 hour or more. Fire dampers are not required in
duct penetrations of 1-hour fire-rated assemblies in fully sprinklered buildings. Fire
dampers are required in duct penetrations of fire-resistance-rated assemblies that have
a fire rating of 2 hours or more.
An access panel must be installed in ducts requiring fire dampers in order to pro-
vide a means by which the fire damper can be manually reset and a new fusible link
installed if the damper closes.
Smoke Dampers Smoke dampers are required in openings and duct penetrations of
smoke-tight components in accordance with the applicable codes to prevent the pas-
sage of smoke through the openings or duct penetrations. Because smoke dampers are
automatically actuated, they require an electrical connection. They are designed to close
in response to a smoke detector which, for duct installations, must be installed in the
duct within 5 ft of each smoke damper with no air outlets or inlets installed between the
smoke detector and smoke damper. Installation of smoke dampers must comply with
the requirements of UL 555S.
Smoke dampers must be labeled for use in dynamic systems if the HVAC system is
required to operate during a fire as part of a smoke control system. Dynamic smoke
dampers must be able to remain closed under the maximum differential static pressure
that can exist across the damper while the fan is running. Because static smoke dampers
are not able to remain closed while the fan is running, they are used in duct systems
where the fan will be off during a fire. Smoke dampers must have a minimum leakage
rating of Class II23 and must have an elevated temperature rating of not less than 250°F.
An access panel is normally installed in ducts requiring smoke dampers in order to
provide a means by which the smoke damper can be inspected.
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers A combination fire/smoke damper is a UL 555S

smoke damper that also has a fire rating and complies with the requirements of UL
555 for fire dampers. Thus, a combination fire/smoke damper requires an electri-
cal connection and also closes in response to a smoke detector, similar to a smoke
damper.
Combination fire/smoke dampers can be used wherever the applicable codes
require the installation of both fire and smoke dampers. One notable location where
both fire and smoke dampers are required is at air transfer openings and duct penetra-
tions in shaft enclosures.
Sound Attenuators Sound attenuators, also referred to as duct silencers, are used in
ductwork distribution systems to attenuate (reduce) the noise generated by fans, VAV
terminal units, and air turbulents within ducts. Dissipative silencers are the most
common type of sound attenuator used for commercial buildings. They consist of
perforated sheet metal baffles filled with sound-absorbing materials. Sound attenua-
tors are normally 3 to 5 ft in airway length and are effective at air velocities up to about
2,000 fpm. Therefore, they can normally be selected with the same cross-sectional
dimensions as the low-velocity or medium-velocity ductwork in which they are
installed. The air pressure drop through sound attenuators needs to be included in the
static pressure calculation for the duct system. A typical pressure drop through a 5-ft
sound attenuator with an air velocity of 1,000 fpm is about 0.25 in. w.c.
Sound attenuators should be selected with the appropriate dynamic insertion loss24
(DIL) in each octave band to achieve the desired room noise criteria (NC). A sound
attenuator manufacturer’s representative should be contacted for the selection of
sound attenuators. Refer to Chap. 8 for a more detailed discussion of noise control
measures.
226 Chapter Six P
Hangers
Refer to SMACNA’s Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for details on the
requirements for duct hangers, including the type and spacing of the hangers, which
depend upon the duct size and pressure class.
General Design Guidelines

Ductwork Drawing Conventions
Ductwork is normally represented on floor plan drawings by single lines for ducts hav-
ing widths up to 12 in. and for all ductwork downstream of VAV terminal units. Ducts
having widths greater than 12 in. and all ductwork upstream of VAV terminal units are
normally represented by double lines. For double-line ductwork drawings, the line
work should represent the sheet metal dimensions, not the outside dimensions of the
duct insulation. For the most part, double-line ductwork drawings present the duct-
work as it actually appears. However, some symbols are used to show duct accessories,
like dampers, in a schematic format.
Vertical portions of duct systems are denoted on the floor plan drawings by “duct
up” and “duct down” symbols. These symbols can be understood by defining the view-
ing plane for a plan drawing as a horizontal plane located just below the underside of
the deck that is above the ceiling of the floor being presented on the drawing. If the
duct rises up through this plane, it is represented by a “duct up” symbol. If the duct
drops down and does not rise up through this plane, it is represented by a “duct down”
symbol. Furthermore, the rises and drops of the supply, return, and exhaust air duct
systems are represented by different symbols. Refer to the sample legend and abbrevia-
tions in Chap. 10 for the supply, return, and exhaust air “duct up” and “duct down”
symbols. These symbols should be shown in the legend for the drawing set.
Ductwork Layout
As with piping systems, duct systems should be laid out parallel and perpendicular to
the building structure. This should be done utilizing the fewest number of bends and
offsets in the vertical and horizontal planes necessary to connect the air systems to the
terminal equipment and air devices in the spaces.
Some good design practices are as follows:
1. A duct size provides the cross-sectional dimensions of the duct.

2. Inch marks are normally omitted from the duct sizes shown on the drawings;
thus, a 48" × 20" duct is notated as 48 × 20.
3. The first number in a duct size shown on a drawing indicates the cross-sectional
dimension of the duct that is seen on the drawing. For example, a 48 × 20 duct
shown on a floor plan drawing has a horizontal dimension of 48 in. and a
vertical dimension of 20 in.
4. The first number in a duct size for a duct up or duct down indicates the cross-
sectional dimension of the duct to which the dimension leader is pointing. For
example, if a dimension leader points to the 20 in. side of a 48 × 20 duct rising
up, the duct size would be notated as 20 × 48.
5. Even numbers are normally used for duct sizes, such as 10 × 12, 48 × 20, etc.
Odd numbers for duct sizes, such as 11 × 13, are rarely used.
6. The aspect ratio (ratio of long dimension to short dimension) of ductwork

should be kept at 4:1 or less. If it’s not, reinforcement of the ductwork may be
required to prevent the ductwork from “oil-canning” (producing that hollow
metal sound that sheet metal makes when it is bent).
7. Ductwork should transition and offset gradually to minimize static pressure
losses within the duct system.
a. Transitions should have a maximum 30° combined angle wherever
possible.
b. Offsets in ductwork should be made with two 45° elbows instead of two 90°
elbows.
8. Coordination of ductwork with other services above ceilings is a paramount
concern. Since the ductwork is normally the largest component within a ceiling
space, it should be located first and mounted as high as possible. The other
services should be coordinated with the ductwork as required. Refer to the
discussion of the vertical space above ceilings in Chap. 2.
9. A basic understanding of the terminology used in architectural and structural
drawings is necessary to determine the space available below the building
structure and above the finished ceiling for routing ductwork and other HVAC
systems.
a. Finished floor elevations25 (FF EL) are shown on the architectural drawings
and are indicated in terms of feet above sea level with two decimal places of
precision (e.g., 261.00'). Sometimes a floor of a building is given a reference
finished floor elevation of 0'-0" and the finished floor elevations of the other
floors in the building are expressed in terms of that datum. For example, if
the first floor in a building is given the reference finished floor elevation of
0'-0", the basement finished floor elevation would be indicated as a negative
number with respect to the first floor datum (such as −15'-0") and the second
floor finished floor elevation would be indicated as a positive number with
respect to the first floor datum (such as +13'-0").
b. The elevation of the underside of finished ceilings is given on the architectural
reflected ceiling plans26 in terms of the elevation above finished floor (AFF)
(e.g., 9'-0" AFF).
c. The elements on the reflected ceiling plan are drawn as if you were located
above the ceiling looking down through the ceiling elements or, more descrip
tively, as if the floor were a mirror and you were viewing the reflection of the
ceiling elements in the mirror.
d. The top elevations of the structural steel members are shown on the
structural drawings. The top of steel (TOS) elevations are indicated in terms
of feet above sea level with two decimal places of precision (e.g., 260.50′).
e. Wide flange steel beams are identified with a capital W followed by two
dimensions: the first is the height of the beam in inches and the second is
the weight of the beam in pounds per linear foot. For example, a W8 × 31
steel beam is 8 in. high and weighs 31 lb/linear foot. The height of steel
beams is the important information for the HVAC system designer.
f. The first number in the designation of a structural steel open web joist
(also called a bar joist) is its height. For example, a 14H4 bar joist is 14 in.
high.
228 Chapter Six P
10. An allowance must be made for the usual 1½ in. of external insulation on
ductwork and the appropriate thickness of insulation on other systems, such as
piping, when coordinating ductwork with other services above ceilings. The
space between systems above ceilings should usually be at least 1 in.
11. The height of branch duct takeoffs should be 2 in. less than the height of the main
duct to which they are connected. This 2 in. dimension allows for connection of
the 1-in. flange on the branch takeoff fitting to the main duct.
12. Ductwork with a height of up to 14 in. (sheet metal dimension) can normally be
accommodated above ceilings without special coordination, provided a
reasonable amount of ceiling space has been allowed by the architect. A 14-in.-
high duct can handle a significant airflow at medium and low velocities and
allows for a 12-in. branch takeoff to VAV terminal units or air devices. If main
duct sizes require a height greater than 14 in. or if the ceiling space is unusually
tight, special coordination with the architectural and structural components, as
well as other systems above the ceilings, will be required. In some cases, it may
be necessary to request that the architect lower the ceilings or design bulkheads
in certain areas to accommodate large main ducts.
13. “U-turns” in ductwork should be avoided except in very rare cases where an
unusual building feature must be accommodated. There will almost always be
a more direct method of designing the ductwork distribution systems that does
not utilize U-turns.
14. Both 90° elbows and 45° elbows for rectangular ductwork should either be
radius elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1.5 times the duct width or
square elbows equipped with turning vanes. Square elbows with turning vanes
are often used where there is insufficient space to accommodate the airway
length of radius elbows.
15. Radius elbows are always used for round ductwork.
16. It is common for the entering and leaving cross-sectional dimensions of duct
elbows to be equal. However, it is possible for the entering and leaving width
dimensions of a rectangular elbow to be unequal, but the entering and leaving
height dimensions must remain equal. For example, a duct elbow may have an
entering dimension (as shown on a floor plan drawing) of 24 × 16 and a leaving
dimension of 20 × 16. Duct elbows having unequal entering and leaving duct
widths are most often used in duct tees constructed of back-to-back duct elbows.
17. Duct tees consisting of one inlet and two outlets are normally constructed of
back-to-back square elbows with turning vanes. This configuration is used to
minimize the space requirement of the tee. However, back-to-back radius
elbows can also be used for duct tees if space is available.
18. Duct tees consisting of two inlets and one outlet, called bullhead tees, should not
be used. The two inlets should be separated by at least five duct diameters27 of
straight duct length in order to allow a uniform air velocity profile to develop
between the two inlets.
19. A minimum of 6 in. clearance should be allowed between ductwork risers and
other systems within shafts to accommodate ductwork flanges (if required) and
insulation on the ductwork and other systems. A minimum clearance of 3 in.
should be allowed between the ductwork risers and the inside face of the shaft
wall to accommodate the ductwork flanges and insulation. Refer to the sample
shaft layout (Fig. 2-3) in Chap. 2.
20. Where it is necessary for a horizontal main duct to connect to a vertical duct
riser within a shaft enclosure, most often a fire damper and smoke damper (or
combination fire/smoke damper) will be required at the duct penetration of the
shaft enclosure. An access door must be designed in the duct on the accessible
side of the shaft enclosure and adequate space must be allowed below the
access door in the duct for inspection and maintenance of the damper.
21. Manual volume dampers are required at all major branches in duct systems to
provide a means for balancing the airflow of the HVAC system. However,
manual volume dampers are not used in medium-velocity systems between air
handling units and VAV terminal units.
22. Bellmouth round or flat oval fittings are normally used where the round runouts
to VAV terminal units connect to the main ducts because bellmouth fittings
(which have a radius corner at the connection to the main duct) have a lower
static pressure drop than flanged fittings (which have a sharp corner at the
connection to the main duct).
23. A minimum length of three duct diameters of straight duct should be designed
for the inlet ductwork connected to VAV terminal units. This straight length of
ductwork ensures a fairly uniform velocity profile at the inlet of the VAV
terminal unit where the inlet velocity sensor is located and results in a more
accurate airflow measurement.
24. Manual volume dampers are required at all duct runouts to air devices. Good
practice is to design at least 5 ft of ductwork between manual volume dampers
and air devices. This length of ductwork will help to attenuate any air noise
that may be generated by the damper as it throttles the airflow.
25. Flanged round fittings with integral volume dampers are normally used where
the round runouts to supply air diffusers connect to the main ducts.
26. Flexible round ductwork should be used above suspended ceilings or other
accessible locations to make the final connections to supply air devices with
round necks. The length of flexible ductwork should be limited to 8 ft.
27. Flexible ductwork should not be used above ceilings constructed of gypsum
board or in other inaccessible locations. The connection of flexible ductwork to
rigid ductwork (or the necks of air devices) is made with a nylon draw band;
this band may become disconnected over time. Rigid ductwork, which is
connected with sheet metal screws, makes a more permanent joint and should
be used exclusively in inaccessible locations.
28. Air devices with integral volume dampers mounted in the neck of the device are
not recommended unless these dampers are manually adjustable by the building
occupants and are used for fine adjustments to the airflow only. If this is the case,
manual volume dampers should also be installed at the connections of the duct
runouts to the main ducts for use in performing the initial system air balance.
Excessive air noise within the spaces may occur if the integral volume dampers
mounted in the necks of the air devices are used for the initial system air balance.
230 Chapter Six
29. Duct takeoffs to air devices are normally connected to the sides of main ducts.
However, top and bottom connections to main ducts can also be utilized if
necessary.
30. Typically a 12-in. “air cushion” is designed at the ends of main ducts serving air
devices; that is, the last side takeoff to an air device is made 12 in. from the end
of the duct. It is not customary to design a branch takeoff on the end of a main
duct.
31. Elbows in close proximity to the discharge of fans or air handling units can
create a condition called fan system effect, which results in an increased static
pressure drop for that elbow. In order to minimize the fan system effect, a
minimum straight duct length of three to five duct diameters should be designed
between the fan discharge and the first elbow.28 Also, the first elbow should
turn the discharge air in the direction of the fan rotation. If the recommended
length of straight duct cannot be accommodated, the duct elbow must still turn
the discharge air in the direction of the fan rotation. However, a fan system
effect factor must be applied to the normal pressure drop of the elbow to account
for fan system effect.
32. A duct elbow within five duct diameters of the fan discharge that turns the
discharge air in the opposite direction of the fan rotation should never be
designed. This is referred to as “breaking the back” of the fan and results in an
excessively high static pressure drop and noise in the duct system at that elbow.
This configuration can be avoided by specifying a fan with an opposite
rotation.
33. Elbows should be avoided at the inlet connection to centrifugal fans. Again, a
minimum straight duct length of three to five duct diameters is recommended.
34. Ductwork should never penetrate egress stairwells. In fact, it is good practice to
keep ductwork out of stairwells altogether.
35. Ductwork must not be installed above electrical panelboards or through electric
or data closets. The vertical column above (and below) electrical panelboards is
defined by the National Electric Code as dedicated electrical space and is reserved
for the installation of electrical conduit and wiring only.
Figures 6-17 through 6-20 show the graphical representation of ductwork and com-
monly used duct fittings and accessories on a floor plan drawing.29 Figure 6-21 shows
the construction of a duct tee utilizing square elbows with turning vanes and radius
elbows.
Penetrations of Building Components

All ductwork penetrations of interior walls require sleeves. A duct sleeve is a short
section of galvanized sheet metal that is embedded in the wall. It is large enough to
allow the duct to pass through without interruption to the duct insulation (if required).
Sleeves for ducts penetrating nonfire-resistance-rated assemblies are used to isolate
the ducts from the building components and to provide a finished appearance. Sleeves
for duct penetrations that require fire, smoke, or combination fire/smoke dampers are
an integral part of the UL-listed assembly. Duct penetrations through exterior walls
and roofs must be waterproofed.
231
Figure 6-17 Overall HVAC plan.
232 Chapter Six P
Figure 6-18 Enlarged area showing duct transitions, elbows, and bellmouth fittings.
Figure 6-19 Enlarged area showing a radius elbow, flanged round fitting with integral volume
damper, and transfer air duct.
Figure 6-20 Enlarged area showing a sound attenuator, manual volume damper, and
combination fire/smoke damper.
Figure 6-21 Duct tee detail.
Duct Sizing Criteria

Ductwork for commercial buildings is most commonly sized using the equal friction
sizing method. This method maintains a constant static pressure drop per unit length
throughout the entire duct system. The static regain method of sizing ductwork is
another method that can be employed. However, this procedure is somewhat involved
and is best suited to the use of ductwork design software for its application. We will not
discuss the static regain method of sizing ductwork in this book.
When employing the equal friction method of sizing ductwork, it is first necessary to
establish the static pressure drop per unit length criterion that will be used [expressed in
terms of inches of water column (in. w.c.) per 100 feet of ductwork] and the maximum air
velocity [expressed in terms of feet per minute (fpm)] within the ductwork that will be
allowed. We will establish these criteria for both low-velocity duct systems and medium-
velocity duct systems. We will define low-velocity duct systems as those having a maxi-
mum air velocity within the ductwork of 1,200 fpm. Medium-velocity duct systems are
those having an air velocity within the ductwork that is between 1,200 and 2,500 fpm.
234 Chapter Six
Low-Velocity Duct Systems Low-velocity duct systems are typically utilized for the fol-
lowing air systems or portions of air systems:
• Any air system that does not have any terminal units or sound attenuators
between the air handling unit and the air devices within the conditioned spaces.
This typically applies to constant air volume systems.
• The portion of the duct system between the terminal units or sound attenuators
and the air devices within the conditioned spaces for VAV or other air systems
that utilize terminal units or sound attenuators.
• Return air duct systems between the air devices in the conditioned spaces and
the air handling unit.
• Outdoor and relief air duct systems between the air handling unit and the
outdoor air inlet or relief air outlet within the building envelope.
Low-velocity duct systems are used for these applications because the noise generated
by the air turbulents within the ductwork for medium-velocity duct systems will be
sufficiently loud enough to create objectionable noise within the conditioned spaces if
there is no sound attenuating device, such as a VAV terminal unit or sound attenuator,
inserted between these air turbulents and the air devices. In other words, medium-velocity
duct systems can only be used where there is a VAV terminal unit or sound attenuator
located between the conditioned spaces and the medium-velocity duct system.
A common sizing criterion for low-velocity duct systems that are installed above
the ceilings of occupied areas is 0.08 in. w.c. static pressure drop per 100 ft of ductwork
with a maximum velocity of 1,000 fpm.30 For ductwork installed in unoccupied areas or
within shafts, the same static pressure drop criterion should be used, but the maximum
air velocity can be increased to 1,200 fpm. Table 6-9 lists the airflow capacities for even-
sized ducts using the 0.08 in. w.c. static pressure drop per 100 ft, with a maximum velocity
of 1,000 fpm criteria. Note that the static pressure drop criterion is used for airflows up
to 1,534 cfm. For airflows exceeding this value, the maximum velocity criterion is used.
Duct sizing calculators and software programs are available to assist in sizing ductwork
if different criterion is desired.
Medium-Velocity Duct Systems (Upstream of VAV Terminal Units) For VAV systems and any
other system utilizing terminal units or sound attenuators between the air handling
units and the air devices within the conditioned spaces, the ductwork between air han-
dling unit and the terminal units or sound attenuators is normally sized for medium-
velocity airflow. The sizing criterion typically used for medium-velocity ductwork is
0.30 in. w.c. static pressure drop per 100 ft of ductwork, with a maximum air velocity of
2,000 fpm. This sizing criterion allows for smaller duct sizes than the typical low-velocity
criterion of 0.08 in. w.c. static pressure drop per 100 ft, with a maximum air velocity of
1,000 fpm. However, the result is that the static pressure within the medium-velocity
ductwork typically exceeds the low-pressure ductwork classification limit of 2 in. w.c.
Therefore, the supply air ductwork upstream of VAV terminal units is normally con-
structed to medium-pressure duct construction standards (3 to 6 in. w.c.). Table 6-10
lists the airflow capacities for even-sized ducts using the 0.30 in. w.c. static pressure drop
per 100 ft, with a maximum velocity of 2,000 fpm criterion. Note that the static pressure
drop criterion is used for airflows up to 3,086 cfm. For airflows exceeding this value,
the maximum-velocity criterion is used. Duct sizing calculators and software programs
are available to assist in sizing ductwork if different criterion is desired.
235
Table 6-9 Airflow Capacities for Even-Sized Ducts Using 0.08 in. w.c. Static Pressure Drop per 100 ft, 1,000 fpm Maximum Velocity
236
Table 6-10 Airflow Capacities for Even-Sized Ducts Using 0.30 in. w.c. Static Pressure Drop per 100 ft, 2,000 fpm Maximum Velocity
P
One very important thing to understand when designing medium-velocity duct

systems is that the static pressure losses for fittings where the air velocity is 2,000 fpm
are four times the static pressure losses for the same fittings where the air velocity is
1,000 fpm. The higher static pressure losses for both the straight duct and the duct fit-
tings in medium-velocity duct systems must be included in the static pressure calcula-
tion for the duct system.
Air Devices
Air devices, which include diffusers, registers, and grilles, are the components at the
ends of the duct distribution system through which air is either delivered to the spaces
within the building (air outlets) or removed from the spaces within the building (air
inlets). Air devices consist of a neck, to which the ductwork is connected, and the face,
which is the visible portion of the air device. There are many different types of air
devices, some of which have very specialized applications, such as for clean rooms and
laboratories. In this section, we will focus on the air devices commonly used in com-
mercial buildings and discuss some of the basic criteria used to make proper selections
and layout the air devices within the occupied spaces. Manufacturers’ product catalogs
should be consulted for more specific information about a particular type of air device
or application and also for engineering guidelines that cover the topic of air distribution
in much more detail than we will discuss in this book.
The selection and layout of air devices within a space that will coordinate with the
interior design of the architect incorporate both form (appearance) and function (per-
formance). Air devices not only provide a finished appearance to the air distribution
system but also contribute to the overall comfort of the occupants within the space. Two
factors that significantly influence the level of comfort perceived by the occupants are
the uniformity of the space air temperature and the airspeed in the occupied zone.31 The
number and locations of the air devices are as important to achieving a uniform space
temperature and airspeed in the occupied zone as the selection of the air devices
themselves. The layout of the air devices within a space must consider factors such as
localized space heat gains or losses, location of occupants, obstructions to airflow, and
the height of the space. An improperly designed air distribution system can result in
excessive noise, hot or cold spots within the occupied zone, drafty or stagnant condi-
tions within the occupied zone, stratification (warmer air near the top of the room and
cooler air near the bottom of the room), and potentially added cost to the project.
First, we will discuss the distinctions between a diffuser, a register, and a grille. A
diffuser is a ceiling air outlet that is usually designed for a high induction of room air
into the supply airstream.32 The induction of room air into the supply airstream aids in
the mixing of the room air and contributes to a uniform space temperature and air-
speed. A grille can be either an air outlet or an air inlet and is often a wall-mounted
device. Grilles generally do not have the same level of room air induction as diffusers.
Grilles often have a louvered appearance where the face of the grille consists of parallel
blades. Double-deflection grilles have a second set of blades behind the visible blades
that are oriented perpendicular to the visible blades. As a result, double-deflection
grilles distribute air both horizontally and vertically. A register is a grille that has an
adjustable volume damper mounted within the neck of the grille. Registers are not
commonly used for commercial projects because the system air balance is affected by
adjustments made to the dampers in the registers and because of the excessive air noise
238 Chapter Six
that can result in a space if the damper is closed significantly. Registers should only be
used if it is necessary for the occupants to have manual control of the airflow (which is
not common). In this case, the dampers should be equipped with a lever adjustment
(not a screwdriver adjustment) and should be used for fine adjustments to the airflow
only. Manual volume dampers should also be installed at the connections of the duct
runouts to the main ducts for use in performing the initial system air balance.
Once the type of air device for a particular space has been identified, two main
criteria must be considered in order to make an appropriate selection: noise and throw
criteria. Noise criteria (NC) is discussed in Chap. 8 and is a measure of the noisiness of
a space. The NC levels given in the manufacturer’s product data for air devices repre-
sent the room NC that results from the noise generated by the air device and are based
on an assumed sound absorption of the space. Air devices for occupied spaces in com-
mercial buildings should be selected with an NC level that is less than 30.
Throw values only apply to supply air devices and are normally given for terminal
(air) velocities of 150, 100, and 50 fpm. A terminal velocity of 50 fpm in the occupied
zone is desirable for occupant comfort. Thus, the 50-fpm throw value should be used to
make an appropriate air device selection; that is, the distance from the air device to the
occupants should be approximately equal to the 50-fpm throw value.
Air devices should be identified on the floor plan drawings with a unique designa-
tion given to each different type of air device. For example, all air devices that have the
same configuration and construction, that is, the same manufacturer and model num-
ber, should be given the same designation, such as SD-1 (supply diffuser, type 1) or
RG-2 (return grille, type 2). The design airflow should also be included in the tag for
each air device shown on the floor plan drawings.33 Also, for air devices that are the
same type, but have varying neck sizes or lengths, which may be the case for some
types of linear slot diffusers, the neck size (or length) would also need to be included
in the tag. In short, air device tags require either two or three lines of information:
type, design airflow, and neck size (or length). Refer to the sample legend (Fig. 10-2) in
Chap. 10 for sample air device tags. Also refer to Fig. 6-17 which shows air device tags
on a floor plan drawing.
The types, sizes, airflow ranges, and physical characteristics of air devices should
be given in a diffuser, register, and grille schedule. Figure 6-22 is a schedule that lists
some common types of diffusers and grilles and associated airflows, which result in an
NC level that is less than 30.
The following are some basic guidelines for designing air distribution systems:
• The layout of ceiling air devices needs to be coordinated with the locations of
lighting fixtures, sprinkler heads, and other systems installed in the ceiling.
• Ceiling air devices should be laid out on the floor plan drawings in a pattern
that is similar to the pattern of the lighting fixtures.
• For a typical open office plan with a 9 ft ceiling height, 24 in. × 24 in. ceiling
supply air diffusers serving interior zones normally supply between 150 and
250 cfm (depending upon the load) and are located on approximately 16-ft
centers.
• The quantity of 24 in. × 24 in. ceiling supply air diffusers should normally be
based on a supply airflow of about 250 cfm per diffuser. It is not recommended
that 24 in. × 24 in. ceiling supply air diffusers supply more than about 400 cfm.
Figure 6-22 Diffuser, register, and grille schedule.
239
240 Chapter Six P
• Linear slot diffusers perform well to condition the localized heat gains and
losses from windows. If linear slot diffusers are designed for this purpose,
a two-slot linear slot diffuser would typically be designed in the ceiling within
2 ft of the window. The airflow of the exterior slot would be adjusted in a
downward direction to “wash” the window with supply airflow, and the airflow
of the interior slot would be adjusted in a horizontal direction to supply air
toward the interior of the space.
• Multiple levels of supply air diffusers should be designed for spaces that are
two or more stories high. Long-throw diffusers may be required to distribute
the supply air down to the occupied zone.
• Air inlets should be designed near the floor for spaces that are two or more
stories high to ensure air movement from the top to the bottom of the space.
This will reduce the stratification of the air within the space and also prevent
short-circuiting of the supply airflow to the air inlets. This can occur if the air
inlets are mounted high within the space along with the air outlets.
• Air inlets should be located near sources of heat or odors in order to capture
heat and odors at their source.
• Air inlets and air outlets should be separated sufficiently to prevent short-
circuiting of the air.
• The architect should review the air device selections to ensure that they
coordinate with the interior design.
• The color of air devices is normally white. However, custom colors can be
specified if requested by the architect.
• The construction of air devices is normally painted steel. However, painted or
anodized aluminum should be specified for damp environments, such as for
dishwasher exhaust and shower exhaust grilles.
• Air devices are available with different types of borders for installation in
different types of ceiling, wall, floor, or window sill construction. For example,
an air device mounted within a suspended ceiling will have one type of border
and an air devices installed within a gypsum board ceiling will have a different
type of border. The type of border for each air device should be given in the
diffuser, register, and grille schedule.
• Some types of diffusers are available with different discharge patterns. For
example, square ceiling diffusers are normally specified with a 4-way discharge
pattern which means air will be discharged from the diffuser evenly in all four
directions. However, some situations, such as a diffuser located in the corner of
a room or in a narrow corridor, may require a diffuser with a 2-way discharge
pattern in order to prevent air from blowing directly onto a wall or other
obstruction. The manufacturer’s product data should be consulted to determine
the discharge patterns that are available for each type of diffuser.
Coordination With Other Disciplines

The architect is responsible for identifying the locations and fire ratings of all fire-
resistance-rated assemblies and smoke barriers within the building. This enables the
HVAC system designer to design the fire, smoke, or combination fire/smoke dampers
that may be required in the duct penetrations and/or transfer air openings in these
assemblies.
In addition to locating the fire-resistance-rated assemblies and smoke barriers
designed by the architect, it is important for the HVAC system designer to locate all
full-height walls designed by the architect, that is, the walls that are solid from the floor
to the underside of the deck above. If a ceiling return air plenum is used, transfer air
ducts will need to be designed in these walls above the ceiling to allow return air to
migrate from all of the spaces back to the main open-end return air duct.
The architect should review the layout of all air devices, particularly those that will
be mounted in the ceiling, to ensure that the layout coordinates with the work of all
disciplines.
The space above the ceiling must be coordinated with the work of all other dis-
ciplines so that reasonable ceiling heights can be established by the architect. If the
ceiling heights proposed by the architect in the usable areas do not allow sufficient
space for the HVAC systems, the HVAC system designer should consider routing
portions of the piping and ductwork systems in alternate locations, such as above
the ceilings of corridors and storage areas, where the ceilings can usually be low-
ered. If these locations do not afford an acceptable route for the HVAC systems,
sections should be developed for particular areas of concern, identifying the maxi-
mum allowable ceiling heights. The sections will provide the architect with the
information needed to revise the ceiling heights, design bulkheads, or perhaps
reconfigure some rooms to suit the needs of the HVAC systems for space above the
ceilings.
As discussed in Chap. 2, it is necessary for the HVAC system designer to coordinate
the sizes and locations of all openings in the floors and exterior walls with the architect
and structural engineer.
Finally, the electrical engineer will need to know the locations of all smoke and
combination fire/smoke dampers in the building because it is common for these damp-
ers to utilize 120V/1Ø electrical power. Furthermore, the electrical power for these
dampers will need to be connected to a back-up (emergency) power distribution system
so that power is provided to these dampers during a fire.
Endnotes
1. Btu per hour (Btu/h) is frequently represented as Btuh.
2. Standard air is defined as air at standard temperature and pressure and can be used
without volumetric correction for typical HVAC applications at elevations below
1,000 ft above sea level.
3. 1 MBH in English units is equal to 1,000 Btuh. The prefix “M” in the English system
represents thousands of units, which is not to be confused with the prefix “M” in
the metric system, which represents millions of units.
4. EDR (equivalent direct radiation), expressed in terms of square feet, is the amount
of heating surface at 215°F (1 psig steam) that will dissipate 240 Btuh of heat when
surrounded by still air at 70°F. The capacity of steam heating equipment is some-
times given in terms of EDR and sometimes given in terms of Btuh or MBH.
5. Condenser water piping is used in a generic sense to include piping systems oper-
ating at temperatures lower than 100°F, which includes heat pump water piping
systems.
242 Chapter Six P
6. Manual air vents are recommended for locations where their operation will be
infrequent, such as at the high points in the hydronic system distribution piping
and the piping connections to HVAC equipment. Once the air is released from the
system during start-up, the system and equipment air vents should not have to be
opened unless a section of piping nearby or a piece of equipment has to be drained
for maintenance or replacement. The seals in automatic air vents may dry out over
time if they are not required to vent any air. If this occurs, they may leak or fail to
function properly. Automatic air vents are recommended for locations where they
will operate frequently, such as at the air separator and expansion tank for the
system.
7. A butterfly valve with a memory stop can perform both shutoff and balancing duty
for pipe sizes 2½ in. and larger.
8. A takeoff is defined as a branch pipe or duct connection to a main pipe or duct.
9. Lifting of condensate for higher-pressure steam systems is possible, but these sys-
tems are beyond the scope of this book.
10. The flash steam percentage for saturated condensate at 2 psig supply pressure and
0 psig return pressure is 0.7%. The flash steam percentage for saturated condensate
at 15 psig supply pressure and 0 psig return pressure is 4.0%.
11. For more in-depth coverage of steam utilization for a variety of applications, refer to
the engineering manuals published by the various steam equipment manufacturers.
12. The equivalent length of a piping system is equal to the length of the straight pipe
sections to the farthest point in the system plus the pressure drop through the pipe
fittings and valves, expressed in terms of equivalent lengths of straight pipe. It is
common practice to allow 100% of the straight pipe length to account for the pres-
sure drop through the pipe fittings and valves.
13. If no vacuum breaker is provided, the pressure within the equipment can drop
below atmospheric pressure, resulting in a partial vacuum.
14. Galvanized coatings are described in terms of one hundredths of an ounce (oz.) of
coating per square foot of sheet steel (total coating, both sides of the sheet). A G60
galvanized coating has 0.60 oz. of galvanized coating per square foot of sheet steel
and a G90 coating has 0.90 oz. per square foot.
15. Duct liner should be specified with an anti-microbial agent to protect the coating
of the duct liner from the potential growth of fungus and bacteria.
16. Outdoor supply and return air ductwork should be avoided whenever possible due
to the potential for leakage in the waterproof membrane. If water penetrates the
waterproof membrane, damage could occur to the ductwork and mold may grow
within the insulation and possibly within the ductwork itself. Mold growth within
the HVAC ductwork distribution system is a serious concern because it adversely
affects the indoor air quality within the building and can cause health problems for
the building occupants.
17. A plenum is a space formed by the interior components a building (walls, floors,
ceilings) through which air is conveyed by an HVAC system. A shaft, the space
above a ceiling, or the space below a raised floor can be a plenum. It is common
for the space above the ceiling in commercial buildings to be used as a return
air plenum. Air enters the plenum from the conditioned spaces through return
air grilles mounted within the ceiling. From there it migrates through the ceiling
plenum to a central open-end return air duct. From this point the air is transferred
through the return air duct to the air handling unit. If the area served by the HVAC
system is extensive, return air ductwork may be distributed through the ceiling
plenum to multiple open-end ducts in order to return air more evenly from the
entire area served.
18. Static pressure is the pressure exerted transversely on walls of a duct system by
the air within the duct system. Static pressure can be positive or negative and is
independent of air velocity; that is, static pressure exerted on a duct system by
a fan can exist even in the absence of airflow. The resistance of a duct system to
airflow (friction loss) is proportional to the square of the air velocity through the
duct system. Friction loss, commonly expressed in terms of in. w.c. static pressure
drop per 100 ft of duct, reduces the static pressure (potential energy) of the air as it
travels through the duct system.
19. Flat oval ductwork has similar performance characteristics as rectangular ductwork.
The dimensions of flat oval ductwork are given in terms of the duct width (major
dimension) and the diameter of the rounded sides connecting the flat portions of
the duct (minor dimension).
20. An air transfer opening is simply an opening in a wall through which air is trans-
ferred during the normal operation of an HVAC system. Air transfer openings may
consist of a framed opening in the wall or may be a short section of ductwork that
has openings on both sides of the wall.
21. A duct penetration is defined as one in which the sheet metal ductwork is at least
26-gauge and is continuous from the air handling unit to the air devices.
22. The blades are retained either within the airstream (Type A) or within a pocket
mounted outside of the airstream (Type B). Type B fire dampers have a lower resist-
ance to airflow.
23. Smoke dampers are available with Class I or Class II leakage ratings. Class I smoke
dampers are rated for a maximum of 8 cfm/ft2 at 4.0 in. w.c. differential pressure.
Class II smoke dampers are rated for a maximum of 20 cfm/ft2 at 4.0 in. w.c. dif-
ferential pressure.
24. Dynamic insertion loss is the difference in sound pressure levels measured within a
space before and after the insertion of the sound attenuator. DIL of a sound attenu-
ator decreases as the air velocity through the sound attenuator increases.
25. The finished floor elevation is the elevation to the top of the finished floor. For
example, the finished floor elevation of a raised floor system in a computer room
may be 12 to 18 in. higher than the top elevation of the floor slab that supports it.
26. The reflected ceiling plan is a drawing that shows the type, elevation, and compo-
nents of the ceilings within a building. Ceiling components include the ceiling grid
(for suspended ceilings), lights, air devices, sprinkler heads, exit signs, speakers,
and similar components.
27. A duct diameter is the diameter of a round duct or the equivalent round duct diam-
eter of a rectangular duct.
28. This straight length of duct allows a uniform air velocity profile to develop between
the fan discharge and the elbow.
29. A ceiling return air plenum with return air-type lighting fixtures is used in this
example. Thus, there is no return air ductwork routed to each space nor are there
any return air devices shown on the plan.
30. A static pressure drop of 0.10 in. w.c. per 100 ft of ductwork can be used; this
will result in slightly smaller ducts for airflows up to about 1,100 cfm. This sizing
criterion will result in a slightly lower first cost for these portions of the duct systems
but will also result in a slightly higher fan brake horsepower for the air handling
unit serving these portions of the duct systems.
244 Chapter Six
31. The occupied zone is from 0 to 6 ft above the floor.

32. One exception to this definition is a laminar flow diffuser designed for a minimal
induction of room air into the supply airstream. Laminar flow diffusers are often
used in laboratories that contain fume hoods but are also used in commercial kitch-
ens as the makeup air outlet for the kitchen exhaust hood.
33. One exception is for return air grilles that are simply openings to a return plenum
where there is no volume damper associated with the air device. In this case, these
air devices would not be balanced by the testing, adjusting, and balancing contrac-
tor and would not require a design airflow in the tag.
Chapter 7
Terminal Equipment
T
erminal equipment was introduced in Chap. 2 as the equipment that delivers
the heating and/or cooling energy to the HVAC zones in response to the zone
thermostats. The terminal equipment we will discuss in this chapter is commonly
used in commercial buildings and includes finned-tube radiators, electric radiators,
duct heating coils, unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, fan-coil units, ductless split-system
units, and variable air volume (VAV) terminal units.
Before we begin a further discussion of terminal equipment, it is appropriate to
discuss the piping connections for terminal equipment coils in general. Many types of
terminal equipment have heating coils, cooling coils, or both that require connection to
the building hydronic system(s), steam system, or electrical system.
Connections for the various types of coils used in terminal equipment are as follows:
1. Hot water heating coils

a. Heating water supply and return piping.
2. Steam heating coils
a. Steam supply and condensate return piping.
3. Chilled water cooling coils
a. Chilled water supply and return piping.
b. Condensate drain pipe connection to the drain pan.
4. Electric coils
a. Electrical power (common voltages are listed below)
(1) Single-phase voltage (120V/1Ø, 208/230V/1Ø, or 277V/1Ø)
(2) Three-phase voltage (208/230V/3Ø or 480V/3Ø)
5. Direct expansion (DX) refrigerant coils
a. Refrigerant suction.
b. Refrigerant liquid.
c. Possibly hot gas piping.
d. Condensate drain pipe connection to the drain pan.
Valves and specialties are required for shutoff, balancing, pressure and temperature
measurement, and automatic temperature control. These are common for the hot water
and steam heating coils (Figs. 7-1 through 7-3) and chilled water cooling coils used in
terminal equipment. The actual type of control valve selected for the hydronic terminal
equipment coil will depend upon the operation of the overall hydronic system. The pip-
ing connections for chilled water coils are similar to the piping connections for hot
water heating coils.
245
246 Chapter Seven T
Figure 7-1 Hot water heating coil piping connections with 2-way valve control.
Figure 7-2 Hot water heating coil piping connections with 3-way valve control.
Figure 7-3 Steam heating coil piping connections (2-way valve control).
T e r m i n a l E q u i p m e n t 247
Heating-Only Equipment
In this section, we will discuss terminal equipment that provides only heating for the
spaces served.
Finned-Tube Radiators
Purpose
Finned-tube radiators (FTRs) are designed for use in heating water or steam systems and
consist of a copper tube with mechanically bonded aluminum fins. This finned-tube
assembly is normally factory-mounted within a painted sheet metal enclosure or it can
be field-installed within a custom enclosure. FTRs are normally used to supplement the
heating capacity of the building HVAC systems rather than being the only source of heat
for the spaces within the building. One area where FTRs are used extensively is below
windows. In this location, FTRs warm the air at the bottom of the windows, which initi-
ates natural convection currents of warm air rising upward. These warm air currents
offset the cool air currents that flow downward near the cold window surface.
There are various configurations of FTRs, including wall-mounted (Fig. 7-4) and pedestal-
mounted units, which have different shapes, sizes, and heating capacities. The one
thing that all FTRs have in common is the need for air to enter through the bottom of
the FTR and exit through the top of the FTR in order to initiate the natural convection
flow of warm air upward. It is common for the bottom of FTR enclosures to be open
and the top of the enclosures to have some type of grille. FTRs can also be installed
within a floor trough with a grille on top, but this configuration compromises their
effectiveness.
Figure 7-4 Photograph of a wall-mounted FTR with manual damper, which controls the airflow
through the FTR.
248 Chapter Seven T
Connections
Connections for hot water FTRs are limited to the heating water supply and return pip-
ing. Connections for steam FTRs are limited to the steam supply and condensate return
piping. FTRs do not require an electrical connection; however, automatic temperature
control (ATC) connections are required for the control valve and thermostat if the FTR
is so equipped. The hot water or steam piping connections as well as the shutoff and
control valves are normally located within the FTR enclosure. Figure 7-20 in the Fan-
Powered VAV Terminal Units section illustrates a floor-mounted hot water FTR (FTR-1)
on a floor plan drawing.
Capacity The heating capacity of FTRs is dependent upon the quantity and length of the
finned tube(s) and the density of fins on each finned tube (usually expressed in terms of
fins per inch of tube length). The heating capacity of hot water FTRs is also dependent
upon the entering water temperature, whereas the heating capacity of steam FTRs is
normally given for 1 psig (215°F) steam. Steam pressures in excess of 2 psig are not recom-
mended for FTRs because the surface temperature of the enclosure would be too hot.
Control The heating output of hot water FTRs can be controlled in a number of ways.
The most common method is to vary the heating water flow through each FTR, or group
of FTRs, with an automatic control valve that responds to a space thermostat. Another
method is for the occupant to manually vary the airflow through the finned tube by
means of a manual damper installed within the FTR enclosure. Individual control valves
and thermostats for the FTRs are not required for this configuration. A third method is to
reset the temperature of the heating water supplied to a group of FTRs based on the out-
door temperature. This may be done for all of the FTRs serving a particular building
exposure, such as the north exposure, or it can be done for all the FTRs in the building.
Reset of the heating water temperature is performed at a central location for this configu-
ration. Thus, individual control valves and thermostats for the FTRs are not required.
The heating output of steam FTRs can be controlled manually through a two-
position (opened/closed) or modulating radiator supply valve. The heating output can
also be controlled automatically through a 2-way control valve in response to a space
thermostat. Steam FTRs are not used very often in commercial buildings because the
heating output is difficult to control.
Selection In general, FTRs are used below windows in colder climates (winter design
outdoor temperature less than 15°F) where the windows are more than 5 ft high. The
capacity of the FTR should be equal to the design heat loss through the window.
Because FTRs are visible components of the HVAC system, the project architect will
usually want to review and comment on the FTR selections proposed by the HVAC
system designer.
Installation FTRs are mounted to walls with brackets that support the finned tube sep-
arately from the enclosure. This allows the enclosure to be removed for cleaning and
inspection. Floor-mounted FTRs are typically supported by pedestals, again with the
finned tube supported separately from the enclosure. FTRs are available in various
standard lengths. If longer sections of FTR are required, multiple FTR sections can be
joined together.
If an FTR is to be mounted within a trough, the trough should be at least 9 in. wide
and the FTR should be mounted on the interior side of the trough. This will allow the cool
air downdrafts near the window surface to enter the trough on the exterior side, thus
creating a circular motion of the air currents as the warm air rises up through the FTR.
Electric Radiators
Electric radiators perform the same function as hot water and steam FTRs, the only dif-
ference is that electricity is the source of heating energy. The heating capacity of electric
radiators is dependent upon the electrical power input of the electric heating element
given in terms of watts per linear foot of radiator length or total radiator watts. The
heating output of electric radiators is normally controlled by a contactor (heavy-duty
relay) for on/off control in response to a unit-mounted or space thermostat.
Electric radiators only require an electrical connection. The thermostat is usu-
ally specified to be furnished with the radiator for stand-alone operation [no inter-
face with the building automation system (BAS)]. The thermostat will be either a
line voltage1 thermostat or a low-voltage thermostat. If a low-voltage thermostat is
specified, the control voltage (usually 24V ac) is derived from a unit-mounted, step-
down control transformer that must also be specified to be furnished with the elec-
tric radiator.
The representation of an electric radiator on a floor plan drawing is the same as that
of an FTR without the piping. The thermostat controlling the radiator should be shown
on the radiator if it is unit-mounted or on the wall if it is a space thermostat.
Duct Heating Coils

Purpose
Duct heating coils are heating coils that are mounted within the duct distribution systems
to provide supplemental heat, either for zone heating or for zone humidity control.
Duct heating coils can utilize heating water, steam, or electricity as the source of heating
energy. Hot water and steam heating coils will typically utilize flanges for connection to
the ductwork.
Electric heating coils can utilize either flanges or be of the slip-in configuration. A
slip-in electric heating coil is designed to be inserted through a hole in the side of the
ductwork. Although both open coil and finned tubular heating elements are available
for electric heating coils, the less costly open coil-type elements are used predominantly
for HVAC applications.
Connections
In addition to the ductwork connections required for all duct heating coils, hot water
coils require heating water supply and return piping connections, and steam coils
require steam supply and condensate return piping connections. Electric duct heating
coils require an electrical power connection that is usually terminated within a terminal
box that is furnished as an integral part of the electric coil. ATC connections are required
for the control valve (hot water and steam coils) and the thermostat. Figure 7-5 illus-
trates an electric duct heating coil (EHC-1) on a floor plan drawing.
250
Figure 7-5 Floor plan representation of a vertical split-system fan-coil unit with electric duct heating coil.
T
Capacity The heating capacity of hot water and steam duct heating coils is dependent
upon the face area, number of rows, and number of fins per inch of the heating coil. The
heating capacity of hot water duct heating coils is also dependent upon the entering water
temperature. The heating capacity of steam duct heating coils is dependent upon the
steam pressure. The heating capacity of electric duct heating coils is dependent upon the
electrical power input of the electric resistance element given in terms of kilowatts (kW).
Control The heating output of hot water and steam duct heating coils is controlled by
an automatic control valve that modulates the water or steam flow through the coil in
response to either a duct-mounted thermostat or a space thermostat. The thermostat
and control valve may be connected to the BAS for central monitoring and control.
An electric duct heating coil is also controlled either by a duct-mounted thermostat
or a space thermostat, but its capacity is controlled either in steps by a step controller2
or in a modulating manner by a silicon-controlled rectifier (SCR) controller.3 Magnetic
contactors are the standard offering for step controllers, but these can be noisy. For quiet
operation of step controllers, mercury contactors should be specified; however, these
are more costly than magnetic contactors. Also, the number of steps of capacity control
that are available is limited by the manufacturer. More steps of capacity control are
available as the capacity of the coil increases. In general, the number of steps of capacity
control should be based on an approximate 5 to 10°F air temperature rise per step. Thus,
if an electric duct heating coil is designed to raise the air temperature 20°F, two to four
steps of capacity control should be specified. If more control is required than is avail-
able with a step controller, an SCR controller should be specified, keeping in mind this
will add to the cost of the project. The thermostat may be connected to the BAS; how-
ever, the electric heating coil controller is normally not connected to the BAS. If the
operational status of the electric duct heater needs to be monitored through the BAS, a
temperature sensor connected to the BAS can be installed downstream of the coil to
measure the leaving air temperature. If the entering air temperature is already known,
it can be determined whether the coil is energized or not. If the entering air temperature
is not known, a separate temperature sensor will have to be installed upstream of the
coil to report the entering air temperature to the BAS.
Selection Hot water and steam duct heating coils are usually selected for a face veloc-
ity of 500 to 1,000 fpm. However, electric duct heating coils must be selected to ensure
that a minimum air velocity through the coil is always present to prevent overheating
of the electrical elements and nuisance tripping of the thermal cutouts. The minimum
required air velocity varies depending upon the power density of electric heater
expressed in terms of kilowatts per square foot of cross-sectional duct area. The manu-
facturer’s product data should be consulted to determine the minimum airflow required
for each electric duct heating coil.
Installation In addition to the connections listed above, the following are some impor-
tant installation considerations that should be addressed in the design of duct heating
coils:
• Access doors should be installed both upstream and downstream of duct

heating coils for cleaning and inspection of the coils.
252 Chapter Seven T
• Four duct diameters of straight duct should be designed upstream of electric

duct heating coils to ensure a uniform air velocity distribution across the heating
element.
• Transitions upstream and downstream of electric heating coils, if required,
should be gradual, with a maximum combined angle of 30°.
• Slip-in duct heaters are normally suitable for installation in ducts lined on the
interior with up to 1 in. of duct liner. Since 1 in. is a standard thickness for duct
liner, slip-in duct heaters can be used for most commercial applications unless
there is another reason why a flanged connection would be desired.
• A door-interlocked disconnect switch should be specified for the door on the
terminal box of electric duct heaters. This will disconnect power to the electric
duct heater whenever the terminal box door is opened. Specifying this option
will avoid the need for a field-installed electrical disconnect switch. This should
be coordinated with the electrical engineer so that a redundant disconnect
switch is not designed.
• An airflow switch should be specified for electric duct heaters that will prevent
operation of electric duct heater when there is no airflow.
• A minimum of 18 in. clearance should be allowed in front of the terminal box
for the door swing and for maintenance access.
Unit Heaters
Purpose
Unit heaters are normally used in unoccupied areas, such as equipment rooms, to keep
these areas from freezing in the winter.
Unit heaters consist of a fan and a heating coil contained within a single enclosure.
Small-capacity unit heaters utilize a propeller fan and large-capacity unit heaters utilize
a centrifugal fan. The heating coil can be hot water, steam, electric, or gas.4 Gas-
fired unit heaters are available with natural draft and forced draft burners. Hot water,
steam, and electric unit heaters are available in a horizontal-blow or vertical-blow
(downflow) configuration. Gas-fired unit heaters are available only in a horizontal-blow
configuration.
Connections
All unit heaters require an electrical connection for the fan. Hot water unit heaters
require heating water supply and return piping connections. Steam unit heaters require
steam supply and condensate return piping connections. Gas unit heaters require gas
and vent connections. If an electric coil is used, the unit heater will normally require a
single-point electrical connection for both the fan and the electric heating coil. Unit
heaters typically do not require an ATC connection because they are normally con-
trolled by a unit-mounted thermostat.
Hot water unit heaters can be used in 2-pipe hydronic systems provided a strap-on
aquastat is utilized to sense the pipe temperature and cause the control valve to close
completely whenever the pipe temperature is below 90°F. This will keep chilled water
from circulating through the unit heater during the cooling mode of the 2-pipe system,
preventing any damage to the unit heater that could occur due to condensation.
Figure 7-5 in the Duct Heating Coils section illustrates electric unit heaters (UH-1 and
UH-2) on a floor plan drawing.
Capacity Unit heaters are available in standard-size fan/coil combinations, which
are determined by the manufacturer. The capacity of unit heaters is given in terms of
the heating output capacity for hot water, steam, and electric unit heaters and in terms
of the gas burner input rating for gas-fired unit heaters.5 Standard-size hot water and
steam unit heaters range from 8,000 to more than 300,000 Btuh output. Standard-size
electric unit heaters range from 3 kW (10,239 Btuh) to 100 kW (341,300 Btuh). Standard-
size gas-fired unit heaters range from 25,000 to 400,000 Btuh input rating. Unit heaters
with a capacity greater than 30,000 Btuh are rarely used for commercial building
projects. Unit heaters in this size range are typically used for warehouses or other large
open spaces.
Control Unit heaters are typically controlled by unit-mounted thermostats, although

space thermostats are available as an option. Unit heaters typically operate with on/off
control; that is, the unit runs when there is a call for heat and shuts off when no heating
is required. For hot water and steam unit heaters, the control valve is a two-position
(opened/closed) control valve. For electric unit heaters, the electric heating coil has a
single contactor that fully energizes or de-energizes the coil. For gas unit heaters, the
gas burner operates at high fire or it is off.
Selection Unit heaters are typically sized to maintain the unoccupied areas that they
serve at approximately 60°F during the winter. In order to select the appropriate unit
heater(s) to serve an area, it is necessary to estimate the heat losses through the building
envelope as well as the heating load associated with any outdoor air that may need to
be conditioned. Sources of outdoor air that must be conditioned include infiltration
from frequently opened doors and combustion air for equipment rooms containing
fuel-fired equipment that uses room air for combustion.
Once the heating load is estimated, the number and capacity of unit heater(s)
required to meet the space needs can be determined. However, an exact match of unit
heater capacity to heating load is not necessary as long as the capacity exceeds the load.
For commercial building projects, it is common to utilize one or two different sized unit
heaters that can be applied to all of the unoccupied spaces within the building. If more
heating capacity is required for a particular space than is available through one unit
heater, multiple unit heaters are designed for the space. Common sizes for hot water
unit heaters are 8,000 Btuh and 24,000 Btuh. The smallest size for a steam water heater
is about 18,000 Btuh and the smallest size for a gas-fired unit heater is about 25,000 Btuh
input rating.
Another factor to consider is the throw of supply air from the unit heater. An
8,000-Btuh unit heater has a throw of about 20 ft and a 24,000-Btuh unit heater has a
throw of about 30 ft. This provides the basic guideline that a separate unit heater should
be designed for about every 400 to 900 ft2 of space.
Hot water heating coil capacities are typically given in the manufacturer’s product
data for 200°F entering water temperature and 60°F entering air temperature. Correction
factors must be applied to the capacities if different entering water or entering air
254 Chapter Seven T
temperatures are used. The heating water flow rate through the heating coil is deter-
mined by the heating water temperature drop (Δt) through the coil, which is commonly
20°F. The heating water Δt must be consistent with the design parameters of the overall
heating water system.
Steam heating coil capacities are typically given in the manufacturer’s product data
based on 2 psig steam (219°F saturation temperature) and 60°F entering air tempera-
ture. Correction factors must be applied to the capacities if a different steam pressure or
entering air temperature is used.
Electric heating coil capacities are given in the manufacturer’s product data in terms
of kilowatts. The heating capacity of electric heating coils is independent of the entering
air temperature.
Installation Unit heaters are normally suspended from the building structure. Unit
heaters should be positioned so that they blow warm air along exterior walls and in the
direction of doors and combustion air openings within equipment rooms. This will
help to condition the heat losses through the building envelope and the outdoor air
that is drawn in through these openings. This is particularly important for locations
where the outdoor air may be drawn across pipes that can freeze. For larger areas where
multiple unit heaters are used, the unit heaters should be mounted near the perimeter
walls of the room and should blow in such a manner as to create a circular flow of air
within the room.
Gas-fired unit heaters typically use the room air for combustion. Section 9.3.2.1
of NFPA Standard 54—National Fuel Gas Code requires 50 ft3 of room volume per 1,000
Btuh of gas input. If the unit heater has a natural draft burner, a draft hood is required
at the connection of the vent to the unit heater and the vent will have to terminate at
least 5 ft higher than the unit heater draft hood (NFPA Standard 54, Section 12.7.2). If
the unit heater has a forced draft burner, the vent can terminate through a wall or
roof. All vent terminations must be in compliance with the requirements of NFPA
Standard 54, Chap. 12.
Cabinet Unit Heaters

Purpose
Cabinet unit heaters are most frequently used near exterior doors to heat the outdoor
air that infiltrates through these doors. However, they can also be used to condition
areas that are heated only, such as locker rooms.
Cabinet unit heaters are similar to unit heaters in that they consist of a fan and a heating
coil that are contained within a single enclosure. The heating coil can be hot water,
steam, or electric. Cabinet unit heaters are available in surface-mounted and recessed
configurations for both wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted arrangements. The supply
and return air openings are typically stamped into the front of the painted sheet metal
enclosure.
Connections
Connections for hot water, steam, and electric cabinet unit heaters are the same as those
for unit heaters (refer to the Unit Heaters section earlier). The hot water or steam piping
connections as well as the shutoff and control valves are normally located within cabinet
Figure 7-6 Floor plan representation of wall-mounted hot water cabinet unit heater.
unit heater enclosure. Figure 7-6 is a graphical representation of a wall-mounted hot

water cabinet unit heater on a floor plan drawing. Figure 7-20 in the Fan-Powered VAV
Terminal Units section is a graphical representation of a ceiling-mounted hot water
cabinet unit heater (CUH-1) on a floor plan drawing.
Capacity Cabinet unit heaters are available in standard-size fan/coil combinations,
which are determined by the manufacturer. The capacity of cabinet unit heaters is given
in terms of the heating output capacity for hot water, steam, and electric unit heaters.
Standard-size hot water and steam cabinet unit heaters range from around 12,000 to
80,000 Btuh output. Standard-size electric cabinet unit heaters range from 750 W
(2,560 Btuh) to 24 kW (81,912 Btuh). Cabinet unit heaters with a capacity greater than
30,000 Btuh are rarely used for commercial building projects.
Control The control of hot water, steam, and electric cabinet unit heaters is the same as
that of unit heaters (refer to the Unit Heaters section earlier).
Selection Cabinet unit heaters serving exterior doors are typically sized to heat the
outdoor air infiltration through these doors to 70°F. In addition, if a cabinet unit heater
is installed within a vestibule, it should also be sized to condition the heat losses through
the envelope of the vestibule.
Outdoor air infiltration through exterior doors should be estimated according to the
procedure described in Chap.16 of the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals. For an
exterior door that serves approximately 75 people per hour, the outdoor air infiltration
can be estimated at about 50 cfm per 3 ft × 7 ft door, based on a 0.10 in. w.c. pressure
difference across the door. Thus, for a typical 50 ft2 vestibule with two 3 ft × 7 ft doors,
the cabinet unit heater should have a capacity of at least 15,000 Btuh based on a 0°F
winter design temperature (7,500 Btuh envelope heat loss6 plus 7,500 Btuh outdoor air
heating load). For an exterior door consisting of two 3 ft × 7 ft doors without a vestibule,
the cabinet unit heater should have a capacity of at least 7,500 Btuh (outdoor air heating
load only). For an exterior door consisting of one 3 ft × 7 ft door without a vestibule, the
terminal heating equipment should have a capacity of at least 3,750 Btuh (outdoor air
heating load only). However, this heating load is much less than the lowest capacity
available for a hot water or steam cabinet unit heater (approximately 12,000 Btuh).
256 Chapter Seven T
Therefore, a hot water or steam FTR would be a more appropriate choice of terminal
heating equipment for this application. A 1,500 W (5,120 Btuh) electric cabinet unit
heater would, however, be appropriate for this application if electricity is used for heat-
ing in the building.
For cabinet unit heaters serving exterior doors, an exact match of cabinet unit heater
capacity to heating load is not necessary as long as the capacity exceeds the load by no
more than about 50% of the load. For commercial building projects, it is common to
utilize one to three different-sized cabinet unit heaters that can be applied to the various
exterior doors of the building.
Cabinet unit heaters serving other areas should be sized for the heat losses through
the building envelope as well as the heating load associated with any outdoor air that
may need to be conditioned.
data for 200°F entering water temperature and 60°F entering air temperature. Correction
factors must be applied to the capacities if different entering water or entering air tem-
peratures are used. The heating water flow rate through the heating coil is determined
by the heating water Δt through the coil, which is commonly 20°F. The heating water Δt
must be consistent with the design parameters of the overall heating water system.
air temperature.
Installation The configuration of the cabinet unit heaters, that is, whether they are
wall- or ceiling-mounted and whether they are surface-mounted to or recessed within
the walls or ceilings, needs to be coordinated with the design of the architectural com-
ponents in which they are installed. Recessed cabinet unit heaters require about 10 in.
clear inside depth of the wall or ceiling in which they are installed. Surface-mounted
cabinet unit heaters will protrude approximately 10 in. into the space. It is necessary to
coordinate the protrusion of cabinet unit heaters within the spaces they serve with door
swings and any clearances that must be maintained in accordance with the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA). Also, the location of ceiling-mounted cabinet unit heaters
must be coordinated with the ceiling grid for suspended ceilings and with the ceiling
lighting fixture locations.
Heating and Cooling Equipment

In this section, we will discuss terminal equipment that provides heating and cooling
for the spaces served.
Fan-Coil Units
Purpose
Fan-coil units are normally small, single-zone, constant air volume air handling units
(AHUs), commonly used in 2-pipe and 4-pipe systems and also in conjunction with
split-system air-cooled condensing units or split-system air-cooled heat pump units.

Fan-coil units are often used to serve areas less than 2,000 ft2 where little or no outdoor
air ventilation is required or where outdoor air ventilation is provided by a separate
system. However, they can also be used to serve larger areas as long as the HVAC loads
are within the capabilities of the standard equipment offered by the manufacturer.
Fan-coil units are available in various horizontal and vertical (upflow and downflow)
configurations. Horizontal and vertical fan-coil units are normally installed in con-
cealed locations, such as above ceilings or within equipment rooms. Cabinet configura-
tions are also available for below-the-window installations.
Because fan-coil units are packaged pieces of equipment, they are only available in
the standard configurations and fan/coil combinations offered by the manufacturer. A
common configuration includes a filter, heating coil, cooling coil, and supply fan. Heat-
ing coils can be hot water, steam, or electric. Cooling coils can be chilled water or DX
refrigerant. Supply fans are typically centrifugal. Return fans are not an option for fan-
coil units.
Connections
All fan-coil units require an electrical connection for the supply fan. The supply fan
motors for small fan-coil units (2,000 cfm or less) are typically fractional horsepower
(less than 1 hp) utilizing single-phase voltage (120V/1Ø, 208/230V/1Ø, or 277V/1Ø).
The supply fan motors for larger fan-coil units (2,000 to 12,000 cfm) will normally
require three-phase voltage (208/230V/3Ø or 480V/3Ø) because the motor sizes are
much larger (1 to 10 hp).
Depending upon the installation, supply and return air ductwork connections may
be required. Flexible duct connectors should be used for duct connections to fan-coil
units. However, fan-coil units are also available with supply and return air grilles that
are integral to the unit cabinet; thus they do not require any ductwork connections.
Such is the case with cabinet units for exposed mounting below windows and also for
horizontal or vertical units that are installed either within the conditioned space or
recessed above a ceiling or within a wall.
If outdoor air ventilation is supplied by the fan-coil unit, the outdoor air duct nor-
mally connects to the return duct as opposed to connecting to a mixing box on the unit,
as is the case with a modular central station AHU. The outdoor air duct will normally
be equipped with a two-position (opened/closed) motor-operated damper that opens
when the unit is running and closes when the unit is off.
Fan-coil units with hot water and/or chilled water coils require heating and/or
chilled water supply and return piping connections. Connections for DX refrigerant
coils include the refrigerant suction, liquid, and possibly hot gas piping. Chilled
water, dual-temperature water, and DX refrigerant cooling coils also require a con-
densate drain pipe connection to the drain pan. Steam coils require steam supply
and condensate return piping connections. Electric coils utilize the same voltage as
the supply fan (single-phase voltage for small fan-coil units, three-phase voltage for
larger fan-coil units). If an electric coil is used, the fan-coil unit should be specified
with a single-point electrical connection as an optional accessory. Otherwise, the fan-
coil unit will require separate electrical connections for the supply fan and electric
heating coil.
258 Chapter Seven T
Figure 7-5 in the Duct Heating Coils section is a graphical representation of a large
(12-ton), vertical split-system fan-coil unit on a floor plan drawing. The unit serves a
computer room with high space sensible heat gains. Therefore, the airflow is high on
a cubic foot per minute (cfm) per square foot basis, but the outdoor ventilation rate is
a low percentage of the supply airflow because the occupant density is very low.
Figure 7-7 is a graphical representation of cabinet fan-coil units on a floor plan draw-
ing; Fig. 7-8 is a photograph of a cabinet fan-coil unit in its installed condition.
In the configuration shown in Fig. 7-7, space would need to be made available
within the exterior wall on the interior side of the wall insulation for routing the dual-
temperature water piping from the ceiling space to the fan-coil unit mounted below the
window. Outdoor air for the office would have to be provided by a separate system.
The condensate drain pipe is often connected to a vertical condensate drain riser that
is shared by two fan-coil units on each floor, as shown in Fig. 7-7. The capacities and
configurations of fan-coil units are often scheduled as typical “types” rather than as
Figure 7-7 Floor plan representation of cabinet fan-coil units.
Figure 7-8 Photograph of a cabinet fan-coil unit.
individual pieces of equipment because the same unit configuration and capacity may
be utilized in multiple locations for a project. For example, there may be several Type
“A” fan-coil units in a project, all of which have the same configuration and capacity.
This is done to simplify the scheduling of the unit capacities and configurations and
also to make the contractor’s job of pricing, ordering, and installing the units easier.
Capacity The capacity of a fan-coil unit is often given in terms of its cooling capacity
(in tons) or its supply airflow (in cfm). Fan-coil unit cooling capacities are usually 5 tons
or less with supply airflows of 2,000 cfm or less. However, fan-coil units as large as
25 tons with supply airflows up to 10,000 cfm are also available, usually as a less costly
option to modular central station AHUs. Fan-coil units larger than 5 tons are similar to
modular central station AHUs, with the exception that fan-coil units are available only
with the standard components and capacities offered by the manufacturer. Thus, there
is less flexibility in selecting the components of a large fan-coil unit compared to the
options available with a modular central station AHU.
Another limitation of fan-coil units is the external static pressure7 that the supply
fan is capable of developing to overcome the static pressure loss of the supply and
return air duct system. Small fan-coil units (2,000 cfm or less) are limited to duct
systems having a static pressure loss of about 0.50 in. w.c. or less. Larger fan-coil
units (2,000 to 10,000 cfm) are capable of serving duct systems with a static pressure
loss of 1.00 in. w.c. or less for the standard-size motor. Typically, a larger motor and
drive8 are available as an option to serve duct systems with a static pressure loss of
up to 2.00 in. w.c.
Control Fan-coil units connected to duct systems are typically controlled by space ther-
mostats. Cabinet units and units without ductwork connections that are installed in
accessible locations are usually controlled by unit-mounted thermostats. Both space
thermostats and unit-mounted thermostats may also be connected to the BAS, depend-
ing upon the requirements of the project. The unit fans are typically two-speed or three-
speed and may run continuously or intermittently when heating or cooling is required.
The control valves for the hot water or steam heating and/or chilled water cooling coils
are normally two-position (opened/closed) since modulating control valves are not
required for capacities up to 5 tons. Electric heaters for fan-coil units less than 5 tons are
normally single stage (on/off). Normally, fan-coil units are available with all required
ATC components as an optional accessory.
Fan-coil units larger than 5 tons are normally equipped with modulating control
valves. Step controllers are used for electric heaters in fan-coil units larger than
5 tons.
Selection
HVAC Load As with any air system, fan-coil units should be selected to meet the
heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning needs of the areas that they serve. However,
because the capabilities of fan-coil units are limited by the standard fan/coil combina-
tions offered by the manufacturers, they may not be suitable for areas that require a
high percentage of outdoor air or have significant internal latent heat gains, such as
people or cooking appliances.
260 Chapter Seven T
In order to determine the suitability of a fan-coil unit for a particular application,

HVAC load calculations must first be performed for the areas served to determine the
sensible and total cooling load9 and the heating load that will be imposed upon the fan-
coil unit cooling and heating coils. The calculations must include the outdoor airflow
that is conditioned by the fan-coil unit, if any. The cooling supply airflow should be
based on a cooling supply air temperature of 55 to 58°F and a space temperature of 75°F
for occupied areas and 85°F for unoccupied areas that require cooling.10 The output of
the HVAC load calculations will show the calculated space relative humidity (RH),
which should be between 40 and 60% RH (preferably closer to 50% RH). The HVAC
load calculations will also identify the conditions of the air entering and leaving the
cooling coil, the total and sensible cooling load on the cooling coil, and the heating load
on the heating coil.
Fan Selection In order to properly select a fan-coil unit, the unit must first be able to
supply the calculated airflow required for cooling against the static pressure losses of
the supply and return air duct systems, if any. In the manufacturer’s product data, sup-
ply fan airflows are given for each unit size, fan speed, total number of coil rows (cool-
ing coil rows plus heating coil rows), and the external static pressure of the supply and
return air duct systems.
This introduces the term unit size, which is commonly used to describe terminal
equipment such as fan-coil units and VAV terminal units. Although different manufac-
turers may use different conventions, it is common for fan-coil unit sizes to correspond
to the nominal supply airflow capability. For example, a unit size 06 may supply 600 cfm
of airflow at a certain fan speed, number of coil rows, and external static pressure deter-
mined by the manufacturer. The capacities of the cooling and heating coils available for
the various unit sizes are based on this nominal airflow. Correction factors must be
applied to the coil capacities for airflows that differ from the nominal values.
Cooling Coil Selection If chilled water is used, the proper cooling coil must be selected
based on the entering chilled water temperature and design temperature rise (Δt) of the
chilled water through the coil. Typically, the entering chilled water temperature is 45°F
and the design Δt is 10°F. However, this is determined by the design parameters of the
overall chilled water system. If a DX refrigerant cooling coil is used, the proper satu-
rated suction temperature11 must be identified, which is usually 45°F.
The cooling coil entering air conditions from the calculations must be matched
with the closest entering air conditions supplied by the manufacturer in the product
data. Three common entering air conditions supplied in manufacturers’ product
data are 75°F dry bulb (db)/63°F wet bulb (wb), 80°F db/67°F wb, and 85°F db/71°F
wb. The 75°F db/63°F wb entering air condition represents a 75°F/52% RH space
with no outdoor air ventilation (occupied space, 100% recirculating air). The 80°F
db/67°F wb entering air condition represents a 78°F/53% RH space with approxi-
mately 10 to 12% outdoor air ventilation (occupied space, outdoor air ventilation for
a minimum number of occupants). The 85°F db/71°F wb entering air condition rep-
resents an 85°F/50% RH space with no outdoor air ventilation (unoccupied space,
100% recirculating air).
The fan-coil unit manufacturer’s product data will also provide the sensible and
total cooling capacity for the cooling coils that are available for each unit size based on
the entering air dry bulb/wet bulb temperatures listed above, entering water tempera-
tures, and chilled water temperature differentials through the coil (Δt). For chilled water
coils, performance data are provided for 40°F, 45°F, and 50°F entering water tempera-
tures. An entering water temperature of 45°F and a 10°F Δt temperature rise is common.
If a greater degree of dehumidification is required, a 40°F entering water temperature
should be utilized, keeping in mind that the chilled water plant must be designed to
supply this chilled water temperature. Similar performance data are provided for DX
refrigerant coils for 35°F, 40°F, 45°F, and 50°F saturated suction temperatures, where a
45°F saturated suction temperature is the most common. Greater dehumidification
capacity can be achieved with a lower saturated suction temperature, but the refrigera-
tion system must be designed accordingly. Cooling coils for fan-coil units are normally
available in two-row, three-row, and four-row configurations, although a six-row con-
figuration may be available for larger units. The latent cooling capacity of cooling coils
increases with an increase in the number of rows.
The sensible cooling capacity of the fan-coil unit cooling coil must exceed the sen-
sible cooling load of the areas served in order to be capable of maintaining the design
space temperature setpoint. Furthermore, the cooling coil’s ratio of latent capacity to
total capacity must be equal to, or greater than, the ratio of latent load to total load of
the areas served (including the outdoor air ventilation load) to ensure that the cooling
coil has sufficient ability to dehumidify the air flowing through the coil. This “latent
heat ratio” is commonly expressed as a sensible heat ratio (SHR), or qs/qt, where qs is
the sensible heat flow (in Btuh) and qt is the total heat flow (in Btuh). Although “latent
heat ratio” it is not a common term, it is equal to 1 minus the SHR. Therefore, if the latent
heat ratio of the cooling coil must be equal to, or greater than, the latent heat ratio of the
load, it follows that the SHR of the cooling coil must be equal to, or less than, the SHR
of the load in order to provide adequate dehumidification of the supply airflow.
If the SHR of the coil is greater than the SHR of load, the cooling coil will not have
sufficient dehumidification capacity to maintain the design space relative humidity
determined by the HVAC load calculations. In this case, the HVAC system designer
must determine if an increase in the space relative humidity is acceptable or if a differ-
ent cooling coil should be selected. More cooling coil rows, an increase in chilled water
flow (with a corresponding decrease in chilled water Δt), and a lower entering chilled
water temperature will all provide greater dehumidification capabilities for the cooling
coil. Remember, all of these factors must be consistent with the design parameters of the
overall chilled water system.
Heating Coil Selection Heating coils are much easier to select than cooling coils
because air warming is strictly a sensible heating process; that is, there is no latent heat
component. Therefore, the heating coil selected for the fan-coil unit must simply have a
greater heating capacity than the heating load of the areas served, including the heating
load of the outdoor airflow, if any. The heating coil capacity should be selected as close
as possible to the heating load in order to prevent drastic swings in the space tempera-
ture when the heating coil is energized and de-energized. Sufficient heating capacity is
typically available from a one-row or two-row hot water or steam heating coil for most
commercial applications.
data for 180°F entering water temperature and 70°F entering air temperature. Correc-
tion factors must be applied to the capacities if different entering water or entering air
temperatures are used. The heating water flow rate through the heating coil is deter-
mined by the heating water Δt through the coil, which is commonly 20°F. The heating
262 Chapter Seven T
water Δt must be consistent with the design parameters of the overall heating water
system.
air temperature.
General Guidelines The following are some general guidelines that should be fol-
lowed when selecting fan-coil units:
• Fan-coil units should not be used where the outdoor airflow requirement for
occupant ventilation or exhaust air makeup exceeds 10 to 12% of the supply
airflow.
• Fan-coil units are suitable for serving the heating and cooling needs for areas
such as offices and conference rooms where the occupant density ranges
between 10 and 25 people per 1,000 net occupiable square feet.
• Fan-coil units should not be used to serve the heating and cooling needs of
areas where the occupant density exceeds 25 people per 1,000 net occupiable
square feet because the units typically will not have the latent cooling capacity
required to maintain an acceptable space relative humidity for these occupant-
dense areas.
• A two-row or three-row cooling coil is normally acceptable for fan-coil units
that do not condition any outdoor air.
• A four-row cooling coil is normally required if the fan-coil unit must condition
any outdoor air.
• Space thermostats provide better control of space temperature than unit-
mounted thermostats.
• An outdoor air duct connection with or without a manual damper is normally
available as an option for cabinet units mounted on exterior walls. However,
this option is not recommended because there is the potential for freezing
conditions within the wall box housing and subsequent freezing of the water
coil(s) should the heating coil in the fan-coil unit fail to function properly.
• Fan-coil units with capacities that are 5 tons or less are only capable of utilizing
1-in.-thick air filters. Larger fan-coil units with capacities up to 25 tons are only
capable of utilizing 2-in.-thick air filters. A filtration efficiency of minimum
efficiency reporting value (MERV) 8 is possible with 1-in. and 2-in. filters, which
is standard for commercial buildings. However, if superior air filtration is
required, such as is required to achieve the Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design (LEED) Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) Credit 5,
fan-coil units cannot be used because they are incapable of obtaining the MERV
13 air filtration efficiency that is required.
• The heating and sensible cooling capacities of the coils in fan-coil units should
be selected as close as possible to the heating and sensible cooling loads of the
areas served. Oversizing the heating and cooling coils is not recommended
because it results in poor control of space temperature, reduced dehumidification

capability,12 and potential short-cycling of the refrigeration system compressor(s)
for units utilizing DX refrigerant cooling coils.
• A cooler supply air temperature utilizing less airflow results in a lower space
relative humidity than a warmer supply air temperature utilizing more airflow.
Therefore, a supply air temperature closer to 55°F (rather than 58°F) is
recommended for spaces having occupant densities that are at the higher end of
the acceptable range.
• If a split-system is used for cooling, there is a limit to the separation distance
between the AHU and the outdoor air-cooled condensing unit for the standard-
sized refrigerant piping. This separation distance is typically in the range of 75
to 100 ft. Also, the allowable separation distance between the two units may be
decreased if the condensing unit is installed at a higher elevation than the AHU.
The manufacturer’s representative should be consulted if the separation
distance between the two units exceeds 75 ft because special sizing of the
refrigerant lines may be required.
• The lowest outdoor temperature in which the outdoor air-cooled condensing
units and heat pump units can operate in the cooling mode is approximately
23°F. If cooling operation of the outdoor units is required for temperatures
below 23°F, variable speed condenser fans must be specified; this will enable
low ambient cooling operation down to −20°F outdoor temperature.
Installation The following are some installation and maintenance requirements that
need to be respected in the design of HVAC systems utilizing fan-coil units:
• Fan-coil units suspended from the building structure should be suspended

with neoprene vibration isolation hangers.
• Sufficient clearance around fan-coil units should be provided for piping and
electrical connections, filter replacement, access to removable panels in the unit,
and coil removal.
• The locations of fan-coil units installed above ceilings and their associated
maintenance clearances need to be coordinated with the locations of lighting
fixtures, sprinkler heads, and other systems installed in the ceiling.
• Sufficient space must be allowed, especially above ceilings, for the required
¼ in./ft pitch required for the condensate drain piping from the fan-coil units
to the points of discharge to the building storm water system.
• Sufficient clear space between the ceilings and building structure must be
allowed for fan-coil units installed above ceilings.
• Ceiling access panels (minimum 24 in. × 24 in.) are required for maintenance
access to fan-coil units installed above gypsum board ceilings.
Ductless Split-System Units

Purpose
Ductless split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units are often used where it is
difficult or impossible to route ductwork to the area served; where heating water, steam,
or chilled water is unavailable or undesirable for use; and/or where a stand-alone unit
264 Chapter Seven
separate from the central HVAC system is desired. Applications for ductless split-
system units frequently include elevator machine rooms, data closets, and other equip-
ment rooms that require cooling year-round, 24 hours per day. Although some models
are equipped with a connection for an outdoor air duct, most units do not provide any
outdoor air ventilation to the spaces they serve.
As the name implies, ductless split-system units do not have any supply or return air
ductwork. They consist of an indoor fan-coil unit with integral supply and return air
grilles and an outdoor air-cooled condensing unit or heat pump unit, depending upon
the configuration. The indoor unit is equipped with a DX refrigerant coil and possibly
an electric heating coil.
The indoor unit is either surface wall-mounted within the conditioned space or
recessed within the ceiling. The outdoor air-cooled condensing unit or heat pump unit
is usually of a compact design, which allows it to be installed in tight spaces outdoors.
Ductless split-system units are available in cooling capacities of up to approximately
3½ tons. Configurations include cooling-only, cooling with electric heat, heat pump,
and heat pump with backup electric heat.
Certain models are also capable of serving multiple indoor units from one outdoor
unit. The manufacturer’s product data should be consulted for specific products that
are available for each application.
Connections
Connections to ductless split-system units include the refrigerant suction, liquid, and
possibly hot gas piping between the indoor and outdoor units, condensate drain pipe
connection to the drain pan, and electrical connections to the indoor and outdoor units.
Because the indoor units are wall-mounted below the ceiling or recessed within the ceil-
ing, it is common for there to be insufficient space for the pitch of the condensate drain
piping. Therefore, a small condensate pump is usually installed adjacent to the indoor
unit to receive condensate from the cooling coil drain pan and pump it to the point of
discharge to the building storm water system.
Ductless split systems typically utilize 208/230V/1Ø electrical power. If a conden-
sate pump is required, it should be specified to utilize 120V/1Ø power and be fur-
nished with a cord and plug to serve as the disconnecting means. In this case, the
electrical engineer would design a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacle
near the condensate pump as its source of electrical power.
Figures 7-9 and 7-10 illustrate the indoor and outdoor components of ductless
split-system units on a floor plan drawing and a connection detail for a ductless split-
system unit, respectively. Figures 7-11 and 7-12 are photographs of these units in their
installed conditions.
The following are some design considerations that apply to most ductless split-system
units:
• Ductless split-system units should be selected with heating and sensible cooling
capacities that are greater than the heating and sensible cooling loads of the
areas served.
Figure 7-9 Floor plan representation of ductless split-system units.
265
266 Chapter Seven T
Figure 7-10 Connection detail of a ductless split-system unit.
Figure 7-11 Photograph of a ductless split-system indoor unit.
Figure 7-12 Photograph of a ductless split-system outdoor unit.
• Ductless split-system units typically have a high sensible heat ratio; thus they
are not suitable for serving areas with high internal latent heat gains, such as
occupant-dense areas.
• There is no flexibility in the coil selection for the indoor units as there is with
fan-coil units.
• Ductless split-system units utilize 1-in.-thick air filters; thus they cannot be
used to serve areas that require a filtration efficiency higher than MERV 8.
• Ductless split-system units are controlled by either wall-mounted space
thermostats or by wireless handheld thermostats.
• The lowest outdoor temperature in which the outdoor air-cooled condensing
units and heat pump units can operate in the cooling mode is approximately
23°F. If cooling operation of the outdoor units is required for temperatures
below 23°F, the optional wind baffle accessory must be specified to enable low
ambient cooling operation down to 0°F outdoor temperature.
• The heating capacity of heat pump units decreases with a decrease in outdoor
temperature. The rated heating capacities for heat pump units are normally
given for an outdoor temperature of 17°F. If the design winter temperature is
less than 17°F, the manufacturer’s representative should be consulted to
determine the heating capacity at the design winter temperature and see if it is
adequate for the application.
268 Chapter Seven T
• If the heating capacity of a heat pump unit is insufficient at the design winter
temperature or for an air-conditioning unit that requires heating capabilities, an
electric heater should be specified for the indoor unit.
• Sufficient clear space must be provided around outdoor units for free airflow.
The manufacturer’s product data should be consulted to determine the
minimum separation distances required between adjacent units, from units to
nearby walls, and for the proper orientation of discharge air with respect to
adjacent units and walls.
• Outdoor units should be securely attached to rigid bases with anchor bolts and
neoprene vibration isolation pads.
• As with all split-system units, there is a limit to the separation distance between
the indoor and outdoor units for the standard-sized refrigerant piping. The
manufacturer’s representative should be consulted if the separation distance
between the two units exceeds 75 ft because special sizing of the refrigerant
lines may be required.
• The locations of ceiling-recessed units need to be coordinated with the locations
of lighting fixtures, sprinkler heads, and other systems installed in the ceiling.
• Indoor units should be mounted at least 6 ft 6 in. above the floor to the bottom
of the unit so that the units do not become a head-bumping hazard.
Variable Air Volume Terminal Units

In Chap. 5 we discussed, in general, the operation of VAV terminal units within VAV
air systems. In this chapter we will look more closely at the two types of VAV terminal
units most commonly used in commercial buildings: single-duct and fan-powered
VAV terminal units. We will first discuss the similarities of single-duct and fan-powered
VAV terminal units and then look at the features that distinguish them. We will also
discuss the two types of fan-powered VAV terminal units: series fan-powered and par-
allel fan-powered VAV terminal units.
Similarities of Single-Duct and Fan-Powered VAV Terminal Units

Purpose
Both single-duct and fan-powered VAV terminal units have the same purpose, to provide
heating, cooling, and ventilation to the temperature zone (group of spaces controlled by
a single zone temperature sensor) that each VAV terminal unit serves.
Primary Air Inlet Single-duct and fan-powered VAV terminal units have one (typically
round) primary air13 inlet.
Primary Air Damper and Controller The primary airflow for single-duct and fan-powered
VAV terminal units is modulated by an automatic damper mounted within the primary
air inlet. The primary air damper actuator is typically electric and is controlled by a
direct digital control (DDC) system controller mounted on the VAV terminal unit.14 The
primary air damper actuator and controller are normally housed within a terminal box
mounted on the outside of the VAV terminal unit.
Inlet Velocity Sensor The primary air inlet is equipped with a velocity sensor consisting
of multiple pitot tubes15 that constantly measure the total pressure and static pressure
of the primary airflow at multiple locations across the primary air inlet. This type of
sensor is called a multipoint averaging sensor because the sensor averages all of the
total pressure measurements and all of the static pressure measurements of the pitot
tubes. The velocity pressure, which is the difference between the average total pressure
and average static pressure, is read at the controller mounted on the VAV terminal unit.
The controller is connected to the inlet velocity sensor by two tubes, one for the average
total pressure and one for the average static pressure measured by the inlet velocity
sensor. From the velocity pressure, the controller is able to continuously calculate the
primary airflow (in cfm).16 The inlet velocity sensor ensures that the airflow called for
by the space temperature sensor is what is actually delivered by the VAV terminal unit
(regardless of the static pressure within the primary air duct system) and also ensures
that the primary airflow delivered by the VAV terminal unit remains within the preset
minimum and maximum primary airflows for the VAV terminal unit.17
Outlet Single-duct and fan-powered VAV terminal units have one rectangular outlet to
which the downstream ductwork is connected.
Heating Coil A hot water or electric heating coil can be specified as an accessory to a
single-duct or fan-powered VAV terminal unit if heating is required by the zone.
Terminal Box The primary air damper actuator and the unit controller for both single-
duct and fan-powered VAV terminal units are normally housed within a terminal box
mounted on the side of the terminal unit. Figure 7-13 shows the components within the
Figure 7-13 Photograph of the terminal box for a VAV terminal unit.
270 Chapter Seven T
terminal box of a single-duct VAV terminal unit with a hot water heating coil. The
damper actuator is mounted on the primary air damper shaft and is located on the
right-hand side of the terminal box in Fig. 7-13 and the unit controller is located on
the left-hand side of the terminal box.
Liner Typically, VAV terminal unit casings are lined on the interior with coated, dual-
density fiberglass insulation. Other liners with a less porous surface can be specified to
reduce the accumulation of dirt; these include fiber-free (foam) liner, foil-faced liner, and
a double-wall casing with a galvanized steel inner wall. Specification of these smooth
liners slightly reduces the sound attenuation qualities of the VAV terminal unit.
Connections
Both single-duct and fan-powered VAV terminal units require duct connections to
the inlet and outlet of the terminal units. The primary air duct system (upstream of
VAV terminal units) is usually a medium-velocity duct system (between 1,200 and
2,500 fpm air velocity) having a medium-pressure classification (3 in. w.c. to 6 in.
w.c.). The duct distribution system downstream of VAV terminal units will be a low-
velocity duct system (maximum 1,000 fpm air velocity) having a low-pressure clas-
sification (2 in. w.c. or less). If a hot water heating coil is designed, it will require
heating water supply and return piping connections. If an electric heating coil is
designed, it will require an electrical power connection that is usually terminated
within the terminal box, which is furnished as an integral part of the VAV terminal
unit. All VAV terminal units that are controlled by a DDC system require low-voltage
(24V ac) control power.
A minimum length of three duct diameters of straight duct should be designed for
the inlet ductwork connected to VAV terminal units. This straight length of ductwork
ensures a fairly uniform velocity profile across the inlet velocity sensor, increasing the
accuracy of the primary airflow measurement.
It is common to design the first 5 ft of supply air ductwork downstream of VAV
terminal units to be lined on the interior with 1 in. of duct liner. This helps to attenuate
some of the discharge noise that is generated by the VAV terminal unit.
One important distinction between VAV terminal units and many of the other types
of terminal equipment that provide cooling is that VAV terminal units do not require a
condensate drain connection because they do not contain a cooling coil.
Primary Airflow Capabilities All primary air dampers can shut off the primary airflow
completely. However, complete shutoff of primary airflow is not recommended if the
VAV terminal unit serves a zone that has a heating load (refer to the VAV Terminal Units
section in Chap. 5). If the zone has a heating load, the primary air damper should be
specified to have a minimum airflow position in order for the VAV terminal unit to
provide ventilation to the zone during times of low cooling load and during the heating
mode of operation.
The inlet velocity sensor requires a minimum air velocity of about 400 fpm through the
inlet in order to accurately measure the primary airflow. Therefore, all VAV terminal units
have a minimum primary airflow below which the terminal unit cannot accurately deliver
primary air. This minimum airflow depends upon the size of the primary air inlet.
The maximum primary airflow that can be delivered by single-duct and fan-powered
VAV terminal units is limited by the acceptable radiated and discharge noise criteria (NC)
levels for the terminal units. The noise that is generated by a VAV terminal unit increases
as the air velocity through the primary air inlet increases and also increases as the
differential static pressure between the inlet and outlet of the terminal unit increases.
Most VAV terminal unit manufacturers test their equipment in accordance with the
Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standard 880-98 to obtain the
sound power levels for their terminal units at various primary airflows and various
differential static pressures between the inlet and outlet of the terminal unit. Table 7-1
summarizes the minimum allowable airflows for different-sized VAV terminal unit
inlets (based on the minimum airflow required by the inlet velocity sensor) and the
maximum recommended airflows (based on the AHRI-rated airflows with a 1.5 in. w.c.
differential static pressure between the inlet and outlet of the terminal unit). These
maximum airflows result in radiated and discharge NC levels for the terminal units
of about 30, which is an acceptable NC for spaces within commercial buildings.
Capacity Once the heating and cooling loads of the zones within the building have
been calculated, the heating and cooling capacity of the VAV terminal units serving
these zones can be determined. The cooling capacity (or maximum primary airflow) of
a VAV terminal unit must be equal to or greater than the cooling supply airflow calcu-
lated for the zone. The zone cooling supply airflow is based on the zone sensible cooling
load, the design primary air temperature (which is normally 55°F), and the zone cooling
setpoint (which is normally 75°F).
The heating capacity of a VAV terminal unit must be equal to the zone heat losses
through the building envelope, plus the heating load of any outdoor air infiltration to
the zone, plus the heat required to raise the heating primary airflow from the primary
air temperature (which is normally 55°F) to the zone heating setpoint (which is nor-
mally 70°F). Thus, the VAV terminal unit heating coil not only needs to meet the heating
load of the zone served by the terminal unit, it also needs to heat the heating primary
airflow up to room temperature. Once the load on the heating coil is known, the heating
supply airflow must be calculated. The heating supply airflow should be calculated
based on a supply air temperature that is 15°F warmer than the zone heating setpoint,
Inlet Size, in. Minimum Airflow, cfm Maximum Airflow,1 cfm

6 80 400
8 145 700
10 230 1,100
12 325 1,600
14 450 2,100
16 580 2,800
1
Maximum airflows are the Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute–
rated airflows (based on a 1.5 in. w.c. differential static pressure between the inlet
and outlet of the terminal unit).
Table 7-1 Primary Airflow Capabilities for Single-Duct and Fan-Powered VAV
Terminal Units
272 Chapter Seven T
which equates to 85°F for a 70°F zone heating setpoint. If the heating supply air tem-
perature is greater than 20°F warmer than the room temperature, the air within the
room will stratify. That is, the warmer air will rise to the top of the room and the cooler
air will remain near the bottom of the room, resulting in an uncomfortable condition for
the occupants. Refer to the Selection sections of the Single-Duct VAV Terminal Units
and Fan-Powered VAV Terminal Units sections later for sample calculations of the heat-
ing and cooling supply airflows and the capacities of the heating coils for single-duct
and fan-powered VAV terminal units.
Standard hot water heating coils for VAV terminal units are one-row and two-row
coils. The heating capacity of the hot water heating coil depends upon the number of
rows, entering water temperature, water flow, and entering air temperature. Standard-
sized electric heating coils are available for both single-duct and fan-powered VAV ter-
minal units depending upon the unit size. The heating capacity of the electric heating
coil is independent of the entering air temperature.
The minimum primary airflow designed for VAV terminal units that do not shut off
is commonly 25% of the maximum airflow. This normally provides adequate outdoor
air ventilation for commercial buildings. Thus, based on the information presented in
Table 7-1, any size VAV terminal unit can be selected to deliver its maximum allowable
airflow and still be capable of throttling the primary airflow to 25% of the maximum
airflow.
Control VAV terminal units are either pressure independent or pressure dependent.
Pressure-independent VAV terminal units utilize an inlet velocity sensor and are capa-
ble of maintaining the required airflow delivered by the units regardless of the pressure
fluctuations within the primary air duct system between the AHU and the VAV terminal
units. Because pressure-independent VAV terminal units are used in almost all VAV air
systems for commercial buildings, we will limit our discussion in this chapter to pressure-
independent units. Pressure-dependent VAV terminal units do not have a means of
compensating for pressure fluctuations within the primary air duct system and are,
therefore, dependent upon the system pressure for the airflow delivered by the units.
Each VAV terminal unit is equipped with a DDC system controller that receives
input from the inlet velocity sensor and the space temperature sensor. The controller
sends output to the primary air damper actuator to position the damper to deliver the
airflow required to maintain the cooling setpoint of the zone temperature sensor. If the
VAV terminal unit is equipped with a heating coil, the controller will also send output
to the control valve actuator (hot water heating coil) or electric heating coil controller to
control the output of the heating coil to maintain the heating setpoint of the zone tem-
perature sensor. The controller on fan-powered VAV terminal units also sends output to
the fan to turn it on and off.
The DDC system controller on each VAV terminal unit requires low-voltage (24V ac)
power for operation. The 24V ac control power for single-duct VAV terminal units is
normally fed from a control transformer mounted in a main ATC panel called a net-
work DDC panel (refer to Chap. 9 for a discussion of DDC systems). This eliminates the
need for separate line voltage electrical power connections to all of the single-duct VAV
terminal units. For fan-powered VAV terminal units and single-duct VAV terminal units
with electric heat, the low-voltage control power is normally derived from the line volt-
age feed to the terminal unit through a control transformer mounted in the terminal
unit terminal box.
Selection In the cooling mode of operation, single-duct and fan-powered VAV terminal
units function basically the same. Consequently, the selection of the inlet size for both
single-duct and fan-powered VAV terminal units is based solely on the zone cooling sup-
ply airflow requirement (refer to the Primary Airflow Capabilities section earlier).
The electric heating coils for VAV terminal units must be selected to ensure that a
minimum air velocity through the coil is always present to prevent overheating of the
electrical elements and nuisance tripping of the thermal cutouts. The manufacturer’s
product data should be consulted to determine the minimum airflow required for the
electric heating coil.
The supply fan in the AHU must have sufficient external static pressure to over-
come the static pressure losses associated with the primary air duct system between the
AHU and the farthest VAV terminal unit. Furthermore, for single-duct VAV terminal
units and parallel fan-powered terminal units, the AHU supply fan must also overcome
the static pressure losses through the farthest VAV terminal unit and the duct distribu-
tion system downstream of the terminal unit. For series fan-powered VAV terminal
units, the terminal unit fan overcomes the static pressure losses through the terminal
unit and the duct distribution system downstream of the terminal unit.
Installation Duct strap18 can be used to suspend both single-duct and fan-powered
VAV terminal units from the building structure. However, if greater vibration isolation
is desired, neoprene vibration isolation hangers can be used to suspend fan-powered
VAV terminal units from the building structure.
A clear space of at least 18 in. should be provided in front of the terminal box for
both single-duct and fan-powered VAV terminal units to allow room for the door swing
and for maintenance access. This access space should be coordinated so that it is not
above lighting fixtures. Access to the fan within fan-powered VAV terminal units is usu-
ally through the bottom panel of the unit casing. Therefore, it is necessary to provide
clear access to the bottom of all fan-powered VAV terminal units; that is, they should
not be located above lights or any other services that would restrict this access. Ceiling
access panels (minimum 24 in. × 24 in.) are required for maintenance access to all VAV
terminal units installed above gypsum board ceilings.
Single-Duct VAV Terminal Units

Purpose
Single-duct VAV terminal units are used for zones that require cooling only and where
the zone heating supply airflow requirement (at 85°F) is close to the minimum primary
airflow required for ventilation. Single-duct VAV terminal units are not equipped with
fans to recirculate air and are, therefore, not recommended for zones that have a heating
supply airflow requirement at 85°F, which is significantly higher than the minimum
primary airflow required for ventilation. Fan-powered VAV terminal units are recom-
mended in this case, as is discussed in the Fan-Powered VAV Terminal Units section
later.
Single-duct VAV terminal units can also be used to serve zones that require a
constant primary airflow, such as where the zone has continuous exhaust airflow. In
this case, the terminal units would be considered constant air volume (CAV) terminal
units and the minimum and maximum primary airflows would be the same. For CAV
terminal units, the primary air damper only modulates to compensate for pressure
274 Chapter Seven T
fluctuations within the primary air duct system. A heating coil is required for CAV
terminal units, whether zones have a heating load or not, to prevent overcooling. The
output of the heating coil would be modulated to maintain the setpoint of the zone
temperature sensor.
The height of single-duct VAV terminal units ranges from 8 to 18 in., the width ranges
from 12 to 24 in., and the length is usually about 20 in. (Fig. 7-14). The rectangular outlet
size for single-duct VAV terminal units is approximately the same size as the terminal
unit casing.
Connections
Figure 7-15 illustrates the connections associated with a single-duct VAV terminal unit
with an electric heating coil. The connections for a single-duct VAV terminal unit with
a hot water heating coil would be similar, but the hot water heating coil would be
Figure 7-14 Diagram of a single-duct VAV terminal unit.
Figure 7-15 Single-duct VAV terminal unit with electric heating coil connection detail.
mounted directly on the outlet of the terminal unit. The heating water piping connec-
tions (depending upon the type of control valve) would be similar to those shown in
Figs. 7-1 and 7-2. If the VAV terminal unit has no heating coil, the lined discharge duct-
work would connect directly to the outlet of the terminal unit.
Control The normal sequence of operation for a single-duct VAV terminal unit is for the
primary air damper to modulate closed as the space temperature drops below the cool-
ing setpoint of the zone temperature sensor and to modulate open as the space tempera-
ture rises above the cooling setpoint of the zone temperature sensor. The primary airflow
will modulate between the preset cooling minimum and maximum airflows. If the VAV
terminal unit is equipped with a heating coil, the unit will change its mode of operation
from cooling to heating mode once the primary air damper reaches its cooling minimum
airflow setting and the zone temperature drops below the heating setpoint. In the heat-
ing mode of operation, the primary air damper will position to deliver the heating air-
flow (which may be the same as, or higher than, the cooling minimum airflow) and the
output of the heating coil will be modulated as required to maintain the heating setpoint
of the zone temperature sensor. Upon a rise in space temperature above the heating
setpoint of the zone temperature sensor, the reverse will occur.
Selection The following are sample calculations for the heating and cooling supply
airflows and the capacity of the heating coil for a single-duct VAV terminal unit:
• Zone cooling load: 15,120 Btuh

• Zone heating load: 4,860 Btuh
• Cooling setpoint: 75°F
• Primary air temperature: 55°F
• Heating setpoint: 70°F
• Heating supply air temperature: 85°F
• Cooling supply airflow = (15,120 Btuh)/[(1.08)(75°F − 55°F)] = 700 cfm
• Minimum primary airflow required for ventilation = (700 cfm)(25%) = 175 cfm
• Minimum heating supply airflow19 = (4,860 Btuh)/[(1.08)(85°F − 70°F)] = 300 cfm
• Heating coil capacity20 = (4,860 Btuh) + (1.08)(300 cfm)(70°F − 55°F) = 9,720 Btuh
Based on the cooling supply airflow of 700 cfm, a single-duct VAV terminal unit
with an 8-in.-diameter primary air inlet should be selected to serve the zone in this
example, realizing that the terminal unit is sized for its maximum airflow capability. If
any additional zone cooling load is anticipated in the future, a VAV terminal unit with
a 10-in.-diameter primary air inlet should be selected to provide some spare capacity
for the future.
This example shows how the recommended heating supply airflow of 300 cfm
at 85°F is 125 cfm greater than 25% of the maximum cooling supply airflow, which is
175 cfm. What this means is that this VAV terminal unit should have two minimum
primary airflows: the cooling minimum airflow of 175 cfm and the heating minimum
airflow of 300 cfm. If the heating minimum airflow were allowed to be the cooling
276 Chapter Seven T
minimum airflow of 175 cfm, the heating supply air temperature would have to be
95.7°F in order to provide the 4,860 Btuh of heating required for the zone [4,860 Btuh =
(1.08)(175 cfm)(95.7°F − 70°F)].
Since the heating minimum primary airflow is greater than 25% of the maximum
primary airflow, the heating coil must heat an additional 125 cfm of primary air than
what is required by the zone for ventilation. It would require less energy for the VAV
terminal unit to heat 125 cfm of 70°F return air to 85°F than it would to heat 125 cfm
of primary air at 55°F to 85°F. It is for this reason that fan-powered VAV terminal units
were developed. Fan-powered VAV terminal units have the capability to reduce the
primary airflow to the minimum required by the zone for ventilation and utilize
return air for the additional airflow required for heating. Refer to the discussion of
fan-powered VAV terminal units below for the fan-powered VAV terminal unit selec-
tion procedure.
Fan-Powered VAV Terminal Units

Purpose
Fan-powered VAV terminal units should be designed for zones that have a significantly
higher heating supply airflow requirement (at an 85°F supply air temperature) than the
minimum primary airflow required by the zone for ventilation. Fan-powered VAV ter-
minal units are normally designed for perimeter zones for this reason. Fan-powered
VAV terminal units are also most suitable for use in air systems that utilize a ceiling
return air plenum. The ceiling return air plenum provides a ready source of return air
for the terminal unit fan to draw through the induced air inlet. Fan-powered VAV ter-
minal units can also be used in air systems that do not utilize a ceiling return air ple-
num. However, a lined return air duct must be connected from the induced air inlet to
return air grilles in all of the spaces served by the terminal unit.
Fan-powered VAV terminal units have all of the same components that single-duct
VAV terminal units have with the addition of a fan and an induced air inlet. The fan
can be oriented within the terminal unit such that it is in series with the primary air-
flow or parallel to the primary airflow. Thus, the two types of fan-powered VAV termi-
nal units are called series fan-powered and parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units.
Figures 7-16 and 7-17 illustrate the relationship of the fan to the primary airflow for
these two types of fan-powered VAV terminal units.
Because of the fan that is installed within the terminal unit, fan-powered VAV ter-
minal units are significantly larger than single-duct VAV terminal units. The height of
fan-powered VAV terminal units ranges from 17 to 20 in., although low-profile units
that are approximately 10 in. high are available. The width ranges from 36 to 48 in., and
the length ranges from 41 to 47 in. The rectangular outlet size for fan-powered VAV
terminal units ranges from 14 to 17 in. wide by 11 to 14 in. high. Because of their size,
fan-powered VAV terminal units require close coordination with ductwork and other
services above the ceiling.
Fan-powered VAV terminal units will almost always be equipped with a heating
coil. If no heating coil is required in the terminal unit, a single-duct VAV terminal unit
would be a more cost-effective choice to serve the cooling needs of the zone. Hot water
Figure 7-16 Diagram of a series fan-powered VAV terminal unit.
Figure 7-17 Diagram of a parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit.
or electric heating coils are mounted on the outlet connection of series fan-powered
VAV terminal units. For parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units, the hot water coil is
normally mounted on the induced air inlet and the electric heating coil is mounted on
the outlet connection of the unit.
A filter rack on the induced air inlet is usually available as an optional accessory
and is recommended to keep the heating coil clean. However, filter replacement will
become an ongoing maintenance item for the building owner.
Terminal Box Fan-powered VAV terminal units with an electric heating coil normally
have a larger terminal box to allow room for the terminal block (where the electrical
power is connected) and the electric heating coil controller to be installed within the
terminal box.
Connections
Figure 7-18 illustrates the connections associated with a parallel fan-powered VAV
terminal unit with a hot water heating coil. The connections for a series fan-powered
VAV terminal unit with a hot water heating coil would be similar, but the hot water
heating coil would be mounted on the outlet of the terminal unit. The heating water
278 Chapter Seven
Figure 7-18 Parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit with hot water heating coil connection detail.
piping connections (depending upon the type of control valve) are similar to those
shown in Figs. 7-1 and 7-2. Also, a flexible duct connector is required on the outlet con-
nection of fan-powered terminal units to isolate the vibrations generated by the fan in
the terminal unit from the downstream duct system.
Figures 7-19 and 7-20 are representations of a fan-powered VAV terminal with a hot
water heating coil along with the associated ductwork and piping shown on separate
floor plans. Also shown on the HVAC piping plan is a ceiling-mounted cabinet unit
heater and floor-mounted finned-tube radiators.
Control The operation of the primary air damper for both types of fan-powered
VAV terminal units is the same as the cooling sequence of operation for the primary
air damper in single-duct VAV terminal units. The fan in series fan-powered VAV
terminal units runs continuously during the occupied mode of operation. The fan in
parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units only runs when heating is required by the
zone temperature sensor. During heating operation, the output of the heating coil is
modulated as required to maintain the heating setpoint of the zone temperature
sensor. Therefore, the only difference in the operation of series and parallel fan-
powered terminal units is in the operation of the fan. Series fan-powered VAV ter-
minal units deliver a constant supply airflow to the zone at a variable temperature
for both cooling and heating operation. Parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units
deliver a variable supply airflow to the zone at a constant temperature for cooling
operation and a constant supply airflow to the zone at a variable temperature during
heating operation.
Figure 7-19 HVAC duct plan.
Figure 7-20 HVAC piping plan.
279
280 Chapter Seven T
Selection The fan in a series fan-powered VAV terminal unit must be capable of sup-
plying the maximum cooling supply airflow since the fan is in series with the primary
air. The fan in a parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit only needs to be sized to deliver
the heating supply airflow (based on an 85°F supply air temperature) minus the mini-
mum primary airflow required for ventilation since the fan is in parallel with the pri-
mary air. The manufacturer’s product data must be consulted to determine the minimum
terminal unit fan airflow for parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units because it may be
greater than what is required based on an 85°F supply air temperature. The minimum
terminal unit fan airflow is usually in the range 300 to 400 cfm, but this depends upon
the size of the fan and the external static pressure of the duct system downstream of the
terminal unit.
The fan in both series and parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units must be capable
of delivering the design fan airflow at the external static pressure required to overcome
the losses in the downstream duct system, heating coil, and induced air inlet filter
(if any).
Using the same zone heating and cooling loads for the example given in the Single-
Duct VAV Terminal Units section earlier, the following are sample calculations for the
heating and cooling supply airflows and the capacity of the heating coil and terminal
unit fan for both series and parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units:
1. Zone cooling load: 15,120 Btuh

2. Zone heating load: 4,860 Btuh
3. Cooling setpoint: 75°F
4. Primary air temperature: 55°F
5. Heating setpoint: 70°F
6. Heating supply air temperature: 85°F
7. External static pressure: 0.25 in. w.c.
8. Cooling supply airflow = 700 cfm
9. Minimum primary airflow required for ventilation = (700 cfm)(25%) = 175 cfm
10. Minimum heating supply airflow21 = (4,860 Btuh)/[(1.08)(85°F − 70°F)] = 300 cfm
11. Heating coil capacity22 = (4,860 Btuh) + (1.08)(175 cfm)(70°F − 55°F) = 7,695 Btuh
12. Fan airflow
a. Series fan-powered VAV terminal unit
(1) Fan airflow = cooling supply airflow = 700 cfm
b. Parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit
(1) The fan airflow is ideally equal to minimum heating supply airflow of
300 cfm minus the minimum primary airflow of 175 cfm, which equals
125 cfm. However, based on the manufacturer’s product data, the
minimum fan airflow for the terminal unit at 0.25 in. w.c. of external
static pressure is 300 cfm.
(2) Therefore, since the minimum fan airflow at the design external static
pressure is equal to 300 cfm, the terminal unit will deliver the sum of
the minimum fan airflow plus the minimum primary airflow, which
equals a total of (300 cfm + 175 cfm) = 475 cfm of supply airflow during
heating operation.
13. Heating supply air temperature

a. Series fan-powered VAV terminal unit
(1) Heating supply air temperature = {(zone heating load)/[(1.08)(heating
supply airflow)]} + heating setpoint
(2) Heating supply air temperature = {(4,860 Btuh)/[(1.08)(700 cfm)]} +
70°F = 76.4°F
b. Parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit
(1) Heating supply air temperature = {(zone heating load)/[(1.08)(heating
supply airflow)]} + heating setpoint
(2) Heating supply air temperature = {(4,860 Btuh)/[(1.08)(475 cfm)]} +
70°F = 79.5°F
The primary air inlet size for both the series and parallel fan-powered VAV terminal
units would be the same as for the single-duct VAV terminal unit illustrated in the
single-duct VAV terminal unit example above. The fan for the series fan-powered VAV
terminal unit would be selected to deliver 700 cfm of air at 0.25 in. w.c. external static
pressure. The fan for the parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit would be selected to
deliver 300 cfm of air at 0.25 in. w.c. external static pressure.
Comparison
The following are some of the advantages and disadvantages of single-duct, series fan-
powered, and parallel fan-powered VAV terminal units.
Single-Duct VAV Terminal Units

Advantages
• Most energy-efficient choice because there is no fan energy associated with the
terminal unit.
• Lowest first cost.
• Lowest maintenance cost because there is no air filter or fan that requires
maintenance.
Disadvantages
• Not suitable for use when the heating airflow is significantly higher than the
minimum primary airflow required for ventilation.
• Mixing of room air is decreased as the primary airflow is reduced, which occurs
during times of low cooling load and during heating operation.
Series Fan-Powered VAV Terminal Units

Advantages
• Constant supply airflow:
• Consistent noise from the terminal unit.
• Effective mixing of room air at all times.
282 Chapter Seven
Disadvantages
• Least energy-efficient because the fan runs continuously during occupied
operation.
• Lowest supply air temperature during heating operation, which may feel drafty
to occupants.
Parallel Fan-Powered VAV Terminal Units

Advantages
• More energy-efficient than series fan-powered VAV terminal units:
• The fan runs only during the heating mode of operation.
• A smaller fan is required.
• Warmer supply air temperature than series fan-powered VAV terminal units
during heating operation, which will feel more comfortable to occupants.
Disadvantages
• Variable supply airflow:
• Variable noise from the terminal unit.
• Variable mixing of room air.
• Mixing of room air is decreased as the primary airflow is reduced, which occurs
during times of low cooling load.
Coordination With Other Disciplines

Coordination with other disciplines includes the following:
• The architect should review the selections of all terminal equipment that will be
visible in the occupied spaces to ensure that they coordinate with the interior
design.
• The electrical requirements of the terminal equipment should be communicated
to the electrical engineer through the equipment list and a highlighted set of
HVAC plans, as discussed in Chap. 2.
Endnotes
1. Line voltage is a term that refers to the operating voltage of the equipment.
2. A step controller is a series of contactors that close individually to energize the
electric heater element in stages. For example, a three-step controller energizes the
electric heater in one-third capacity increments.
3. An SCR controller is a solid-state device that uses a pulsed signal to control the
percentage of time the electric heater is energized (it does not control the electrical
power input). SCR controllers are capable of modulating the output of the electric
heater from 0 to 100%.
4. Unit heaters can also burn fuel oil, but fuel-burning unit heaters are not common
in commercial buildings.
5. Gas-fired unit heaters typically have an 80% thermal efficiency; thus, the gross
output is typically 80% of the burner input rating.
6. The envelope heat loss is the sum of the heat losses through the walls, windows,
doors, roof, and floor slab of the vestibule.
7. External static pressure refers to the static pressure losses external to the unit. Static
pressure losses associated with the components of a fan-coil or air handling unit,
such as the filter and coils, are called internal static pressure losses. The supply fan
must develop a total static pressure sufficient to overcome both the external and
internal static pressure losses.
8. Drive refers to the pulleys on the motor and fan for belt-driven fans. A larger motor
pulley and/or smaller fan pulley increases the fan speed and, as a result, causes the
fan to develop a greater static pressure. However, this also requires more power
(brake horsepower) from the motor.
9. The total cooling load is equal to the sensible cooling load plus the latent cooling
load. The sensible component of the cooling load (in Btuh) is met by the cooling
coil through a decrease in the dry bulb temperature of the air flowing through the
cooling coil. The latent component of the cooling load (also in Btuh) is met by the
cooling coil through the condensation of the water vapor within the air flowing
through the cooling coil. Thus, latent cooling of moist air is not related to a change
in dry bulb temperature of the air; rather, it is related to a reduction in the moisture
content of the air.
10. The cooling supply airflow is strictly a function of the supply air temperature, the
space sensible heat gains, and the space temperature. The cooling supply airflow
required to maintain the design space temperature setpoint is independent of the
amount of outdoor air ventilation that is mixed with return air upstream of the
cooling coil.
11. The saturated suction temperature is the temperature at which the refrigerant evap-
orates within the cooling coil. This is the temperature of the cooling coil.
12. The average coil temperature of an oversized cooling coil will be warmer than the
average coil temperature of a properly sized cooling coil. Less moisture is con-
densed on a warmer surface; thus the dehumidification capability of an oversized
cooling coil is reduced.
13. Primary air is the air that is delivered to the VAV terminal units by the AHU.
Typically, the primary air temperature is 55°F so that cooling can always be pro-
vided through the VAV terminal units to the temperature zones, if required.
14. A pneumatic damper actuator may also be used with a pneumatic control system,
although this is less common.
15. A pitot tube measures total air pressure and static air pressure. The difference
between the total pressure and the static pressure is the velocity pressure.
16. Airflow can be calculated if both the velocity pressure of the airflow through a duct
and the cross-sectional area of the duct are known.
17. The maximum and minimum primary airflows for the VAV terminal units
designed for a project are given in the VAV terminal unit equipment schedule
on the construction drawings. These values are preset at the factory before the
units are shipped to the contractor and are also verified by the testing, adjusting,
and balancing contractor after installation (during start-up).
284 Chapter Seven
18. Duct strap is a light gauge strip of sheet metal about 1 in. wide that is cut to length
and is used for suspending ductwork in accordance with SMACNA guidelines. It is
also used to suspend small pieces of HVAC equipment such as VAV terminal units
and fans.
19. Based on an 85°F heating supply air temperature.
20. Based on the heating supply airflow of 300 cfm.
21. Based on an 85°F heating supply air temperature.
22. Based on the minimum primary airflow required for ventilation of 175 cfm.
Chapter 8
Noise and V ibration Control
A
lthough sound and vibration are complex subjects, a basic understanding of
the fundamental methods of controlling noise (unwanted sound) and vibration
is necessary to avoid what can be the most objectionable qualities of a poorly
designed HVAC system.
Noise Control
Sound Power and Sound Pressure
Sound power and sound pressure are two related, but different, terms that are used in
the study of sound. Sound power is the intensity of a source, such as a chiller, fan, or cool-
ing tower. It cannot be measured directly but must be calculated through measure-
ments of sound pressure in a controlled environment. Sound power for HVAC
equipment is commonly determined through measurements of sound pressure con-
ducted in accordance with the Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute
(AHRI) standards. Sound pressure is measureable, diminishes in proportion to the square
of the distance from the source, and is affected by intervening obstacles. Because sound
pressure varies with the distance from the source, sound pressure levels will always be
given in terms of the distance from the source.
Sound power and sound pressure are both expressed in terms of decibels (dB), a
unit based on a reference sound power of 10-12 W,1 which is defined as having a sound
power level of 0 dB. Sound power is represented by the following equation, which con-
verts sound power from watts to decibels:
LW = 10 log W + 120
where
LW = sound power (dB)
W = sound power (W)
A sound power level of 1 W is equivalent to 120 dB,2 a sound power level of 2 W is

equivalent to 123 dB,3 and a sound power level of 10 W is equivalent to 130 dB.4 Thus,
we can see that an increase of 3 dB in sound power level is a two-fold increase in sound
power level, and an increase of 10 dB in sound power level is a ten-fold increase in
sound power level.
285
286 Chapter Eight
Some common sources and their associated sound power levels are as follows:
Source Sound Power, dB

Soft whisper 30
Conversational speech 70
Shouting voice 90
Loud radio 110
Small aircraft engine 120
Loud rock band 130
Afterburning jet engine 170
Tonal Qualities of Sound

Sounds have different tonal qualities; that is, they have predominantly low-, mid-, or
high-frequency tones. The tonal quality of a sound can be defined by its sound spec-
trum. In order to describe the sound spectrum of a source, sound power levels and
sound pressure levels are often reported in terms of decibels in each of eight octave
bands having center frequencies of 63, 125, 250, 500, 1,000, 2,000, 4,000, and 8,000 Hz. By
analyzing the sound spectrum, the tonal quality of the sound can be determined. The
characteristics of sound in the various octave bands can be described as follows:
Octave Band Characteristic

Below 63 Hz Throb
63 to 125 Hz Rumble
125 to 500 Hz Roar, hum, and buzz
500 to 2,000 Hz Whine and whistle
2,000 to 8,000 Hz Hiss
Balanced and Unbalanced Sound

Sound can also be defined as being balanced or unbalanced. Unbalanced sound has
strong tonal components; that is, the sound spectrum has peaks in certain octave bands.
Balanced sound conforms to established octave band spectra, such as noise criteria
(NC) curves, which were established to rate the noisiness of indoor spaces (refer to the
discussion of noise criteria below). Generally, unbalanced sound is more objectionable
than balanced sound and may require noise control measures.
A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level

Sounds may also be rated by means of the A scale, which approximates the response of the
human ear to sound. The A-scale (or A-weighted) sound pressure level is expressed in
terms of dBA. To obtain the A-weighted sound pressure level of a source, a weighting fac-
tor is applied to the sound pressure level measured in each octave band to adjust the spec-
trum to the A-scale.5 The adjusted sound pressure levels in adjacent octave bands are then
summed through logarithmic addition to arrive at the overall A-weighted sound pressure
level. A-weighted sound pressure levels are a good indicator of the perceived loudness of
a source but give no indication of the tonal quality or spectral balance of the sound.
N o i s e a n d V i b r a t i o n C o n t r o l 287
To provide a frame of reference for the perceived loudness of sources, the following
are some common sources and their associated A-weighted sound pressure levels:
Source Sound Pressure, dBA

Soft whisper at 5 ft 34
Conversational speech at 5 ft 50
Loud radio in an average room 70
Vacuum cleaner at arm’s length 74
Jackhammer at 50 ft 88
Home lawn mower at 5 ft 95
Chain saw at arm’s length 116
Threshold of pain 120
Immediate damage to unprotected ears 130
Table 8-1 provides an example of the sound pressure level spectrum and A-weighted
sound pressure level as they might appear in a manufacturer’s product data for a par-
ticular piece of HVAC equipment.
Outdoor Noise
Noise generated by outdoor HVAC equipment can be a concern because there may be
local or state regulations that establish maximum values of noise at the property lines.
These values will depend upon the location of the building (residential, commercial, or
industrial district, etc.) and the time of day. Also, the building owner may want to keep
certain areas outside the building free from HVAC equipment noise.
It is important to understand that noise in any octave band is additive to the ambi-
ent noise in the same octave band. For example, if the ambient sound pressure level in
an octave band is 60 dB and a piece of HVAC equipment has a sound pressure level of
60 dB in the same octave band, the resulting sound pressure level in that octave band
will be doubled (i.e., it will be measured at 63 dB). However, if the HVAC equipment
has a sound pressure level that is 10 dB (or more) lower than the ambient sound pres-
sure level in the same octave band, the ambient sound pressure level in that octave
band will be virtually unaffected and will, for this example, remain at 60 dB. This is
important to keep in mind when considering the effect that HVAC equipment noise
will have on ambient noise both outdoors and indoors.
Octave Band Number (Center Frequency)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Overall
(63 Hz) (125 Hz) (250 Hz) (500 Hz) (1,000 Hz) (2,000 Hz) (4,000 Hz) (8,000 Hz) A-weighted1
66 68 65 65 62 56 56 55 67
30 ft from side of unit.

1
Table 8-1 Sample HVAC Equipment Sound Pressure Data, dB
288 Chapter Eight
Indoor Noise
Maximum Noise Level
For equipment rooms, the noise level should be kept below 85 dBA. If it isn’t, the Occu-
pational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) will require hearing conservation
measures to protect employees who could be exposed to this noise for an 8-hour day.
Noise Criteria Rating

For other indoor locations, such as offices, conference rooms, corridors, and similar
areas, the noise should be kept below the accepted indoor NC level for the space. The
NC method of rating indoor noise is the most widely used method, although other
methods such as the room criteria (RC) and balanced noise criteria (NCB) are also used,
particularly to identify interference with speech and imbalances in the noise spectrum.
Table 8-2 and Fig. 8-1 illustrate the NC curves.
Octave Band Number (Center Frequency)

Noise 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Criteria (63 Hz) (125 Hz) (250 Hz) (500 Hz) (1,000 Hz) (2,000 Hz) (4,000 Hz) (8,000 Hz)
20 51 41 33 26 22 19 17 16
30 57 48 41 35 31 29 28 27
40 64 57 51 45 41 39 38 37
50 71 64 59 54 51 49 48 47
60 77 71 67 63 61 59 58 57
70 83 79 75 72 71 70 69 68
Table 8-2 NC Curve Tabulations, dB
Figure 8-1 NC curves.
The sound pressure level in the octave band having the highest NC level deter-
mines the NC level of the space. For example, a space with a sound pressure level of
41 dB in the 1,000-Hz octave band would have an NC level of 40. Noise criteria design
guidelines for various commercial spaces are as follows:
Space Design NC level

Conference room 30
Private office 35
Open office 30
Corridor 45
Discharge and Radiated Sound Power Levels

For airside HVAC equipment, it is common for the intensity of the noise generated by
the equipment to be given in terms of the discharge sound power and radiated sound
power levels.
The discharge sound power is the noise generated by the equipment that will be
transmitted through the air within the ductwork to the occupied spaces. The discharge
sound pressure that will be perceived in the areas served by the equipment will be
transmitted through the air inlets and outlets located in these areas. Discharge sound
pressure diminishes in proportion to the square of the distance from the source and is
also affected by intervening obstacles within the ductwork distribution system, such as
sound attenuators and variable air volume (VAV) terminal units.
The radiated sound power is the noise that is generated by vibration of the equip-
ment walls. The radiated sound power is transmitted to the space in which the equip-
ment is installed and can also be transmitted to adjacent spaces through vibration of the
building walls and floors and the ductwork that is connected to the equipment. Radi-
ated sound pressure also diminishes in proportion to the square of the distance from the
source and is affected by intervening obstacles such as sound attenuating materials
installed on the equipment, building walls, floors, and ductwork.
Noise Control Measures

In order to properly attenuate the noise generated by HVAC equipment to acceptable
levels, the sound power level spectrum of the source and the desired NC level for the
space must first be defined. Then it is necessary to identify the sound paths from the
source to the building occupants and apply insertion losses for the intervening obsta-
cles. Insertion losses of the intervening obstacles are described as such because when
they are “inserted” between the source and the receiver (building occupants), they
attenuate the sound pressure levels in each octave band to varying degrees depending
upon the nature of the obstacle. Once the insertion losses for all intervening obstacles
along a sound path have been applied, the resultant sound spectrum is what will be
perceived by the building occupants. The resultant sound spectrum is then compared
to the acceptable NC level for the space to determine whether noise control measures
need to be applied or not and, if so, to what level they are required in each of the eight
octave bands.
In general, dense materials have good sound attenuation qualities for low-frequency
noise and less dense materials have good sound attenuation qualities for high-frequency
noise. For example, an acoustical consultant may specify a lead blanket to be installed
290 Chapter Eight
below the floor of a penthouse equipment room to attenuate the radiated noise of a cen-
trifugal chiller (which generates predominantly low-frequency noise). On the other
hand, partition walls filled with fiberglass batt insulation are effective in attenuating the
radiated noise of speech (which has sound in the mid- to high-frequency range).
The following are some generally accepted practices for reducing the HVAC noise
that will be perceived by building occupants:
• Locate equipment rooms as far away from noise-sensitive areas as possible.

• Coordinate with the project architect to ensure that the walls of equipment
rooms are constructed of concrete masonry units.
• Locate outdoor HVAC equipment, such as chillers, cooling towers, and air-
cooled condensing units, away from noise-sensitive areas such as building
entrances and operable windows.
• Locate rooftop HVAC equipment, especially compressorized HVAC equipment,
as far away from noise-sensitive areas on the top floor of the building as possible.
• In general, a larger fan wheel rotating at a lower speed generates less noise than
a smaller fan wheel rotating at a higher speed. Therefore, if two fans meet the
design requirements for airflow and static pressure, the larger of the two fans
will normally generate less noise.
• Design sound-lined ductwork for the first 10 ft of supply and return air ductwork
connected to air handling units.
• Design sound attenuators6 in the supply and/or return air ductwork connected
to large air handling units or air handling units that serve noise-sensitive spaces.
A sound attenuator manufacturer’s representative should be contacted for the
selection of sound attenuators. The representative will need the sound power
level spectrum of the equipment, duct sizes, airflows, and the intervening
obstacles along the sound paths in order to select sound attenuators with the
appropriate dynamic insertion loss7 (DIL) in each octave band to achieve the
desired room NC level.
• The size of the opening for open-end return air ductwork should be based on an
air velocity of 500 fpm through the opening wherever possible. A maximum air
velocity of 750 fpm is acceptable if a 500 fpm air velocity cannot be achieved.
Transition the open-end duct to the return air duct main with a maximum
combined angle of 30°. Design sound-lined ductwork for the open-end return
air ductwork transition and the first 5 ft of return air main ductwork.
• Design open-end return air ductwork to air handling units to have at least one
elbow between the unit and the open end of the ductwork.
• Design sound-lined ductwork for the first 5 ft of supply air ductwork downstream
of VAV terminal units, especially fan-powered VAV terminal units.
• Locate VAV terminal units above corridors wherever possible and not above
private offices or conference rooms. This is especially true for fan-powered VAV
terminal units, which have a higher radiated sound power than single-duct
VAV terminal units.
• Design transfer air ducts to be sound-lined and have a Z-configuration to
eliminate a straight line sound path between the openings on each end of the
transfer air duct.
• Design flexible duct connectors for all ductwork connections to equipment with
rotating elements, such as fans or compressors.
• Design flexible pipe connectors for all piping connections to equipment with
rotating elements, such as pumps, cooling towers, and chillers.
• Design sleeves for all duct penetrations of walls. The sleeves should be at least
1 in. larger than each of the duct dimensions. The space between the duct and
the sleeve should be packed with mineral fiber and caulked.
• Design final connections to supply air diffusers with flexible ductwork not to
exceed 8 ft in length.
• Maintain air velocities within ductwork below the acceptable limits depending
upon the location of the ductwork (i.e., in a shaft, above a corridor, above an
occupied space). Refer to the Duct Sizing Criteria section in Chap. 6.
• Specify manufacturer-furnished sound attenuating blankets or enclosures for
indoor chillers.
• Specify manufacturer-furnished sound attenuating options, such as compressor
enclosures or oversized condenser fans, for outdoor chillers.
• Specify manufacturer-furnished sound attenuators for cooling towers.
Vibration Control
All pieces of HVAC equipment that utilize motor-driven rotating elements (such as
pumps, fans, and compressors) vibrate, producing a vibratory force that is proportional to
the weight of the equipment. This vibration energy will be transmitted to the building
structure, piping, and/or ductwork distribution systems if the HVAC equipment is rigidly
connected to these elements. The vibration transmitted through these elements may
become an annoyance to the building occupants, may affect the operation of sensitive
equipment, and may be radiated to certain areas within the building as structure-borne
noise.
In order to reduce the transmission of vibration from HVAC equipment to the build-
ing structure, piping, and ductwork distribution systems, vibration isolation is required
either within the HVAC equipment itself (internal isolation) or at the connection points
of the HVAC equipment to these elements (external isolation). Effective vibration isola-
tion is based on the principle that flexible materials transmit vibration energy less effi-
ciently than stiff materials do. Thus, in order to isolate the vibration of HVAC equipment
from the (stiff) building structure, piping, and/or ductwork, the HVAC equipment
should be connected to these elements with flexible materials.
Vibration isolation is normally described in detail in the project specifications. How-
ever, vibration isolation is often shown in the connection details for the various pieces
of HVAC equipment included in a project. We will briefly discuss some of the more
common types of vibration isolation utilized in commercial buildings.
Equipment Hangers and Supports

Vibration isolation is used in the hangers, floor-mounted supports, and roof-mounted
supports for vibrating HVAC equipment and its associated piping. The effectiveness of
vibration isolation hangers and supports is measured in terms of isolation efficiency,
which is the percentage of the vibratory force that is not transmitted to the support
292 Chapter Eight
structure. Isolation efficiency is directly proportional to the deflection of the vibration
isolator under the operating weight of the HVAC equipment (i.e., isolation efficiency
increases with an increase in isolator deflection).
Furthermore, isolation efficiency is increased when the deflection of the vibration
isolator is high compared to the deflection of the support structure. This ratio of isolator
deflection to the support structure deflection is an important consideration for any
piece HVAC equipment installed on a floor (which is not a slab on grade) or roof. But,
it is particularly important when determining the appropriate vibration isolation for
HVAC equipment that is supported by light construction, such as a roof supported by
open-web joists.
The two components that are most often used in vibration isolation for HVAC
equipment are:
1. Neoprene
a. Neoprene’s elastic properties provide effective isolation of high-frequency
vibration. Neoprene isolators are designed to be fairly stiff, having a
deflection of only about ¼ in. Because the deflection is so small, neoprene
can be used in conjunction with spring isolators without the adverse effects
that can occur due to resonance if two spring isolators are used in series to
isolate the same piece of equipment.8
b. Neoprene is often used on the bottom of the base plate of spring isolators to
isolate high-frequency vibration.
c. Separate neoprene vibration isolators are often used as external vibration
isolation for internally isolated HVAC equipment, such as chillers and
cooling towers, once again, to isolate high-frequency vibration.
2. Steel springs
a. Spring isolators are used where a higher static deflection, in the range of ¾ to
3½ in., is required to isolate low-frequency vibration.
The following are some common types of vibration isolation hangers and supports
and their recommended uses:
1. Vibration isolation hangers

a. Combination spring and neoprene vibration isolation hangers
(1) All piping in equipment rooms.
(2) First 50 ft of piping connected to vibrating HVAC equipment.
(3) Suspended HVAC equipment that is not internally isolated.
b. Neoprene vibration isolation hangers
(1) Suspended HVAC equipment that is internally isolated.
2. Vibration isolation supports
a. Neoprene pads or molded mounts for equipment bases
(1) Base-mounted HVAC equipment, such as air handling units, condensing
units, heat pump units, chillers, and cooling towers, which is internally
isolated.
b. Spring isolators for equipment bases
(1) Base-mounted HVAC equipment that is not internally isolated.
c. Concrete inertia bases with spring isolators
(1) End-suction pumps.
Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors

Flexible pipe and duct connectors are used in the piping and ductwork connections to
vibrating HVAC equipment to isolate the equipment vibration from the piping and
ductwork distribution systems in the building.
As discussed in Chaps. 3 and 6, flexible pipe connectors are either reinforced rubber
or stainless steel hose and braid. Flexible pipe connectors should be designed for the
piping connections to the following pieces of HVAC equipment:
• End-suction pumps
• Cooling towers
• Water-source heat pump units
• Other pieces of motor-driven equipment where the equipment vibration may
be transmitted to the piping system
As discussed in Chap. 6, flexible duct connectors consist of a rubber-coated glass

fabric and should be used for the ductwork connections to the following pieces of
HVAC equipment:
• Air handling units

• Fan-coil units
• Water-source heat pump units
• Packaged rooftop units
• Fans
• Discharge air duct for fan-powered VAV terminal units
• Other pieces of motor-driven equipment where the equipment vibration may
be transmitted to the ductwork system
Additional Resources
For more information, the reader is directed to the Vibration Isolation and Control sec-
tion in Chap. 48 of the 2011 ASHRAE Handbook—HVAC Applications. Table 47 in that
chapter lists the recommended vibration isolation for various pieces of HVAC equip-
ment based on the type and size of the equipment and its location within the building.
Also, vibration isolation manufacturers are a good source of technical information. The
HVAC system designer should consult with a manufacturer’s representative or a vibra-
tion consultant for any applications that are out of the ordinary or for which further
guidance is required.
Endnotes
1. A sound power level of 10-12 W is the lowest sound level which a person with excel-
lent hearing can discern.
2. LW = 10 log(1) + 120 = 10(0) + 120 = 120 dB
3. LW = 10 log(2) + 120 = 10(0.30) + 120 = 123 dB
4. LW = 10 log(10) + 120 = 10(1) + 120 = 130 dB
294 Chapter Eight
5. A-weighted sound pressure levels can also be measured directly with a sound level
meter.
6. Sound attenuators are also referred to as duct silencers.
7. Dynamic insertion loss (DIL) is the difference in sound pressure levels measured
within a space before and after the insertion of the sound attenuator. The DIL of
a sound attenuator is inversely proportional to the air velocity through the sound
attenuator (i.e., the DIL decreases as the air velocity through the sound attenuator
increases).
8. Two spring isolators should not be used in series to isolate the same piece of equip-
ment without the expert advice of a vibration consultant because resonance of the
unit and excessive vibration can occur at certain rotational speeds.
Chapter 9
Automatic Temperature
Controls
T
he automatic temperature control (ATC) system is the part of the HVAC system
that causes it to operate according to its design intent. Modern ATC systems are
microprocessor-based direct digital control (DDC) systems that have, at their
heart, an ATC system controller. The ATC system controller sends output to certain ATC
components within the HVAC system commanding them to perform their intended
functions, receives input from other ATC system components to determine if the HVAC
system is functioning properly, makes any necessary adjustments to the operation of
the HVAC system, and signals an alarm when the HVAC system is operating outside of
established parameters. Without an ATC system, the HVAC system would either run
continuously (out of control) or it would not run at all.
DDC ATC systems are the most widely used systems for medium- and large-sized
commercial building projects (projects larger than 10,000 ft2). However, pneumatic1 and
electrical ATC systems may also be utilized to control certain portions of the HVAC
systems. Pneumatic ATC systems are commonly found in older buildings; however,
some modern buildings use a combination of DDC and pneumatic ATC components. In
this case, pneumatic actuators are typically used for the ATC components, which require
a high operating torque, such as large control valves and large motor-operated dampers.
Electrical ATC systems are commonly used for certain pieces of terminal equipment
(such as finned-tube and electric radiators, unit heaters, and cabinet unit heaters) that
are not connected to a centralized building automation system (BAS).2 Electrical ATC
systems normally utilize low-voltage3 (24V ac) ATC components. The 24V ac source for
the low-voltage ATC components is derived from the line voltage through a step-down
control transformer. Line voltage electrical ATC components are also used where it is
not desirable to derive a separate low-voltage control circuit.
Whether they use DDC, pneumatic, or electrical components, ATC systems can be
designed to operate in a self-contained mode with no communication to a wider control
network, or they can be designed to operate within the framework of a networked con-
trol system, often referred to as a BAS. ATC systems that communicate with a BAS are
still fully functional, stand-alone systems; that is, they are able to perform their design
function even if communication with the BAS is disrupted. However, the advantage of
a BAS is that it enables the building operator to monitor and control the various HVAC
systems serving a building (or multiple buildings) from a central location, typically a
computer workstation. Many building automation systems are also web-based, which
enables access to these systems through the Internet from anywhere in the world.
295
296 Chapter Nine A
The purpose of this chapter is not to provide an in-depth analysis or detailed

description of ATC systems. Rather, it is to provide an overview of the commonly used
ATC system components and how these components can work together as a system to
enable the various types of commercial HVAC systems they control to perform their
intended functions. Where any explanation of the actual operation of the control system
is given, it will be in the context of a DDC or electrical ATC system, not a pneumatic
ATC system.
Components
ATC systems are composed of various components (referred to as points) that provide
input to the ATC system controller or receive output from the controller. The input
received by the controller from the points and the output sent by the controller to the
points is either analog or digital. Analog information is continuous, or constantly chang-
ing. Digital information is in one of two discrete states (such as on or off, opened or
closed, voltage or no voltage).
Analog information is communicated through a variable electrical signal [most
commonly 0 to 10V dc, 2 to 10V dc, or 4 to 20 milliamperes (mA)] or through a variable
resistance. Digital information is communicated through the opening or closing of elec-
trical contacts4 or the presence or absence of the control voltage. The input and output
points for ATC system controllers are referred to as analog input (AI), analog output
(AO), digital input (DI), or digital output (DO) points.5
Examples of AI points include space temperature, duct static pressure, heating
water supply temperature, and chilled water system differential pressure. Examples of
AO points include positioning of a modulating control valve, positioning of a variable
air volume (VAV) terminal unit primary air damper, modulation of supply fan speed
for a VAV air handling unit, and modulation of pump speed for a variable flow pump-
ing system. Examples of DI points include fan status (on/off), smoke detector status
(normal/alarm), high-limit heating water temperature (normal/alarm), and low-limit
air temperature (normal/alarm). Examples of DO points include fan (on/off), two-
position control valve (open/close), smoke damper (open/close), and cooling tower
sump heater (on/off).
In the following sections, we will discuss the various types of ATC components that
are commonly used to control commercial HVAC systems. Our discussion will not
focus on the details of how these components actually work. Instead, it will focus on the
types and configurations of the components that are available and how they are com-
monly integrated into complete ATC systems.
Input
The following are some common ATC system devices that provide input to the ATC
system controller.
Analog Input
Temperature Sensors Temperature is probably the most commonly measured variable
in commercial HVAC systems. Temperature sensors used in HVAC systems are either
resistance temperature devices (RTDs) or thermistors. Both types of sensors change
their resistance with varying temperature; thus the analog input to the ATC system
A u t o m a t i c T e m p e r a t u r e C o n t r o l s 297
Figure 9-1 Photograph of a temperature sensor installed in a pipe.
controller from these sensors is variable resistance. Temperature sensors can measure
space temperature, water temperature within pipes, outdoor temperature, and air tem-
perature within ducts. Space temperature sensors can be specified with or without a
setpoint adjustment (analog input). They can also be specified with or without an over-
ride pushbutton (digital input), which changes the associated air system from unoccu-
pied to occupied mode of operation for a predetermined period of time. Temperature
sensors installed in pipes are installed within fluid-filled thermometer wells that extend
to the center of the pipe for pipe sizes 4 in. and smaller and a minimum of 2 in. into the
fluid for pipes larger than 4 in. Figure 9-1 is a photograph of a temperature sensor
installed in a pipe. Outdoor air temperature sensors are normally specified with a sun
shield to reduce the effect of the sun’s radiant heat on the temperature sensor. Duct
temperature sensors are typically 12 in. long and are installed with mounting brackets
in the walls of ducts.
Pressure Sensors Like pressure gauges, pressure sensors measure the difference in
pressure between two points. Pressure sensors are equipped with two ports, one that
senses the higher pressure and one that senses the lower pressure. It is common for one
of these two ports to be open to the atmosphere, in which case the measured pressure is
based on the reference of atmospheric pressure and is called gauge pressure. Gauge
pressure is measured when there is only one connection to the piping or duct system.
Connections of pressure sensors to piping or duct systems are typically made with ¼-in.
brass tubing. Air pressure sensors are mounted in the walls of ducts and normally sense
only the static pressure of the air within the ducts. Water and steam pressure sensors are
mounted in threaded openings in large pipes or in pipe tees for smaller pipes. Water
and steam pressure sensors typically sense only the static pressure of the fluid in the
pipes.
298 Chapter Nine A
A duct static pressure sensor is commonly used in the control of the supply fan
speed in a VAV air system.6 The fan speed is modulated through a variable frequency
drive (VFD) to maintain the setpoint of the static pressure sensor, which is typically
located two-thirds the way down the primary supply air duct system.
Differential pressure is the difference in pressure between two points in a piping or
duct system. In order to measure differential pressure, the high- and low-pressure ports
of a pressure sensor are piped with tubing from the pressure sensor to the remote points
in the pipe or duct. A differential pressure sensor is commonly used in the control of the
pump speed in variable flow pumping system. The pump speed is modulated through
a VFD to maintain the setpoint of the differential pressure sensor. The differential pres-
sure sensor is connected between the supply and return pipe mains at a point that is
indicative of the overall system differential pressure. If the piping system contains mul-
tiple branches, it may be necessary to utilize multiple differential pressure sensors to
ensure that adequate differential pressure is maintained in all of the branches.
Relative Humidity Sensors Relative humidity sensors are available to sense space rela-
tive humidity, outdoor relative humidity, and relative humidity within ducts. Return
air relative humidity is commonly sensed when the average relative humidity of mul-
tiple spaces is desired.
Enthalpy Sensors Enthalpy, which is a measure of the total heat of air (sensible and
latent), can also be sensed within spaces, outdoors, and within ducts. Return air and
outdoor air enthalpy sensors are commonly used in the control of the airside econo-
mizer operation of air systems where the enthalpy of the return air is compared to the
enthalpy of the outdoor air. If the air system is in the cooling mode of operation or is
required to maintain a constant 55°F discharge air temperature, the ATC system will
command the air system utilize up to 100% outdoor air instead of return air when the
return air enthalpy is greater than the outdoor air enthalpy.
Carbon Dioxide Sensors Carbon dioxide (CO2) sensors are available to sense space CO2
level, outdoor CO2 level, and the CO2 level within ducts. CO2 sensors are commonly
used to accomplish what is called demand controlled ventilation (DCV) for air systems.
DCV is an energy-efficient strategy that involves the adjustment of the outdoor airflow
delivered by an air system to meet the ventilation needs of the occupants within the
spaces served by the air system. Because CO2 is the gas exhaled by the building occu-
pants, an increase in the space CO2 level above the outdoor air CO2 baseline (typically
about 450 ppm) indicates the presence of occupants, thus the need for outdoor air venti-
lation. The sequence of operation for DCV is to adjust the outdoor airflow delivered by
the air system as required to maintain the space CO2 (or return air CO2) level at a maxi-
mum of 1,000 ppm. If the air system serves only one space or several spaces with a simi-
lar occupant density and occupancy schedule, the return air CO2 level can be sensed
instead of sensing multiple space CO2 levels. DCV systems are particularly appropriate
for spaces that have infrequent, dense occupancy, such as auditoriums and lecture halls,
because the significant outdoor airflow required to ventilate these spaces can be reduced
to zero when the spaces are unoccupied, which may be the majority of the time.
One of the requirements of the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
(LEED) Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) Credit 1 is to monitor the space CO2 levels
in all densely occupied spaces (greater than or equal to 25 people per 1,000 square feet)
and generate an alarm if the conditions vary by 10% or more from the setpoint.
Fluid Flow Measurement Measurement of fluid flow in pipes or ducts requires both a
fluid flow sensing element and a converter. The converter receives the input of the sen-
sor (velocity pressure) and calculates the flow rate based on the cross-sectional area of
the pipe or duct in which the sensor is installed. The flow rate is then communicated by
the converter to the ATC system controller.
Water and Steam Different types of flow sensors are available for measuring water
and steam flow. Orifice and venturi flow sensors are inexpensive, have no moving
parts, and are the most common types used for measuring fluid flow in commercial
HVAC systems. Turbine and vortex-shedding sensors are more costly and also more
accurate than orifice and venturi flow sensors. The types of flow sensors should be
selected based on the needs of each particular application and the client requirements.
Continuous measurement of water or steam flow in pipes is usually not required
for commercial HVAC systems, unless there is a need to meter the heating and cooling
energy used and assess a charge for it, as is the case with a district heating and cooling
utility and some campus heating and cooling systems. For example, steam flow is con-
tinuously measured at the service entrance of the steam utility to each customer in
district heating systems. The steam flow rate is totalized and the customer is periodi-
cally charged for its steam use, usually in 100-lb increments. If the steam pressure is
known and remains constant, the heat of vaporization is also known. Thus, it is only
necessary to measure the steam flow in order to determine the steam energy utilized by
a customer.
However, if a customer’s heating water or chilled water energy use is to be mea-
sured and totalized, it is necessary to continuously measure the supply and return tem-
peratures in addition to the water flow. The heating or chilled water energy use can
only be measured if the temperature differential is measured simultaneously with the
flow rate. Meters that incorporate fluid flow rate and temperature differential are called
thermal-energy (or sometimes Btu) meters.
Air Measurement of airflow in ducts is common for commercial HVAC systems,

particularly the outdoor airflow required for occupant ventilation in VAV air systems.
Section 403 of the 2009 International Mechanical Code requires the control system to main-
tain the minimum required outdoor airflow rates for the entire range of supply airflow.
Airflow is measured in a duct through an airflow measuring station, which consists
of a series of airflow sensors (pitot tubes or thermal dispersion elements) that are
arranged in a matrix across the duct’s cross-sectional area. The airflow sensors measure
the average-velocity pressure in the duct and convert this pressure to airflow based on
the duct’s cross-sectional area. Airflow can also be measured at the inlet of a fan through
a fan inlet velocity sensor. Once again, airflow is calculated based on the air velocity
pressure and cross-sectional area of the fan inlet. Another example of an airflow mea-
suring device is the velocity sensor mounted in the primary air inlet of single-duct and
fan-powered VAV terminal units.
Digital Input
Low-Limit Temperature Sensors A low-limit temperature sensor (also referred to as a
freezestat) consists of a continuous temperature sensing element (typically 20 ft long)
that is capable of sensing the coldest point along the sensor. The sensor is serpentined
across the leaving air side of the first water or steam coil in an air system that is exposed
300 Chapter Nine A
to any mixture of outdoor air. The air system fan motor(s) and outdoor air damper
control circuit are wired through the contacts of the low-limit temperature sensor. When
the temperature of the coldest point along the sensor drops below the (adjustable)
setpoint of the sensor (usually 38°F), the contacts of the sensor open, causing the fan(s)
to shut down and the outdoor air damper to close. Low-limit temperature sensors
typically require a manual reset because it is important to determine the cause of the
shutdown before the air system is reenergized. A low-limit temperature sensor is not
required if there is no water or steam coil in the air system.
High-Limit Temperature Sensors A high-limit temperature sensor is commonly used in

the heating water supply connection to a hot water boiler. Its purpose is to shut down
the boiler if its (adjustable) setpoint is exceeded. Typically, the setpoint will be 20°F
higher than the operating temperature of the boiler. Also, it is common for the high-
limit temperature sensor to be an accessory of the boiler itself and to be a factory-wired
component of the boiler’s operating controls. If not, one must be installed in the heating
water supply piping, with the boiler controls wired through the contacts of the high-
limit temperature sensor. High-limit temperature sensors require a manual reset because
it is important to determine the cause of the high temperature condition before the
boiler is reenergized.
Differential Pressure Switches A differential pressure (DP) switch (Fig. 9-2) is similar to
a pressure sensor in that it has high- and low-pressure ports that are piped to remote
points in a pipe, duct, or piece of equipment to sense the difference in pressure between
Figure 9-2 Photograph of a differential pressure switch.
the two points. DP switches have an adjustable pressure setpoint above which the
switch will either open or close its contacts, providing digital input to the ATC system
controller. DP switches are commonly piped between the inlet and discharge of pumps
and fans to provide the run status (on or off) of the equipment. DP switches are also
piped across air filters to provide a dirty filter alarm when the differential pressure
across the filters exceeds the setpoint of the DP switch.
Flow Switches Flow switches are used to identify the presence or absence of fluid flow
within pipes and ducts and are sometimes used instead of differential pressure switches
to provide the run status of pumps and fans. A flow switch consists of a spring-loaded
paddle that is mechanically connected to a switch. The switch is mounted to the wall of
a pipe or duct, with the paddle extended through the wall of the pipe or duct into the
fluid stream. The position of the paddle changes when there is fluid flow either opening
or closing the switch, thereby providing digital input to the ATC system controller.
High Static Pressure Switches A high static pressure switch is a differential pressure
switch that senses the (gauge) static pressure in a duct and opens its contacts if the duct
static pressure rises above the high-limit setpoint of the pressure switch. They are com-
monly used in VAV air systems to shut down the air system fan(s) if the duct static
pressure rises too high.
Duct Smoke Detectors Duct smoke detectors (Fig. 9-3) are mounted to the walls of ducts
and are designed to detect the presence of smoke in the air flowing through the ducts.
Most types consist of two sampling tubes (one inlet, one return) that extend into the
duct and allow air within the duct to circulate through the sensing chamber of the
smoke detector (mounted to the wall of the duct) where it is constantly monitored for
the presence of smoke.
Figure 9-3 Photograph of a duct smoke detector.
302 Chapter Nine A
The air system fan motor control circuit(s) is wired through the contacts of each
smoke detector so that all of the operational capabilities of the air system are shut down
when the presence of smoke is detected by any of the smoke detectors in the system.
This does not apply if the air system is part of a smoke control system. In this case, the
air system would change its mode of operation from normal to smoke control mode.
Duct smoke detectors require a manual reset.
Duct smoke detectors are required by the 2009 International Mechanical Code, Sec-
tion 606, to be installed in the return air duct for air systems with a design capacity of
2,000 cfm or greater. They are required in the return air duct connection to the return
air riser at each floor for air systems with a design capacity of 15,000 cfm that serve two
or more stories. Section 607 of the 2009 International Mechanical Code also requires a
duct smoke detector for each smoke damper installed within a duct.
End Switches An end switch is a switch that is mounted on a valve or damper actuator
that closes when the actuator reaches its fully stroked opened or closed position.7 End
switches can be separate from, or an integral part of, the valve or damper actuator. End
switches are used to provide digital input to the ATC system controller of the (opened
or closed) status of automatic control valves and motor-operated dampers. An end
switch is commonly used to provide the opened status of a motor-operated damper
when it is necessary for the damper to be fully opened before a fan can be energized,
such as the outdoor air damper for an equipment room ventilation system.
Current Sensing Relays A current sensing relay consists of an (integral or remote) induc-
tion coil and a relay. The induction coil senses electrical current flow through a wire and
closes (or opens) its relay contact when current flow is present. Current sensing relays are
often used to provide digital input to the ATC system controller of the run status of small
(¼ hp or less) direct-drive motors. Current sensing relays should not be used for motors
larger than ¼ hp or for belt-driven equipment because they are not capable of detecting a
mechanical failure of the driven equipment, such as a broken belt or locked-rotor condi-
tion.8 A differential pressure switch or flow switch should be used to determine the run
status of large motors and belt-driven equipment instead of a current sensing relay.
Aquastats An aquastat is a thermally actuated set of contacts that open or close above
a certain temperature. Aquastats are commonly used in 2-pipe systems to keep the con-
trol valves for heating-only equipment, such as unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters,
closed when the 2-pipe system is in the cooling mode of operation. In this case, the
normally closed control valve for the heating-only unit would be wired through the
contacts of a strap-on aquastat that is mounted to the dual temperature water supply
pipe to the heating-only unit. Whenever the pipe temperature is below 90°F, the con-
tacts of the aquastat open, causing the normally closed control valve to close. When the
pipe temperature rises above 90°F, the contacts of the aquastat close. This allows the
control valve to function under the control of the unit thermostat. (Figure 9-15, which
appears later in this chapter, illustrates the application of an aquastat in the control of a
cabinet unit heater in a 2-pipe system.)
Output
Following are some common ATC system devices that receive output from the ATC
system controller.
Fluid Flow Control

In this section we will discuss the ATC system devices that are used to automatically con-
trol the flow of water, steam, and air in HVAC systems. However, before we begin this
discussion, it is important to introduce some general terms associated with this topic.
Fluids are controlled in water and steam systems by control valves, and air is con-
trolled in air systems by motor-operated dampers (MODs). The positions of control valves
and MODs are adjusted by actuators, which are electric motors or pneumatic pistons that
change the position of control valves and MODs through linear or rotary action. An exam-
ple of a linear-action actuator is the actuator for a globe-type control valve that is mounted
directly to the valve stem and changes the valve position by stroking the valve stem in and
out. An example of a rotary-action actuator is a type of actuator for an MOD that rotates a
shaft connected to a linkage to change the position of the operable damper blades.
Control valves and MODs can be normally open (N.O.), normally closed (N.C.), or
floating, which defines the position of the control valve or MOD when the actuator is
de-energized. A spring-return actuator9 is required to achieve either N.O. or N.C. con-
trol valve or MOD operation. Without a spring-return actuator, the control valve or
MOD will float; that is, it will not change its position when it is de-energized.
Control valves and MODs can also be either modulating or two-position. Modulat-
ing control valves and MODs receive analog output from the ATC system controller
and are capable of positioning anywhere between (and including) fully opened and
fully closed. Two-position control valves and MODs receive digital output from the
ATC system controller and can only be positioned either fully opened or fully closed.
As mentioned above, end switches can be externally mounted to a control valve or
MOD actuator or they can be an integral part of the actuator to provide digital input to
the ATC system controller of the (opened or closed) status of the control valve or MOD.
An actuator can also be equipped with a potentiometer (variable resistor), which pro-
vides analog input to the ATC system controller of the position of a modulating control
valve or MOD.
Control Valves As mentioned previously, control valves are used to automatically control
the flow of water and steam in commercial HVAC systems. Control valves can have either
a 2-way or 3-way configuration.10 Normally-open control valves are used where fluid
flow through the equipment is desired if there is a loss of power to the control valve
actuator. Heating and chilled water and steam coils in air handling units typically utilize
N.O. control valves as one means to protect against coil freeze-up from outdoor air. Heat-
ing coils in fan-coil units, unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, VAV terminal units, and other
heating equipment that is not exposed to outdoor air typically use floating control valves
because there is no possibility of freezing these coils and the floating control valve actua-
tors are less costly than spring-return actuators. Normally-closed control valves would
only be used where the closed position of the valve is the fail-safe position. An N.C. control
valve is commonly used in conjunction with an aquastat for a piece of heating-only equip-
ment, such as a unit heater or cabinet unit heater, that is connected to a 2-pipe system.
Proper sizing of modulating control valves is required to achieve acceptable control
of the fluid flow through the equipment served by the control valve. The pressure drop
across a modulating control valve in its fully opened position should represent 50 to
70% of the pressure drop through the combined control valve/equipment assembly.
More precise control of the fluid flow is achieved when the pressure drop through the
control valve represents a significant portion of the combined pressure drop through
304 Chapter Nine A
the control valve/equipment assembly. This is demonstrated qualitatively by consider-

ing two control valves for the same application: one is oversized (having a low pressure
drop at the design flow rate) and one is properly sized. For the oversized control valve,
a small change in the position of the valve stem from the fully closed position to a
slightly open position will allow more flow through the valve than the same change in
the position of the valve stem for the smaller (properly sized) control valve. Also, once
the oversized control valve is opened, further opening of the valve will have less of an
effect on the fluid flow than the same change in the position of the valve stem for the
properly sized valve. In short, the change in the fluid flow through the control valve is
more closely related to the change in the valve stem position for the properly sized
control valve than it is for the oversized control valve. This close relation of fluid flow
through the control valve to valve stem position is called linearity. Thus, the smaller
(properly sized) control valve will function more linearly and control the fluid flow
more precisely than the oversized control valve.
The pressure drop through modulating control valves in the fully opened position
is defined by the flow coefficient (Cv) of the control valve. The Cv of a control valve is
the flow in gallons per minute that causes a 1-psi pressure drop across the control valve.
The Cv of a control valve for a water system is defined as follows:
Cv = (Q)/(Δp)½
where
Cv = flow coefficient11
Q = water flow (gpm)
Δp = pressure drop (psi)
For example, the Cv of a control valve that has a 5-psi pressure drop at 20 gpm is
8.94.12
Although the modulating control valves for commercial HVAC systems are nor-
mally selected by the ATC contractor, the HVAC system designer must understand the
sizing requirements in order to review the ATC submittal prepared by the ATC contrac-
tor during construction. Modulating control valves should be sized as described above.
However, because a typical pressure drop for modulating control valves is 2 to 5 psi,
modulating control valves are commonly one pipe size smaller than the line size of the
piping system in which they are installed. Therefore, if a line-sized modulating control
valve is submitted by the ATC contractor or if a modulating control valve that is two or
more pipe sizes smaller than the line size is submitted, both situations would warrant
careful scrutiny to ensure that the control valve is sized properly.
Finally, the pressure drop through a modulating control valve for a hydronic system
is normally a significant contributor to the overall system pressure loss and must be
included in the pump head calculation for the system pump.
2-Way Control Valves A 2-way control valve has one inlet and one outlet and is
normally of the globe valve design for water and steam applications. However, a but-
terfly valve may also be used for control valves that are 2½ in. and larger in water
systems only. Figure 9-4 illustrates globe-type N.O. and N.C. 2-way control valves.
For N.O. 2-way control valves, the spring-return actuator drives the valve stem
upward (opening the valve) upon a loss of power. For N.C. 2-way control valves, the
spring-return actuator drives the valve stem downward (closing the valve) upon a
loss of power.
Figure 9-4 Normally-open and normally-closed 2-way control valves.
Heating water, chilled water, and heat pump water systems with variable-flow
pumping utilize 2-way control valves for the air system and terminal unit coils. 2-way
control valves should not be used in constant-flow pumping systems; 3-way control
valves should be used instead (that is, unless the combined flow rate of all 2-way control
valves in the system represents less than 10% of the total system flow or there is a dif-
ferential pressure-actuated bypass valve installed between the supply and return mains
in the system, which ensures that the required minimum flow rate will be circulated by
the system pump if a significant number of the 2-way control valves are closed).
Two-position 2-way control valves are used to control the heating water and/or
chilled water flow through the coils in small, 100% recirculating air heating and cooling
units where modulating control of the fluid flow through the coils is not required.
Examples include fan-coil units that do not provide outdoor air ventilation, unit heat-
ers, cabinet unit heaters, and finned-tube radiators. Two-position 2-way control valves
are sometimes used to control the condenser water flow through water-source heat
pump units in variable flow heat pump water systems. They are also used in the supply,
return, and equalizer piping connections to multiple-cell cooling towers or multiple
cooling tower installations to isolate the idle cells or idle cooling towers.
Modulating 2-way control valves are used to control the heating water, chilled
water, and/or steam flow through the coils in larger heating and cooling units where
the mixed air temperature is different from the room temperature and more precise
control of the fluid flow through the coils is required. Examples include fan-coil units
and air handling units that provide outdoor air ventilation, and VAV terminal units.
The steam flow through steam utilization equipment, such as shell and tube heat
exchangers and heating coils, will either be controlled by a modulating 2-way control
valve or it will not be controlled at all (i.e., there will be no steam control valve and the
capacity will be controlled by some other means).
3-Way Control Valves A 3-way globe-type control valve (Fig. 9-5) has three ports, either
two inlets and one outlet (mixing valve) or one inlet and two outlets (diverting valve). Two
mechanically interlocked butterfly valves (Fig. 9-6) may also be used to form a 3-way mix-
ing or diverting control valve. This is common for control valves that are 2½ in. and larger.
A
Figure 9-5 Photograph of a 3-way globe valve.
Figure 9-6 Photograph of a 3-way butterfly valve.
306
3-way control valves are only used in water systems; they are not used in steam
systems. A 3-way mixing valve is a modulating control valve that mixes two inlet
streams into one outlet stream. A 3-way diverting valve is a two-position control valve
that diverts one inlet stream to one of two outlet ports. The N.O. and N.C. position
refers to the straight-through port only (Figs. 9-7 and 9-8). The outlet port of a 3-way
mixing valve, which is always the straight-through port, is called the common port. For
Figure 9-7 Normally-open and normally-closed 3-way mixing control valves.
Figure 9-8 Normally-open and normally-closed 3-way diverting control valves.
308 Chapter Nine A
N.O. 3-way mixing control valves, the spring-return actuator drives the valve stem
downward (opening the straight-through port) upon a loss of power. For N.C. 3-way
mixing control valves, the spring-return actuator drives the valve stem upward (closing
the straight-through port) upon a loss of power. For N.O. 3-way diverting control
valves, the spring-return actuator drives the valve stem upward (opening the straight-
through port) upon a loss of power. For N.C. 3-way diverting control valves, the spring-
return actuator drives the valve stem downward (closing the straight-through port)
upon a loss of power.
3-way mixing valves are commonly used on heating and chilled water coils in con-
stant flow pumping systems where a constant flow of water through the control valve
is required. The outlet pipe of the coil is connected to the straight-through mixing valve
inlet and the bypass pipe is connected to the other mixing valve inlet. Whatever flow is
not circulated through the coil is circulated through the bypass, thus maintaining a
constant flow through the control valve. The position of the control valve is based on
the heating or cooling requirement of the coil. [Figure 7-2 shows a heating (or chilled)
water coil with a 3-way mixing valve.]
3-way mixing valves are also used to control the heating water supply temperature
from a hot water boiler to the building. The heating water supply pipe from the boiler
is connected to the straight-through mixing valve inlet and the boiler bypass pipe is
connected to the other mixing valve inlet. The heating water supply temperature to the
building is controlled by mixing the cool return heating water from the building with
the hot supply heating water from the boiler. Often, the temperature of the heating water
supplied to the building is reset based on the outdoor air temperature (colder outdoor
temperature requires a warmer heating water supply temperature and vice versa).
Figure 9-9 illustrates the application of a 3-way mixing valve in the control of heating
water supply temperature.
3-way diverting valves are used where full flow is required through one of the two
outlet ports. 3-way diverting valves can be used in constant flow pumping systems in
the same locations that two-position 2-way control valves are used in variable flow
pumping systems. Examples include fan-coil units that do not provide outdoor air ven-
tilation, unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, finned-tube radiators, and water-source heat
pump units. Figure 9-15, which appears later in this chapter, shows the application of a
Figure 9-9 Hot water boilers with 3-way mixing valve.
Figure 9-10 3-way diverting valve to control bypass around a cooling tower.
Figure 9-11 3-way diverting valve in a 2-pipe system.
3-way diverting valve in the control of a cabinet unit heater in a 2-pipe system. Another
application of a 3-way diverting valve is the bypass valve for a cooling tower (Fig. 9-10)
where full flow is diverted either through the cooling tower or through the bypass pipe
to the cooling tower sump.
3-way diverting valves are also used in 2-pipe hydronic systems where it is neces-
sary to divert full flow either to the boilers or to the chillers, depending on the operating
mode of the 2-pipe system (see Fig. 9-11).
Motor-Operated Dampers Motor-operated dampers (MODs) in an air system are like

2-way control valves in a water or steam system. Their purpose is to open completely
to some preset position to allow full airflow, close completely to shutoff airflow, or
modulate somewhere in between (and including) fully opened and fully closed.
Two-position (spring-return) N.C. MODs are commonly used to prevent outdoor
air from infiltrating through louvers, intake air hoods, and other openings to the out-
doors. Examples include the outdoor air intake or relief air openings for equipment
room ventilation systems, outdoor air ducts for fan-coil units, and the inlets or outlets
of exhaust fans.
310 Chapter Nine A
Modulating MODs are commonly used in the outdoor air, return air, and relief air
ducts associated with air handling units that utilize airside economizer. In this case, it is
necessary for the ATC system controller to proportionally position these dampers to
meet the needs of the airside economizer mode of operation.
The outdoor air damper for air handling units is typically a (spring-return) N.C.
MOD, which provides a measure of protection against coil freeze-up from outdoor air.
The relief air damper, which typically tracks with the position of the outdoor air damper,
is also a (spring-return) N.C. MOD. The return air damper is typically a (spring-return)
N.O. MOD.
It is common for two MODs to be mechanically interlocked by a linkage so that
both dampers function together to perform a mixing or diverting operation. As one
damper opens, the other damper closes, and vice versa. This is similar to two inter-
locked butterfly valves functioning together to act as a 3-way mixing or diverting valve
in a water system. An example of two MODs performing a mixing function is the out-
door and return air dampers connected to the mixing box of an air handling unit.
Motor Controllers
A motor controller (commonly called a motor starter) is a manual or automatic, motor-
rated switching device that starts and stops the motor it controls. It may also control
the motor speed. The motor starter also provides thermal overload protection, which
de-energizes the motor if the motor draws more than its rated full-load current.13 Acces-
sories that are available for motor starters include a hand-off-automatic (H-O-A) switch
for magnetic motor starters (refer to the Magnetic Motor Starters section below), indi-
cating lights, low-voltage protection, and auxiliary contacts for interlock with other
motors or the ATC system.
The motor starters listed below are examples of across-the-line starters that start
the motors they control with full voltage. Various types of reduced-voltage starters are
available that provide a “soft-start” to reduce the starting (or inrush) current of the
motors they control. One example is the wye-start, delta-run (or wye-delta) reduced-
voltage starter discussed in the Chillers section of Chap. 4.14 However, these types of
starters are normally recommended for motors that are 100 hp and larger, which are
not commonly used in HVAC systems for commercial buildings (with the exception of
compressors in large chillers). Thus, they will not be further discussed in this book.
Manual Motor Starters A manual motor starter consists of a manual motor-rated switch,
thermal overload element(s), and optional accessories. The use of manual motor start-
ers is limited to motors that do not require automatic control. For example, a manual
motor starter is commonly used to control the operation of the exhaust fan serving a
kitchen exhaust hood. In this case, the manual motor starter would be mounted near
the hood and it would be equipped with auxiliary contacts that close when the exhaust
fan is (manually) started and open when the exhaust fan is (manually) stopped. The
control circuit of the makeup air unit would be wired through the auxiliary contacts in
the exhaust fan starter so that the makeup air unit is energized through its magnetic
motor starter whenever the exhaust fan is energized. Thus, the operation of the make-up
air unit (which runs only when the exhaust fan is running) is said to be interlocked with
the operation of the exhaust fan. There are other applications of manual motor starters.
However, because they have no automatic capability, we will discuss them no further in
this chapter.
Magnetic Motor Starters A magnetic motor starter is a magnetic switching device that
uses a reduced-voltage control circuit15 to open and close the load-carrying contacts
through a solenoid coil. Overload protection is provided for the motor by thermal over-
load elements connected in series with the load contacts. When the setting of any of the
overload elements is exceeded, its associated contact in the control circuit opens, de-
energizing the motor. A common accessory for a magnetic motor starter is an H-O-A
switch. The three-position H-O-A switch controls whether the starter operates in the
hand mode (manual on), off mode (manual off), or automatic mode (under control of
the ATC system). Other common accessories for magnetic motor starters include
auxiliary contacts and indicating lights. Figure 9-12 is a schematic of a magnetic
motor starter for a three-phase motor with a 120V/1Ø control transformer, thermal
overload elements, and H-O-A switch.
A combination magnetic motor starter has a disconnect switch built into the starter
enclosure. Figure 9-13 shows a combination magnetic motor starter. The three-pole dis-
connect switch is located in the upper right-hand corner of the enclosure, the magnetic
motor starter is located in the lower left-hand corner, and the control transformer and
associated primary and secondary fusing is located in the lower right-hand corner.
Magnetic motor starters are used to control single-speed and multispeed motors.
For single-speed motors, full voltage is applied to the motor windings whenever the
load-carrying contacts are closed. Magnetic motor starters for multispeed motors con-
tain a separate set of load-carrying contacts for each set of motor windings (i.e., a two-
speed motor would have two sets of windings and the starter would have two sets of
load-carrying contacts).
Figure 9-12 Magnetic motor starter with accessories.
312 Chapter Nine A
Figure 9-13 Photograph of a combination magnetic motor starter.
Magnetic motor starters for HVAC equipment typically receive digital output from
the ATC system controller. If the starter controls a multispeed fan, a separate digital
output is required for each speed. Magnetic motor starters can provide digital input to
the ATC system controller through an auxiliary contact. However, like the current sens-
ing relay discussed earlier, the auxiliary contact in the control circuit will not detect a
mechanical failure of the driven equipment. Magnetic motor starters are used for almost
all three-phase motors in HVAC systems and for single-phase motors that require auto-
matic control.
Variable Frequency Drives A VFD16 is an automatic motor starter with the same motor
protection features as a magnetic motor starter, but its mode of operation is much
different. A VFD does not open and close contacts to start and stop the motor. Rather,
it uses solid-state components to change the line-side alternating current waveform
entering the VFD into a variable-voltage, variable-frequency load-side waveform
that is sent to the motor. By varying the frequency of the load-side waveform, the
VFD is able to modulate the speed of the motor anywhere from completely off to full
speed.
Figure 9-14 Photograph of a variable frequency drive with a hand-off-automatic switch and a
bypass contactor.
A VFD (Fig. 9-14) can also be equipped with an H-O-A switch, which enables hand,
off, or automatic operation (through the ATC system) of the VFD. Also, if the motor
must remain in service at all times, electrically interlocked isolation and bypass contac-
tors, a bypass magnetic motor starter, and a VFD-off-bypass switch can be specified to
allow the VFD to be isolated for maintenance or replacement while the motor is con-
trolled by the bypass magnetic motor starter. However, these bypass components are
not required if a full-size, standby piece of equipment, controlled by a separate VFD or
starter, is available.
VFDs are frequently used in variable-flow pumping and VAV air systems to control
the system pumps and fans. The use of VFDs greatly improves the energy efficiency of
the systems in which they are utilized because the input power to the motor is propor-
tional to the cube of the motor speed. Thus, when the speed of a pump or fan motor is
decreased to one-half of full speed, the input power is decreased to one-eighth (plus
losses) of the full-load input power.
VFDs receive analog output from the ATC system controller and can also provide
analog input to the ATC system controller of the actual operating frequency of the VFD.
Step Controllers
Step controllers, which consist of a series of contactors that close individually, are com-
monly used to stage electric heating elements and compressors. Step controllers require
a separate digital output from the ATC system controller for each stage.
314 Chapter Nine A
Connections
Electrical and DDC ATC systems require a line voltage source of electrical power (typi-
cally 120V/1Ø) from which the ATC system controllers can derive the low-voltage
control power that is required by the ATC system components. For major pieces of
equipment, such as air handling units, chillers, and boilers, a separate 120V/1Ø power
connection is required to each ATC system controller. However, for smaller pieces of
equipment, particularly VAV terminal units, it is common for a line voltage power con-
nection to be made at the ATC system controller for one unit, from which low-voltage
control power is fed to the ATC system controllers on several other units, thus eliminat-
ing the need for separate line voltage power connections to all of the units. For equip-
ment that has a line voltage electrical connection, such as fan-powered VAV terminal
units, electric heating coils, or fan-coil units, a separate 120V/1Ø electrical power
connection is not required for the ATC system. The low-voltage control power can be
derived through a control transformer from the line voltage feed to the equipment.
Line voltage electrical systems are normally provided by the electrical contractor,
and low-voltage electrical systems are normally provided by the ATC contractor. There-
fore, it is necessary for the HVAC system designer to inform the project electrical engi-
neer of the locations where line voltage electrical power connections are required for
the ATC system in order for these connections to be incorporated into the design of the
electrical power distribution system for the building.
Control valves typically have the same ends (soldered, threaded, or flanged) for
connection to the piping systems in which they are installed as other similar-sized
valves in the system. MODs are constructed with a frame that mounts inside of the
ducts in which they are installed.
Systems
The best way to demonstrate the control functions of the ATC components we have
discussed is to show how these components are configured to control certain HVAC
systems commonly found in commercial buildings. The following are selected ATC dia-
grams, sequences of operation, and DDC system point lists as they would appear on the
construction drawings.17 The purpose of the ATC diagram is to provide the ATC con-
tractor with an understanding of the components that are required to accomplish the
intended function of the HVAC system. Each HVAC system that is controlled by an
ATC system should have an ATC diagram and a sequence of operation. The sequence
of operation describes the logic of the ATC system. It should start with a general state-
ment of the type of ATC system, and then describe its various modes of operation,
alarms, and safeties. The DDC point list describes the various input and output points
for the DDC ATC system controller associated with the HVAC system.
In developing the ATC diagram, it is not necessary to show all of the ancillary sys-
tems, such as transformers and relays, that are required to enable the system to work,
nor is it necessary to give a detailed explanation in the sequence of operation of how the
ATC system components actually perform their required functions. The purpose of the
ATC diagram and sequence of operation is to show the intent of the design. The DDC
point list is supplemental to the ATC diagram and lists the input that the DDC system
controller receives from each ATC component and the output that the DDC system
controller sends to each ATC component. For example, the operation of an MOD shown
on the ATC diagram will be described in the sequence of operation. However, specific
information, such as the requirement for an analog input to indicate the position of the
MOD, will be given in the DDC point list.
The project specifications should require the ATC contractor to submit detailed shop
drawings showing exactly how the ATC system will be configured. The ATC shop draw-
ings should include wiring diagrams for each HVAC system, as well as product data for
all of the ATC system components. During the review of these shop drawings, the HVAC
system designer will have the opportunity to ensure that the ATC systems proposed by
the ATC contractor are suitable to accomplish the design intent of each HVAC system.
Hot Water Cabinet Unit Heater

We will start off with a simple ATC diagram and sequence of operation for a hot water
cabinet unit heater that is installed in a 2-pipe system (Fig. 9-15). The ATC system is
electric with no connection to the BAS; thus there is no DDC point list associated with
this system.
Sequence of Operation
The hot water cabinet unit heater shall be controlled by the unit-mounted electric ther-
mostat.
The 3-way control valve shall open to the coil and the unit fan shall be energized
when the space temperature drops below the 70°F (adjustable) setpoint of the thermo-
stat. Upon a rise in space temperature above setpoint, the reverse shall occur.
The strap-on aquastat shall keep the control valve closed to the coil whenever the
pipe temperature is below 90°F to prevent chilled water flow through the cabinet unit
heater.
Notes to Reader
It is not necessary to specify exactly how the strap-on aquastat is to keep the control
valve closed. The ATC contractor will know that it is necessary to wire the control valve
actuator through the contacts of the aquastat and that the aquastat contacts need to be
open below the setpoint temperature in order to keep the control valve closed. A 3-way
diverting control valve is used to allow dual-temperature water to circulate either
through the cabinet unit heater or through the bypass pipe so the aquastat continuously
senses the temperature of the dual-temperature water. If a two-position 2-way control
valve were used, there would be no flow through the control valve when it was in the
closed position. Thus, the aquastat would not accurately sense the temperature of the
water circulating through the 2-pipe system. Finally, whether the ATC components
Figure 9-15 Hot water cabinet unit heater ATC diagram.
316 Chapter Nine A
are line voltage or low voltage will be described in the project specifications; the ATC
diagram and sequence of operation is the same regardless of the voltage of the electrical
ATC components.
Parallel Fan-Powered Variable Air Volume Terminal Unit

Figures 9-16 and 9-17 illustrate an ATC diagram and DDC point list for a parallel fan-
powered VAV terminal unit with hot water heat.
Figure 9-16 Parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit with hot water heat ATC diagram.
Figure 9-17 Parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit with hot water heat DDC point list.
General The VAV terminal unit shall be controlled by the DDC ATC system controller.
Occupied and unoccupied modes of operation shall be determined by the time schedule of
the BAS. Graphics shall be provided in the BAS for all components of the system, identify-
ing the current mode of operation, and the setpoints and current values of all points.
Morning Warm-up Mode The primary air damper shall open completely. The VAV box
fan shall be energized and the heating coil control valve shall open completely. Once the
space temperature is within 2°F of the occupied setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall
function in the occupied mode.
Occupied Cooling Mode The terminal unit fan shall not run in the occupied cooling
mode. The primary air damper shall modulate between its minimum and maximum
positions to maintain the cooling setpoint of the space temperature sensor.
Occupied Heating Mode After the primary air damper has reached its minimum posi-
tion, upon a further drop in space temperature below the heating setpoint of the space
temperature sensor, the terminal unit fan shall be energized. Upon a further drop in
space temperature, the heating coil control valve shall modulate open to the coil as
required to maintain the space heating temperature setpoint. Upon a rise in space tem-
perature above setpoint, the reverse shall occur.
Unoccupied Mode The terminal unit fan shall be energized and the heating coil control
valve shall modulate open to the coil as required to maintain the night setback tem-
perature setpoint. Upon a rise in space temperature above setpoint, the terminal unit
fan shall be de-energized.
Override Mode The VAV terminal unit and its associated air system shall be indexed
from the unoccupied mode to the occupied mode of operation for a predetermined
period of time (adjustable) either manually through the override pushbutton located on
each space temperature sensor or through the BAS.
Notes to Reader
This sequence of operation assumes that all of the spaces in the building that require
heat during unoccupied periods are served by fan-powered VAV terminal units. Thus,
there is no need for the air handling unit fan(s) to operate during unoccupied periods.
The VAV air handling unit sequence of operation (see below) is consistent with this type
of system. However, if there are certain areas within the building that are served by
single-duct VAV terminal units with heating coils, it will be necessary for the air han-
dling unit fan(s) to operate during unoccupied periods in order for these VAV terminal
units to be able to supply heat to the areas they serve. In this case, the fan-powered VAV
terminal unit sequence of operation would need to be modified to add a description of
the primary air damper operation during the unoccupied mode of operation.
VAV Air Handling Unit

Figures 9-18 and 9-19 illustrate an ATC diagram and DDC point list for a VAV air han-
dling unit with supply and return fans, hot water preheat and chilled water cooling
coils, enthalpy economizer, and continuous outdoor airflow measurement.
318
Figure 9-18 VAV air handling unit ATC diagram.
A
Figure 9-19 VAV air handling unit DDC point list.
General The air handling unit shall be controlled by the DDC ATC system controller.
Occupied and unoccupied modes of operation shall be determined by the time sched-
ule of the BAS. Graphics shall be provided in the BAS for all components of the system,
identifying the current mode of operation, setpoints and current values of all points,
and the status of all alarms and safeties.
320 Chapter Nine A
Morning Warm-up Mode When indexed to the occupied mode by the time schedule of
the BAS, the supply and return fans shall be energized and run continuously.
The outdoor and relief air dampers shall be fully closed and the return air damper
shall be fully open.
The supply fan VFD shall modulate the supply fan speed to maintain the 1.50-in.
w.c. (adjustable) setpoint of the supply air static pressure sensor. The return fan VFD
shall modulate the return fan speed to maintain the −0.25-in. w.c. (adjustable) setpoint
of the return air static pressure sensor.
The preheat coil control valve shall modulate to maintain a 105°F discharge air tem-
perature.
The morning warm-up mode of operation shall continue as long as the return air
temperature is below 68°F, as sensed by the return air temperature sensor.
When the return air temperature reaches 68°F, the morning warm-up mode shall be
completed and the unit shall function in the occupied mode.
Occupied Mode When the morning warm-up mode is complete, the outdoor, return,
and relief air dampers shall position to deliver the minimum outdoor airflow, as mea-
sured by the outdoor airflow measuring station.
The supply fan VFD shall modulate the supply fan speed to maintain the 1.50-in.
w.c. setpoint of the supply air static pressure sensor. The return fan VFD shall modulate
the return fan speed to maintain the −0.25-in. w.c. setpoint of the return air static pres-
sure sensor.
Enthalpy Economizer Mode The DDC ATC system controller shall continuously compare
the return air enthalpy to the outdoor air enthalpy.
When the return air enthalpy is greater than outdoor air enthalpy, the preheat coil
control valve shall modulate to maintain a minimum of 55ºF (adjustable) discharge air
temperature, as sensed by the discharge air temperature sensor. Upon a rise in dis-
charge air temperature above 55°F, the outdoor and relief air dampers shall modulate
open and the return air damper shall modulate closed proportionally to maintain the
55°F discharge air temperature setpoint. Once the outdoor and relief air dampers reach
their fully open positions, upon a further rise in discharge air temperature above set-
point, the chilled water coil shall modulate open to the coil to maintain the discharge air
temperature setpoint.
Upon a drop in discharge air temperature below setpoint, the reverse shall occur.
Minimum Outdoor Air Mode When the return air enthalpy is less than outdoor air
enthalpy, the outdoor, return, and relief air dampers shall position to deliver the mini-
mum outdoor airflow, as measured by the outdoor airflow measuring station. The out-
door, relief, and return air dampers shall modulate as required to ensure that the
minimum outdoor airflow is continuously delivered for the entire range of supply air-
flow. Upon a rise in discharge air temperature above 55°F, the chilled water coil shall
modulate open to the coil to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.
Upon a drop in discharge air temperature below setpoint, the reverse shall occur.
Unoccupied Mode When indexed to the unoccupied mode by the time schedule of the
BAS, the outdoor and relief air dampers shall close completely and the return air
damper shall open completely.
The supply and return fans shall be de-energized.
Override Mode The unit shall be indexed from the unoccupied mode to the occupied
mode of operation for a predetermined period of time (adjustable) either manually
through the override pushbutton located on any VAV terminal unit space temperature
sensor or through the BAS.
Fan Failure Alarm A fan failure alarm shall signal at the BAS when either the supply or
the return fan fails to operate, as sensed by the differential pressure switch piped
between the inlet and discharge of each fan.
Dirty Filter Alarm A dirty filter alarm shall signal at the BAS when the differential pres-
sure across the filter section exceeds the 0.70-in. w.c. (adjustable) setpoint.
Safeties Upon a drop in the preheat coil leaving air temperature below 38ºF, as sensed
by the low-limit temperature sensor serpentined across the downstream face of the coil,
the supply and return fans shall be de-energized, the outdoor and relief air dampers
shall close completely, the return air damper shall open completely, the preheat coil
control valve shall open fully to the coil, and an alarm shall signal at the BAS. The low-
limit temperature sensor shall require a manual reset for the unit to be restarted.
The return air duct smoke detector shall be hard-wired through the supply and
return fan VFD control circuits. When the return air duct smoke detector detects the
presence of smoke, the supply and return fan shall be de-energized, the outdoor and
relief air dampers shall close completely, the return air damper shall open completely,
and an alarm shall signal at the fire alarm control panel and at the BAS. The duct smoke
detector shall require a manual reset for the unit to be restarted.
Notes to Reader
Morning Warm-up Mode The morning warm-up mode of operation is intended to uti-
lize the heating capability of the air handling unit to assist the other heating terminal
equipment in the building (such as the VAV terminal units) to warm the building from
its night setback temperature of approximately 60°F to within 2°F of the occupied heat-
ing setpoint as quickly as possible. The morning warm-up mode of operation stops
short of the occupied heating setpoint so that the air handling unit does not overshoot
the occupied temperature. Because the morning warm-up mode of operation occurs
before the occupied hours of operation, it is not necessary to provide outdoor air ven-
tilation until the morning warm-up mode of operation is complete and the unit begins
to operate in the occupied mode of operation. The supply and return fans operate dur-
ing the morning warm-up mode of operation the same way they operate during the
occupied mode of operation; that is, their fan speed is modulated to maintain the set-
point of the supply and return air static pressure sensors. Static pressure setpoints
should be given for these sensors, but their actual settings will be finalized by the test-
ing, adjusting, and balancing contractor during start-up. The supply air static pressure
setpoint should be as low as possible, yet it should be high enough to enable the supply
fan to deliver the maximum cooling airflow to the majority of the VAV terminal units
in order to simulate the design cooling airflow condition. The return air static pressure
setpoint should be adjusted to maintain a positive building static pressure. In fact, a
building differential pressure sensor can be used instead of a return air static pressure
sensor to control the return fan speed. In this case, the low-pressure port of the building
differential pressure sensor would be connected by ¼-in. tubing to a point outdoors
322 Chapter Nine A
and the high-pressure port would be connected by ¼-in. tubing to an area indoors that
is judged to be representative of the overall building pressure. It is important that the
termination of the low-pressure tubing outdoors not be affected by wind pressure;
otherwise, an erroneous outdoor pressure measurement could result at certain times.
Occupied Mode During the occupied mode of operation, the supply and return fans
continue to operate as in the morning warm-up mode of operation. Outdoor air ventila-
tion is introduced to the building to maintain the required minimum outdoor airflow,
as measured by the outdoor airflow measuring station.
Enthalpy Economizer Mode Because the unit has an enthalpy (airside) economizer mode
of operation, the enthalpy of the return air is constantly compared to the enthalpy of the
outdoor air. When cooling of the mixed air is required, the ATC system controller will
position the outdoor and return air dampers to favor the air with the lower enthalpy
because it requires less energy to cool to the 55°F discharge air temperature.
Thus, when the return air enthalpy is greater than the outdoor air enthalpy, and
cooling of the mixed air is required, the outdoor air damper will modulate beyond its
minimum outdoor airflow position to allow a greater percentage of outdoor airflow
into the mixing box of the air handling unit. The outdoor air damper is allowed to
modulate as far as its fully opened position if that is what is necessary to meet the 55°F
setpoint of the discharge air temperature sensor. In this mode of operation, the return
air damper closes proportionally as the outdoor air damper opens, eventually to its
fully closed position if necessary. The relief air damper position tracks with the position
of the outdoor air damper so that the excess outdoor air delivered by the air handling
unit is given a path to be relieved from the building in order to prevent overpressuriza-
tion of the building.
Once the outdoor air damper reaches its fully open position, further cooling from
the outdoor air is no longer possible. As the discharge air temperature rises above the
55°F setpoint of the discharge air temperature sensor, mechanical cooling must be pro-
vided by the chilled water cooling coil in order to maintain the 55°F setpoint of the
discharge air temperature sensor. The outdoor air damper will remain at its fully open
position (relief air damper also fully open and the return air damper fully closed) as
long as the return air enthalpy is greater than the outdoor air enthalpy.
When the outdoor air enthalpy rises above the return air enthalpy, less energy is
required to cool the return air than is required to cool the outdoor air. Therefore, the
outdoor air damper will be positioned to deliver the minimum outdoor airflow, and the
relief and return air dampers will reposition accordingly. In this mode of operation,
minimum outdoor airflow will be delivered during the occupied mode of operation
and mechanical cooling will be provided by the chilled water cooling coil in order to
maintain the 55°F setpoint of the discharge air temperature sensor.
As the discharge air temperature drops below the 55°F setpoint of the discharge air
temperature sensor, the process reverses. If the unit is in the economizer mode of oper-
ation, mechanical cooling will be reduced to zero. The outdoor air damper will then
begin to close all the way to its minimum position if that is what is required. The relief
and return air dampers will also reposition accordingly. Once the outdoor air damper
reaches its minimum position, upon a further drop in the discharge air temperature,
heating will be provided by the preheat coil to maintain the 55°F setpoint of the dis-
charge air temperature sensor.
Unoccupied Mode During the unoccupied mode of operation, the supply and return fans
shut down and the outdoor air damper closes to keep the unit from freezing during the
winter. The return air damper is positioned to the fully open position and the relief air
damper (like the outdoor air damper) is closed. This sequence of operation assumes that
all of the spaces in the building requiring heat during unoccupied periods are served by
fan-powered VAV terminal units. Thus, there is no need for the air handling unit fans to
operate during unoccupied periods. However, if there are certain areas within the build-
ing that are served by single-duct VAV terminal units with heating coils, it will be neces-
sary for the air handling unit fans to operate during unoccupied periods in order for these
VAV terminal units to be able to supply heat to the areas they serve.
Building Automation Systems

A modern BAS is a computerized network of devices that communicate over a local
area network (LAN) that, in some ways, is similar to the LAN used in many businesses.
The BAS is often capable of managing not only the HVAC system controls but also
security and access control, fire and life safety, closed-circuit television, asset tracking,
and other systems as well.
For smaller projects, a BAS is not necessary. All of the HVAC systems operate in a
stand-alone fashion with no communication to a wider control network. Also, for projects
with a BAS, it is not necessary for all ATC systems to communicate with the BAS. Some
pieces of HVAC equipment in the building, particularly the small pieces of terminal equip-
ment, such as finned-tube and electric radiators, unit heaters, and cabinet unit heaters, do
not require central monitoring and control and are, therefore, not connected to the BAS.
BAS Architecture
The architecture of the HVAC system controls portion of the BAS often consists of a
two-tiered network (Fig. 9-20).
Figure 9-20 Typical BAS architecture for HVAC system controls.
324 Chapter Nine A
Peer-to-Peer LAN
The first tier is the primary LAN, called the peer-to-peer LAN. The devices on the peer-
to-peer LAN communicate directly with each other and include the central computer
workstation (or server), the network DDC panels that control major pieces of HVAC
equipment and communicate with the second tier LAN, and a router that enables access
to the BAS from the Internet for web-based systems. Various network technologies are
utilized for the peer-to-peer LAN, but Ethernet is the most common.
The application software developed by the BAS manufacturer is loaded onto the
central computer workstation. This software is customized by the local BAS vendor for
the project to include graphics for each of the HVAC systems connected to the BAS. The
network DDC panels (Fig. 9-21) are fully programmable and have expanded capabili-
ties for monitoring and controlling HVAC systems with many points, such as central
heating and cooling plants and air handling units.
Application-Specific LAN
The second tier is the application-specific LAN, which functions under a network
DDC panel. This LAN uses a different data communication protocol than the peer-to-
peer LAN. HVAC systems with fewer points, such as VAV terminal units and fan-coil
Figure 9-21 Photograph of a network DDC panel.
units, are connected to the application-specific LAN through their individual applica-
tion-specific controllers (ASCs). ASCs are designed to perform specific control func-
tions for a particular type of HVAC equipment, such as a VAV terminal unit or a
fan-coil unit. Therefore, ASCs are not programmable, cannot connect to the peer-to-
peer LAN, and have a limited number of points through which to perform their
intended control functions.
Communication
All network DDC panels and ASCs function in a stand-alone mode; that is, they do not
require communication with the BAS to perform their control functions. Communication
with the BAS is for sharing information between devices and for providing the capability
of monitoring and controlling the HVAC systems from a central or remote location.
Operators can communicate with any device on the BAS through the central com-
puter workstation, through the Internet for web-based systems, or through a portable
operator terminal, which may be a laptop computer, personal digital assistant (PDA), or
other network-compatible device supported by the BAS software. The portable opera-
tor terminal can be connected by a network data cable to any network DDC panel, ASC,
or room temperature sensor. The ability of the portable operator terminal to communi-
cate with the BAS through the room temperature sensors is often utilized by the testing,
adjusting, and balancing contractor during start-up and commissioning of the HVAC
systems.
Interoperability
It is important for the HVAC system designer to understand that the HVAC system
controls portion of the BAS may be just one part of an overall BAS that manages other
systems in the building (and possibly other buildings) as well. Also, the manufacturer
of the overall BAS may be different than the manufacturer of the HVAC system controls
portion of the BAS. In this case, the HVAC system controls portion of the BAS must be
able to communicate with the overall BAS.
The ability of one manufacturer of BAS devices to communicate with other manu-
facturers’ BAS devices is called interoperability. Interoperability of BAS devices is a
fairly recent development. Prior to 1995, BAS devices could only communicate with a
BAS of the same manufacturer. This inability to communicate among system manufac-
turers meant that once a BAS manufactured by a particular company was established in
a facility, the BAS devices connected to that BAS for all future projects had to be manu-
factured by that company. This eliminated competition for the BAS devices on future
projects, requiring the BAS portion of a project to be sole-source to the company whose
BAS was established in the facility.
This lack of competition left many building owners dissatisfied. As a result, many
BAS manufacturers and ASHRAE cooperated to develop an open data communication
protocol (or language) that allows the BAS devices manufactured by various companies
to communicate with each other. This open data communication protocol is called
BACnet®. BACnet is the language that the BAS devices use to communicate with each
other. However, not all BAS devices, especially older BAS devices, utilize BACnet as
their native language. In this case, a “gateway” is required in order for these devices to
communicate with a BACnet BAS. Many BAS manufacturers now offer BACnet as the
native language, thereby eliminating the need for gateways.
326 Chapter Nine A
A second well-known open communication protocol is called LonWorks®, which

was developed by the Echelon Corporation. LonWorks not only describes the data com-
munication protocol (called LonTalk®) but also describes the devices themselves. All
LonWorks devices contain a Neuron® core processor, which is manufactured by the
Echelon Corporation. The presence of this processor in the LonWorks devices enables
the communication of these devices over the LonTalk LAN. Many BAS manufacturers
offer a product line that utilizes LonWorks devices. Thus, there will be competition
among local BAS vendors for a BAS that is specified to be LonWorks. Although Lon-
Works enables communication between BAS devices of different manufacturers, the
devices themselves require the proprietary LonWorks Neuron core processor and the
LAN must be a LonTalk LAN. Thus, there is still a level of propriety in a LonWorks
BAS. Another difference between LonWorks and other building automation systems is
in the BAS architecture. A LonWorks BAS has a flat peer-to-peer architecture instead of
the two-tiered architecture described above. Therefore, all LonWorks devices (even the
ASCs) communicate directly with each other over the LonTalk LAN.
Unfortunately, BACnet and LonWorks are two completely different languages.
Thus, devices using one language cannot communicate directly with devices using the
other language. Therefore, if the BAS is to utilize an open communication protocol (as
it should), the building owner will need to decide early in the design process for a new
building whether the BAS will be BACnet or LonWorks. Also, for renovation projects,
the BAS devices must utilize the same communication protocol as the existing BAS,
which may be BACnet, LonWorks, or a proprietary communication protocol of a par-
ticular BAS manufacturer.
Endnotes
1. Pneumatic ATC systems utilize compressed air to perform the control functions.
2. A BAS can also be referred to as a building management system (BMS), a facility
management and control system (FMCS), or other customer-specific names, all of
which mean the same thing.
3. Low voltage refers to wiring and electrical devices using 30V ac or less.
4. Contacts are the switch portion of a relay. A relay is an electromagnetic switch
whose contacts are opened and closed by the presence or absence of current flow
through a solenoid coil. Normally open contacts are open when the solenoid coil is
de-energized and closed when the solenoid coil is energized. Normally closed con-
tacts are closed when the solenoid coil is de-energized and open when the solenoid
coil is energized.
5. Digital input and digital output points can also be referred to as binary input (BI)
and binary output (BO) points, respectively.
6. A duct static pressure sensor may also be used in the control of the return fan speed
if a return fan is required.
7. A separate end switch is required for each position (opened and closed).
8. A locked-rotor condition occurs when the motor is energized, but the shaft is either
not turning or is requiring higher than the rated torque of the motor. This adverse
condition, which causes the motor to draw more than its rated full-load current,
can potentially damage the motor. However, a locked-rotor condition will not be
detected by a current sensing relay because the motor is still drawing electrical
current.
9. A spring-return actuator contains an internal spring that returns the actuator to its
normal position when it is de-energized.
10. A 4-way control valve configuration is also available but is not used in commercial
HVAC systems.
11. Although Cv has units of gpm/psi½, it is usually expressed as a dimensionless
term.
12. Cv = (20)/(5)½ = 8.94.
13. The thermal overload elements (one per phase conductor) must be matched to the
full-load current of the specific motor.
14. Wye-delta starters are commonly used to start the compressors in chillers that are
100 tons and larger.
15. Power for the control circuit is typically derived from a control transformer mounted
within the starter enclosure. The control circuit voltage is normally 120V/1Ø.
16. VFDs are also called variable speed drives (VSDs), adjustable frequency drives
(AFDs), adjustable speed drives (ASDs), and pulse-width-modulated drives (PWM
drives).
17. Sometimes the sequences of operation and DDC point lists are included in the
project specifications. However, it is convenient for the ATC contractor if they are
shown on the drawings adjacent to the ATC diagrams.
Chapter 10
Construction Drawings
C
onstruction drawings are used to graphically convey the intent of the HVAC
system design to the contractor who will be installing the HVAC systems. They
also become a record of the HVAC systems for the building owner once the
project is completed. The project specifications, which define additional requirements
of the HVAC system design, also accompany the construction drawings and together
form the construction documents. However, the project specifications will not be dis-
cussed in this book. In this chapter, we will describe the process of preparing HVAC
construction drawings and the conventions commonly employed to clearly present the
design intent.
Legend and Abbreviations

Symbols and abbreviations are used extensively in HVAC construction drawings. Thus,
it is necessary to explain the symbols and abbreviations that are used in a legend, which
also includes a list of abbreviations. The legend and abbreviations are usually presented
on the first drawing of the HVAC drawing set. Figures 10-1 and 10-2 illustrate some of
the symbols and abbreviations that are commonly used in the preparation of HVAC
construction drawings. Although the symbols vary from one company to another, the
actual symbols used are not as important as the need to explain what the symbols rep-
resent in order to ensure a clear communication of the HVAC system design.
Terminology
Though it may seem a bit tedious, it is important to discuss the proper use of the follow-
ing terms commonly used in the preparation of construction drawings.
Shall: The word “shall” should be used instead of the word “will” in the notes on the
construction drawings. The word “shall” carries with it a stronger connotation, mean-
ing there are no exceptions or alternatives to the stated directive. It is acceptable for the
word “will” to be used when describing the actions of the building owner or other par-
ties that are not bound by the requirements of the HVAC construction drawings.
New: Use of the word “new” should be avoided on construction drawings wher-
ever possible. All work shown in a bold line weight, scheduled, or detailed on the con-
struction drawings is, by definition, new and is required to be provided by the
contractor unless noted otherwise. This eliminates any confusion that may be caused if
the word “new” is used in some instances to describe the work but is not used univer-
sally on the drawings for all new work. For example, if the word “new” is only some-
times used to refer to the new work, the contractor may misinterpret something that is
329
330
Figure 10-1 Abbreviations, sheet designations, and piping, valve, and specialty symbols.
Figure 10-2 Equipment, duct, and automatic temperature control system symbols.
331
332 Chapter Ten
not labeled as “new” as being provided by others or as being shown for informational
purposes only.
Furnish: Furnish means to purchase a product and deliver it to the jobsite or another
construction team member. For example, the HVAC contractor may be required by the
project specifications to furnish the starters for all motor-driven HVAC equipment to
the electrical contractor for installation. In this case, the cost of installing the equipment
is borne by the electrical contractor, not the HVAC contractor.
Install: Install means to furnish the labor and equipment necessary to connect a
product and prepare it for use. This word should be used carefully because it clearly
indicates the product is not to be furnished by the contractor. For example, the contrac-
tor may be required to install a piece of owner-furnished equipment. In this case, the
cost of purchasing and delivering the equipment to the jobsite is borne by the owner,
not the installing contractor.
Provide: Provide means to furnish and install. Thus, the word “provide” is almost
always used in the notes on the construction drawings. From the definitions of “furnish”
and “install” above, it is obvious that confusion can arise when the words “furnish” or
“install” are used when the word “provide” is what is actually intended.
Notes on Drawings
It is often necessary to supplement the HVAC drawings with notes that provide infor-
mation that cannot be adequately portrayed through the graphical entities. There are
three types of notes commonly employed in engineering and architectural drawings:
general notes, drawing notes, and key notes.
General Notes
General notes are normally shown on the first drawing of each design discipline and
apply to all work of that discipline. As the name implies, they are general in nature
and give the contractor the basic requirements related to the work of that discipline.
More detailed information regarding the work of each discipline is given in the project
specifications. The following is a list of general notes that may be used for the HVAC
construction drawings. These general notes would be used for a renovation project.
They would have to be edited for a new project to delete any references to the existing
conditions.
• General notes shall apply to all HVAC drawings.

• All key notes indicated on the drawings as “typical” are to be considered as
shown at all other similar conditions whether noted or not.
• All HVAC work shall be complete and ready for satisfactory service.
• The contract drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the general
arrangement of the work.
• The contractor is responsible for the means, methods, and work scheduling
associated with the installation of the HVAC systems.
• Examine the site and observe the conditions under which the work will be
installed. No allowances will be made for errors or omissions resulting from the
failure to completely examine the site.
Construction Drawings 333
• Verify the size and location of all existing services. Notify the engineer of all
discrepancies that exist between the contract documents and the existing
services before making any connections to the existing services.
• Coordinate the size and location of roof penetrations and flashing requirements
with the work of other trades.
• Route piping and duct systems parallel and perpendicular to the building lines.
Mount as close as possible to the underside of the building structure.
• Coordinate the installation of the HVAC systems with the work of other trades.
Provide offsets in piping and ductwork as required at no additional cost to
avoid obstructions.
• Mount room sensors and switches at 4 ft, 0 in. above finished floor unless noted
otherwise.
• Support all equipment from the building structure to provide a vibration-free
installation.
• Ductwork dimensions shown on the drawings are internal airflow dimensions.
Increase the sheet metal ductwork dimensions by 2 in. to accommodate 1-in.
duct liner where required.
• Provide flexible duct connectors on all ductwork connections to fans or air
handling units.
• Provide ½-in. mesh aluminum screen over the opening of all open-ended
ductwork.
• Provide manual air vents at all high points and drains at all low points of
hydronic piping systems.
• Pitch all hydronic piping ¼ in. in 10 ft in the direction of terminal equipment to
enable the system to be drained.
• Pitch all steam and steam condensate return piping ½ in. in 10 ft in the direction
of the steam traps to enable steam condensate to be removed from the system.
• Ensure that adequate clearance exists for the installation and maintenance of all
work shown on the drawings and described in the specifications.
• Provide access panels (installed in walls or ceilings) and/or access doors
(installed in ductwork) that are indicated or required for access to concealed
HVAC devices that may require future inspection, repair, or adjustment.
• Identify all HVAC piping and equipment as to its function and equipment
number indicated on the drawings.
• Identify all piping systems with cylindrical self-coiling plastic sheet that snaps
over piping insulation and is held tightly in place without the use of adhesive
tape or straps. Pipe identification shall be provided with flow arrows and
lettering that is at least 1 in. high.
• Identify all HVAC equipment with engraved, color-coded laminated plastic
markers with contact-type, permanent adhesive. Match equipment schedules
on the drawings as closely as possible for equipment designations.
• Provide sleeves and caulk all piping penetrations through walls and floors and
patch to match the adjacent construction. Provide chrome-plated escutcheons1
on all piping penetrations in exposed locations.
334 Chapter Ten
• Provide sleeves and patch all duct penetrations through walls and floors to
match the existing construction. Sleeve dimensions shall be 1 in. larger than
insulated duct dimensions. The space between the duct and the sleeve shall be
packed with mineral fiber and caulked.
• Firestop all penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls, floors, or assemblies
in accordance with the applicable codes and standards.
• Seal all penetrations through waterproof construction in accordance with the
waterproofing manufacturer’s instructions. All work shall be performed by
approved contractors if required by the manufacturer to maintain the warranty
on the material.
For renovation projects, it is helpful to add general demolition notes on the first
drawing in the HVAC drawing set. These notes describe the general requirements of
the demolition work, eliminating the need for repetitive instructions in the demolition
key notes such as “remove all associated hangers and supports” or “dispose of all
equipment and materials to be removed in accordance with federal, state, and local
regulations.” The following is a list of general demolition notes that may be used for the
HVAC construction drawings for a renovation project:
• Demolition notes shall apply to all HVAC demolition drawings.

• Demolition shall be performed as neatly as practical and with the minimum
disruption to the building activities and occupants.
• Remove all existing hangers and supports associated with the demolition
work.
• Where a portion of existing piping or ductwork is indicated to be removed,
the remaining piping or ductwork shall be capped and reinsulated to match
existing.
• All equipment and materials being removed, and not indicated to be given to
the owner, shall be disposed of by the contractor in accordance with all federal,
state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations.
• All equipment and materials indicated to be reused or given to the owner shall
be carefully removed so as not to damage the equipment or material or affect its
reuse. Any such equipment and materials damaged by the contractor shall be
replaced with new by the contractor at no expense to the owner.
Drawing Notes
Drawing notes apply only to the drawing on which they appear. Examples of drawing
notes are those that describe the process, or phases, in which the work on a particular
drawing must be performed. The following is an example of drawing notes that describe
the work scheduling of a kitchen and dining room renovation where the kitchen must
remain in service throughout the renovation:
• The dining room will be shut down for a 2-week period to allow for the work in
the dining room to be performed. The kitchen will remain operable during the
2-week shutdown of the dining room. Provisions shall be made to allow the
kitchen staff free access to the kitchen at all times.
• All demolition and new work in the dining room and kitchen, including work
associated with air handling unit AHU-1, air-cooled condensing unit ACCU-1,
exhaust fans, variable air volume (VAV) terminal units, supply air ductwork,
air devices (air inlets and outlets), piping, electrical, and automatic temperature
control (ATC) systems shall be performed during this 2-week period.
• All work in the kitchen shall be performed between 9:00 p.m. and 11:00 a.m.
The kitchen shall be cleaned up and open areas in the ceiling covered with
plastic sheeting upon completion of each day’s work.
• One of the two exhaust hoods in the kitchen must be operable at all times
throughout the course of the construction.
Key Notes
Key notes are used when important information that cannot be adequately portrayed
graphically must be communicated. Sometimes called specific notes, key notes consist
of a numbered list of notes that make specific references to items on a drawing through
the use of callouts. The callout is usually represented by a leader with a numeric note
“bubble” attached to it.
Key notes may have multiple applications on the same drawing, in which case one
or two instances should be identified on the drawing and the key note should contain
the word “typical,” which means it has multiple applications to similar conditions on
the drawing (which are obvious to the reader of the drawing). Key notes should not be
used where adequate information is portrayed graphically on the drawing. An example
of an unnecessary key note would be “Supply air ductwork above ceiling.” Unless there
are portions of the building shown on the drawing that do not have finished ceilings, it
is obvious that the ductwork is to be installed above the ceiling; thus, this key note
would provide no useful information to the contractor.
It is important for key notes to be direct, complete, and unambiguous. Key notes
should be stated as a directive (or command) using the active voice, not the passive
voice (e.g., “Remove existing air handling unit” instead of “Existing air handling unit
to be removed”). The passive voice is ambiguous and may cause the contractor to ask,
“Who is removing the existing air handling unit?” Key notes should be complete and
include all necessary instructions that are not already explained in the general notes or
drawing notes. Finally, key notes must be unambiguous; that is, they must clearly
explain the work that the HVAC contractor must perform and the work that will be
performed by others. The following is an example of a direct, complete, unambiguous
key note:
“Remove existing air handling unit and all associated ductwork and piping to point
indicated. Remove all associated ATC components and control wiring. Remove existing
concrete housekeeping pad. Patch all openings in existing walls and floors where the
ductwork and piping are removed to match existing. Existing electrical power wiring
shall be removed by the electrical contractor.”
Linework
The weight (or thickness) and color (percent gray scale) of the linework on HVAC draw-
ings is a useful tool in making a distinction between the architectural floor plan, reflected
ceiling plan, existing HVAC work to remain, HVAC demolition work, and HVAC new
336 Chapter Ten
work. The following conventions should be used to make the HVAC demolition and
new work stand out from the existing HVAC work and the architectural floor plan and
reflected ceiling plan:
1. Architectural floor plan

a. Line weight—0.15 mm
b. Line type—continuous
c. Line color—50% gray scale
2. Reflected ceiling plan
c. Line color—20% gray scale
3. Existing HVAC work to remain
c. Line color—black
4. HVAC demolition work
b. Line type—dashed
5. HVAC new work
Another important point regarding the linework for HVAC drawings is that of
consistent spacing between the single-line representations of parallel pipes. The
space between parallel pipes should be 6 in. in the model file for pipe sizes 3 in. and
smaller. Thus, for a drawing that is presented at 1/8 in. = 1 ft scale, the space between
the pipes will be 1/16 in. and the space between parallel pipes for a drawing that is
presented at ¼ in. = 1 ft scale will be 1/8 in. The space between parallel pipes should
be 12 in. in the model file for pipe sizes 4 to 6 in. For pipes that are 8 in. and larger,
the pipe spacing in the model file should be approximately equal to the actual dis-
tance between the pipe centerlines (accounting for approximately 2 in. of insulation
on the pipes and 2 in. of spacing between the facing of the insulation on adjacent
pipes). For example, the pipe spacing for two parallel 12-in. pipes would be 18 in. in
the model file.
Computer-Aided Design Considerations

It is not the purpose of this book to describe in detail the standards that a particular
company should use in preparing computer-aided design (CAD) drawings. However,
there are certain conventions that aid in both the process of preparing CAD drawings
and in sharing CAD information with other members of the design and construction
teams.
CAD Standard
The most important thing is to have a standard for CAD drawings that defines the con-
ventions for layering, file naming, symbols, line weights and line types, fonts, and so
on. Many of these conventions are defined in detail in the U.S. National CAD Standard,
which is available online. Although this standard need not be adopted verbatim as a
company CAD standard, it does provide reasonable guidelines that should be followed
if there are no compelling reasons to digress from its recommendations. One process
that is defined in the U.S. National CAD Standard is the use of model files and sheet files
in the preparation of CAD drawings.
Although it may seem a little awkward at first, the use of model files and sheet files
in preparing HVAC floor plans, large-scale floor plans, and sections is a helpful conven-
tion. This method allows each aspect of the HVAC work to be drawn in only one file,
while enabling this same information to be presented in different ways on multiple
drawings. For example, the HVAC existing conditions and demolition work are drawn
in only the HVAC demolition model file, yet the demolition work can be presented
using a bold dashed line weight on the HVAC demolition drawings and not be shown
at all on the HVAC new work drawings. At the same time, the HVAC existing condi-
tions are available for presentation in both the HVAC demolition and new work draw-
ings. The process, in brief, is described below.
Model Files
The model file contains the HVAC work drawn in the “model space” at full size (e.g., a
36-in.-wide duct is drawn 36 in. wide). There will be separate model files for both the
HVAC demolition (and HVAC existing conditions) and the HVAC new work for each
floor of the building. The first step in creating an HVAC model file is to assign the
appropriate values to the CAD software variables in the drawing, such as the dimen-
sion scale, line type scale, and text size. The values for these variables depend upon the
scale in which the information will ultimately be presented on the plotted drawings.
Next, the respective architectural floor plan is attached as an external reference file. The
HVAC demolition model files contain the existing HVAC work drawn on “Existing”
layers and the demolition work drawn on “Demolition” layers.2 Each HVAC new work
model file will attach the respective architectural floor plan and the respective HVAC
demolition model file as external reference files. The “Demolition” layers in the refer-
enced HVAC demolition drawing are turned off and the new work is drawn in the
HVAC new work model file on appropriately named layers for the HVAC new work.
Equipment numbers, duct sizes, pipe sizes, and pipe designations within the piping
linework are drawn in the model files.
Sheet Files
The sheet files are the files that are plotted. There will be one sheet file for each drawing
in the HVAC drawing set. For HVAC demolition and new work floor plan drawings,
large-scale floor plan drawings, and sections, the appropriate demolition and new work
model files are referenced into the “model space” of the sheet file that will present the
work. The title block is referenced into the “layout” of the sheet file. A viewport is
defined in the layout where the work is to be presented on the plotted drawing and the
viewport is assigned the appropriate scale factor (e.g., 1/8 in. = 1 ft). All annotations,
338 Chapter Ten
such as plan titles, key notes, and their associated callouts, are drawn in the layout of
the sheet file. The layout of the sheet file is plotted at a 1-to-1 scale factor; thus, the page
setup of the layout matches the actual sheet size of the plotted drawing.
Other Conventions
Other conventions such as layer names within each type of CAD drawing and file nam-
ing conventions should also be used consistently in order to increase the efficiency of
CAD drawing production and simplify the transfer of information with other members
of the design team. These conventions are defined in detail in the U.S. National CAD
Standard.
It should also be noted that certain clients may have their own CAD standards that
must be used in the preparation of CAD drawings for their projects. It is very important
to obtain these standards at the beginning of the project before any design work com-
mences so that all HVAC CAD drawings are set up and completed in accordance with
the client’s CAD standard. It is very difficult to go back and change a set of CAD draw-
ings to meet a different CAD standard once the CAD work is complete.
Regarding the numbering of the HVAC drawings, it is common for the project
architect, who is typically the design team leader, to define the drawing numbering
convention. This convention should be followed by all design disciplines in order for
the entire architectural and engineering drawing set to be consistently numbered.
Demolition Plans
For renovation projects, it is common for the first drawings in the HVAC drawing set to
describe the demolition of existing HVAC systems that is required. There are various
conventions that may be employed to describe the demolition of the existing HVAC
systems. However, the conventions employed are not as important as the need to clearly
describe the extent of demolition that is required and the work that is to remain.
If all of the HVAC services in a particular area, such as an equipment room, are to
be removed and only the services outside of the area are to remain, the area can be sur-
rounded by a boundary on the demolition drawing and a key note (and possibly draw-
ing notes) can be used to verbally describe the demolition work within the area. This
convention is acceptable because the contractor’s estimate for the demolition work will
normally be based on floor area or weight of the services to be removed, and the con-
tractor will have to visit the project site before submitting the bid for the work. Design
time is better spent detailing the locations and sizes of the services to remain outside of
the demolition area so that the new work connections to these existing services can be
fully coordinated.
However, when the demolition work is selective (only a portion of the existing ser-
vices in a particular area is to be removed), it is necessary to show the extent of the
demolition work in more detail by using graphical entities and key notes. A symbol is
commonly used to show the limit where the demolition work ends and the existing
services remain (Fig. 10-3). It is only necessary to show the amount of existing services
that will remain to the extent that is required to clearly portray the design intent and
provide useful information for coordination.
It is necessary for the HVAC system designer to conduct a field survey for every
renovation project in order to determine the sizes and locations of the existing HVAC
systems that will be affected by the work of the project. The existing building drawings
Figure 10-3 Demolition plan.
should never be depended upon as an accurate reflection of the existing conditions. The
existing drawings are, however, helpful in providing the general arrangement of the
existing services and should be brought to the field and marked up with the actual
conditions. The provision of accurate information regarding the sizes and locations of
the existing services is invaluable in preparing a well-coordinated set of construction
drawings for renovation projects.
Figure 10-3 is an example of a drawing that shows the selective demolition of an air
handling unit located within an equipment room. The drawing is presented at a 1/8 in. =
1 ft scale3 and utilizes a bold, dashed line type to identify the demolition work. Existing
work to remain is drawn with a thin, continuous line type. A symbol is used to show
the extent of the demolition work and a key note is given to provide supplemental
information. The air handling unit, housekeeping pad, and ductwork are drawn to scale
in their actual locations; piping is represented with single lines. Only the portions of the
existing services that affect the work are shown.
340 Chapter Ten
New Work Plans
Figure 10-4 is the HVAC new work drawing associated with the demolition drawing
shown if Fig. 10-3. Note that the words “new work” are not required in the plan title.
The drawing utilizes a bold, continuous line type to identify the new work. Existing
work to remain is drawn with a thin, continuous line type. Lines are broken and/or
shown in a hidden line type where the particular service is routed beneath another
service that is also shown on the plan. This convention is necessary in order to provide
a clear presentation of the work.
This particular drawing is presented at a 1/8 in. = 1 ft scale because it is possible
(though somewhat crowded) to show the necessary information on the plan. A section
is also provided to present supplemental information that cannot be shown in the plan
view (Fig. 10-5). The location where the section is cut is designated by a symbol on the
Figure 10-4 HVAC plan.
Figure 10-5 Section drawing of an air handling unit.
drawing along with the section number and the drawing where the section appears.
Symbols are used to show the connections to the existing services and key notes are
given to provide supplemental information.
Simplicity and clarity are the keys to presenting information on either a demolition
or new work floor plan. It is not necessary to show every valve, fitting, and specialty
because these items will be shown in the connection details for each piece of equipment.
Each piece of equipment is given a designation (shown in the equipment tag) on the
floor plan, which is used in scheduling the equipment capacities.
Common designations for HVAC equipment are as follows:
• B-1, etc. Boilers

• CH-1, etc. Chillers
• P-1, etc. Pumps
• AS-1 Air separator
All designations for equipment should be shown in the legend.

Other conventions that should be followed in the preparation of new work plans
are as follows:
• Sometimes it is helpful to present the HVAC equipment and ductwork on

one plan and the HVAC equipment and piping on a separate plan. This keeps
the drawings from becoming too crowded and aids in clear presentation of
the work.
342 Chapter Ten
• It is helpful to show the reflected ceiling plan for areas with finished ceilings on
HVAC plans. Because the reflected ceiling plan can usually be referenced from
the architectural drawings, it does not need to be drawn from scratch. The
ceiling grid and all of the ceiling devices should be shown on the reflected
ceiling plan in a thin, light gray color. The HVAC work, including the air devices
to be installed in the ceiling, should be drawn in a bold, continuous line type.
This convention will assist the contractor in coordinating the location of ceiling
air devices with other equipment in the ceiling, especially the lighting fixtures.
• Draw all HVAC equipment to scale and provide a minimum amount of detail.
• Identify areas required for access to HVAC equipment in a light, hidden line
type. This is particularly true for crowded installations where access to the
HVAC equipment is likely to be obstructed if not properly coordinated.
• Show main shutoff valves only. Other valves and specialties are shown in the
connection details.
• Shade duct-mounted coils and coils in VAV terminal units. This assists the
contractor in identifying the locations of HVAC equipment requiring piping
connections.
• Show all volume dampers without exception.
• Show turning vanes in all rectangular elbows without exception.
• Break pipes that cross under other pipes. The gap should be 1/32 in. when plotted.
• Use a hidden line type for all work that is underneath other work.
• Use proper conventions for supply, return, and exhaust air ducts up and down
(refer to the sample legend in Fig. 10-2).
• Use proper conventions for pipe rises and drops (refer to the sample legend in
Fig. 10-1).
Section Drawings
Section drawings should be prepared for areas requiring close coordination with the
work of other trades. Examples include:
• Breakouts of ductwork and piping from risers in shafts

• Corridors where the ductwork is the largest
• Areas requiring close coordination with unusual architectural and structural
elements
• Crowded areas in equipment rooms
• Areas around large pieces of HVAC equipment in equipment rooms
The same drawing conventions that apply to new work plans apply to section draw-
ings. All entities shown on the sections should be drawn to scale. Section drawings are
normally presented at ¼ in. = 1 ft scale, although larger scales can be used if necessary
to show detail. The architectural and structural building components and pertinent
work of other trades should be drawn in order to show how the HVAC systems are
coordinated with these elements. See Figs. 10-5 and 10-6 for a section drawing and pho-
tograph of the air handling unit shown in the sample HVAC plan in Fig. 10-4.
Figure 10-6 Photograph of the air handling unit shown in the section drawing (Fig. 10-5).
Large-Scale Plans
Like section drawings, large-scale plans should be prepared for areas requiring close
coordination with the work of other trades. The same drawing conventions that apply
to new work plans apply to large-scale drawings. All entities shown on the large-scale
drawings should be drawn to scale. Large-scale drawings are normally presented at
¼ in. = 1 ft scale.
The use of the larger scale usually makes it possible to show the HVAC equipment,
ductwork, and piping on the same drawing (Fig. 10-7). The larger scale also allows for
more detail to be shown, such as flexible duct connectors for all duct connections to fans
or air handling units, housekeeping pads, floor drains, and portions of work by other
trades.
Details
Details are an important part of HVAC construction drawings because much of what is
shown in them is repeated multiple times throughout the project. For example, the spe-
cialties shown in the hot water heating coil detail for a VAV terminal unit could apply
to more than a hundred VAV terminal units for a large project. Thus, if the balancing
valve is omitted from the detail, the cost to incorporate it through a change order to the
contract could be thousands of dollars.
344 Chapter Ten
Figure 10-7 Large-scale HVAC plan, presented at ¼ in. = 1 ft.
However, some judgment needs to be used when preparing the details for a project.
If a piece of equipment has fairly simple connections that are spelled out in the project
specification, a detail is not required. One example is a supply air diffuser that is to be
mounted within a ceiling grid and has a piece of flexible ductwork connected to it.
However, for pieces of equipment that have more components and the orientation of
the components with respect to each other is important, a detail should be developed.
One example is a heating or cooling coil. Details are also provided for components that
are not necessarily related to any particular piece of HVAC equipment. Examples
include pipe hangers and pipe penetrations through various architectural components
such as walls, roofs, and floors. Finally, a detail may be required in the form of large-scale
plan and section views of a piece of HVAC equipment, piping, or ductwork where close
coordination with a particular architectural feature is required. An example may be the

installation of a fan coil unit below a window or recessed above a ceiling.
Details describing HVAC equipment connections should show every pipe, valve, spe-
cialty, duct, duct accessory, hanger, support, and ATC component required to properly
install the equipment in accordance with the design intent. Notes can be added to describe
pertinent information that may be difficult to show graphically. The notes can also be
used to describe coordination with other trades that may not be described elsewhere in
the drawings or specifications. The HVAC equipment itself need not be shown in great
detail unless it is required to convey the design intent. With few exceptions, information
that should be omitted from the details includes pipe and duct sizes, dimensions of the
equipment, product specifications, and equipment quantities. Unless this information is
the same for each piece of equipment, as in the case of a ¾-in. hose-end drain valve, it
should be shown elsewhere in the drawings and specifications in order to avoid the
potential for conflicts between the detail and other parts of the construction documents.
Most consulting engineering companies have a standard library of details that they
have developed. The HVAC system designer should become familiar with these details
because they will usually apply to 80 to 90% of the details required for a project.
The details that would apply to the air handling unit replacement shown in the
sample demolition plan, HVAC plan, and section above include:
• Heating water coil detail (Fig. 10-8)

• Chilled water coil detail (Fig. 10-9)
• Condensate drain detail (Fig. 10-10)
• Gas-fired steam humidifier detail (Fig. 10-11)
• Gas vent and combustion air intake detail (Fig. 10-12)
Figure 10-8 Heating water coil detail.
346 Chapter Ten
Figure 10-9 Chilled water coil detail.
Figure 10-10 Condensate drain detail.
Figure 10-11 Gas-fired steam humidifier detail.
Figure 10-12 Gas vent and combustion air intake detail.
347
348 Chapter Ten
• Pipe penetration through precast plank detail (Fig. 10-13)
• Pipe penetration through interior wall detail (Fig. 10-14)
• Pipe hanger detail (Fig. 10-15)
Figure 10-13 Pipe penetration through precast plank detail.
Figure 10-14 Pipe penetration through interior wall detail.
Figure 10-15 Pipe hanger detail.
350 Chapter Ten
Schedules
Equipment schedules are used to list the design capacities for each major piece of equip-
ment for a project. The capacities for similar types of equipment are listed in the same
schedule (e.g., fans are listed in a fan schedule; pumps are listed in a pump schedule).
Each schedule should list the equipment capacities in sufficient detail for the contractor
to order it from an equipment supplier. The data used by manufacturers in their cata-
logs or selection software to describe their products is often the same data presented in
the equipment schedule to describe the equipment capacities. The criteria used to
describe the equipment capacities are given in the column headings. It is good practice
to give the criterion in each heading and to list the units of that criterion in parenthesis.
For example, some of the column headings for a pump schedule would read as follows:
flow (gpm), head (ft w.c.), speed (rpm), impeller diameter (in.).
Notes are often added to equipment schedules to list the required accessories for
individual pieces of equipment and may also describe some distinguishing characteris-
tics of the equipment. However, the notes do not replace the project specifications,
which describe the requirements of the equipment in detail; they merely supplement
the project specifications.
Often, the particular manufacturer and model number of the equipment that formed
the basis for the design are listed in the schedule for each piece of equipment as well.
This is not done to show any preference of one manufacturer over another. Rather, it is
done to give the contractor a better understanding of the configuration of the particular
piece of equipment. Other manufacturers listed as acceptable manufacturers in the proj-
ect specifications can also submit their equipment for use as long as it meets the sched-
uled capacities and the requirements of the project specifications.
It is helpful to develop standard equipment schedules using a worksheet program,
such as Microsoft Excel®. Worksheets are particularly helpful in presenting information in
tabular format because they enable data to be easily presented in a consistent format. Also,
it is easy to add or delete columns or rows and modify the data in each cell. Third-party
software is available that can import the data from a worksheet into the CAD software and
convert the worksheet entities into CAD lines and text. The CAD text can be edited if
changes are required. It is also possible to establish a link between the worksheet and the
drawing to update the schedule in the CAD drawing each time the data in the worksheet
is modified. This process of linking worksheets to CAD drawings is much more efficient
than creating schedules with the CAD software by using only lines and text.
The schedules shown in Figs. 10-16 through 10-18 would be used to describe the
equipment capacities for the air handling unit replacement shown in the sample demo-
lition plan, HVAC plan, and section above.
Diagrams
There are three types of diagrams commonly used in HVAC drawings: flow diagrams,
riser diagrams, and ATC diagrams.
Flow and riser diagrams are intended to supplement the information shown on the
floor plan drawings and connection details for the HVAC equipment. Information that
should be shown on the flow and riser diagrams includes the pipe and duct sizes and
flow rates, main shutoff valves, main dampers, flow meters, airflow measuring stations,
and main ATC devices. These components may also be shown on the floor plan drawings
Figure 10-16 Air handling unit schedule.
351
352
Figure 10-17 Gas-fired steam humidifier schedule.
Figure 10-18 Pump schedule.

or the connection details for the HVAC equipment. Consequently, there is some redun-
dancy in the presentation of this information, making it important to ensure that the flow
and riser diagrams are consistent with the floor plans and equipment connection details.
It is not necessary to show all of the valves and specialties for the HVAC equipment on
the flow and riser diagrams because it unnecessarily clutters the diagrams and is a poten-
tial source of conflict with the equipment connection details. These components are more
clearly shown in the connection details for the HVAC equipment.
ATC diagrams illustrate the complete ATC systems for the central plant,4 air sys-
tems, and terminal equipment. ATC diagrams require a sequence of operation and a
direct digital control (DDC) point list (for DDC systems). ATC diagrams are discussed
in detail in Chap. 9.
Flow Diagrams
Flow diagrams illustrate the major components of the central plant and include equip-
ment designations, pipe sizes, and flow rates. Figure 10-19 illustrates a sample flow
diagram for a four-pipe heating and cooling plant. One helpful device in preparing the
Figure 10-19 4-pipe system flow diagram.
354 Chapter Ten
flow diagram for a central plant is to orient the equipment on the diagram in a fashion
similar to the floor plan drawing of the central plant equipment room. For example, if
the floor plan drawing of the equipment room is oriented with north at the top of the
sheet, the boilers are on the west side of the equipment room, the secondary heating
water pumps are on the east side of the equipment room, and the main heating water
piping exits the east wall of the equipment room, the flow diagram should be oriented
with the boilers on the left-hand side of the flow diagram, the secondary pumps on the
right-hand side of the flow diagram, and the main heating water piping to the building
also on the right-hand side of the flow diagram. This is not a hard and fast rule, but it
does aid in providing a consistent presentation of the information and helps the reader
of the drawings to compare the flow diagram to the floor plan drawings without having
to reorient the diagram to the plan.
Riser Diagrams
Riser diagrams illustrate the major components of the piping and ductwork distribution
systems, including the piping and duct risers and the connections to these risers at each
floor. Riser diagrams also show the equipment designations, pipe sizes, duct sizes, and flow
rates.5 The same principle of orienting the flow diagram in a fashion similar to the floor plan
drawing of the central plant equipment room applies to orienting the riser diagram to the
piping or ductwork distribution system in the building. Figures 10-20 and 10-21 illustrate a
sample heating water riser diagram and a sample air riser diagram for a three-story building.
Figure 10-20 Heating water riser diagram.
Figure 10-21 Air riser diagram.
355
356 Chapter Ten
ATC Diagrams
The final components of the construction drawings for the air handling unit replace-
ment illustrated in Figs. 10-3 through 10-6 and Figs. 10-8 through 10-18 are the ATC
diagram, sequence of operation, and DDC point list for the air handling unit and associ-
ated equipment. (No flow or riser diagrams would be required for this project.)
Figures 10-22 and 10-23 illustrate the ATC diagram and DDC point list for the air
handling unit replacement.
General The air handling unit shall be controlled by the DDC ATC system controller.
Occupied and unoccupied modes of operation shall be determined by the time sched-
ule of the BAS. Graphics shall be provided in the BAS for all components of the system,
identifying the current mode of operation, setpoints and current values of all points,
and the status of all alarms and safeties.
Occupied Mode When the unit is energized, the outdoor air damper shall open and
shall be proved open by the end switch mounted on the damper actuator. Upon closure
of the end switch, the supply fan shall be energized and run continuously.
The heating water coil control valve shall modulate to maintain a minimum of 68ºF
discharge air temperature as sensed by the discharge air temperature sensor.
The chilled water coil control valve shall modulate to maintain a maximum of 55°F
discharge air dew point temperature as sensed by the discharge air hygrometer, and a
maximum of 75°F discharge air temperature as sensed by the discharge air temperature
sensor.
Whenever the outdoor air temperature is below 70°F, the circulating pump shall be
energized and run continuously. Upon a rise in outdoor air temperature above 75°F, the
pump shall be de-energized. A pump failure alarm shall signal at the BAS when the
circulator fails to operate, as sensed by the differential pressure switch piped between
the inlet and discharge of the pump.
Humidification When the air handling unit is started, the BAS shall send a start signal
to the gas-fired steam humidifier. The humidifier shall be energized upon receiving
proof of airflow from the duct mounted airflow switch. The humidifier shall operate
under its packaged controls to maintain a 35% (adjustable) space relative humidity
(RH) setpoint. The humidifier shall be de-energized if the 50% RH (adjustable) setting
of the high-limit humidistat is exceeded. A general humidifier alarm shall signal at the
BAS when the humidifier control panel is in any alarm condition.
Unoccupied Mode When indexed to the unoccupied mode by the time schedule of the
BAS, the outdoor air damper shall close completely, and the supply fan and humidifier
shall be de-energized.
Fan Failure Alarm A fan failure alarm shall signal at the BAS when the supply fan fails
to operate, as sensed by the differential pressure switch piped between the inlet and
discharge of the fan.
Dirty Filter Alarm A dirty filter alarm shall signal at the BAS when the differential pres-
sure across the filter section exceeds the 0.70-in. w.c. (adjustable) setpoint.
Figure 10-22 Air handling unit ATC diagram.
357
358 Chapter Ten
Figure 10-23 Air handling unit DDC point list.
Safeties Upon a drop in the heating coil leaving air temperature below 38ºF, as sensed
by the low-limit temperature sensor serpentined across the downstream face of the coil,
the supply fan shall be de-energized, the outdoor air damper shall close completely,
the heating coil control valve shall open fully to the coil, the humidifier shall be de-
energized, and an alarm shall signal at the BAS. The low-limit temperature sensor shall
require a manual reset for the unit to be restarted.
The supply air duct smoke detector shall be hard-wired through the supply fan
starter control circuit. When the supply air duct smoke detector detects the presence of
smoke, the supply fan shall be de-energized, the outdoor air damper shall close com-
pletely, the humidifier shall be de-energized, and an alarm shall signal at the fire alarm
control panel and at the BAS. The duct smoke detector shall require a manual reset for
the unit to be restarted.
Endnotes
1. An escutcheon is a doughnut-shaped flat plate that is installed around a pipe penetra-
tion through a wall. Its purpose is to cover the rough opening in the wall around the
pipe and provide a finished appearance.
2. Refer to the U.S. National CAD Standard for recommended layer names for each file
type.
3. A 1/8 in. = 1 ft scale is commonly employed for demolition drawings because this
scale is usually adequate to present the detail that is required.
4. The flow diagram for the central plant can often be used as the basis for developing
the central plant ATC diagram.
5. Riser diagrams are typically used for buildings that have three or more stories. Riser
diagrams are not necessary for buildings that have fewer than three stories because
the information can be clearly portrayed on the floor plan drawings for the piping
and ductwork distribution systems.
Index
Note: Page numbers followed by f denote figures; page numbers followed by n denote notes; page
numbers followed by t denote tables.
A Air, handling unit, VAV (Cont.):

A-weighted sound pressure, 286–287 DDC point list for, 319f
Abbreviations, 31, 329, 330f, 331f enthalpy economizer mode, 320, 322
minimum outdoor air mode, 320
AI. See Analog input
morning warm-up mode, 320, 321–322
Air. See also Computer room air-conditioning
occupied mode, 320, 322
unit; Constant air volume systems;
override mode, 321
Decentralized air system; Dedicated
sequence of operation, 319–321
outdoor air system; Exhaust air systems;
unoccupied mode, 320, 323
HVAC air systems; Makeup air systems;
noise control, 290–291
Outdoor air systems; Variable air volume pressurization calculations, 171–172
systems; Ventilation air systems primary, 157, 191n, 268, 283n
combustion, 81 standard, 241n
conversion factors, 194 system, 4–5
damper, 223–225 components, 151–152
devices: load calculations, 10–11
design guidelines, 237–240 overview, 151
ductwork systems, 237–238, 239f, 240 types, 152–153
noise and throw criteria, 238 vents, 70
schedule, 239f automatic, 72, 73f, 242n
selection and layout, 237 manual, 72, 72f, 242n
types of, 237–238 specialties, 70, 72, 72f, 73f
filters, 151, 186, 189 Air-cooled chiller:
flow equations, 194 connections, 103, 105f
fluid flow measurement, 299 representation, 104f
handling unit, CAV, 153–157 Air separator, hydronic system:
handling unit, modular central station, connections, 124–125, 125f
192n design considerations, 125–126
handling unit, VAV, 158–161 physical characteristics, 124
alarms and safeties, 321 purpose, 123
ATC diagram for, 318f representation of, 124f
ATC for, 317, 318f, 319–323, Air system equipment:
319f connections, 178, 186
363
364 Index
Air system equipment (Cont.): Automatic air vents, 72, 73f, 242n
design considerations, 186–190 Automatic temperature control (ATC):
air leakage, 187 BAS, 295, 323, 326n
airside economizer, 189, 192n application-specific LAN, 324–325
clearance, 189–190 architecture, 323–325, 323f, 324f
coil, 186–187, 188, 189 communication, 325
drain pan, 187, 190 interoperability, 325–326
electrical, 188, 190 overview, 323
fan, 187 peer-to-peer LAN, 324, 324f
filter, 186, 189 components:
hose kits, 190 aquastats, 302
intake opening, 190 carbon dioxide sensors, 298
low-limit temperature sensor, 188 control valves, 303–309
panels, 187 2-way, 304–305, 305f
smoke detector, 189, 301–302, 301f 3-way, 305, 306f, 307–309, 307f, 308f, 309f
static pressure loss, 189 current sensing relays, 302
width and height, 186 DP switches, 300–301, 300f
physical characteristics: duct smoke detectors, 189, 301–302, 301f
centralized equipment, 172, 173f end switches, 302
decentralized equipment, 172–173, 174f, enthalpy sensors, 298
175f, 176f, 177f flow switches, 301
exhaust air equipment, 178, 181f, 182f, fluid flow control, 303–310
183f, 184f, 185f fluid flow measurement, 299
outdoor air equipment, 178, 179f, 180f high static pressure switches, 301
Airside economizer, 189, 192n high-limit temperature sensors, 300
Alarms, 112, 298, 299–302, 321 low-limit temperature sensors, 188, 299–300
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating motor controllers, 310–313
and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), 1 motor-operated dampers, 309–310
Analog input (AI): overview, 296
carbon dioxide sensors, 298 pressure sensors, 297–298
enthalpy sensors, 298 relative humidity sensors, 298
fluid flow measurement, 299 step controllers, 251, 282n, 313
pressure sensors, 297–298 temperature sensors, 296–297, 297f
relative humidity sensors, 298 connections, 314
temperature sensors, 296–297, 297f DDC, 295
Anchors, 199–200, 200f, 201t, 202t diagrams:
Angle globe valve, 49f air handling unit, 357f
Annealed, 40, 42 hot water cabinet unit heater, 315f
Annealing, 75n parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit, 316f
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15–2010, 101, 112, 147 VAV air handling unit, 318f
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2–2007, 151 electrical, 295
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2007, 1, 9, 12 systems:
Application-specific LAN, 324–325 construction drawings, 314–315
Approach temperature, 95, 97, 98, 117, 150n hot water cabinet unit heater, 315–316, 315f
Aquastats, 302 parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit,
ASHRAE. See American Society of Heating, 316–317, 316f
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning VAV air handling unit, 317, 318f, 319–323,
Engineers 319f
ATC. See Automatic temperature control overview about, 295–296
Attenuators, sound, 225, 233f, 290, 291, 294n pneumatic, 295, 326n
Index 365
B C
Backdraft damper, 223–224 Cabinet unit heaters. See also Hot water cabinet
Backflow preventer, 43, 125, 130, unit heater
130f, 131 connections, 254–255
Ball valve, 51–53, 52f, 53f design considerations:
Bar joists, 34n, 227 capacity and control, 255
BAS. See Building automation system installation, 256
Block load calculations, 15 selection, 255–256
Boilers: purpose and physical characteristics, 254
condensing, 86–87, 89–90, 148n representation of, 255f
connections, 79, 79f, 80f, 81 CAD. See Computer-aided design
design considerations: Calibrated balancing valves, 53–54, 53f
capacity control, 85–86 Capacity control, 85–86, 106, 253, 255, 259
clearances, 87 Carbon dioxide sensors, 298
combustion air, 81 CAV. See Constant air volume systems
condensing boiler, 89–90 CDs. See Construction documents
draft, 81, 82f, 83 Ceilings, preliminary space above, 19–20, 20f
efficiencies, 86–87 Center-guided check valves, 56–57, 56f
gas-fired and fuel-burning appliances, Central plant, 5. See also Boilers; Chillers;
81, 82f, 83–85 Cooling towers; Equipment room;
hot water boiler, 87–90 4-pipe heating and cooling plants;
noncondensing boiler, 88–89 Heat exchangers, Heating equipment;
steam boiler, 90–91 Hydronic equipment, auxiliary; 2-pipe
supply piping swing joints, 87 heating and cooling plants; Water-source
vent system, 83–85 heat pump plant
feedwater system, 90–91, 212, 219 load calculations, 11
heat exchanger, 89 overview, 77
noncondensing, 86, 88–89 Check valves, 54, 54f, 55f, 56–57, 56f
overview, 77 Chemical shot feeder, hydronic system:
physical characteristics, 78–79 connections, 126–127
purpose, 78 described, 126, 126f, 127f
Brine, 35, 74n, 108 physical characteristics, 126
Building automation system (BAS), Chemical treatment, hydronic system:
295, 323, 326n chemical shot feeder, 126–127, 126f, 127f
application-specific LAN, purpose, 126
324–325 Chilled water coil detail, 346f
architecture, 323–325, 323f, 324f Chillers. See also Freeze protection, outdoor chiller
communication, 325 connections:
interoperability, 325–326 air-cooled chiller, 103, 104f, 105f
overview, 295, 323 water cooled chiller, 101–103, 102f, 103f
peer-to-peer LAN, 324, 324f design considerations:
Building envelope openings: alarms, 112, 113–114
roof, 24–26, 26f, 27f capacity, 105–106
wall, 23–24, 24f, 25f capacity control, 106
Building materials: chemical treatment, 112
fenestration, 7–8 clearances, 109–110
opaque, 6–7, 6f compressor starter, 111
Butterfly valve, 49, 50f, 51, 51f, compressor type, 103, 105
305, 306f controls, 113–114
366 Index
Chillers, design considerations (Cont.): Combustion efficiency, 148n
efficiency, 106–107 Components, ATC:
fouling factor, 112 AI:
installation, 110–111 carbon dioxide sensors, 298
multiple chillers, 106 enthalpy sensors, 298
outdoor installation freeze protection, fluid flow measurement, 299
107–108 pressure sensors, 297–298
primary-secondary pumping, relative humidity sensors, 298
109 temperature sensors, 296–297,
refrigerant, 105 297f
safety requirements, 112–113 DI:
selection, 103, 105–107 aquastats, 302
space requirements, 109 current sensing relays, 302
variable primary flow, 109 DP switches, 300–301, 300f
voltage, 107 duct smoke detectors, 189, 301–302,
water loop volume, 112 301f
water temperatures, 111–112 end switches, 302
noise control and, 290 flow switches, 301
overview, 99 high static pressure switches, 301
physical characteristics, 100–101 high-limit temperature sensors, 300
purpose, 99–100 low-limit temperature sensors, 188,
Clearance: 299–300
air system equipment and, 190 output:
boilers and, 87 fluid flow control, 303–310
chillers and, 109–110 motor controllers, 310–313
equipment room and, 145, 146 step controllers, 251, 282n, 313
Clevis hangers, 195, 195f, 196f overview, 296
Closed system, 150n Compressor:
Codes, 1, 11–12 chillers and, 103, 105
Coefficient of performance (COP), 150n COP for, 150n
Coils. See also Fan-coil units starter, 111
chilled water, 346f Computer-aided design (CAD), construction
cooling, 152 drawings, 336
design considerations, 186–187, model files, 337
188, 189 other conventions for, 338
DOAS and, 162, 163–164, 164f sheet files, 337–338
duct heating: standards for, 337
connections, 249, 250f Computer room air-conditioning (CRAC) unit,
design considerations, 251–252 173, 176f, 177f
physical characteristics, 249 Condensate drain detail, 346f
purpose, 249 Condensing, 148n
SCR controller and, 251 boilers, 86–87
DX, 99–100, 149n, 191n design considerations, 89–90
heating, 152 Constant air volume (CAV) systems:
heating water, 345f dual-duct system, 155–157, 156f
reheat, 152 H&V, 153–154
terminal equipment, 245, 246f multiple-zone, 154–157, 155f, 156f,
Combustion air: 158f
all gas-fired and fuel-burning appliances multizone system, 157, 158f
and, 81 reheat system, 154–155, 155f
makeup systems, 166–167, 168f single zone, 153, 154f
Index 367
Construction documents (CDs): Cooling towers, design considerations (Cont.):
construction drawings: waterside economizer operation, 118
details, 32, 343–345, 345f, 346f, 347f, 348, winterization, 118
348f, 349f forced draft, 115, 115f, 116f
diagrams, 32–33, 350, 353–354, 353f, mechanical-draft, 115
354f, 355f noise control and, 290, 291
equipment schedules, 32, 350 overview, 114
floor plans, 31, 33n physical characteristics, 114–115
general notes, 31 purpose, 114
large-scale plans, 32, 343, 344f COP. See Coefficient of performance
legend and abbreviations, 31, 329, 330f, 331f Copper tube:
sections, 32, 33n, 341f, 342, 343f fittings and joints, 41–42, 41f
design submissions and, 28–33 specifications, 42
final: hot-/cold-working of, 75n
coordination with other disciplines and, overview, 40
29, 30f, 31 CRAC. See Computer room air-conditioning unit
equipment selections and, 29 Crossover temperature, 95, 98, 99f
load calculations and, 29 Current sensing relays, 302
overview on, 28–29
Contacts, 326n D
Conversion factors, 193–194 Damper:
Cooling coil, 152 air, 223–225
Cooling supply airflow, 260, 283n backdraft, 223–224
Cooling towers: combination fire/smoke, 224, 225
connections, 115–116 fire, 224–225
design considerations: manual volume, 223
airflow, 117 MODs, 309–310
architectural, 122 smoke, 224, 225
backflow preventer, 119 VAV terminal unit primary air, 159, 191n,
condenser water temperature, 117–118 268, 270
coordination with other disciplines, 122 DD. See Design development
drift eliminator, 120 DDC. See Direct digital control
electrical, 122 Deadband, 191n
flexible pipe connectors, 120 Decentralized air system:
immersion-type temperature sensor, 120 CRAC unit, 173, 176f, 177f
makeup water piping, 119 RTU, 172, 174f
multiple towers with common supply, split-system, 172–173, 175f
119–120 Dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS):
noise, 120 coils used in, 162, 163–164, 164f
oxidation, 121 dual-path system and, 161–162, 162f
pipe insulation, 118 reheat and, 162–163
plume, 120–121 wrap-around refrigerant coil and, 163–164, 164f
pump, 118–119 Demolition:
remote sump, 121 notes, 334
steel, 121 plans, 338–339, 339f
structural, 122 Design development (DD):
temperature, 117 preliminary:
water filtration, 120 building envelope openings and, 23–26,
water flow rate, 117 24f, 25f, 26f, 27f
water level sensor, 119 electrical loads and, 21–22
water pH, 121 equipment room sizings and, 16, 17f
368 Index
Design development (DD), preliminary (Cont.): Direct digital control (DDC):
equipment selections and, 16 overview, 295
space above ceilings and, 19–20, 20f point list:
structural loads and, 23 air handling unit, 358f
vertical shafts sizings and, 17–18, 19f parallel fan-powered VAV terminal unit,
purpose of, 15 316f
single-line system layout and, 20–21, 21f, VAV air handling unit, 319f
22f Direct expansion (DX) coil, 99–100, 149n,
underground site utilities and, 191n
26–28, 28f Direct gas-fired heater, 191n
zone-by-zone load calculations and, Direct return piping system, 208, 208f
15–16 Discharge sound power levels, 289
Design process: Distribution systems, ductwork:
CDs and, 28–29, 30f, 31–33 air devices, 237–238, 239f, 240
codes, 11–12 construction:
DD and, 15–28, 17f, 19f, 20f, 21f, 22f, 24f, 25f, dampers, 223–225
26f, 27f, 28f duct fittings, 222
design submissions, 14–33 flexible duct connectors, 222–223
factors governing, 2 hangers, 226
load calculations, 3–11, 6f insulation, 221
standards, 12 materials, 220
system selection, 12–13 pressure classifications, 221–222
team members, 13–14 seams and joints, 222
Details: shapes, 220
chilled water coil, 346f sound attenuators, 225, 233f, 290, 291, 294n
condensate drain, 346f coordination with other disciplines, 240–241
drawing, 32, 343–345, 345f, 346f, 347f, 348, dampers:
348f, 349f backdraft, 223–224
gas-fired steam humidifier, 347f combination fire/smoke, 224, 225
heating water coil, 345f fire, 224–225
pipe hanger, 349f manual volume, 223
pipe penetration: smoke, 224, 225
through interior wall, 349f design considerations:
through precast plank, 348f airflow capacities, 235t, 236t
Dew point, 33n drawing conventions, 226
DI. See Digital input layout, 226–230, 231f, 232f, 233f
Differential pressure (DP) switches, 300–301, low-velocity system, 234, 235t
300f medium-velocity system, 234, 236t, 237
Diffusers, 237–238, 239f, 240 sizing criteria, 233–234, 235t, 236t, 237
Digital input (DI): equations and conversion factors, 193–194
aquastats, 302 Distribution systems, piping:
current sensing relays, 302 design guidelines:
DP switches, 300–301, 300f drawing conventions, 194–195
duct smoke detectors, 189, 301–302, 301f equipment connections, 203–205
end switches, 302 expansion compensation, 197, 199–201,
flow switches, 301 200f, 201t, 202t
high static pressure switches, 301 layout, 195, 195f, 196f, 197f
high-limit temperature sensors, 300 penetrations of building components,
low-limit temperature, 188, 299–300 196–197, 198f, 199f
DIL. See Dynamic insertion loss equations and conversion factors, 193–194
Index 369
Distribution systems, piping (Cont.): Drawings, construction (Cont.):
hydronic design fundamentals: linework, 335–336
direct return piping system, 208, new work plans, 340–342, 340f
208f notes:
pipe sizing criteria, 205–206, 206t demolition, 334
piping, 206–207, 207f drawing, 334–335
reverse return piping system, 208–209, general, 332–334
209f key, 335
insulation, 219 overview, 329
pipe and trap sizing criteria, 213–215, piping distribution systems and,
214t, 215t 194–195
steam main drips, 217, 218f, 219f schedules:
traps, 217 air handling unit, 351f
2-psig supply piping, 215–216 gas-fired steam humidifier, 352f
low-pressure steam design fundamentals, pump, 352f
210–213 sections, 32, 33n, 341f, 342, 343f
boiler feedwater system, 90–91, terminology, 329, 332
212, 219 furnish, 332
condensate recovery, 217, 219 install, 332
condensate return piping, 216 new, 329, 332
condensate transfer system, 219 provide, 332
DOAS. See Dedicated outdoor air system shall, 329
Downflow fan, 178, 181f, 182f Drift eliminator, 120
DP. See Differential pressure switches Drive, 259, 283n
Draft, 81, 82f, 83, 148n Dual-path system, 161–162, 162f
Drain pan, 187 Duct:
Drains, 70, 72, 73, 73f, 74f heating coils:
Drawings, construction: connections, 249, 250f
ATC, 314–315 design considerations, 251–252
CAD, 336 physical characteristics, 249
model files, 337 purpose, 249
other conventions for, 338 SCR controller and, 251
sheet files, 337–338 smoke detectors, 189, 301–302, 301f
standards for, 337 strap, 273, 284n
demolition plans, 338–339, 339f Ductless split-system units:
details, 32, 343–345, 345f, 346f, 347f, 348, connections, 264, 266f, 267f
348f, 349f design considerations, 264,
diagrams, 32–33 267–268
ATC, 315f, 316f, 318f, 356, 357f floor plan representation of, 265f
flow, 353–354, 353f indoor, 266f
overview, 350, 353 outdoor, 266f, 267f
riser, 354, 354f, 355f, 359n physical characteristics, 264
ductwork distribution systems and, purpose, 263–264
226–230 Ductwork. See also Distribution systems,
equipment schedules, 32, 350 ductwork
floor plans, 31 mold in, 242n
general notes, 31 noise control and, 290–291
large-scale plans, 32, 343, 344f DX. See Direct expansion coil
legend and abbreviations, 31, 329, 330f, Dynamic insertion loss (DIL), 290,
331f 294n
370 Index
E Expansion compensation:
EDR. See Equivalent direct radiation anchors and, 199–200, 200f, 201t, 202t
Electric radiators, 249 distribution and, 197, 199–201, 200f, 201t, 202t
Electrical heat tape, 107–108 loop diagram, 200f
Electrical loads, 21–22, 30f Expansion tank, hydronic system:
Electricity: connections, 128, 128f, 129f
ATC and, 295 design considerations, 128–130
design considerations: physical characteristics, 127, 128f
air system equipment, 188 purpose, 127
chillers, 101–102 External loads, 3
cooling towers, 122 External static pressure, 188, 189, 259, 283n
equipment room, 146
pumps, 136 F
single-point electrical connection and, 101, Fan:
122, 188, 192n design considerations, 187
End switches, 302 exhaust air systems:
Enthalpy: downflow fan, 178, 181f, 182f
economizer mode, 320, 322 in-line centrifugal fan, 178, 183f, 184f
sensors, 298 propeller fan, 178, 184f, 185f
Envelope, 7, 33n, 255, 283n. See also Building upblast grease fan, 178, 181f, 182f
envelope openings noise control and, 290
Equipment exhaust, 171 fan-powered VAV terminal unit, 268–273,
Equipment room: 269f, 271t, 276–278, 277f, 278f, 279f,
design: 280–282, 316–317, 316f
clearance, 145, 146 return and supply, 152
coordination with other disciplines, 146 Fan-coil units:
electrical equipment and, 146 connections, 257–259, 258f
floor drains, 146–147 design considerations:
preliminary, 16, 17f capacity and control, 259
ventilation, 147 cooling coil selection, 260–261
negative-pressure exhaust and, 169–171, fan selection, 260
170f heating coil selection, 261–262
noise control and, 290 HVAC load, 259–260
positive-pressure ventilation of, 164–165, 165f installation, 263
preliminary sizing, 16, 17f selection guidelines, 262–263
Equivalent direct radiation (EDR), 241n physical characteristics, 257
Escutcheon, 358n purpose, 256–257
Exhaust air systems: Fan-powered VAV terminal unit:
downflow fan, 178, 181f, 182f connections, 270, 277–278, 278f
equipment, 171 design considerations:
general, 167, 169 capacity, 271–272
in-line centrifugal fan, 178, 183f, 184f control, 272, 278, 316–317, 316f
kitchen, 165–166, 166f, 178, 181f, 182f installation, 273
negative-pressure equipment room, 169–171, primary airflow capabilities, 270–271, 271t
170f selection, 273, 280–281
overview, 153, 161, 167 duct plan and, 279f
physical characteristics, 178, 181f, 182f, 183f, parallel, 277f, 278f
184f, 185f advantages and disadvantages, 282
propeller fan, 178, 184f, 185f ATC and, 316–317, 316f
upblast grease fan, 178, 181f, 182f DDC point list, 316f
Index 371
Fan-powered VAV terminal unit, parallel (Cont.): Flow (Cont.):
diagram, 316f reversal prevention, 43
sequence of operation, 317 switches, 301
physical characteristics: Fluid flow control, 303–310
illustrated, 277f, 278f MODs, 309–310
inlet velocity sensor, 269 terms associated with, 303
liner, 270 valves:
primary air inlet, damper, and controller, overview, 303–304
268 sizing, 303–304
terminal box, 269–270, 269f, 277 2-way, 304–305, 305f
piping plan and, 279f 3-way, 305, 306f, 307–309, 307f, 308f, 309f
purpose, 268, 276 Fluid flow measurement, 299
series, 276, 277f Fluid pressure:
advantages, 281 gauge pressure, 74n
disadvantages, 282 overview, 35–36
single-duct VAV terminal unit similarities ratings of valves and, 60–61
with, 268–273, 269f, 271t Fluid temperature:
Feedwater system, boiler, 90–91, 212, 219 overview, 35–36
Fenestration, 7–8 ratings of valves and, 61
Filters, air, 151, 186, 189 Forced draft:
Finned-tube radiators (FTRs): boilers, 83
connections, 248 cooling towers, 115, 115f, 116f
design considerations, 248–249 Fouling factor, 95, 112, 149n
physical characteristics, 247, 247f 4-pipe heating and cooling plants:
purpose, 247 design considerations:
Fire: control strategy, 141
damper, 224–225 pumping system, 140–141, 140f, 141f, 142
smoke combination damper, 224, 225 redundancy, 137, 140
Fittings: reset schedule, 140f, 141
copper tube, 41–42, 41f overview, 137
specifications, 42 schematic, 137, 138f
dielectric, 36 Freeze protection, outdoor chiller, methods:
duct, 222 brine utilization, 108
steel pipe, 37–39, 38f, 39f drain piping, 107
specifications, 39–40 electrical heat tape, 107–108
Flash steam, 149n Freezestats. See Low-limit temperature sensors
Flexible duct connectors, 222–223, 293 FTRs. See Finned-tube radiators
Flexible pipe connectors, 70, 71f Fuel oil, 148n
cooling towers and, 120 Furnish, 332
noise control and, 291
vibration control and, 293 G
Floor: Galvanic action, 74n
drains, 146–147 Gas-fired and fuel-burning appliances, design
plans, 31, 33n considerations, 81, 82f, 83–85
Flow: combustion air, 81
diagrams, 353–354, 353f draft, 81, 82f, 83
meters: vent system, 83–85
orifice, 65–66, 66f Gas-fired heater:
requirements, 66–67 direct, 191n
venturi, 66 indirect, 190n
372 Index
Gas-fired steam humidifier detail, 347f Hot water boiler, design considerations:
Gate valve, 44, 45f, 46f condensing boilers, 89–90
General exhaust air systems, 167, 169 full-load temperature difference, 87
General notes, 332–334 location in heating water system, 88
Globe valve, 47, 47f, 48f, 49f noncondensing boilers, 88–89
bypass, 204 operating pressure, 87–88
Gray cast iron, 74n Hot water cabinet unit heater, ATC:
Grilles, 237–238, 239f, 240 ATC diagram, 315f
Gross output rating, 148n notes, 315–316
sequence of operation, 315
H Housekeeping pad, 188
H-O-A. See Hand-off-automatic switch Humidifier, 152
Hand-off-automatic (H-O-A) switch, 310, 311, gas-fired steam, 347f, 352t
313, 313f H&V. See Heating and ventilating systems
Hangers: HVAC (heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning):
clevis, 195, 195f, 196f history of, 1
ductwork, 226 overview about, 1–2
pipe, 195, 195f, 196f, 197f, 349f HVAC air systems:
trapeze, 195, 196f, 197f CAV, 153–157, 154f, 155f, 156f, 158f
vibration isolation, 291–292 overview, 152, 153
Heat balance method, 3 physical characteristics:
Heat exchangers: centralized equipment, 172, 173f
connections, 93, 94f, 95 decentralized equipment, 172–173, 174f,
design considerations: 175f, 176f, 177f
definitions, 95 VAV, 157–161, 160f
plate and frame, 97–99, 99f Hydronic design, distribution systems:
U-tube shell and tube, 95–97 direct return piping system, 208, 208f
physical characteristics, 91–93, 92f pipe sizing criteria, 205–206, 206t
plate and frame: piping, 206–207, 207f
connections, 93, 94f reverse return piping system, 208–209, 209f
physical characteristics, 91–92 Hydronic equipment, auxiliary:
representations of, 93f, 94f air separator, 123–126, 124f, 125f
purpose, 91 chemical treatment, 126–127, 126f, 127f
U-tube shell and tube: expansion tank, 127–130, 128f, 129f
connections, 92f, 93 floor plan representation of, 123f
physical characteristics, 91 makeup water assembly, 130–132, 130f, 131f
Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning. overview, 123
See HVAC; HVAC air systems pumps, 132, 133f, 134f, 135–137, 135f
Heating and ventilating (H&V) systems,
153–154 I
Heating coil, 152 I-beams, 33n
Heating equipment: ICC. See International Code Council, Inc.
boilers, 77–79, 79f, 80f, 81, 82f, 83–91 IMC. See International Mechanical Code
heat exchangers, 91–93, 92f, 93f, 94f, 95–99, Immersion-type temperature sensor, 120
99f In-line centrifugal fan, 178, 183f, 184f
Heating water, 148n Indirect gas-fired heater, 190n
coil detail, 345f Induced draft, 81, 82f
High static pressure switches, 301 Insertion losses, 289
High-limit temperature sensors, 300 Install, 332
Hose kits, 190 Insulation, 118, 219, 221
Index 373
Intake opening, 190 Louver:
Internal loads, 3, 9–10 face velocity for, 23, 34n
International Code Council, Inc. (ICC), 1 free area velocity for, 34n
International Mechanical Code (IMC), 1, 12, 87, Low-limit temperature sensor, 188,
121, 165, 167, 169, 172, 189, 190, 224, 299, 302 299–300
Low-pressure steam design fundamentals,
J 210–213
Joints: boiler feedwater system, 90–91, 212, 219
copper tube, 41–42, 41f condensate recovery, 217, 219
specifications, 42 condensate return piping, 216
ductwork, 222 condensate transfer system, 219
overview, 36 insulation, 219
steel pipe, 37–39, 38f, 39f pipe and trap sizing criteria, 213–215, 214t,
specifications, 39–40 215t
supply piping swing, 87 steam main drips, 217, 218f, 219f
traps, 217
K 2-psig supply piping, 215–216
Key notes, 335 Low-limit temperature sensors, 188, 299–300
Kitchen exhaust hoods, 165–166, 166f, 178, Low-velocity duct system, 234, 235t
181f, 182f
M
L Magnetic motor starters, 311–312, 311f, 312f
Laminar flow diffuser, 244n Makeup air systems:
LAN. See Local area network combustion air, 166–167, 168f
Latent cooling load, 283n kitchen exhaust hoods, 165–166, 166f
Leadership in Energy and Environmental Makeup water assembly, hydronic system:
Design, 151, 262, 298 backflow preventer and, 130, 130f
LEED. See Leadership in Energy and connections, 132
Environmental Design design considerations, 132
Legend, 31, 329, 330f, 331f physical characteristics, 131
Lift check valves, 54, 55f, 56 pressure-reducing valve and, 131, 131f
Line voltage, 282n purpose, 130–131
Load calculations: Makeup water piping, 119
air systems, 10–11 Manual air vents, 72, 72f, 242n
block, 15 Manual motor starters, 310
building materials, 6–8, 6f Manual volume damper, 223
CD space-by-space, 29 Mechanical-draft cooling towers, 115
central plant, 11 Medium-velocity duct system, 234, 236t,
conditioned spaces, 8–10 237
DD zone-by-zone, 15–16 Meters, 64–67
geographical location and, 5 flow, 65–67, 66f
opaque materials, 6–7, 6f thermometers, 65, 65f
overview, 3 Minimum outdoor air mode, 320
terminology, 4–5 Mixing box, 151
unconditioned spaces and, 8 Model files, CAD, 337
zones, 10 MODs. See Motor-operated dampers
Local area network (LAN): Modular central station air handling unit,
application-specific, 324–325 192n
peer-to-peer, 324, 324f Mold, 242n
Locked-rotor condition, 302, 326n Morning warm-up mode, 320, 321–322
374 Index
Motor controllers: Noncondensing boilers, 86, 88–89
magnetic, 311–312, 311f, 312f Nonrising-stem gate valve, 44, 46f
manual, 310
overview, 310 O
VFD, 312–313, 313f, 327n Occupied mode, 320, 322
Motor-operated dampers (MODs), 309–310 Opaque materials, 6–7, 6f
Multi-purpose valves, 57–58 Open system, 150n
Multi-turn valves: Orifice flow meters, 65–66, 66f
gate valve, 44, 45f, 46f Outdoor:
globe valve, 47, 47f, 48f, 49f air mode, minimum, 320
Multiple-zone CAV systems: ductless split-system units, 266f, 267f
dual-duct system, 155–157, 156f installation freeze protection, 107–108
multizone system, 157, 158f noise control, 287
reheat system, 154–155, 155f vent terminals, 85
Multiple-zone VAV systems: Outdoor air systems:
dual-duct, 159–160 makeup:
VAV terminal units, 159, 160f combustion air, 166–167, 168f
kitchen exhaust hoods, 165–166, 166f
overview, 152–153, 161
N physical characteristics, 178, 179f, 180f
National Electric Code, 12, 110, 190, 230
VAV handling unit and, 320
National Fire Protection Association, 12, 81, 83,
ventilation:
84, 85, 147, 165, 166, 171, 192, 220, 254
DOAS, 161–164, 162f, 164f
Natural draft, 81, 82f
positive-pressure equipment room,
NC. See Noise criteria rating
164–165, 165f
NEC. See National Electric Code
Override mode, 321
Negative-pressure equipment room exhaust Oxidation, 121
system, 169–171, 170f
Neoprene, 292
New work plans, 340–342, 340f
P
Peer-to-peer LAN, 324, 324f
NFPA. See National Fire Protection Association
Penetrations:
Noise control:
of building components, 196–197, 198f, 199f
design considerations, 113, 120 exterior wall, 197, 198f
indoor: floor, 197, 199f
discharge and radiated sound power interior wall, 198f, 349f
levels, 289 Pickup, 148n
maximum level, 288 Pipe. See also Copper tube; Distribution
NC rating, 288–289, 288f, 288t systems, piping; Flexible pipe connectors;
measures, 289–291 4-pipe heating and cooling plants; Steel
insertion losses and, 289 pipe; 2-pipe heating and cooling plants
material density and, 289–290 flexible connectors of, 70, 71f
for reducing, 290–291 hanger, 195, 195f, 196f, 197f, 349f
outdoor, 287 size, 35
sound attenuators and, 225, 233f, 290, 291, 294n systems, overview, 35–36
sound balance and, 286 types, 36
sound power and, 285–286 Pitot tube, 269, 283n
sound pressure and, 285 Plate and frame heat exchangers:
A-weighted, 286–287 connections, 93, 94f, 95
sample, 287t design considerations, 97–99, 99f
sound tonal qualities and, 286 physical characteristics, 91–92
Noise criteria (NC) rating, 238, 288–289, 288f, 288t representations of, 93f, 94f
Index 375
Plenum, 221, 242n Registers, 237–238, 239f, 240
Plume, 120–121 Reheat coil, 152, 154–155, 155f
Pneumatic ATC system, 295, 326n Reheat system, CAV, 154–155, 155f
Positive-pressure equipment room ventilation, Relative humidity sensors, 298
164–165, 165f Relay, 326n
Power venting, 85 Remote sump, 121
Preliminary equipment selections, 16 Return fan, 152
Pressure: Reverse return piping system, 208–209, 209f
gauge, 67, 67f Riser diagrams, 354, 354f, 355f, 359n
regulating valves: Rising-stem gate valve, 44, 45f
description, 58 Roof:
differential pressure valves, 58–59 building envelope openings, 24–26, 26f, 27f
pressure reducing valves, 58, 125, 125f, noise control and, 290
131, 131f Roof-top unit (RTU), 172, 174f
regulation, 43–44
relief valves, 44, 59, 60f S
sensors, 297–298 Safeties, 321
Pressurization calculations, 171–172 Safety:
Primary air, 157, 191n, 268, 283n overview on, 1–2
Primary air damper, 159, 191n, 268, 270 refrigerant and, 112–113
Propeller fan, 178, 184f, 185f Schedules, 10, 31, 140f, 141, 239f, 350, 351f,
Provide, 332 352f
Pumps. See also Water-source heat pump Schematic design (SD):
plant block load calculations and, 15
chillers and, 109 design submissions and, 14–15
cooling towers and, 118–119 single-line layout and, 15
heating and cooling plants and, 140–141, system options, 15
140f, 141f, 142 SCR. See Silicon-controlled rectifier controller
hydronic system: SD. See Schematic design
connections, 134f, 135–136, 135f Seams, 222
design considerations, 136–137 Section, 33n
end-suction, 133f, 134f drawings, 31, 32, 341f, 342, 343f
in-line, 134f, 135f Sensible cooling load, 283n
physical characteristics, 132, 133f, 134f, Sensors:
135 carbon dioxide, 298
purpose, 132 enthalpy, 298
schedules and, 352f high-limit temperature, 300
inlet velocity, 269
Q low-limit temperature, 188, 299–300
Quarter-turn valves, 47 pressure, 297–298
ball valve, 51–53, 52f, 53f relative humidity, 298
butterfly valve, 49, 50f, 51, 51f temperature, 296–297, 297f
Sheet files, CAD, 337–338
R SHGC. See Solar heat gain coefficient
Radiated sound power levels, 289 Shutoff, 43
Refrigerant: Silicon-controlled rectifier (SCR) controller,
chillers and, 105 251, 282n
safety requirements, 112–113 Single-duct VAV terminal unit:
wrap-around heat pipe coil, 163–164, advantages and disadvantages, 281
164f connections, 270, 274–275, 274f
376 Index
Single-duct VAV terminal unit (Cont.): Specialties (Cont.):
design considerations: meters, 64–67, 65f, 66f
capacity, 271–272 pressure gauges, 67, 67f
control, 272, 275 strainers, 68–69, 69f
installation, 273 suction diffusers, 69, 70f
primary airflow capabilities, 270–271, 271t test plugs, 68, 68f
selection, 273, 275–276 Split-system. See also Ductless split-system
fan-powered VAV terminal unit similarities units
with, 268–273, 269f, 271t decentralized air, 172–173, 175f
physical characteristics: Spring isolators, 292, 294n
diagram, 274, 274f Spring-return actuator, 303, 327n
inlet velocity sensor, 269 Standard air, 241n
liner, 270 Standards:
primary air inlet, damper, and controller, construction drawings, 337
268 design process, 12
terminal box, 269–270, 269f Static pressure, 243n
purpose, 268, 273–274 loss, 188–189
Single-line system layout, 15, 20–21, 21f, 22f Steam. See also Low-pressure steam design
Single-point electrical connection, 101, 122, fundamentals
188, 192n boiler, design considerations, 90–91
Single zone CAV system, 153, 154f conversion factors, 194
Single-zone VAV systems, 160–161 flash, 149n
Sleeves, 196–197, 198f, 199f flow equations, 193–194
Smoke: fluid flow measurement, 299
damper, 224, 225 gas-fired steam humidifier, 347f, 352t
detector, 189, 301–302, 301f Steel:
Soft water, 108, 149n cooling towers and, 121
Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC), 7 springs, 292
Sound: wide flange steel beams, 33n
attenuators, noise control and, 225, 233f, 290, Steel pipe:
291, 294n fittings and joints, 37–39, 38f, 39f
balanced and unbalanced, 286 specifications, 39–40
discharge and radiated power levels of, 289 overview, 36–37
power, 285–286 Step controller, 251, 282n, 313
pressure, 285 Straight-through globe valve, 47, 47f, 48f
A-weighted, 286–287 Strainers, 68–69, 69f
sample, 287t Structural loads, 23
tonal qualities, 286 Submissions, design:
Space, 4 CD, 28–33
conditioned: DD, 15–28, 17f, 19f, 20f, 21f, 22f, 24f, 25f, 26f,
below grade floors, 8 27f, 28f
infiltration, 9 SD, 14–15
internal loads, 9–10 Suction diffusers, 69, 70f
schedules, 10 Sump, 114, 115, 121
unconditioned, 8 Supply fan, 152
Specialties: Supports, vibration, 291–292
air vents, 70, 72, 72f, 73f Swing check valves, 54, 54f, 55f
defined, 64 Swing joints, 87
drains, 70, 72, 73, 73f, 74f Symbols, pipe up/down, 194–195, 330f
flexible pipe connectors, 70, 71f System options, 15
Index 377
System selection: 2-pipe heating and cooling plants:
design process, 12–13 design considerations:
factors influencing, 13 control strategy, 141
pumping system, 140–141, 140f, 141f, 142
redundancy, 137, 140
T reset schedule, 140f, 141
Team members, design process, 13–14 disadvantage of, 142
Temperature sensors, 296–297, 297f overview, 137
Terminal box, 269–270, 269f, 277 schematic, 137, 139f
Terminal equipment, 4 2-psig supply piping, 215–216
coils, 245 2-way control valves, 304–305, 305f
coordination with other disciplines and,
282 U
fan-powered VAV, 268–273, 269f, 271t, U-tube shell and tube heat exchangers:
276–278, 277f, 278f, 279f, 280–282, connections, 92f, 93
316–317, 316f design considerations, 95–97
heating and cooling: physical characteristics, 91
ductless split-system units, 263–264, 265f, U-Value, 6–7, 6f
266f, 267–268, 267f Unit heaters:
fan-coil units, 256–263, 258f connections, 252–253
heating-only: design considerations:
cabinet unit heaters, 254–256, 255f capacity and control, 253
duct heating coils, 249, 250f, 251–252 installation, 254
electric radiators, 249 selection, 253–254
FTRs, 247–249, 247f purpose and physical characteristics, 252
unit heaters, 252–254 Unoccupied mode, 320, 323
overview, 245 Upblast grease exhaust fan, 178, 181f, 182f
single-duct VAV, 268–276, 269f, 271t, Utilities, DD coordination of underground,
274f 26–28, 28f
valves and, 245, 246f
VAV units similarities, 268–273, 269f,
271t V
Test plugs, 68, 68f Valves. See also specific valve
Thermal efficiency, 148n ends, 42, 64
Thermal shock, 148n fluid flow control:
Thermometers, 65, 65f overview, 303–304
Thermostat, 4, 33n sizing, 303–304
Threaded ends, 74n 2-way, 304–305, 305f
Three piece ball valve, 52, 53f 3-way, 305, 306f, 307–309, 307f, 308f, 309f
3-way control valves: functions:
butterfly-type, 305, 306f flow reversal prevention, 43
diverting, 307, 307f, 308–309, 309f pressure regulation, 43–44
globe-type, 305, 306f, 307f pressure relief, 44
mixing, 305, 307–308, 307f, 308f shutoff, 43
Throttling, 43 throttling, 43
Throw criteria, 238 materials, 63–64
Total cooling load, 260, 283n valve seat, 64
Transfer air ducts, 232f, 241, 290 operating conditions:
Trapeze hangers, 195, 196f, 197f bubble-tight shutoff requirement, 61
Two piece ball valve, 52, 52f fluid pressure rating, 60–61
378 Index
Valves, operating conditions (Cont.): Variable frequency drive (VFD), 312–313, 313f,
fluid temperature rating, 61 327n
installation space available, 61 VAV. See Variable air volume systems
manual or automated control, 62–63, Vent, 70
62f, 63f automatic air, 72, 73f, 242n
operation frequency, 61 for gas-fired and fuel burning appliances,
working fluid, 60 83–85
overview, 42 manual air, 72, 72f, 242n
pressure regulating: Ventilation, 1, 12, 147
description, 58 Ventilation air systems. See also Air system
differential pressure valves, 58–59 equipment; Exhaust air systems; Outdoor
pressure reducing valves, 58, 125, 125f, air systems; Positive-pressure equipment
131, 131f room ventilation
relief valves, 44, 59, 60f overview, 152–153, 161
types: physical characteristics:
calibrated balancing, 53–54, 53f exhaust equipment, 178, 181f, 182f, 183f,
check valves, 54, 54f, 55f, 56–57, 56f 184f, 185f
multi-purpose, 57–58 outdoor air equipment, 178, 179f, 180f
multi-turn, 44, 45f, 46f, 47, 47f, 48f, 49f Venturi flow meters, 66
quarter-turn, 47, 49, 50f, 51–53, 51f, Vertical shafts sizings, preliminary, 17–18,
52f, 53f 19f
Variable air volume (VAV) systems. See also VFD. See Variable frequency drive
Fan-powered VAV terminal unit; Single- Vibration control:
duct VAV terminal unit flexible pipe and duct connectors, 293
air handling unit in, 158–159 hangers and supports, 291–292
alarms and safeties, 321 neoprene and, 292
ATC diagram for, 318f overview, 291
ATC for, 317, 318f, 319–323, 319f resources, 293
DDC point list for, 319f spring isolators, 292, 294n
enthalpy economizer mode, 320, steel springs and, 292
322 Voltage, 107, 245, 282n
minimum outdoor air mode, 320
morning warm-up mode, 320, W
321–322 Wall:
occupied mode, 320, 322 building envelope openings, 23–24,
override mode, 321 24f, 25f
sequence of operation, 319–321 exterior penetrations of, 196–197, 198f
unoccupied mode, 320, 323 interior penetrations of, 196–197, 198f
multiple-zone: Water:
dual-duct, 159–160 conversion factors, 194
VAV terminal units, 159, 160f cooled chiller:
noise control and, 290 connections, 101–103, 102f, 103f
overview, 157 representations, 102f, 103f
refrigeration and, 159 flow equations, 193
single-duct and fan-powered terminal units fluid flow measurement, 299
similarities, 268–273, 269f, 271t Water-source heat pump plant:
single-zone, 160–161 design considerations, 145
supply airflow in, 158 heating and cooling simultaneity in, 143
Index 379
Water-source heat pump plant (Cont.): Wrap-around heat pipe refrigerant coil,
overview, 142 163–164, 164f
schematic, 144f Wye-delta starters, 310, 327n
temperature and, 142–143
Waterside economizer operation, 118 Z
Wet bulb temperature, 150n Z bend diagram, 200
Wide flange steel beams, 33n Zone, 4, 10
Winterization, 107–108, 118 Zone-by-zone load calculations,
Working fluids, 35, 60 15–16

HVAC Design Sourcebook PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HVAC Design Sourcebook PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HVAC Design Sourcebook PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.EngineeringEBooksPdf.

New York Chicago San Francisco

“… with God all things are possible.”—Matthew 19:26

Duct Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Building Automation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

W. Larsen Angel, P.E., LEED AP

Spaces with Floors at or Below Grade

Codes and Standards

Design Team Members

• Landscape Architect: Responsible for designing the plantings, walkways,

Block HVAC Load Calculations

HVAC System Options

Single-Line Layout of the Recommended HVAC System

Zone-by-Zone HVAC Load Calculations

Preliminary Equipment Selections

Preliminary Sizing of Equipment Rooms

Figure 2-2 DD-level equipment room layout.

Preliminary Sizing of Vertical Shafts

Figure 2-3 DD-level plan of vertical shaft.

Preliminary Space Required Above Ceilings

Figure 2-4 Coordination of the space above ceilings.

Single-Line Layout of HVAC Systems

Figure 2-5 DD-level single-line HVAC layout.

Preliminary Electrical Loads

Figure 2-6 DD-level section.

Preliminary Structural Loads

Preliminary Openings in the Building Envelope

Figure 2-7 Typical wall louver.

Figure 2-8 Wall opening information for architectural/structural coordination.

Figure 2-9 Typical intake/exhaust/relief air hood.

required for roof-mounted intake/exhaust/relief air hoods so as to limit the throat

Coordination With Underground Site Utilities

Figure 2-10 Roof opening information for architectural/structural coordination.

Figure 2-11 Coordination with site utilities.

Final HVAC Load Calculations

Final Equipment Selections

Final Coordination With Other Disciplines

Figure 2-12 Sample equipment list for electrical coordination.

However, the electrical requirements of the HVAC equipment should be communi-

Diagrams Diagrams of the automatic temperature control (ATC) systems associated

• Pipe, fittings, and joints

Pipe, Fittings, and Joints

Steel Pipe Fittings and Joints

Figure 3-1 Photograph of a cast iron elbow with threaded ends.

Figure 3-2 Photograph of a malleable iron union with threaded ends.

Specification for Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Joints

1. Piping 2 in. and smaller, above ground

2. Piping 2½ in. through 12 in., above ground

Copper Fittings and Joints

Specification for Copper Tube, Fittings, and Joints

1. Piping 2 in. and smaller, above ground12

1. Piping 1.5 in. and smaller, above ground

Prevention of Flow Reversal

Figure 3-6 Photograph of a rising-stem gate valve with flanged ends.

Figure 3-14 Photograph of a lug-style butterfly valve—installed.

Figure 3-17 Photograph of a two-piece ball valve with solder ends—installed.

Calibrated Balancing Valves

Swing Check Valves

Lift Check Valves